System Manual FS Tredess 04 FULL

Technical Manual
Air-cooled
transmitters
transposers and gap fillers
854xxxxx
for digital TV
networks
85014700000004 - Ed 04
.
Documentation included in this package:

• Technical manual of air-cooled medium power transmitters 85415xxx 85416xxx 85417xxx 85418xxx.
• Technical manual of air-cooled low power transmitters 854119xx 854129xx 854139xx 854149xx.
• Technical manual of air-cooled low power Transposers and Gap Fillers 8542xxxx.
UNE-EN ISO 9001

ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Volta do Castro, s/n. 15.706 Santiago de Compostela.
Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
The information contained in this manual is copyrighted by TRedess, and it can not be used, reproduced,
copied or distributed in any form without the expressed written permission of TRedess 2010 S.L.
Technical Manual
Air-cooled
medium power
transmitters
85415xxx 85416xxx
85417xxx 85418xxx
for digital TV
networks
.
UNE-EN ISO 9001

ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
SIMPLIFIED EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
The simplified EU declaration of conformity referred to in Article 10(9) shall be provided
as follows:
Hereby, TRedess 2010, S.L. declares that the radio equipment type 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 is in compliance with Di-
rective 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet ad-
dress: http://doc.tredess.com.
DECLARACIÓN UE DE CONFORMIDAD SIMPLIFICADA

La declaración UE de conformidad simplificada a que se refiere el artículo 10, apartado
9, se ajustará a lo siguiente:
Por la presente, TRedess 2010, S.L. declara que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico 85411951
85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 es conforme
con la Directiva 2014/53/UE.
El texto completo de la declaración UE de conformidad está disponible en la dirección
Internet siguiente: http://doc.tredess.com.
DECLARAÇÃO UE DE CONFORMIDADE SIMPLIFICADA

A declaração UE de conformidade simplificada a que se refere o artigo 10.o, n.o 9, deve
conter os seguintes dados:
O(a) abaixo assinado(a) TRedess 2010, S.L. declara que o presente tipo de equipamento
de rádio 85411951 85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145
está em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE.
O texto integral da declaração de conformidade está disponível no seguinte endereço de
Internet: http://doc.tredess.com.
DECLARATION UE DE CONFORMITE SIMPLIFIEE

La déclaration UE de conformité simplifiée visée à l’article 10, paragraphe 9, est établie
comme suit:
Le soussigné, TRedess 2010, S.L., déclare que l’équipement radioélectrique du type
85411951 85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 est
conforme à la directive 2014/53/UE.
Le texte complet de la déclaration UE de conformité est disponible à l’adresse internet
suivante: http://doc.tredess.com.
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITÀ UE SEMPLIFICATA

La dichiarazione di conformità UE semplificata di cui all’articolo 10, paragrafo 9, deve
essere presentata come segue:
Il fabbricante, TRedess 2010, S.L., dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio 85411951
85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 è conforme
alla direttiva 2014/53/UE.
Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformità UE è disponibile al seguente indirizzo
VEREINFACHTE EU-KONFORMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG
Die vereinfachte EU-Konformitätserklärung gemäß Artikel 10 Absatz 9 hat folgenden
Wortlaut:
Hiermit erklärt TRedess 2010, S.L., dass der Funkanlagentyp 85411951 85415111 85415115
85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.
Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der folgenden Internetadresse
verfügbar: http://doc.tredess.com.
ZJEDNODUŠENÉ EU PROHLÁŠENÍ O SHODE

Zjednodušené EU prohlášení o shode uvedené v cl. 10 odst. 9 má tuto formu:
Tímto TRedess 2010, S.L. prohlašuje, že typ rádiového zarízení 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 je v souladu se smernicí
2014/53/EU.
Úplné znení EU prohlášení o shode je k dispozici na této internetové adrese: http://doc.tredess.com.
FORENKLET EU-OVERENSSTEMMELSESERKLÆRING
Den forenklede EU-overensstemmelseserklæring, som omhandlet i artikel 10, stk. 9, ud-
formes som følger:
Hermed erklærer TRedess 2010, S.L., at radioudstyrstypen 85411951 85415111 85415115
85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 er i overensstemmelse med direktiv
2014/53/EU.
EU-overensstemmelseserklæringens fulde tekst kan findes på følgende internetadresse:
http://doc.tredess.com.
LIHTSUSTATUD ELI VASTAVUSDEKLARATSIOON

Artikli 10 lõikes 9 osutatud lihtsustatud vastavusdeklaratsioon esitatakse järgmisel kujul:
Käesolevaga deklareerib TRedess 2010, S.L., et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp 85411951
85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 vastab direk-
tiivi 2014/53/EL nõuetele.
ELi vastavusdeklaratsiooni täielik tekst on kättesaadav järgmisel internetiaadressil:
POJEDNOSTAVLJENA EU IZJAVA O SUKLADNOSTI

Pojednostavljena EU izjava o sukladnosti iz clanka 10. stavka 9. sastavlja se kako slijedi:
TRedess 2010, S.L. ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 u skladu s Direktivom
2014/53/EU.
Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedecoj internetskoj adresi:
VIENKARŠOTA ES ATBILSTIBAS DEKLARACIJA
Vienkaršota ES atbilstibas deklaracija saskana ar 10. panta 9. punktu ir šada:
Ar šo TRedess 2010, S.L. deklare, ka radioiekarta 85411951 85415111 85415115 85415141
85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 atbilst Direktivai 2014/53/ES.
Pilns ES atbilstibas deklaracijas teksts ir pieejams šada interneta vietne: http://doc.tredess.com.
SUPAPRASTINTA ES ATITIKTIES DEKLARACIJA

Supaprastinta ES atitikties deklaracija, nurodyta 10 straipsnio 9 dalyje, suformuluojama
taip:
Aš, TRedess 2010, S.L., patvirtinu, kad radijo irenginiu tipas 85411951 85415111 85415115
85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 atitinka Direktyva 2014/53/ES.
Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu: http://doc.tredess.com.
EGYSZERUSÍTETT EU-MEGFELELOSÉGI NYILATKOZAT

A 10. cikk (9) bekezdésében említett egyszerusített megfeleloségi nyilatkozat szövege a
következo:
TRedess 2010, S.L. igazolja, hogy a 85411951 85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145
85416111 85416141 85416145 típusú rádióberendezés megfelel a 2014/53/EU irányelvnek.
Az EU-megfeleloségi nyilatkozat teljes szövege elérheto a következo internetes címen:
DIKJARAZZJONI SSIMPLIFIKATA TA’ KONFORMITÀ TAL-UE

Id-dikjarazzjoni ssimplifikata tal-konformità tal-UE msemmija fl-Artikolu 10(9) ghandha tigi
prevista kif gej:
B’dan, TRedess 2010, S.L., niddikjara li dan it-tip ta’ taghmir tar-radju 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 huwa konformi mad-
Direttiva 2014/53/UE.
It-test kollu tad-dikjarazzjoni ta’ konformità tal-UE huwa disponibbli f’dan l-indirizz tal-
Internet li gej: http://doc.tredess.com.
VEREENVOUDIGDE EU-CONFORMITEITSVERKLARING
De in artikel 10, lid 9, bedoelde vereenvoudigde EU-conformiteitsverklaring wordt als
volgt geformuleerd:
Hierbij verklaar ik, TRedess 2010, S.L., dat het type radioapparatuur 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 conform is met Richtlijn
2014/53/EU.
De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring kan worden geraadpleegd op het
volgende internetadres: http://doc.tredess.com.
UPROSZCZONA DEKLARACJA ZGODNOSCI UE

Uproszczona deklaracje zgodnosci UE, o której mowa w art. 10 ust. 9, nalezy podac w
nastepujacy sposób:
TRedess 2010, S.L. niniejszym oswiadcza, ze typ urzadzenia radiowego 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 jest zgodny z dyrek-
tywa 2014/53/UE. Pelny tekst deklaracji zgodnosci UE jest dostepny pod nastepujacym
adresem internetowym: http://doc.tredess.com.
DECLARATIA UE DE CONFORMITATE SIMPLIFICATA

Declaratia UE de conformitate simplificata prevazuta la articolul 10 alineatul (9) include:
Prin prezenta, TRedess 2010, S.L. declara ca tipul de echipamente radio 85411951
85415111 85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 este în con-
formitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE.
Textul integral al declara?iei UE de conformitate este disponibil la urmatoarea adresa in-
ternet: http://doc.tredess.com.
ZJEDNODUŠENÉ EÚ VYHLÁSENIE O ZHODE
Zjednodušené EÚ vyhlásenie o zhode uvedené v clánku 10 ods. 9 znie takto:

TRedess 2010, S.L. týmto vyhlasuje, že rádiové zariadenie typu 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 je v súlade so smerni-
cou 2014/53/EÚ.
Úplné EÚ vyhlásenie o zhode je k dispozícii na tejto internetovej adrese: http://doc.tredess.com.
POENOSTAVLJENA IZJAVA EU O SKLADNOSTI

Poenostavljena izjava EU o skladnosti iz clena 10(9) se predloži tako:
TRedess 2010, S.L. potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme 85411951 85415111 85415115
85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.
Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem spletnem naslovu:
YKSINKERTAISTETTU EU-VAATIMUSTENMUKAISUUSVAKUUTUS
Edellä 10 artiklan 9 kohdassa tarkoitettu yksinkertaistettu EU-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus
on annettava seuraavasti:
TRedess 2010, S.L. vakuuttaa, että radiolaitetyyppi 85411951 85415111 85415115 85415141
85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.
EU-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutuksen täysimittainen teksti on saatavilla seuraavassa
internetosoitteessa: http://doc.tredess.com.
FÖRENKLAD EU-FÖRSÄKRAN OM ÖVERENSSTÄMMELSE

Den förenklade EU-försäkran om överensstämmelse som avses i artikel 10.9 ska lämnas
in enligt följande:
Härmed försäkrar TRedess 2010, S.L. att denna typ av radioutrustning 85411951 85415111
85415115 85415141 85415145 85416111 85416141 85416145 överensstämmer med di-
rektiv 2014/53/EU.
Den fullständiga texten till EU-försäkran om överensstämmelse finns på följande web-
badress: http://doc.tredess.com.
Air-cooled medium power transmitters 85415xxx 85416xxx 85417xxx 85418xxx
Technical Manual CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Contents
1 Safety instructions 7
2 Design and Characteristics 9

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Exciter description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.1 AC Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.2 Control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.2.1 Control addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.2.2 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2.3 Multiport Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.2.4 I/O contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.3 Signal board (Transmitters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.3.1 DVB-T/T2 receiver (re-transmitter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.3.2 Input switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.3.3 Transmitter latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.3.4 Frequency and time reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.3.5 Digital modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.3.6 Non linear digital precorrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.3.7 Linear digital precorrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.3.8 IF / Upconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.3.9 Muting of RF output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.4 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.5 Front panel and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.6 Synchronization module (GNSS) (HW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.7 Synchronization module (OCXO) (HW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.8 ISDB-T Remux (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.2.9 Interface description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3 Amplifier description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3.1 AC Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3.2 Control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3.3 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.3.4 Self-Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.4.1 Excessive reflected power self-protection . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.4.2 Exceeded output power self-protection . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.4.3 General hardware error self-protection . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.4.4 LDMOS currents self-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.4.5 Overtemperature self-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.5 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.6 Front panel LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.4 Coupling amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.4.1 Quadrature Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
page 1 Ed 04
CONTENTS
2.4.2 Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.5 Low-pass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.6 N+1 Redundancy (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.7 1+1 redundancy (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.8 Dual Drive redundancy (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.9 Dual drive switch description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.9.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.10 Rack cooling control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.11 Hardware and software options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.12 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.12.1 Transmitter specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3 Installation 72
3.1 Unpacking and Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.1.1 Equipment Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.1.3 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.2 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.1 Connecting cables for Digital TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.1.1 ASI Inputs of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.1.2 TS over IP Inputs of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.1.3 RF Input of Re-transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.1.4 Reference signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.2 Connecting internal cables for SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.2.3 Connecting internal cables for DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.2.4 Connecting internal cables for 1+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2.5 Connecting internal cables for N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3.2.6 Connecting the antenna system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.7 Connecting INTERLOCK loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.8 Notes on the AC Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.9 GNSS antenna installation (HW accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4 Commissioning 98
4.1 Putting into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.1.1 Connecting to the AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.1.2 1+1 (Passive reserve) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.1.3 N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.1.4 DD (Dual Drive) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.1.5 Single configuration for Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5 Operation 104
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.1.1 Local and remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2 Operation via front display and keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.2.1 Main menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.2.1.1 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.2.1.2 Dual drive redundancy overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.2.1.3 1+1/N+1 redundancy overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.2.2 Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.2.3 Menus navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3 Operation via Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3.1 Connecting Ethernet interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3.2 Log on via web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.3.3 Web GUI description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
page 2 Ed 04
CONTENTS
5.3.4 Log out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

5.4 Monitoring and Control via SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.4.3 MIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.4.3.1 TREDESS-FS-MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.4.3.1.1 MIB module: system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.4.3.1.2 MIB module: setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.4.3.1.3 MIB module: status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
5.4.3.1.4 MIB module: eventTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.4.3.1.5 MIB module: conformance . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5.5 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.5.1 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.5.1.1 System > General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5.5.1.2 System > Network interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.5.1.3 System > WEB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
5.5.1.4 System > SNMP > Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
5.5.1.5 System > SNMP > IRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
5.5.1.6 System > Events configuration > Alarms . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.5.1.7 System > Events configuration > Events . . . . . . . . . . 205
5.5.1.8 System > Events configuration > I/O interface . . . . . . . 206
5.5.1.9 System > Device info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
5.5.1.10 System > Service > Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.1.11 System > Service > SW Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.1.12 System > Service > Forward power . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.1.13 System > Service > RF phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.1.14 System > Service > Linear Precorrection . . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.1.15 System > Service > Non-linear Precorrection . . . . . . . 209
5.5.1.16 System > Service > Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.5.1.17 System > Service > Power supply > Exciter . . . . . . . . 210
5.5.1.18 System > Service > Power supply > Stage X . . . . . . . 210
5.5.1.19 System > Service > Cooling > Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.5.1.20 System > Service > Cooling > Stage X . . . . . . . . . . 211
5.5.1.21 System > Service > Cooling > Rack X . . . . . . . . . . . 211
5.5.1.22 System > Service > Configuration backups . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.1.23 System > Service > Install HW / SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.1.23.1 Install HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.1.23.2 Install SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.1.24 System > Service > Service report . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.5.1.25 System > Service > Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.5.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.5.2.1 Setup > Input > IP socket 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.5.2.3 Setup > Input > ASI 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.5.2.4 Setup > Input > ASI 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.5.2.5 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T) . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.5.2.6 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T2) . . . . . . . . . 219
5.5.2.7 Setup > Input > Input switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
5.5.2.8 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > General . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.5.2.9 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T) . . . . . . 225
5.5.2.10 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T) . . . . . 226
5.5.2.11 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (DVB-T) . . . . 227
5.5.2.12 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T2) . . . . . 228
5.5.2.13 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T2) . . . . . 229
page 3 Ed 04
CONTENTS
5.5.2.14 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > T2 Frame (DVB-T2) . . . . 231
5.5.2.15 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > PLP (DVB-T2) . . . . . . . 233
5.5.2.16 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (ISDB-T) . . . . . 235
5.5.2.17 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (ISDB-T) . . . . . 236
5.5.2.18 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (ISDB-T) . . . . 237
5.5.2.19 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Program Specific Information (ISDB-T)239
5.5.2.20 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector . . . . . . . . 240
5.5.2.21 Setup > Exciter > RF Output > RF Configuration . . . . . 242
5.5.2.22 Setup > Exciter > RF Output > Mutes . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.5.2.23 Setup > Reference > Reference source . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.5.2.24 Setup > Reference > Synchronization module . . . . . . . 246
5.5.2.25 Setup > Amplifier > Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.5.2.26 Setup > Amplifier > Stage X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.5.2.27 Setup > Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.5.2.28 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . 258
5.5.2.29 Setup > Redundancy > Configuration (N+1 [B]) . . . . . . 258
5.5.2.30 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [B]) . . . . 263
5.5.2.31 Setup > Redundancy > Status (N+1 [A]) . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.5.2.32 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [A]) . . . . 264
5.5.3 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.5.3.1 Fault summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.2 Warning summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.3 Amplifier :: Exceeded power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.4 Amplifier :: Decreased power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.5 Amplifier :: Decreased power [Non critical] . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.6 Amplifier :: Reflected power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.7 Amplifier: Stage X :: Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.8 Amplifier: Stage X :: Exceeded power . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.3.9 Amplifier: Stage X :: Decreased power . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.10 Amplifier: Stage X :: Reflected power . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.11 Amplifier: Stage X :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.12 Amplifier: Stage X :: HW error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.13 Amplifier: Stage X :: PSUs error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.14 ASI input :: ASI 1 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.16 IP input :: Socket 1 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3.18 DTT receiver 1 :: Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.5.3.19 DTT receiver 1 :: RF signal quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.5.3.20 DTT receiver 1 :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.5.3.21 Modulator :: TS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.5.3.22 Modulator :: MIP error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.5.3.23 Modulator :: Input Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.5.3.24 Modulator :: T2MI error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.5.3.25 Modulator :: BTS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.5.3.26 Modulator :: SFN reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.5.3.27 Modulator :: SFN margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.28 Modulator :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.29 Modulator :: Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.30 Modulator :: Shoulders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.31 Modulator :: MER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.32 Modulator :: External feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.33 Modulator :: BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.5.3.34 RF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
page 4 Ed 04
CONTENTS
5.5.3.35 Synchronization module :: Satellites antenna . . . . . . . 272

5.5.3.36 Synchronization module :: UnLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.5.3.37 Synchronization module :: Holdover not available . . . . . 272
5.5.3.38 Synchronization module :: HW error . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.5.3.39 Synchronization module :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.5.3.40 Synchronization module :: 10MHz input . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.5.3.41 Synchronization module :: 1PPS input . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.42 Rack cooling :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.43 Rack cooling :: Pressure difference . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.44 Rack cooling :: HW error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.45 HW error :: Internal error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.46 HW error :: Local oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.47 HW error :: Internal DC supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.48 Fan :: Fan 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.5.3.49 External alarm :: Input #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.5.3.51 Redundancy :: Communication error . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.5.3.52 Redundancy :: RF switch error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.5.3.53 Redundancy :: Reserve not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.5.4 EventLog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
6 Maintenance 276
6.1 Software upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
6.1.1 Software upgrade from file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
6.1.2 Software upgrade from server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
6.1.3 Notes for redundancy configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.1.4 Clean cache memory on web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.2 Cleaning of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7 Troubleshooting 291
7.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.1.1 Exciter LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.1.2 Amplifier LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.2 Fault Diagnosis via alarms status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7.3 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.4 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.4.1 System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.4.2 RF Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
8 Service 304
8.1 Change of the output frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
8.2 Amplifier stage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.2.1 Removing amplifier stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.2.2 Installing amplifier stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.2.3 Fine phase adjusting for coupled amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
8.3 Exciter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.3.1 Removing exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.3.2 Installing exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.4 Install/Uninstall a HW option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.4.1 Install the Synchronization board (GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.4.2 Uninstall the Synchronization board (GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.4.3 Install the Synchronization board (OCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.4.4 Uninstall the Synchronization board (OCXO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.4.5 Install AC power supply unit into the ampliffier . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.4.6 Uninstall AC power supply unit into the ampliffier . . . . . . . . . . 309
page 5 Ed 04
CONTENTS
8.5 Install a SW option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

8.6 GNSS receiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.6.1 Removing GNSS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.6.2 Installing GNSS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.7 OCXO module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.7.1 Removing OCXO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.7.2 Installing OCXO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.8 External reference module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.8.1 Removing External reference module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.8.2 Installing External reference module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.9 Rack cooling control module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.9.1 Removing a rack cooling control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.9.2 Installing a rack cooling control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.10 Amplifier AC power supply installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
8.10.1 Removing AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8.10.2 Installing AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8.11 Fans replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8.12 Change of fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
8.12.1 Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
8.13 Saving and restoring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.13.1 Saving configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.13.2 Restoring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
page 6 Ed 04
Technical Manual Safety instructions
1 Safety instructions
INTRODUCTION
The equipment described in this manual is designed to be used by adequately trained
staff only. The adjustment, maintenance and repair of this equipment must be carried out
by suitably qualified personnel with detailed knowledge of it.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Terms of installation:
• Please read the manual before handling or connecting the equipment.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose the unit to rain or humidity.
• Do not remove the lid of the power supply without disconnecting from the supply
network.
• Do not obstruct the ventilation slots of the equipment.

• Allow clearance around the equipment to provide adequate ventilation.
• The device should not be exposed to falling or splashing water. No objects or
containers filled with water should be near the equipment if there is not sufficient
protection.
• Do not place the equipment near sources of heat or high humidity environments.
• Do not put the equipment where it can be subject of strong vibrations or shocks.
• The device must be installed in a rack with a metal (ground) plate below to avoid
dripping in case of short circuit or fire.
• Air circulation at front and rear must be free to avoid overheating.
Operation Safe equipment:

• Make sure that the AC supply matches the AC supply data specified for this product.
• Do not connect power until installation is complete.
• Connect the grounding of the power supply (located at the rear) to the ground
connection of the facility by a braided wire mesh.
• Operation allowed only under responsibility of electrically qualified persons and

restricted access area.
page 7 Ed 04
• All work must be performed in compliance with the local or country-specific safety
and accident prevention regulations.
page 8 Ed 04
Technical Manual Design and
Characteristics
2 Design and Characteristics
2.1 Overview
The Fourth Series medium power is a family of air-cooled UHF transmitters for digital
television standards covering medium power needs in DTT broadcasting networks, which
bring together flexibility, outstanding compactness, high efficiency and smart installation
and operation.
Fully agile over the entire UHF band, the Fourth Series will easily fill in coverage gaps
of a single frequency network (SFN) or a multiple frequency network (MFN).
Key features:
• Architecture based on an exciter and separate amplifiers:
– 1 amplifier : up to 600W (DVB-T).

– 2 amplifiers : up to 1200W (DVB-T).
• Amplifiers, up to 600W (DVB-T) in 3HU, use Ultra-Wide-Band Doherty technology:

high efficiency using the same amplifier for the entire UHF TV band.
• Exciter in 1HU.
• DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T/Tb and ATSC 1.0 modulation standards supported.
• MFN and SFN operation.
• Multiple 2xASI inputs and 2xTS over IP inputs with programmable seamless switch-
ing between all inputs.
• DVB-T/T2 receiver option for re-transmitter operation.
• Digital Adaptive linear and non-linear pre-correction.
• Air-cooled system based on fans.
• Full local and remote control functionality for easy remote operation: Including web-
based user interface, SNMP agent and relays interface.
• Built-in GNSS option available for GPS and/or GLONASS satellites.
• Single Drive, Dual drive, 1+1 and N+1 configurations with no need of switching unit.
page 9 Ed 04
Characteristics
Overview
Figure 2.1: Fourth Series Medium Power Transmitter (7HU).
Figure 2.2: Fourth Series medium power exciter (1HU).
Figure 2.3: Fourth Series medium power amplifier (3HU).
page 10 Ed 04
Characteristics
Overview
Types and power options:
Type Height DVB-T/T2/ISDB-T ATSC 1.0

Transmitter SD 4U 600W 750W
Transmitter DD 5U 600W 750W
Re-transmitter SD 4U 600W 750W
Re-transmitter DD 5U 600W 750W
page 11 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2 Exciter description
Figure 2.4: Fourth Series medium power exciter (1HU).
2.2.1 AC Power supply

AC Power Supply provides an unique DC voltage (26,5V) to operate the exciter. All nec-
essary internal voltages are generated through DC/DC converters inside each of the main
modules of the device.
The AC Power supply is provided with following automatic protections:
Overload protection
105% - 135% rated output power. The protection type is Hiccup mode, recovers auto-
matically after fault condition is removed.
Overvoltage protection
27.6 - 32.4V. The protection type is Hiccup mode, recovers automatically after fault con-
dition is removed.
Overtermperature protection
Shut down o/p voltage, recovers automatically after temperature goes down.
2.2.2 Control board

The control board performs, among others, the following functions:
• Device kernel.
• Date and time management.
• Control of the frontal display and keyboard interfaces.
• Control of the device interfaces.
• Control of SD memory card.
page 12 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
• Monitoring and control of all the internal components and modules.
• Control of all the external power amplifiers through the CAN bus.
• Remote control and communication.
• Configuration backup files management.
• Transport stream inputs switching.
• Transport stream inputs seamless management.
• Frequency and time reference management (including GNSS).
• Dual drive and 1+1 management.
2.2.2.1 Control addressing

Control communication between the exciters and the amplifiers, needed for redundancy
configurations or coupling amplifiers, is carried out through a CAN bus using the CTRL
interface (detailed at section 2.2.9).
For a correct communication, each device connected to the control bus must be precon-
figured with an unique control address following the addressing schema of figures 2.5,
2.6.
EXCITER A EXCITER A EXCITER A
EXCITER B AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER
1 AMPLIFIER A1
1
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
2 AMPLIFIER A2
2
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
3 AMPLIFIER A3
3
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
4 AMPLIFIER A4
SD 4
EXCITER B
DD
AMPLIFIER
B1
AMPLIFIER
B2
AMPLIFIER
B3
AMPLIFIER
B4
1+1
Figure 2.5: Control bus addressing schema (SD, DD, 1+1).
page 13 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
EXCITER B EXCITER A1 EXCITER A2 EXCITER An
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
B-1 A1-1 A2-1 An-1
B-2 A1-2 A2-2 ... An-2
B-3 A1-3 A2-3 An-3
B-4 A1-4 A2-4 An-4
n+1
Figure 2.6: Control bus addressing schema (N+1).
To configure the addressing, go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu (see
section 5.5.1.23.1):
• Type of redundancy. Choose the appropriate option: SD (Single Drive), 1+1

[Device A] or 1+1 [Device B], Dual Drive [Exciter A], Dual Drive [Exciter B],
N+1 [B] or N+1 [An] (n=1,2,...,N).
• Number of amplifier stages. Choose the number of amplifier stages and then
configure the appropriate addressing for each stage (see section 2.3.2 for more
details).
2.2.2.2 Date and time

The internal real-time clock of the device provide the information of date and time (with
format yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss).
The date and precise time are required to make correct Eventlog entries and also for
the absolute T2MI timestamp.
Besides the manual configuration, the internal real-time clock can be synchronized with
the information from two sources in a redundant way:
• GNSS receiver. UTC date and time from the GNSS receiver synchronized with the
information from satellites GPS and/or GLONASS. Each minute the internal clock
of the device is synchronized with the information from the GNSS receiver, as long
as the GNSS is ready (depending on the parameter Synchronization module ready
at Reference > Reference source menu).
• NTP server. UTC date and time from a Network Time Protocol Server (NTP
server) used for clock synchronization between systems over packet-switched, variable-
latency data networks. Each certain minutes (a configurable parameter called Up-
date period) the internal clock of the device is synchronized with the information
from the NTP server, as long as the NTP server is ready. Optionally, an alterna-
tive NTP server can be set in case of failure of the main NTP server. In case of
a problem with the main NTP server, the device automatically retries with the al-
ternative NTP server, and if the problem persists, the device automatically retries
each minute.
• Input transport stream. The information contained into the input transport stream
allows synchronizing the UTC date and time of the device. In case of DVB-T/ISDB-
T/DVB-T2 A mode the transport stream contains a number of service information
page 14 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
tables (SI), among which is the Time and Date Table (TDT ) or the Time Offset Table
(TOT ) including UTC date. In case of DVB-T2 B mode (T2MI input) the information
about the date and time is extracted from the T2MI timestamp as long as absolute
reference is used.
For configuring the time zone corresponding to the correct local time two options are
available: to set directly the offset or to set the country/zone with the corresponding lo-
cal time (UTC time offset and daylight-saving rule) from a list of zones availables that is
based on database from IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) that represent the
local time for many representative locations around the globe.
It is possible to set an automatic switching mode for the source selection between
GNSS and NTP server. Both of them can be set as a main source and as a secondary
source in case of lost of synchronization with the main source.
In case of the date and time of the device is synchronized with the data from the GNSS
(not in case of synchronizaton from a NTP server), the device automatically starts a NTP
server in the device IP address that can be used for another devices into the same sub-
net to synchronize its date and time. Possible status values of this local NTP server are
running or not running.
2.2.2.3 Multiport Ethernet

The Ethernet interface of the device has an unique MAC address composed by 4 Giga-
bit ports (GbE1, GbE2, GbE3, GbE4) as is detailed in figure 2.7.
Figure 2.7: Ethernet interface at the rear side of the device: GbE1, GbE2, GbE3 and GbE4.
Each port is reserved for an unique functionality:
• GbE1: Local control through the WEB GUI.

• GbE2: Network access for remote control (SNMP or WEB GUI).
• GbE3: IP socket 1. Transport stream input over IP network for the modulator.
Remote IP address can be set automatically by a DHCP client or manually by configur-

ing following parameters:
• Remote IP address. IPv4 address. Factory default 192.168.0.100.

• Netmask. Network mask.
page 15 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
• Gateway. Gateway. For access from an external network. Factory default 192.168.0.1.
• DNS Server. Allows configuring an address for a DNS server that can be used for
example for configuring the NTP server by name instead for IP address.
Local IP address. To configure IPv4 address for the communication with a connected
PC, the address must be in the subnet of the PC’s network interface. Factory default
192.168.1.1.
NOTE:
Local IP address is only up if device is set into local mode.
page 16 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.2.4 I/O contacts
The device is provided with a general purpose port of I/O contacts with two external
inputs and two contact outputs.
The interface is based in a series of 2 isolated inputs through optocouplers and 8 free
electrical relay outputs (Only 2 are configurable, the rest are reserved) distributed in the
20-pin I/O connector at the rear panel.
For the inputs, the control of the device allows you to define the stand-by status (open
or closed) and also the activation mode (by level or by pulse). In case of activation by
pulse, it is possible to define the time duration (seconds) of the pulse. See section 5.5.1.8
for more details about the configuration of the outputs.
The device is able to monitor the inputs status to determine the corresponding status of
two predefined alarms (External alarm input #1 and External alarm input #2). See
section 5.5.3 for more details.
Each input can be configured as an external RF loop through a safety loop for muting the
RF output signal when the RF loop is open. Set activation mode into RF loop and set
stand-by status into closed. RF output is muted when loop is opened, but transmitter
remains switched on. RF returns as soon as loop is closed again.
Regarding the outputs, it is possible to define the stand-by status (open or closed)
and also the actuation mode (by level or by pulse). In case of actuation by pulse, it is
possible to define the time duration (seconds) of the pulse generated. See section 5.5.1.8
Each of the predefined alarms of the device can be linked with the relay outputs, so when
an alarm is triggered, the corresponding output relay acts. See section 5.5.1.6 for more
details.
page 17 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.3 Signal board (Transmitters)

2.2.3.1 DVB-T/T2 receiver (re-transmitter)
A built-in digital DVB-T/T2 receiver can be provided optionally for re-transmitter operation
(regenerative transposer).
The built-in receiver is a separate board that is supplied with a DC voltage from the con-
trol board.
The incoming RF signal is introduced to the Tuner. Then the signal is converted to
intermediate frequency. The IF signal is introudced into the demodulator where is de-
modulated and coverted into a MPEG-2 Transport Stream.
The transport stream generated into the receiver is introduced into the control board
substituting one of the transport stream input reserved for ASI.
2.2.3.2 Input switching

The device is able to select the input transport stream for the modulator from up to 4
inputs: up to 2 ASI inputs (or DVB-T/T2 receiver inputs) and up to 2 IP inputs.
Each IP socket can be configured with transmission mode unicast or multicast. UDP or
RTP transport protocols are available and also VLAN is available for each IP socket.
Input switching can be be done manually or automatically with up to 4 different priori-

ties from 1(highest) to 4 (lowest). Seamless switching is available for all inputs.
For automatic switching between inputs without seamless, two different hysteresis are
available:
• Non-seamless error hysteresis. Time (in seconds) to switch to another input after
a failure detected in the selected input. Failure must keep during hysteresis time.
• Higher priority hysteresis. Time (in seconds) to switch to a higher priority input
without failure in the selected input.
2.2.3.3 Transmitter latency

The signal processing time of the transmitter or simply Latency (LT OT AL ) is the con-
catenation of latencies from the different blocks through the signal path:
LT OT AL = LIP SOCKET + LIN P U T SW IT CHIN G + LM ODU LAT ION + LM ARGIN
Where:
• LIP SOCKET : IP socket input latency. Only available for IP sockets, its value
depends on the configuration of the parameter buffer duration detailed below.
• LIN P U T SW IT CHIN G : Input switching buffer latency. The latency of the switch-
ing buffer tends to the minimum delay needed for the input switching that guaran-
tees an appropriate performance of the seamless algorithm. This latency depends
on the bitrate of the input transport stream. For example for a bitrate of 19.9Mbps,
the optimal latency is approximately 50ms, while for a bitrate of 50Mbps, the optimal
latency is approximately 20ms.
page 18 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
• LM ODU LAT ION : It is the time required for the modulator to prepare the infor-
mation to be broadcast. In DVB-T2 this value corresponds to a little more than
the duration of a T2 frame (maximum frame duration is 250ms). In DVB-T and in
ISDB-T this value is negligible.
• LM ARGIN : It is the time that the modulator waits to transmit the information al-
ready prepared. In SFN, this value is the time remaining until the transmission. In
MFN, this value is less than 10ms.
IP socket buffer duration
The buffer duration parameter (available at Input > Ip socket Menu) usefulness depends
strongly on the transport protocol employed (RTP or UDP).
Both UDP and RTP: The buffer duration helps to reduce the influence of an occa-
sional lack of received data. It means that if no data is received during a time gap, the
system will output the data stored within this internal buffer.
If the time gap with no data received is shorter than the buffer duration configured, the
system output will have no errors at all.
RTP: By using RTP, it is possible to rearrange IP packets that are not received in the
right order. This disorder is due to the network packet jitter (the variability over time of
the delay between the source of the stream and the end device). The buffer duration
should be large enough to eliminate the jitter influence on the received data. An IP net-
work should have a packet jitter shorter than ±20 ms (ETSI TS 102 034 V1.4.1, section
7.2.1.1). This means that using a buffer duration of 40 ms should normally be enough.
Maybe the IP gateway is close enough to the transmitter and the packet jitter is much
shorter than this theoretical maximum value. In this case, the buffer duration parameter
could be adjust to a shorter value, depending on the particular network.
RTP (with FEC): When the IP gateway is configured in RTP FEC (Forward Error
Correction), it is also possible to check the integrity of the received packets. This in-
volves fixing packets received with errors or even insert packets that were lost due to
network problems. Depending on the FEC and the input IP bitrate, it is necessary to
configure a suitable buffer duration to take advantage of the FEC capability.
The following table summarizes the buffer duration (latency) that would be needed for
different input bitrates and FEC configurations to recover the maximum number of IP
packets.
The FEC can consist of columns (L) and rows (D). The restrictions are
L * D = 100; 1 = L = 20; 4 = D = 20;
The bigger the product L*D, the more capability of recovering packets. However, the data
redundancy will also be bigger and, therefore, the IP network will be more congested.
page 19 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
Overhead Latency Latency Latency Recovery Buffer
(3Mbps) (30 Mbps) (100 Mbps) size
XOR(5,10) 10% 175.5 ms 17.5 ms 5.3 ms 5 IP pkts 66400
Bytes
XOR(10,10) 10% 350.9 ms 35.1 ms 10.5 ms 10 IP 132800
pkts Bytes
XOR(20,5) 20% 350.9 ms 35.1 ms 10.5 ms 20 IP 132800
pkts Bytes
XOR(8,8) 12.5% 224.6 ms 22.5 ms 6.7 ms 8 IP pkts 84992
Bytes
XOR(10,5) 20% 175.5 ms 17.5 ms 5.3 ms 10 IP 66400
pkts Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
2.2.3.4 Frequency and time reference

Frequency (10MHz) and time (1PPS) reference is used as clock for the modulator, and
as a reference for generating the upconverter local oscillator.
The 10MHz and 1PPS reference can be selected from following sources:
• Internal. Not valid for SFN. This internal reference is a 10 MHz VTCXO, whose
stability is 1ppm.
• Internal [OCXO]. Not valid for SFN. Reference is obtained from a 10 MHz OCXO
placed inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option) but without
taking into account external synchronization from 1PPS interface.
• External [OCXO]. An external 1PPS signal is used to synchronize a 10 MHz OCXO

placed inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option). 1PPS and
10MHz output signals from the synchronization module (OCXO) are used as SFN
reference for the modulator. In case of loss of external 1PPS signal, taking into
account the stability of OCXO, the device allows to set a configurable limit for the
holdover time keeping the SFN operation for a longer time.
• External. Reference signals (10MHz and 1PPS) from an external source are pass-
ing directly to the modulator (without passing through the OCXO) as SFN reference.
In case of loss of external 10MHz signal, due to the stability of VTCXO, reference
signal is not valid for SFN operation.
• Built-in GNSSS. GNSS satellite receiver is used to synchronize a OCXO placed

inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option). 1PPS and 10MHz
output signals from the synchronization module (OCXO) are used as SFN refer-
ence for the modulator. In case of loss of satellite information, taking into account
the stability of OCXO, the device allows to set a configurable limit for the holdover
time keeping the SFN operation for a longer time.
At the start-up of the modulator, if the 10MHz or 1PPS signals are not present, SFN op-
eration is not possible. The modulator output signal can be switched off or not depending
page 20 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
on the SFN reference mute configuration.
After a synchronized state of the modulator, 1PPS signal is not taken into account be-
cause 1PPS signal is internally generated from 10MHz signal and is being compared to
external 1PPS signal while reference signal inputs are synchronized. Therefore, if 1PPS
input signal disappears, the modulator will keep SFN locked forever while the 10 MHz
signal keeps from a synchronized source.
The device allows selecting the reference in an automatic mode between the GNSS sig-
nals (high priority) and the external signals. In case of a GNSS, can be considered valid
the synchronized signals only when the GNSS is locked or when the GNSS is locked or
in holdover mode.
2.2.3.5 Digital modulator

The modulator receives as inputs the 10MHz frequency reference signal and the 1PPS
time reference signal to process all synchronization tasks in SFN mode.
It also receives the Transport Stream from the input switching to deliver an output sig-
nal at intermediate frequency, compatible with DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T/Tb and ATSC 1.0
standards.
The modulator is able to work with the types of input that are available in DVB-T2, TS and
T2MI:
TS (TRANSPORT STREAM)
This communication protocol encapsules video, audio and data services according to
the MPEG-2 specifications. Taking into account that this kind of stream does not con-
tain modulation information, user must set up the different parameters on the transmitter
equipment (bandwidth, FFT size, code rate, etc). The modulator introduces that incoming
information into one PLP and transmits it over a RF T2 signal.
The transmitter admits TS input streams up to 50.34Mbps. However, this capacity de-
pends on the chosen configuration parameters (bigger or smaller bandwidths, more or
less dense constellations, more or less redundant codes, etc).
While this mode can not exploit the full potential of DVB-T2, the main advantage is that
it allows the user to have an RF T2 signal without any additional equipment other than a
TS source.
Even more, the modulator introduces null packets (and makes a timely PCR restamping)
if the input bitrate is less than the nominal one for the selected configuration. Thus, the
modulator allows TS input configured to generate RF output signal even without an input
(a PRBS sequence in test mode).
DVB-T2 modulation has a large number of signaling parameters and not all the possi-
ble combinations of them are valid. Thus, when a configuration is applied a validation
process is performed. If the set of parameters entered is valid, those parameters are
recorded. Otherwise an error is reported.
page 21 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
T2MI (T2 MODULATION INTERFACE)
This input type transports audio, video and data in accordance with the TS MPEG-2
specifications. This information is encapsulated in turn grouped into one or more PLPs
(distinguishing operation thus Single and Multiple PLP). Besides this digital content, this
signal includes all the configuration information needed by the modulator therefore it’s
not necessary to manually enter it into the equipment. It also contains information on the
broadcast time allowing SFN (Single Frequency Network) operation.
The maximum input bitrate that it’s supported by the modulator for a T2MI input is 72Mbps.
The PLPs data is processed and encapsulated in a more or less complex way into T2
frames. These frames also contain basic signaling (L1) containing detailed modulation
settings so that receivers are able to decode the data. T2 frames are grouped into T2
super frames and finally sent over RF.
The T2 modulator automatically resets on any change of the modulation parameters that
are received through T2MI.
2.2.3.6 Non linear digital precorrector

The signal from the modulator is introduced into a Non Linear Digital Adaptative Pre-
distorter (DAP).
The feedback signal needed for the non linear precorrection of the DAP is obtained from
a sample of the output of the amplifier module.
The performance mode of the DAP features an automatic adaptive way of getting the
best shoulders attenuation by means of an internal algorithm, ensuring MER rms > 35dB
at any frequency.
Another performance mode, called efficiency improvement, can be enabled. In this

mode, a threshold for the shoulders attenuation (or for the MER rms) must be defined
by the user. Once reached that target, the device reduces the consumption of the LD-
MOS transistors to the minimum level to guarantee a shoulders attenuation (or MER rms)
over the target. See section 5.5.1.16 to perform this improvement.
2.2.3.7 Linear digital precorrector

For linear distortion, the device implements a digital adaptive precorrector with two differ-
ent types of digital linear precorrection mutually exclusive:
• After band-pass filter to correct the group delay and compensate the frequency
response of the output channel band-pass filter.
• Before band-pass filter to equalize the response of amplitude at the output of the
amplifier.
For both types, in order to apply linear precorrection values, a manual and one-shot
calibration must be performed previously using, respectively, a sample of the output of
the band-pass filter or an internal sample of the output of the amplifier. See 5.5.1.14
procedure to more details.
page 22 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.3.8 IF / Upconverter
The IF signal is converted to the output central frequency through a mixer circuit which is
controlled by a VCO (Voltage controlled oscillator).
Once converted to the output frequency, the signal passes through an UHF tracking filter.
The voltages that control this filter are obtained during the adjustment process in factory
and are stored in an internal memory.
Before reaching the output of the module the signal is amplified to adapt both its level
and its impedance to the output level required by the amplifier module.
2.2.3.9 Muting of RF output signal

Besides the possibility of manually muting the RF output (RF = OFF) the device is able
to muting output RF signal automatically in case of following conditions:
• In case of a self-protection (see section 2.3.4 for more details).
• In case of absence of a valid input transport stream in SFN mode. The device
returns automatically to normal operation when mute cause is recovered.
• In case of errors in the input transport stream in MFN mode. This mute function
is configurable. The device returns automatically to normal operation when mute
cause is recovered.
• In case of errors in the input T2MI flow. This mute function is configurable and only
available for DVB-T2. The device returns automatically to normal operation when
mute cause is recovered.
• In case of errors in the input BTS flow. This mute function is configurable and
only available for ISDB-T/Tb. The device returns automatically to normal operation
when mute cause is recovered.
• In case of a MPEG overflow in the input transport stream. This mute function
is configurable and only available for DVB-T. The device returns automatically to
normal operation when mute cause is recovered.
• In case of MIP (Mega-frame Initialization Packet) is not detected correctly on the
transport stream on the active input. This mute function is configurable and only
available for DVB-T. The device returns automatically to normal operation when
• In case of loss of SFN synchronization signals. This mute function is configurable.
The device returns automatically to normal operation when mute cause is recov-
ered.
• In case of the modulator is out of the SFN margin. This mute function is config-
urable. The device returns automatically to normal operation when mute cause is
recovered.
• In case of external Interlock loop is opened. External Interlock is a safety loop
for muting the RF output signal when is open. RF output is muted when loop is
opened, but the device remains switched on. RF returns as soon as Interlock loop
is closed again.
• In case of external RF loop is opened. This safety mute function is configurable
(see section 2.2.2.4 for more details). The device returns automatically to normal
operation when RF loop is closed.
page 23 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.4 Cooling
The device is air cooled. Cooling air enters via the front panel, passes through the signal
board, the ac power supply and then leaves the unit via the fan on the rear panel.
The device is provided with a fan at the rear side which draw in cool air via the ventilation
openings at the front panel and blow the warm air out via the rear panel. This fan is
mounted on the outside of the rear panel and can therefore be changed without needing
to open the device cover.
For service and maintenance tasks, this fan can be easily replaced by the user and it is
possible to detect a failure or monitoring the operating time of the fan.
Working cycle of the fans is 100% being their speed controlled by the temperature of the
signal board temperature ("Signal Ta ").
page 24 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.5 Front panel and display

The device is provided with a LCD display of 256 x 64 pixels, keys and LED indicators at
the front panel for the local operation via display menus and an intuitive graphical main
menu.
Figure 2.8: Frontal LCD display, keys and LED indicators.
Key Description
OK Confirm a new entry.
Enter/exit menu ( ).
Edit parameter value / Navigation screen scroll( ).
Enter editing mode / Navigation parameter ( ).
BACK Exit from current menu. Keep for 2 seconds to home screen.
LOCAL Local/remote operation.
RF ON/OFF RF signal ON/OFF. Although this key is ON, RF signal could
not be present depending on the device configuration.
Table 2.1: Frontal keys description.
LED Description
POWER Supply voltage is OK (green)
RF OUTPUT RF output power at nominal value (green) or decrease (red ).
RF overpower alarm or amplifier overtemperature (orange).
Reflected power alarm (blinking). RF OFF. (off )
INPUT All enabled input signals are OK (green).
Selected input OK but other enabled inputs faulty (orange).
Selected input signal is faulty (red ).
No selected input enabled (off ).
ALARMS New log entries of alarms at Eventlog (blinking). Warning alarm
triggered (orange). Fault alarm triggered (red ). No alarms triggered
(off ). The alarms that are linked with this LED can be user selected.
LOCAL Local operation (orange blinking) or remote operation (off ).
RF ON/OFF RF signal ON (green) or RF signal OFF (off )
Table 2.2: Frontal LED indicators.
page 25 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.6 Synchronization module (GNSS) (HW option)

The optional built-in synchronization module (GNSS) provides the device with a fre-
quency (10MHz) and time (1PPS) reference, e.g. for SFN operation.
Figure 2.9: Synchronization module (GNSS).
Two modes of performance are available in the synchronization module: GNSS re-
ceiver mode and OCXO mode.
GNSS receiver mode

GNSS satellite receiver (GPS and/or GLONASS in a concurrent performance) is used
to synchronize a 10MHz OCXO placed inside the synchronization module. 1PPS and
10MHz output signals from the synchronization module are used as SFN reference for
the modulator.
The output signals 1 PPS and 10 MHz may be redirected also to external output ports as
synchronization signals for another device.
In case of loss of satellite information, taking into account the stability of OCXO, the de-
vice allows to set a configurable limit for the holdover time keeping the SFN operation for
a longer time.
The locking process is about 20 minutes in cold start-up (<5 minutes in hot start-up) and
permanent self-test of main functions are performed.
The GPS board also reports the status of up to 8 satellites. The information for each
satellite is the identification number of the satellite, if the satellite is synchronized or not
and the SNR (signal to noise) of the received signal from this satellite.
UTC date and time from the GNSS receiver can be used to synchronize the date and
time of the device (see section 2.2.2.2).
OCXO mode
The 10 MHz OCXO placed inside the synchronization module is synchronized with an
external 1PPS signal. 1PPS and 10MHz output signals from the synchronization mod-
ule are used as SFN reference for the modulator.
In case of loss of external 1PPS signal, taking into account the stability of OCXO, the
device allows to set a configurable limit for the holdover time keeping the SFN operation
page 26 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
for a longer time.
The synchronization module also offers detailed information about its operation and
status (see Operation chapter) for monitoring its performance and for generating the cor-
responding remote alarms.
2.2.7 Synchronization module (OCXO) (HW option)

The optional built-in synchronization module (OCXO) provides the device with a fre-
Figure 2.10: Synchronization module (OCXO).
for a longer time.
page 27 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.8 ISDB-T Remux (SW option)

ISDB-T Remux functionality provides the transmitter ISDB-T/Tb with services filtering
capabilities. Three performance modes are available:
1. Filtering by PID:
• It is required that the PID of the services at the input are known previously.
• A unique service is assumed for each layer.
• Tables NIT, BIT and TOT are generated.
• The rest of the tables at the input are updated.
2. Filtering by program number:
• It is not required that the PID of the services at the input are known previously.
• The available programs are shown at the Program Specific Information menu.
• Various services are allowed per layer.
3. Advanced filtering:
• It is required that the PID and its typology (audio, video, ...) of the services at
the input are known previously.
• PID of each service can be renamed.
• Each program can be renamed.
• Tables PAT, PMT, SDT, NIT, BIT and TOT are generated.
• The rest of the tables (L-EIT, H-EIT) are updated according to the configured
fields.
To access to the remux mode the parameter Input mode must be set into TS at the menu
Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (ISDB-T) (see section 5.5.2.16).
At the menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Program Specific Information (ISDB-T) (see
section) it is possible to check some critical information contained in the incoming PAT
(Program Association Table), BIT (Broadcast Information Table), NIT (Network Informa-
tion Table), as well as the incoming TOT (Time Offset Table):
page 28 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
At the menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (ISDB-T) (see section) it is possi-
ble to acces to the remux filtering options and the layers configuration:
Filtering by PID
At the following example three services are available at the input (### HD, ### Noticias
and ###) and we want to send the service ### into the layer A, the service ### HD into
the layer B and we do not want to use the service ### Noticias.
Mandatory tables (PAT, PMT, SDT, NIT, BIT, TOT, L-EIT, H-EIT) must be routed manually.
Filtering by program number

At the following example we have the same three services available at the input than be-
fore(### HD, ### Noticias and ###) and we want to send the service ### into the layer
A, the services ### HD and ### Noticias into the layer B.
page 29 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
Advanced filtering
In this mode the list of elements into each layer must be entered with the following format:
Over the same example as before we want:
• Send the service ### into the layer A, the services ### HD and ### Noticias into
the layer B.
• Rename all the PIDs.
• At the service ### remove the video PID and keep the audio PID.
• Rename the service ### Noticias into Servicio de noticias.
page 30 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
2.2.9 Interface description

Front connectors
Name Type Description
RF IN N female, 50Ω (1)
RF input
Rear connectors

AC POWER IEC 60320-C14 AC power supply
RF OUT SMA female, 50Ω RF output
DAP NL SMA female, 50Ω RF feedback input for non-linear precorrec-
tor
DAP L SMA female, 50Ω RF feedback input for linear precorrector
AUX DET1 SMA female, 50Ω RF sample to measure forward power (for
coupled amplifiers)
AUX DET2 SMA female, 50Ω RF sample to measure reverse power (for
coupled amplifiers)
1:LOCAL RJ45 female, 8-pin Ethernet 1: Web GUI for local operation
2:REMOTE RJ45 female, 8-pin Ethernet 2: Network for remote operation
(SNMP or WEB GUI)
3:IP SOCKET 1 RJ45 female, 8-pin Ethernet 3: Transport stream over IP input
1
2
ASI 1 IN BNC female, 75Ω Transport stream over ASI input 1
ASI 2 IN BNC female, 75Ω Transport stream over ASI input 2
ANTENNA(2) SMA female, 50Ω GNSS antenna input
10MHz IN BNC female, 50Ω External 10MHz frequency reference input
1PPS IN BNC female, 50Ω External 1PPS time reference input
10MHz OUT BNC female, 50Ω Loop-through from External 10MHz or from
GNSS
1PPS OUT BNC female, 50Ω Loop-through from External 1PPS or from
GNSS
I/O Terminal Blocks, 20-pin(3) 2 external inputs and 8 contact outputs
INTERLOCK Terminal Blocks, 4-pin(4) Interlock loop 1 and 2 (2x)
CTRL BUS D-Sub male, 9-pin(5) Control bus (CAN)
1+1 SWITCH D-Sub female, 25-pin(6) 1+1 switch control / Interlock loop R
(1)
Only available for re-transmitters (substituting ASI 2 input).
(2)
Only available with GNSS option.
(3)
Pinout detailed at figure 2.11.
(4)
(5)
(6)
page 31 Ed 04
Characteristics
Exciter description
Figure 2.11: I/O port pinout: 2 inputs and 8 outputs.
Figure 2.12: INTERLOCK port pinout: 2 external interlock loops.
Figure 2.13: CTRL BUS port pinout: D-Sub male, 9-pin.
Figure 2.14: 1+1 SWITCH port pinout: D-Sub female, 25-pin.
page 32 Ed 04
Characteristics
Amplifier description
2.3 Amplifier description
Figure 2.15: Fourth Series medium power amplfier (3HU).

AC Power Supply Unit (Figure 2.16) provides an unique DC voltage to operate the
device. All necessary internal voltages are generated through DC/DC converters inside
of the amplifier.
Figure 2.16: AC Power supply unit for the amplifier.
฀ Figure 2.17 details the mechanical diagram of the enclosed power supply unit.
Monitoring status of the Power supply units is performed into control board of the device.
Besides each unit is provided with a front panel with four LED indicators (see table 2.3).
page 33 Ed 04
Characteristics
Dimensions
351.2 mm
(13.85 in)
41.4mm
(1.63 in)
101.6mm
(4.00 in) Front View
Top View Rear View

Shelf insertion keying
Figure 2.17: Mechanical diagram of power supply unit.
LED Description
ON: Input ok
Blinking: Input out of limits
ON: Output ok
Blinking: Overload
ON: Over-temperature Warning
Blinking: Service
! ON: Fault
Table 2.3: Front panel LEDs of power supply unit.
Power amplifier can be optionally provided with a redundant power supply unit con-
nected in parallel operation. Figure 2.18 details the diagram of the AC connections inside
the amplifier and the possible configurations depending on the input voltage range.
+VDC +VDC
PSU A PSU B PSU C PSU A PSU B PSU C

(Redundant) (Redundant)
(option) (option)
N PE 3 N PE 3
1 2 1 2
INPUT INPUT
200-254VAC 100-140VAC
Figure 2.18: AC electrical diagram for inputs of 100-140V (low line) or 200-254V (high
line).
The design of the device allows that each power supply unit can be hot-swapped without
turning off the AC source providing to the device (see section 8.10).
The AC Power supply is provided with following automatic protections:
page 34 Ed 04
Characteristics
Figure 2.19: Slots for power supply units (frontal view).
Overload protection
• Power limit 3000/3500 WDC at high line down to 52VDC .
• Power limit 1500 WDC at low line down to 52VDC .
• High line current limit (Above 280VAC the current limit reduces to 50A when VOU T
≤ 45VDC and to 25A when VOU T ≤ 45VDC and ambient Ta > 55o C.) if VOU T >
39VDC [3000W/3500W] 59/68ADC .
• Low line current limit 30ADC .
Output shutdown (commences as voltage decays below 36VDC ). System power up.
Upon insertion the rectifier will delay an overload shutdown for 20 seconds allowing for
the insertion and startup of multiple rectifiers within a system.
Overvoltage protection
60 - 65VDC . 200ms delayed shutdown. Immediate shutdown. Latched shutdown. Three
restart attempts are implemented within a 1 minute window prior to a latched shutdown.
Overtermperature protection
125/110o C typical. Shut down o/p voltage, recovers automatically after temperature goes
down.
2.3.2 Control board

The control board of the amplifier performs, among others, the following functions:
• Control of the frontal LED indicators.
• Monitoring and control of all the internal components and modules.
• Control from the external exciter through the CAN bus (called CTRL BUS).
Control addressing
Control communication between the exciter and the amplifiers is carried out through a
CAN bus using the CTRL interface (detailed at section 2.3.7).
For a correct communication, exciters must be preconfigured with the adequate number
of amplifier stages and with the adequate type of redundancy (see section 2.2.2) and
page 35 Ed 04
Characteristics
each amplifier stage into the bus must be preconfigured with an unique control address
following the addressing table:
Amplifier Address
Stage 1 1
Stage 2 2
Stage 3 3
Stage 4 4
Useful commands to configure the addressing are:
• Delete address. Clean the address of the amplifier stage X. Can be done at Setup
> Amplifier > Stage X menu by pressing Delete button (see section 5.5.2.26) or
using the hard button at the front panel (see section 2.3.6).
• Assign address. Configure the corresponding address X at Setup > Amplifier >
Stage X menu by pressing Assign button (see section 5.5.2.26)
• Identify address. Identify visually which amplifier stage is being set. All LED indi-
cators at the front panel (see section 2.3.6) are blinking when is pressing Identify
button at Setup > Amplifier > Stage X menu (see section 5.5.2.26).
2.3.3 Power Amplifier

Main function of the power amplifier is to amplify the RF output of the exciter in the entire
UHF frequency band.
The amplifier design is based on Ultra Wide Band Doherty technology. Ultra Wide
Band Doherty technology allows getting high efficiency power amplifiers with no tuning
required along the UHF bandwidth (470MHz-790MHz): the same amplifier hardware is
used for all frequencies.
Power amplifier is composed by 6 LDMOS transistors distributed into 3 UWB Doherty

pallets.
The output signal quality is improved by the digital precorrector at exciter device.
After the output amplifier, a detector is used to measure the transmitted power, getting the
power control, the feedback signal for the precorrection, monitoring output and detecting
a signal proportional to the reflected power in order to measure it.
Power control of the amplifier is performed by the exciter device through a CAN bus.
The amplifier is provided with selfprotection (see section 2.3.4) and monitoring func-
tions such as overtemperature and reflected power protection as well as output power
monitoring.
page 36 Ed 04
Characteristics
2.3.4 Self-Protection
2.3.4.1 Excessive reflected power self-protection
In order to protect the amplifier from excessive reflected power levels due to reflections,
automatic functions are performed according to the reverse power levels measured at
amplifier output.
When the return losses (reverse power / forward power) are above a user-configurable
(at Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu) reverse power threshold from 8dB to 12dB,
the output power is reduced in 8dB for 5 seconds. After 10 seconds more, the output
power will be totally switched off until performing a RF reset (See section 7.4.2) or a
System reset (See section 7.4.1). If the reverse power returns to normal level into these
10 seconds more, the output power will return to the normal level.
2.3.4.2 Exceeded output power self-protection

In order to protect the amplifier from excessive output power levels, automatic functions
are performed according to the forward power levels measured at amplifier output.
When the forward power are above a user-configurable (at Setup > Amplifier menu) Ex-
ceeded power threshold from 0.5dB to 2dB for, at least, 15 seconds, the RF output is
totally switched off until performing a RF reset (See section 7.4.2) or a System reset (See
section 7.4.1).
2.3.4.3 General hardware error self-protection

In order to protect the amplifier from uncontrolled power levels, automatic functions are
performed according to internal error detection points at signal board.
When a internal hardware error is detected in the signal board that could produce uncon-
trolled levels for the amplifier, the RF output is totally switched off until performing a RF
reset (See section 7.4.2) or a System reset (See section 7.4.1).
2.3.4.4 LDMOS currents self-protection

In order to protect the amplifier from a damage in a LDMOS transistor, automatic func-
tions are performed according to the LDMOS currents measured at each amplifier stage.
When any of the LDMOS currents are out-of-range (300mA to 10A), the output power is
o
reduced following the formula Presult = Pinitial ( NNo _T_Transistors
ransistors_ok 2
_total
) .
2.3.4.5 Overtemperature self-protection

In order to protect the amplifier from an overtemperature, automatic functions are per-
formed according to the temperature measured at amplifier.
The output power will be totally switched off when the amplifier board temperature
("Amp Ta ") (and/or the signal board temperature ("Signal Ta ")) is above 90o C until
performing a RF reset (See section 7.4.2) or a System reset (See section 7.4.1).
Previous to reach the temperature limit, when the "Amp Ta " > 85o C, fans start to work to
the maximum speed.
page 37 Ed 04
Characteristics
The AC Power supply itself is provided with an automatic overtemperature protection as
previously detailed.
2.3.5 Cooling System

Power amplifier is air cooled. Cooling air enters via the front panel, passes through the
heat sink fins, and then leaves the unit via the fans on the rear panel.
The device is provided with two fans at the rear side which draw in cool air via the ven-
tilation openings at the front panel and blow the warm air out via the rear panel. This
fans are mounted on the outside of the rear panel and can therefore be changed without
needing to open the device cover.
For service and maintenance tasks, these fans can be easily replaced by the user and it
is possible to detect a failure or monitoring the operating time of the fans.
Working cycle of the fans is 100% being their speed controlled by the temperatures of
the Amplifier board temperature ("Amp Ta ").
When the "Amp Ta " > 85o C, fans start to work to the maximum speed.
The AC power supply module is provided with two fans. Cooling air passes through the
power supply and leaves the unit via the ventilation openings at the rear panel. These
fans are placed into the power supply chassis, so its replacement must be done together
with the power supply module.
page 38 Ed 04
Characteristics
2.3.6 Front panel LED indicators

The amplifier is provided with a front panel provided with LED indicators for a quick
diagnosis about the device status. Table 2.4 details the description of each status from
each LED indicator.
Figure 2.20: Front panel and LED indicators.
LED Description
AMPLIFIER ON Supply voltage is OK (green)
RF IN RF input level OK (green).
RF input level NOK (red ).
REFLECTED POWER Reflected power OK (green).
Reflected power alarm (red ).
TEMPERATURE Temperature OK (green).
Temperature alarm (red ).
OUT POWER LOW RF output power at nominal value (green).
RF output power alarm (red ).
FANS Fans OK(green).
Fans alarm (red ).
TRANSISTORS LDMOS transistors OK(green).
LDMOS transistors alarm (red ).
Front panel of the amplifier is also provided with a RESET button to remove the control
address of the CAN bus interface needed for controlling the amplifier from the exciter. To
perform a reset, pressing the RESET button during 3 seconds until all LED indicators are
blinking in red.
Addressing of the amplifier can be configuring into the corresponding Setup > Amplifier
> Stage menu. See section 2.3.2 for more details about the addressing of the control bus.
NOTE:
When the amplififer has no configured any index addressing for the control bus, all
LED indicators are blinking in red.
page 39 Ed 04
Characteristics
During the first 2 seconds after the power supply on the front LED indicators show
the current amplifier addressing (used in the control bus) lighting up in the following
sequence:
1. Red. The number of LED indicators light up in red is equivalent to the amplifier
stage:
• TRANSISTORS = Index 1.
• TRANSISTORS+FANS = Index 2.
• TRANSISTORS+FANS+OUT POWER LOW = Index 3.
• TRANSISTORS+FANS+OUT POWER LOW+TEMPERATURE = Index 4.
2. Green. The number of LED indicators light up in green is equivalent to the redun-
dancy type:
• TRANSISTORS = Single Drive.

• TRANSISTORS+FANS = 1+1 [Excitador A].
• TRANSISTORS+FANS+OUT POWER LOW = 1+1 [Excitador B].
• TRANSISTORS+FANS+OUT POWER LOW+TEMPERATURE = Dual Drive.
page 40 Ed 04
Characteristics

Front connectors

RF OUT TEST SMA female, 50Ω RF test output
Rear connectors

AC POWER PRC device connec- AC power supply
tor, 5-pos (1)
RF OUT 7/16" female, 50Ω RF power output
RF IN SMA female, 50Ω RF input
DAP OUT SMA female, 50Ω RF feedback output for non-linear precorrector
CTRL BUS D-Sub male, 9- Control bus (CAN)
pin(2)
(1)
(2)
Figure 2.21: AC power input connector.
page 41 Ed 04
Characteristics
Coupling amplifiers
2.4 Coupling amplifiers

The power amplification stage can be composed by up to 4 coupled amplifiers. The num-
ber of amplifiers in the transmitter depends on the transmit power.
The diagram of the figures 2.22, 2.23 and 2.24 show the entire RF path from the output
of the exciter (splitter input) up to total power output (combiner output).
DUMMY LOAD
0º 0º 0º
RF IN
50Ohm
Amplifier 2
-90º -90º -90º

RF OUT
50Ohm
Amplifier 1
UHF 2-Way UHF 3dB Hybrid Coupler
Quadrature Splitter
Figure 2.22: Path of the RF signal in case of two coupled amplifiers.
P
-90º -90º DUMMY LOAD
0.5xP
50Ohm 50Ohm
Amplifier 2
P
0º 0º 0º 0º
0º 0º DUMMY LOAD
0º
RF IN 0.67xP
Amplifier 3
50Ohm
-90º -90º -90º

DUMMY LOAD RF OUT
50Ohm -180º 3xP
50Ohm 50Ohm
P
-90º -90º -90º
Amplifier 1
UHF 4-Way Quadrature Splitter UHF 3-way quadrature combiner
Figure 2.23: Path of the RF signal in case of 3 coupled amplifiers.
P
DUMMY LOAD
0º 0º 0º
0.5xP
50Ohm
Amplifier 4
P
-90º -90º -90º
0º 0º DUMMY LOAD
50Ohm -90º
RF IN P
Amplifier 3
50Ohm
-90º -180º -180º

P RF OUT
50Ohm -180º -180º -180º
4xP
50Ohm
Amplifier 2
P
DUMMY LOAD
-90º -90º -90º
0.5xP
50Ohm
Amplifier 1
UHF 4-Way Quadrature Splitter UHF 4-way quadrature combiner
Figure 2.24: Path of the RF signal in case of 4 coupled amplifiers.
The splitter distributes the output signal of the exciter to the individual amplifiers. In or-
der to absorbe the slightly phase differences between the RF signal paths, each amplifier
page 42 Ed 04
Characteristics
Coupling amplifiers
is provided with a circuit to regulate the phase composed by an hybrid coupler 3dB/90o
and two varactors controlled by a voltage (RF_Phase) generated by a D/A converter.
After a new installation of a coupled amplifiers using a splitter at the input and a coupler
at the output an automatic process for fine adjusting of the phase can be performed.
First, it is applied the same voltage RF_Phase to all amplifiers; then, following a simple
algorithm, the voltage applied to each amplifier is automatically adjusting untill the total
output power, measured at the directional coupler after the output combiner, reaches its
maximum value (keeping the gain of each amplifier stage). This fine adjust of the phase
can also be performed manually in each amplifier.
The RF power output from the amplifiers is coupled with the correct phase using the com-
biner. The combiner consists of a cascade of 90◦ hybrids couplers in a single module.
After the output combiner, a frequency-compensated directional coupler is used to

get a sample of the output signal for the indication of the forward power, for the indi-
cation of the reverse power and for the feedback signal needed the non-linear adaptive
precorrector. All of these signals are introduced back to the exciter where they are de-
tected to introduce to the control and signal board. Another probe (forward or reverse) is
available as a free test point.
All the amplifiers are controlled by the exciter through a CAN bus (called CTRL BUS) as
is detailed in section 2.3.2.
Using the sample from the output directional coupler at the combiner output as reference,
the exciter is able to control the output power of each amplifier unit.
page 43 Ed 04
Characteristics
Coupling amplifiers
2.4.1 Quadrature Splitter

The quadrature splitters is the component in charge of the distribution of the output
signal of the exciter. The type of the splitter depends on the number of amplifier stages.
Figure 2.25: 2-way quadrature splitter.
Specifications
2-way splitter 4-way splitter

Frequency Range 470-862 MHz
Max RMS Input Power 10 W
Insertion Loss < 0.6 dB (over the theo- < 1.2 dB (over the theoretical
retical -3.01 dB) -6.02 dB)
Return Loss / VSWR > 22 dB / < 1.17
Isolation > 22 dB
Amplitude Balance < ±0.1 dB < ±0.2 dB
Phase Response -90◦ / 0◦ (±3◦ ) -180◦ / -90◦ / -90◦ / 0◦ (±6◦ )
Max Operating Tempera- 65 C (149◦ F)
◦
ture (Body)
Environmental Conditions -5 to +55◦ C (+23 to +131◦ F), IP60
Dimensions 119x79x17 mm 213x134x17 mm
Weight 0.3 kg (0.7 lb.) 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Connectors(1) SMA Female
(1)
Other connectors available.
OUTPUT -90°
OUTPUT 0°
OUTPUT 0°
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT -180°
OUTPUT -90°
OUTPUT -90°
page 44 Ed 04
Characteristics
Coupling amplifiers
2.4.2 Coupler
The coupler is the component in cherge of the power combination of the output signal of
the amplifiers. The type of the coupler depends on the number of amplifier stages.
Figure 2.26: 2-way hybrid coupler.
Specifications
2-input coupler 3-input coupler 4-input coupler

Max RMS Input Power 4.30 kW
Connector Spacing 3U
(Center-to-Center)
Isolation > 22 dB
Amplitude Response 3.05 ±0.30 dB -4.80 ±0.6 dB -6.10 ±0.7 dB
Phase Response 0◦ / -90◦ (±1◦ ) -180◦ / -90◦ / -90◦ -180◦ / -90◦ / 0◦ / -
(±10◦ ) 90◦ (±1◦ )
Max Operating Temper- 65◦ C (149◦ F)
ature (Body)
Environmental Condi- -5 to +55◦ C (+23 to +131◦ F), IP60
tions
Dimensions 170x58x42 mm 304x92x49 mm 438x92x49 mm
Weight 1 kg (2.2 lb.) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.)
Connectors(1) 7-16 Female
(1)
P 0° LOAD 0.5 x P
P 0° LOAD 0.5 x P
P -90° LOAD P
P -90° LOAD 0.67 x P
P -180° OUTPUT 4 x P
P -90° OUTPUT 3 x P
P -90° LOAD 0.5 x P
page 45 Ed 04
Characteristics
Low-pass filter
2.5 Low-pass filter

To fulfill the requirements of the spectrum mask may be necessary install a low-pass
filter after the amplifier in order to reduce the harmonic distortion. The type of the filter
to install depends on the output power.
Figure 2.27: Low-pass filter.
Specifications
UHF UHF 1+5/8” UHF 3+1/8”

Frequency Range DC to 806 MHz
Max RMS Input Power 2.50kW @ 470MHz 3.50kW @ 470MHz 8.50kW @ 470MHz
2.30kW @ 700MHz 2.30kW @ 700MHz 5.00kW @ 700MHz
1.60kW @ 800MHz 1.60kW @ 800MHz 3.50kW @ 800MHz
Selectivity > 29 dB @ 940 MHz > 29 dB @ 940
> 60 dB @ 1000 to 2600 MHz to 2600 MHz
Max Operating Ta 65◦ C (149◦ F) (Body)
Environmental -5 to +55◦ C (+23 to +131◦ F), IP60
Dimensions 476.5mm, 502.5mm, 547mm, EIA3+1/8”
EIA1+5/8” EIA1+5/8”
Weight 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) 2.1 kg (4.6 lb.)
Connectors/interface(1) 7-16 Female 1+5/8" Rigid Line 3+1/8" Rigid Line
(1)
page 46 Ed 04
Characteristics
N+1 Redundancy (SW
option)
2.6 N+1 Redundancy (SW option)
N+1 functionality (N up to 11) in transmitters/Re-transmitters is based on a distributed
architecture with no need of an external automatic switching module.
Communication between all transmitters as well as power supply redundancy for the
switching circuits is provided by the interconnection between the CTRL bus interface
(connectors D-Sub, 9-pin). See section 2.2.2.1 for a detailed configuration of the ad-
dressing.
The control of each coaxial switch is provided by the interconnection between the 1+1
SWITCH interface (connectors D-Sub) in each transmitters with the control connector
(D-Sub) at each coaxial switch.
Diagram of figure 2.28 shows the connections between transmitters that are required to
carry out the N+1 functionality.
Transmitter B N+1 SWITCH CTRL
CTRL BUS
RF OUT
#1
Band-pass Filter
Transmitter A1 (Antenna)
2 RF switch 1
RF OUT 1 3
#2
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
Transmitter A2 RF switch 2
2
RF OUT 1 3
...
N+1 SWITCH CTRL

#N
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
Transmitter AN CTRL BUS RF switch N
2
RF OUT 1 3
Dummy load
Figure 2.28: N+1 connections diagram.
page 47 Ed 04
Characteristics
N+1 Redundancy (SW
option)
The Reserve transmitter stores the configuration from the N main transmitters and it is
able to perform all the actions needed for managing the complete N+1 system, including
the routing of the input signal, the autoconfiguration with the appropiate settings and the
commands needed for the coaxial switch. It is possible (even with a failure in the re-
serve transmitter) to check and monitoring the status of the N+1 redundancy from any of
the main transmitters through any of available user interfaces (see section 5.5.2.27 for
more details). A unique IP address (different from the IP addresses from any transmitter)
is available for the remote control and monitoring of the N+1 system.
The N+1 redundancy can be set into manual mode or automatic mode with up to N
different priority levels.
The criterions for switchover are fully configurable at System > Events configuration >
Alarms menu by marking at N+1 column the desired alarms of the device.
Automatic verifications
In order to optimize the switchover time, the reserve transmitter is considered ready for
the switchover after an automatic verification process performed towards the load that
is detailed below.
The automatic verification process is performed towards the load and it does not affect
to the service in any case. It is launched in case it is necessary to testing the reserve
device to confirm the clearance of the cause that has produced the switching. Once the
result of this verification is successful, the reserve device is ready for future switchovers
and no more verification retries are performed.
The duration of the verification process is configurable. The time in between the fault hap-
pens in transmitter to the antenna and the beginning of the verification test is configurable
between the different following options:
• (a) Reiterated with cadence. After a configurable time.
• (b) Daily. Daily at a determined hour.
• (c) In case of a fault in other transmitter with enabled switchings and independently
of the priority.
Although first try is performed over the reserve transmitter immediately. In case of having
enabled the automatic verification process, after the first try, it will be done based on the
selected configuration (a) or (b), except in the case of (c) happens before them, case in
which the verification test will be done immediately. The maximum number of times this
verification process will be performed after a fault and also the cadence of those retries
are configurable.
The verification tests will be stopped when it result is successful or when the maximum
number of retries is over. The cadence of verification retries can be:
• Simple: A retry is performed based on the time selected in option (a) , where the
time between the fault and the verification test is configured.
• Double: The first retry is attempted at the time set based on option (a), whereas
the second retry is attempted at a double of that time, the third at the double of
the previous one and so on, until the number of programmed retries is over. (For
example, 3 retries with option (a) set to 15 min => 1st retry at 15 minutes after the
page 48 Ed 04
Characteristics
N+1 Redundancy (SW
option)
fault; if the transmitter stays faulty, the 2nd retry is performed 30 minutes after the
first unsuccessful retry; 3rd retry at 60 minutes of the previous retry and so on...)
• Triple: The same as the Double case, but applying triple instead of double.
Restorations
The automatic restoration will only be performed after the verification that the fault that
caused the switching is not present and only when a second transmitter (with the au-
tomatic switchings activated) presents a fault so it needs to make use of the reserve
transmitter.
In case of automatic restoration is not active, the system will only return from the reserve
channel to the main channel, after the execution of a manual command to restore the
service from reserve to main.
The maximum number of automatic restorations in a transmitter is also configurable. The

time window in which the restorations can be performed can be configurable in days.
Validation of input alarms as switching criterion

In order to avoid unnecessary switchings due to input signal problems, an extra tempo-
risation in seconds can be configured for validating this input alarm as a criterion for the
switchover. For disable this temporisation, set the value to 0 seconds.
When an input failure is detected in the transmitter towards antenna, the device waits the
configured time before validating this alarm as a criterion for switchover. If input failure
persists, the criterion is validated, if not (or if this input alarm persists in reserve trans-
mitter) this alarm is not taken into account for a switchover.
Switching hysteresis
Once a criterion for switchover is validated, including also all the considerations detailed
above, an extra temporisation in seconds can be configured before switching. For disable
this temporisation, set the value to 0 seconds.
Synchronization of configuration parameters

To store the configuration from each of the main transmitters into the corresponding
memory slot at reserve transmitter, a synchronization menu is available in order to
synchronize the current whole configuration of each main transmitter with the stored
configuration of each main transmitter into the memory of the reserve transmitter. In
case of a non synchronized status, user can save manually the configuration into the
reserve transmitter memory.
page 49 Ed 04
Characteristics
1+1 redundancy (SW
option)
2.7 1+1 redundancy (SW option)
The 1+1 redundant functionality in transmitters is performed with 2 transmitters (Transmitter
A and Transmitter B) without the necessity of any additional module.
GNSS redundancy is performed by means of one GNSS receiver included in each of the
transmitters.
Communication between both transmitters as well as power supply redundancy for the
(connectors D-Sub, 9-pin) between Transmitter A and Transmitter B.
The control of the coaxial switch is provided by the interconnection between the 1+1
SWITCH interface (connectors D-Sub, 25-pin) in both exciters (exciter of Transmitter A
and exciter of Transmitter B) with the control connector (D-Sub) at coaxial switch.
carry out the passive reserve functionality.
CTRL BUS
Transmitter A Transmitter B
1+1 SWITCH
RF OUT RF OUT
1 3
2 RF switch Dummy load
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
Figure 2.29: 1+1 connections diagram.
Control and monitoring of the 1+1 redundancy performance can be done from any of
both transmitters through any of available user interfaces (see section 5.5.2.27 for more
details). A unique IP address (different from the IP addresses from both transmitters) is
available for the remote control and monitoring of the 1 + 1 system (including both trans-
mitters) as one device.
The 1+1 redundancy can be set into manual mode or automatic mode with different
priorities (low and high).
Alarms menu by marking at 1+1 column the desired alarms of the device.
page 50 Ed 04
Characteristics
1+1 redundancy (SW
option)
is detailed below.

• (c) In case of a fault in the transmitter to the antenna with enabled switchings and
independently of the priority. This option is always enabled and it is not user-
configurable.
are configurable.
Automatic priority inversion

If this functionality is enabled, the device swap the priority level (A>B to A<B or vice versa)
automatically each period (days) at the configured time of the day.
For example, for an initial value of priority = A>B, period = 30 days and time = 03:45. After
30 days, at 03:45 am the device will change automatically the priority into A<B. After next
30 days, at 03:45am the device will cahnge automatically the priority into A>B, and so on.
page 51 Ed 04
Characteristics
1+1 redundancy (SW
option)
Validation of power alarms as switching criterion

In order to avoid unnecessary switchings due to RF output power recoverings, an extra
temporisation in seconds can be configured for validating this power alarm as a criterion
for the switchover. For disable this temporisation, set the value to 0 seconds.
When an Decreased power failure is detected in the transmitter towards antenna, the
device waits the configured time before validating this alarm as a criterion for switchover.
If input failure persists, the criterion is validated, if not this alarm is not taken into account
for a switchover.

Due to the fact that the redundancy control can be carried out by any of redundant devices
(A/B), both of them must keep the redundancy configuration parameters continuously
synchronized. According to this, anytime that the redundancy configuration parameters
are changed in the GUI of one device, this configurations is automatically synchronized
with the other device.
Furthermore, a synchronization menu is available in order to synchronize (manually in

this case) the whole configuration between both devices. All the configuration param-
eters (excluded the redundancy configuration itself) are grouped into following groups
according to the structure of configuration menus (see section 5.5):
• WEB interface.
• Date, time and language.
• SNMP.
• Events configuration [Alarms, Events, I/O interface].
• Input [IP, ASI, RX, Switching].
• Modulator.
• RF output.
page 52 Ed 04
Characteristics
1+1 redundancy (SW
option)
• Amplifier [Configuration].
• Reference.
The status of the synchronization between both devices can be checked by groups. In
case of a non synchronized status, user can send the configuration in block to the other
device.
page 53 Ed 04
Characteristics
Dual Drive redundancy
(SW option)
2.8 Dual Drive redundancy (SW option)
The dual drive (henceforth DD) redundant functionality in transmitters is performed with
2 exciters (Exciter A and Exciter B) without the necessity of any additional control mod-
ule.
exciters.
Communication between both exciters as well as power supply redundancy for the switch-
ing circuits is provided by the interconnection between the CTRL bus interface (connec-
tors D-Sub, 9-pin) between Exciter A and Exciter B.
The control of the coaxial switch (DD switch) is provided by the interconnection between
the 1+1 SWITCH interface (connectors D-Sub, 25-pin) in both exciters (Exciter A and
Exciter B) with the control connector (D-Sub, 25-pin) at DD switch.
Diagram of figure 2.30 shows the connections between exciters that are required to carry
out the dual drive functionality.
CTRL BUS
Exciter A Exciter B
RF OUT RF OUT
DD SWITCH
CONTROL
Load
RF IN 1 RF IN 2
DD Switch RF OUT
RF IN
Amplifier
RF OUT
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
Figure 2.30: Dual Drive connections diagram.
Control and monitoring of the DD redundancy performance can be done from any of
page 54 Ed 04
Characteristics
Dual Drive redundancy
(SW option)
both exciters through any of available user interfaces (see section 5.5.2.27 for more
details). A unique IP address (different from the IP addresses from both exciters) is avail-
able for the remote control and monitoring of the DD system (including both exciters) as
one device.
The DD redundancy can be set into manual mode or automatic mode with different pri-
orities (low and high).
Alarms menu by marking at DD column the desired alarms of the exciter.
In order to optimize the switchover time, the status of the reserve exciter is permanently
monitored by the control system without the necessity of extra automatic verifications
towards the load.


When an input failure is detected in the exciter towards antenna, the device waits the
persists, the criterion is validated, if not (or if this input alarm persists in reserve ex-
citer) this alarm is not taken into account for a switchover.


page 55 Ed 04
Characteristics
Dual drive switch
description
• WEB interface.
• SNMP.
• Modulator.
• RF output.
• Reference.
device.
2.9 Dual drive switch description

2.9.1 Specifications
The dual drive switch (DD Switch) is a module that incorporates RF switch DPDT into a
chassis assembled with the adequate interfaces for RF and control needed for building a
dual drive transmitter.
Figure 2.31: Dual drive switch.

Return Loss > 20 dB
Insertion Loss < 1 dB
Isolation (IN-OUT) > 65 dB
Environmental Conditions -0 to +45◦ C
Dimensions 90x72x28 mm
Weight 0.15 kg
page 56 Ed 04
Characteristics
Dual drive switch
description
Front connectors
RF OUT SMA female, 50Ω RF output
RF IN 1 SMA female, 50Ω RF input from exciter A
RF IN 2 SMA female, 50Ω RF input from exciter B
Rear connectors
CTRL D-Sub male, 25-pin(1) DD switch control
(1)
Figure 2.32: DD switch CTRL port pinout: D-Sub male, 25-pin.
page 57 Ed 04
Characteristics
Rack cooling control
module
2.10 Rack cooling control module
Description
In order to manage the cooling of the rack where the transmitters are installed an optional
module is available, called rack cooling control module, that is able to manage up to
two turbines and up to two external sensors for general purpose (door sensor, ...).
Figure 2.33: Rack cooling control module.
This module regulates automatically the speed of the cooling turbines of the rack as
a function of the air pressure difference between inside and outside the rack or as a
function of the temperature at inside the rack:
• Control for air pressure difference. The module is provided with a digital differ-
ential pressure sensor that measures the difference of the air pressure between
inside and outside the rack. The microcontroller regulates the speed of the cooling
turbines to equalize the pressure difference.
• Control for temperature. For the racks where is not possible to use the pressure
sensor to manage the speed of the turbines, the module is also provided with a
temperature sensor. The microcontroller regulates the speed of the cooling tur-
bines to keep the temperature inside the rack in around a target defined by the
user.
Beside the automatic control, is possible to set manually the speed (a % of the maximum
speed) of each turbine.
This module is provided with two general purpose inputs isolated through optocouplers
that allow connecting up to two external sensors, in example a open door sensor.
page 58 Ed 04
Characteristics
module
This module incorporates a microcontroller capable of autonomously performing the nec-
essary functions of control and monitoring of the turbines and sensors, but for powering it
and also for configuring it is needed to interconect the module with a transmitter through
the control bus interface CTRL bus (D-Sub conector, 9-pins).
The diagram of the figure 2.34 details the connections needed for installing the rack cool-
ing control module.
PWM
TACH
CTRL FAN 1
10V
GND
OUT
AIR
PRESSURE FAN 1
IN
SENSOR
PWM
CTRL FAN 2 TACH
10V
GND
RACK COOLING FAN 2

CONTROL
SENSOR 2 SENSOR 2
SENSOR 1 SENSOR 1
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS
TRANSMITTER
RACK
Figure 2.34: Conection diagram of the rack cooling control module.
Configuration, measurements and alarms menus of this module are integrated into
the user interface of the transmitter where is installed. At the corresponding section of
operation chapter in this manual are detailed all the configuration parameters and mea-
surements availables.
For monitoring the status of the module followig alarms have been pre-defined:
• Temperature. It is triggered when the temperature of the module (the temperature
page 59 Ed 04
Characteristics
module
inside the rack) exceeded 70o C.
• Pressure difference. It is triggered when the difference of the air pressure is too
high for being managed by the speed of the rack cooling turbines.
• HW error. It is triggered under the following conditions:
– When the configured speed for a turbine and the measure of the tachometer
from this turbine are incoherents.
– With a communication problem into the control bus between the module and
the transmitter where is installed.
– With an internal hardware failure detected in the module.
Interface description
Figure 2.35: Interface description of the rack cooling control module.
The pinout of the connector CTRL BUS (D-Sub male, 9-pins), that is the control and
power supply interface of the module, is detailed at the figure 2.36.
Figure 2.36: Pinout connector CTRL BUS (D-Sub male, 9-pins).
page 60 Ed 04
Characteristics
module
The connectors of the tubes for the differential pressure sensor are detailed in the figure
2.37.
Figure 2.37: Differential pressure sensor connection tubes. Dimensions in mm.
The interface for the control of the turbines and the external sensors is a terminal
block conector with the pinout detailed in the figure 2.38.
Figure 2.38: Conector for controlling the turbines and the external sensors.
The RESET button allows cleaning the control address for the communication through
the control bus with the transmitters in case of a new installation or a communication con-
flict. To perform the reset press the button, with a needle or similar, for at least 3 seconds
until the LED indicators blink in red.
page 61 Ed 04
Characteristics
module
The LED indicators provide a visual interface for a quick diagnosis about the status of
the module. The table 2.5 details the description of possible statuses of each LED indi-
cator.
LED Description
PWR Power supply OK (green)
FANS Turbines control OK (green).
Any turbine NOK (HW error) (orange).
All turbines NOK (HW error) (red ).
ALARM Without alarms (green).
Pressure diff. or Ta Alarm (orange).
Pressure diff. and Ta Alarm (red ).
Table 2.5: LED indicator status of the rack cooling control module.
FANS and ALARM LED indicators are blinking in red when the module has no control
address. When a communication problem is detected in the control bus both LED indica-
tors blinking in its current color. When the microcontroller of the module, due to a failure,
has not firmware (boot mode) both LED indicators keep in orange fixed.
Specifications
No turbines controlled 2
Turbine control voltage 0-10 VDC/PWM
Turbine tachometer measurement Yes
No general purpose inputs 2
Differential pressure range -125Pa to 125Pa
Differential pressure zero-point accuracy 0.08Pa
Differential pressure stability compensation <0.05Pa/year
Temperature range -55◦ C to +125◦ C
Temperature accuracy 2◦ C (-125◦ C to +100◦ C)
3◦ C (-55◦ C to +125◦ C)
Operative Ta range 0 a +45◦ C
Weight 0.15 kg
page 62 Ed 04
Characteristics
Hardware and software
options.
2.11 Hardware and software options.
Hardware options
• Synchronization module (GNSS). The optional built-in GNSS module provides
the device with a frequency (10MHz) and time (1PPS) reference, e.g. for SFN op-
eration. The OCXO placed inside the synchronization module can be synchronized
with an external 1PPS signal or with the built-in GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) satellite
receiver.
• Synchronization module (OCXO). The optional built-in OCXO module provides

the device with a frequency (10MHz) and time (1PPS) reference, e.g. for SFN
operation. The OCXO is synchronized with an external 1PPS signal.
• Power amplifier redundant power supply. Each power amplifier can be option-
ally provided with a redundant power supply unit. The design of the amplifier allows
that each power supply unit can be hot-swapped without turning off the AC source
providing to the device (see section 8.10).
Figure 2.41: Amplifier redundant power supply.
page 63 Ed 04
Characteristics
Hardware and software
options.
Software options
• SNMP. Provides the device with SNMP agent. See section 5.4 for more details.
• DVB-T. Provides the transmitter with DVB-T standard modulation.
• DVB-T2. Provides the transmitter with DVB-T2 standard modulation.
• ISDB-T. Provides the transmitter with ISDB-T/Tb standard modulation.
• ISDB-T Remux. Provides the transmitter ISDB-T/Tb with services filtering capabil-
ities. It is possible to select from the input transport stream which PIDs or programs
will be transmitted into each layer. See section 2.2.8 for more details.
• ATSC1. Provides the transmitter with ATSC 1.0 standard modulation.
• N+1 Redundancy. Provides the device with the N+1 redundancy functionality. See
section 2.6 for more details.
• 1+1 Redundancy. Provides the device with the redundancy functionality. See
section 2.7 for more details.
• DD Redundancy. Provides the device with the dual drive redundancy functionality.
See section 2.8 for more details.
page 64 Ed 04
Technical Manual
2.12.1 Transmitter specifications
2.12 Specifications
Transmitters 4HU 7HU 10HU 13HU
Maximum output power DVB-T/T2, 600W 1200W 1800W 2400W
ISDBT/Tb (before band-pass filter)
Maximum output power ATSC 1.0 750W 1500W 2500W 3000W
(before band-pass filter)
Number of amplifiers 1 2 3 4
AC supply voltage (Exciter) 90-264V
AC supply voltage (Amplifier) 200-264V 100-140V
AC supply frequency (Exciter) 47Hz-63Hz
AC supply frequency (Amplifier) 47Hz-66Hz
Power factor (Exciter) PF>0.93/230VAC PF>0.98/115VAC at full load
Power factor (Amplifier) >0.97 (0.995 typ.) (50 – 100% load)
page 65
Maximum AC power consumption(1) 1800VA 3600VA 5400VA 7200VA

RF output connector 7/16" female(2) 7/8" female(2) EIA 1 5/8" female(2) EIA 1 5/8" female(2)
Dimensions (WxHxD)(5) 19"x4HUx480mm 19"x7HUx480mm(3) 19"x10HUx480mm(3) 19"x13HUx480mm(3)
Weight(5) 26.6kg(4) 50kg(3)(4) 73.4kg(3)(4) 96.8kg(3)(4)
(1)
At maximum output power.
(2)
(3)
Splitters and couplers are not included.
(4)
Including one power supply at each amplifier. Weight of each power supply (up to 3) = 2.2kg.
(5)
In case of Single Drive configuration. Exciter for dual drive configuration: Height = 1U and Weight = 3.2kg.
Characteristics
Specifications
Design and
Ed 04
Characteristics
Specifications
Main:
Frequency range 470 to 790 MHz (UWB Doherty)
Transmission standards DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T, ISDB-Tb, ATSC
1.0
Input switchover Programmable seamless switching be-
tween all inputs
ASI input:
Number of inputs 2
Impedance 75Ω
Connectors BNC female
IP input:
Number of inputs/outputs 2
Physical Layer IEEE 802.3af
Data Rate 10/100/1000 (Mbps)
Connectors 4 x RJ-45
Port capabilities Switch Gigabit Ethernet
Encapsulation UDP/RTP/RTP-FEC
IP-address assignment DHCP/static
Multicast IGMP v2/v3
Parameterizable jitter tolerance Yes
RF Input (Re-transmitter):
Frequency range 470 to 862MHz
Supported standards DVB-T, DVB-T2
Bandwidth 1.7 MHz, 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Input signal range -78 dBm to -20 dBm (DVB-T)
Impedance 50Ω
Connector N female
Exciter RF output:
Output level range 0 dBm to 18 dBm
Impedance 50Ω
Connector SMA female
DVB-T Modulation:
Network operation MFN (input rate and PCR adaptation),
SFN
FFT 2K, 8K
Guard interval 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
FEC encoding 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Constellation QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
Channel bandwidth 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Maximum input bitrate 31.66Mbps
page 66 Ed 04
Characteristics
Specifications
DVB-T2 Modulation:
T2 version Up to 1.3.1
Profile Base/Lite
Input modes Mode A: TS (Single PLP); Mode B: T2MI
(Single PLP & Multiple PLP)
Network operation TS (MFN with input rate and PCR adap-
tation); T2MI (MFN & relative / absolute
timestamping SFN)
Operation mode SISO / MISO
Channel bandwidth 1.7 MHz, 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
FFT 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K (normal or ex-
tended)
Pilot patterns PP1 to PP8
Guard interval 1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32,
1/128
PAPR reduction yes
PLPs Up to 8 PLPs
PLP efficiency mode Normal & High
PLP FEC type 16K / 64K
PLP code rate 1/3,2/5,1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
PLP constellation QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM (nor-
mal or rotated)
PLP Time interleaving Single / Multiple
ISDB-T Modulation:
Transmit data interfaces Single-Layer Transport Stream
BTS combined hierarchical stream
Hierarchical transmission Three-layer support allows allocation of
the 13 available transmission segments
to the three hierarchical layers
Partial reception Supports priority reception of a single
segment by mobile "1-seg" devices
Network operation SFN BTS using a GPS reference
MFN / SFN with BTS-rate-lock
MFN BTS using NULL packet removal
and insertion
MFN Single-Layer Transport Stream with
input rate and PCR adaptation
OFDM transmission mode Mode 1, 2, 3 (2K, 4K, 8K FFT)
Guard interval 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4
FEC encoding Catenated RS-Viterbi Trellis codes: 1/2,
2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Modulated schemes DQPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
Time interleaving 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
Channel bandwidth 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
ATSC 1.0 Modulation:

Channel bandwidth 6 MHz
page 67 Ed 04
Characteristics
Specifications
RF output:
Distance to the shoulder >38 dB
MER rms >35 dB
Precorrection Digital adaptive, linear and non-linear
Power stability ≤ ±0.5 dB
Return losses > 20 dB
Spurious emissions out of channel (1) < -40 dBc
Harmonic distortion (2) < -16 dBc (2o order)
< -40 dBc (3o order)
Impedance 50Ω
(1)
Measured in 100KHz bandwidth outside fc ±12M Hz before band-pass filter.
(2)
Measured in 10MHz bandwidth before harmonic and/or band-pass filter.
RF monitoring output:
Coupling (3) 50dB±4dB
Impedance 50Ω
(3)
RF probe at amplifier frontal panel. In case of coupling amplifiers, coupling value
corresponds to the frequency-compensated directional coupler at the combiner output.
RF feedback input (Non-linear precorrection):

Input signal range -10 to +10 dBm
Impedance 50Ω
RF feedback input (Linear precorrection):

Impedance 50Ω
Forward power detection input (AUX DET1):

Impedance 50Ω
Reverse power detection input (AUX DET2):

Input signal range(4) -5 to +5 dBm (forward detection)
Impedance 50Ω
(4)
The same coupling value must be used to get the sample for the forward and reverse
power detection. This coupling value must guarantee a RF level within the forward power
detection input range.
page 68 Ed 04
Characteristics
Specifications
Local oscillator:
Phase noise ≥95 dBc/Hz @ 1kHz
Frequency stability peak to peak ≤1x10−6 (-10o C to +60o C) (standard)
with temperature ≤1x10−9 (0o C to +60o C) (GNSS HW option)
≤5x10−9 (-10o C to +60o C) (OCXO HW option)
Frequency stability aging per year ≤±1x10−6 (standard)
≤±3x10−8 (GNSS HW option)
≤±5x10−8 (OCXO HW option)
10MHz and 1PPS external reference inputs:

10MHz range -20 dBm to +10 dBm
10MHz impedance 50Ω
10MHz connector BNC female
1PPS level TTL
1PPS trigger by rise-edge
1PPS connector BNC female
10MHz and 1PPS external reference outputs:

10MHz level (from GNSS receiver) -4 dBm ± 3dB
10MHz insertion losses (loop-through) < 0.3 dB
1PPS level TTL
OCXO (HW option):

10MHz signal:
Frequency stability ageing per year ≤ ± 5x10−8

Frequency stability peak to peak with ≤ 5x10−9 (from -10 o C to 60 o C)
temperature
Short term performance @1s: 5x10−12
Phase noise (typical, static conditions) @1 Hz: -95 dBc / Hz
@10 Hz: -125 dBc / Hz
@100 Hz: -145 dBc / Hz
@1 KHz: -150 dBc / Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc / Hz
Signal waveform Sine Wave
1PPS signal:
Holdover Mode (static conditions):

after 24 hours < 5 µs
Signal waveform 5V TTL
page 69 Ed 04
Characteristics
Specifications
GNSS receiver (HW option):

Receiver:
Type Concurrent GNSS

Satellites supported GPS and GLONASS
Frequency LI - 1.575 MHz
Sensitivity acquisition (cold start) - 147 dBm
Locking time < 5 minutes (Hot start-up)
< 20 minutes (Cold start-up)
Antenna connector SMA female
Antenna impedance 50Ω
Antenna DC supply 5V/30mA
Output 10MHz & 1PPS, DC supply & DIN 41612 2B male 32 pins
data connector
10MHz signal:
Accuracy with GPS < ±1 x 10−12 Hz (average over 24 hours

when GPS locked)
Accuracy without GPS < ±2 Hz
Frequency stability ageing per day ≤ ± 2x10−10
Frequency stability peak to peak with ≤ 1x10−9 (from 0 o C to 60 o C)
temperature
@10s & 100s: 3x10−11
@100 Hz: -135 dBc / Hz
@1 KHz: -145 dBc / Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc / Hz
1PPS signal:
Accuracy to UTC (GPS locked) ± 25 ns

Operation:
Local control Ethernet (Webserver application).
Front LCD display of 256 x 64 pixels,
keys and LED indicators.
Micro-SD card to save and restore con-
figuration settings.
Remote control and monitoring Ethernet (Webserver GUI).
SNMP (SW option).
I/O contacts.
page 70 Ed 04
Characteristics
Specifications
Environmental:
Operating temperature range 0 to 45o C
Relative humidity (max.) 95%, non condensing
Cooling Forced air
Operating altitude <2500m above the sea level
Compliance:
Safety EN 60950-1:2006+A1:2010+A11:2009+A12:2011
EN 60215:1989+A1:92+A2:94
EMC ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09)
ETSI EN 301 489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05)
EN 61000-4-5, heavy Industry level (<4kV AC source;
<1kV input signal)
Spectrum efficiency ETSI EN 302 296-2 V1.2.1 (2011-05)
Standards EN 300744, EN 302755, TS 101191, EN 50083-9,
TR 101290, TS 102773, TS 102831, TS 102034,
ARIB STD-B31, ABNT NBR 15601, ATSC Doc. A/53,
ISO/IEC 13818, RFC 1122, RFC 791, RFC 768, RFC
3550, RFC 2250, RFC 2733, SMTPE 2022-1/-2, EN
300421, EN 302307
page 71 Ed 04
Technical Manual Installation
3 Installation
3.1 Unpacking and Setting Up

3.1.1 Equipment Supplied
The following equipment is included normally:
• 19" rackmount exciter (including HW options in same chassis).
• 19" rackmount power amplifier(s) (including HW options in same chassis).

• AC power cable(s).
• Ground wire(s).
• User documentation.
NOTE:
The equipment can be supplied integrated into a 19" rack with another devices
and cabling.
In case of redundant configurations (dual drive, 1+1,...) or in case of two or more
coupled amplifiers, the needed integration devices as splitters and coupling devices
can be supplied together with the equipment.
3.1.2 Unpacking
Carefully unpack the equipment and use the shipping documents to check that the ship-
ment is complete.
page 72 Ed 04
Unpacking and Setting
Up
3.1.3 Setting Up
The device can be installed in a 19" rack.
The installation must be stable and have adequate air ventilation. In particular, the air
flow through the intake openings on the front panel and through the outlet openings on
the rear panel (fans) must not be obstructed. At least a distance of 30cm must be con-
sidered between the front and rear of the device and the wall or flat surface.
It is under the installer responsibility to guarantee that the ambient conditions around
the equipment is within the operating range:
• Ambient temperature: 0 to +45o C.
• Ambient humidity: 0 to 90% non-condensing.
Equipment must be operate in environments with a pollution degree up to 2 according

with EN 60664-1. At least a filter class G1 from group coarse dust according to EN
779:2012 is recommended for filtering the air.
Maximum heat dissipation values for different devices:
1HU exciter 60 W
3HU amplifier 1140 W
page 73 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
3.2 Connecting Cables

3.2.1 Connecting cables for Digital TV
3.2.1.1 ASI Inputs of Transmitter
1. Connect the first transport stream to ASI 1 IN connector.
2. If signal standby is required, connect a second transport stream to ASI 2 IN con-

nector.
3.2.1.2 TS over IP Inputs of Transmitter

1. Connect the IP network with first transport stream to 3:IP SOCKET 1 ethernet
connector at rear side of the device.
2. If signal standby is required, connect a second transport stream to 4:IP SOCKET

2 ethernet connector at rear side of the device.
3.2.1.3 RF Input of Re-transmitter

1. Connect the RF input signal to RF IN connector.
3.2.1.4 Reference signals

1. To increase frequency accuracy, connect an external reference source (10MHz) to
10MHz IN connector at rear side of the device.
2. For SFN operation, also connect a 1PPS signal for timing synchronization from an
external reference source to 1PPS IN connector at rear side of the device.
NOTE:
The optional GNSS receiver can be used as a frequency and timing reference, by
connecting the antenna to ANTENNA connector at rear side of the device.
page 74 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
3.2.2 Connecting internal cables for SD

Following instructions are needed to carry out the internal connections between the ex-
citer and the amplifier(s) in single drive configurations:
In case of one amplifier:

Follow the instructions that are detailed at figure 3.1:
1. Connect the RF OUT connector at rear side of the Exciter to the RF IN connector
at rear side of the Amplifier.
2. Connect the DAP OUT connector at rear side of the Amplifier to the DAP NL at
rear side of the Exciter.
3. Connect the CTRL BUS interface at rear side of the Exciter to the CTRL BUS
interface at rear side of the Amplifier using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
In case of two amplifiers:

at 2-way splitter using the coaxial cable labelled as E RF OUT.
2. Connect the -90o output connector at 2-way splitter to the RF IN connector at rear
side of the Amplifier 1 using the coaxial cable labelled as A1 RF IN.
3. Connect the 0o output connector at 2-way splitter to the RF IN connector at rear

4. Interconnect the RF OUT of both amplifiers using the 3dB hybrid coupler.
5. Connect the LOAD connector at 3dB hybrid coupler to the DUMMY LOAD.
6. Connect the RF OUT connector at 3dB hybrid coupler to the RF input at direc-
tional coupler using the adequate line for the output power.
7. Connect the forward RF probe connector at directional coupler to the DAP NL

connector at rear side of the Exciter using the coaxial cable labelled as DAP NL.
8. Connect the forward RF probe connector at directional coupler to the AUX DET
1 connector at rear side of the Exciter using the coaxial cable labelled as AUX
DET1.
9. Connect the reverse RF probe connector at directional coupler to the AUX DET
DET2.
interface at rear side of both Amplifiers using a connection bus cable 9-pin D-
sub.
page 75 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
In case of three amplifiers:

2. Connect the first -90o output connector at 3-way splitter to the RF IN connector at
rear side of the Amplifier 1 using the coaxial cable labelled as A1 RF IN.
3. Connect the second -90o output connector at 3-way splitter to the RF IN connector
at rear side of the Amplifier 2 using the coaxial cable labelled as A2 RF IN.

5. Interconnect the RF OUT of the three amplifiers using the 3-way hybrid coupler.
6. Connect each of the two LOAD connectors at 3-way hybrid coupler to the corre-
sponding DUMMY LOAD.
7. Connect the RF OUT connector at 3-way hybrid coupler to the RF input at direc-

DET1.
DET2.
interface at rear side of the three Amplifiers using a connection bus cable 9-pin
D-sub.
page 76 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
In case of four amplifiers:

2. Connect the first 0o output connector at 4-way splitter to the RF IN connector at

4. Connect the -180o output connector at 4-way splitter to the RF IN connector at

6. Interconnect the RF OUT of the four amplifiers using the 4-way hybrid coupler.
7. Connect each of the three LOAD connectors at 4-way hybrid coupler to the cor-
responding DUMMY LOAD.

DET1.
DET2.
interface at rear side of the four Amplifiers using a connection bus cable 9-pin
D-sub.
page 77 Ed 04
Technical Manual
Figure 3.1: Internal connection diagram for single drive in case of one amplifier.
DAP NL
ASI 1 IN
RF OUT TEST
ASI 2 IN
ASI 1 OUT
ASI 2 OUT
DAP L
page 78
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
DAP NL
HARMONIC
FILTER
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT
DAP OUT
Power A RF OUT RF IN RF OUT RF OUT RF
IP SOCKET1
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
RF OUT RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
OUTPUT
Ref. 854119XX Ref.854442XX
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
I/O
CTRL BUS CRTL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
GND GND
IEC13 AC5P
250V AC POWER AC POWER
250V
CTRL BUS
Connecting Cables
Installation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
Figure 3.2: Internal connection diagram for single drive in case of two coupled amplifiers.
AUX DET2
AUX DET1
RF OUT TEST
A2 RF IN
DAP OUT
Power IN 0º LOAD 50
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.854442XX
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN
page 79
ASI 1 OUT
2
ASI 2 OUT
CRTL BUS
DAP L
AUX DET1 GND

AC5P
250V AC POWER
AUX DET2
DAP NL
OUT
0º
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT IN SPLITTER
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT 2 WAY
Ref. 01450773
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
Ref. 854119XX OUT
-90º
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT RF OUT TEST
1PPS OUT
LOAD 50
I/O
LOAD 50
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
GND
DIRECTIONAL
Ref.01391806
IEC13
COUPLER
250V AC POWER
HARMONIC
A1 RF IN
FILTER
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
FORWARD
FORWARD
DAP OUT
Power IN -90º OUT A RF OUT RF IN RF OUT RF OUT RF IN RF OUT
RF
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
OUTPUT
Ref.854442XX
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
3dB
HYBRID COUPLER
Connecting Cables
Ref. 01391805
RF TEST OUTPUT
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
CRTL BUS
Installation
CTRL BUS
GND
AC5P
250V AC POWER
Ed 04
DAP NL
Technical Manual
Figure 3.3: Internal connection diagram for single drive in case of three coupled amplifiers.
AUX DET2
AUX DET1
AC5P
250V
RF OUT TEST
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
CTRL BUS
1
GND
AC5P
250V
page 80
RF OUT TEST
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
ASI 1 IN
Ref.85444211
A3 RF IN
ASI 2 IN
IN
-90º LOAD 50
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
LOAD 50
2
LOAD 50
DAP NL CTRL BUS
OUT
0º
IN
0º LOAD 50
LOCAL OUT
-90º A2 RF IN GND
COUPLER 3-WAY
REMOTE Ref. 85729701
IP SOCKET1
E RF OUT SPLITTER
IP SOCKET2 Exciter RF OUT
IN
4 WAY
Ref. 857312 OUT
-180º LOAD 50
HARMONIC FILTER
Ref. 85411901
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
FORWARD
FORWARD
ANTENNA
IN
-90º OUT RF OUT OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN RF OUT
10MHz IN
AC5P
RF
OUT
1PPS IN
-90º
250V OUTPUT
FORWARD
REFLECTED
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
I/O
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
A1 RF IN
LOAD 50
1+1 SWITCH
GND
IEC13
250V AC POWER
RF OUT TEST
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
Connecting Cables
CTRL BUS
3
GND
Installation
CTRL BUS
Ed 04
DAP NL
Connecting Cables
AUX DET2
AUX DET1
AC5P
250V
RF OUT TEST
A4 RF IN
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
CTRL BUS
4
GND
AC5P
250V
RF OUT TEST
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
ASI 1 IN
Ref.85444211
ASI 2 IN
IN
0º LOAD 50
DAP L
AUX DET1
LOAD 50
AUX DET2
LOAD 50
DAP NL CTRL BUS
OUT
0º
IN
-90º LOAD 50
LOCAL OUT
-90º A3 RF IN GND
REMOTE
IP SOCKET1
E RF OUT SPLITTER
IP SOCKET2 Exciter RF OUT
IN
4 WAY
Ref. 857312 OUT COUPLER 4-WAY
HARMONIC FILTER
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
-180º
Ref. 85411901
FORWARD
FORWARD
A2 RF IN IN
ANTENNA
-180º OUT RF OUT OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN RF OUT
10MHz IN RF
1PPS IN OUT AC5P
250V
OUTPUT
-90º
FORWARD
REFLECTED
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
I/O IN
CTRL BUS
-90º LOAD 50
INTERLOCK
LOAD 50
1+1 SWITCH
GND
IEC13
250V AC POWER
RF OUT TEST
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
AC5P
250V
CTRL BUS
2
GND
RF OUT TEST
A1 RF IN
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS
1
GND
DAP NL
Figure 3.4: Internal connection diagram for single drive in case of four coupled amplifiers.
3.2.3 Connecting internal cables for DD

Following instructions are needed to carry out the internal connections between the ex-
citer and the amplifier(s) in dual drive configurations:
In case of one amplifier:

1. Connect the RF OUT connector at rear side of the Exciter A to the RF IN 1 con-
nector at DD Switch using the coaxial cable labelled as E RF OUT A.
2. Connect the RF OUT connector at rear side of the Exciter B to the RF IN 2 con-
nector at DD Switch using the coaxial cable labelled as E RF OUT B.
3. Connect the RF OUT connector at DD Switch to the RF IN connector at rear side

of Amplifier.

connector at rear side of the Exciter A using the coaxial cable labelled as DAP NL.

connector at rear side of the Exciter B using the coaxial cable labelled as DAP NL.
6. Connect the CTRL BUS interfaces at rear side of the Exciter A, Exciter B and
Amplifier using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
7. Connect the 1+1 SWITCH interfaces at rear side of the Exciter A and Exciter
B and sub-D connector, 25 pin at DD switch using the DD connection cable
D-sub, 25-pin (figure 3.5).
page 81 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14 ACTUATOR DD B 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
ACTUATOR DD B 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15 3 16
3 16 4 GND 17
4 GND 17 5 18
GND 5 18 6 19
6 19 GND 7 20
GND 7 20 8 21
8 21 9 22
9 22 10 ACTUATOR DD A 23
GND 10 ACTUATOR DD A 23 11 24
11 24 12 25
12 25 ACTUATOR (C) 13
ACTUATOR (C) 13
D-Sub male, 25-pin.

D-Sub female, 25-pin.
DD SWITCH EXCITER A
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14
ACTUATOR DD B 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
3 16
4 GND 17
5 18
6 19
GND 7 20
8 21
1 9 22
2 10 ACTUATOR DD A 23
3 11 24
INTERLOCK DD (C) 4 12 25
5 ACTUATOR (C) 13
6
7
INTERLOCK DD (NO) 8
I 9
1
D-Sub male, 25-pin.
9
EXCITER B
EXTERNAL
INTERLOCKS
Figure 3.5: Connection cable D-sub for control of dual drive switch.
In case of two amplifiers:

3. Connect the RF OUT connector at DD Switch to the RF IN connector at 2-way

splitter using the coaxial cable labelled as E RF OUT.

6. Interconnect the RF OUT of both amplifiers using the 3dB hybrid coupler.
7. Connect the LOAD connector at 3dB hybrid coupler to the DUMMY LOAD.
8. Connect the RF OUT connector at 3dB hybrid coupler to the RF input at direc-

connector at rear side of the Exciter A using the coaxial cable labelled as DAP NL
A.
connector at rear side of the Exciter B using the coaxial cable labelled as DAP NL
B.
page 82 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
1 connector at rear side of the Exciter A using the coaxial cable labelled as AUX
DET1 A.
1 connector at rear side of the Exciter B using the coaxial cable labelled as AUX
DET1 B.
DET2 A.
DET2 B.
15. Connect the CTRL BUS interfaces at rear side of the Exciter A, Exciter B and
both amplifiers using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
page 83 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
In case of three amplifiers:


4. Connect the first -90o output connector at 3-way splitter to the RF IN connector at

7. Interconnect the RF OUT of the three amplifiers using the 3-way hybrid coupler.
8. Connect each of the two LOAD connectors at 3-way hybrid coupler to the corre-
sponding DUMMY LOAD.
A.
B.
DET1 A.
DET1 B.
DET2 A.
DET2 B.
16. Connect the CTRL BUS interfaces at rear side of the Exciter A, Exciter B and the
three amplifiers using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
page 84 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
In case of four amplifiers:

4. Connect the first 0o output connector at 4-way splitter to the RF IN connector at
6. Connect the -180o output connector at 4-way splitter to the RF IN connector at
8. Interconnect the RF OUT of the four amplifiers using the 4-way hybrid coupler.
9. Connect each of the three LOAD connectors at 4-way hybrid coupler to the cor-
responding DUMMY LOAD.
A.
B.
DET1 A.
DET1 B.
DET2 A.
DET2 B.
17. Connect the CTRL BUS interfaces at rear side of the Exciter A, Exciter B and the
four amplifiers using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
page 85 Ed 04
Technical Manual
DAP NL A
Figure 3.6: Internal connection diagram for dual drive in case of one amplifier.
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
DAP NL
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT A
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
Ref. 854119XX
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
RF OUT TEST
1PPS OUT
page 86
I/O
LOAD 50
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
GND
IEC13
250V AC POWER
RF IN 1
HARMONIC
FILTER
REFLECTED
FORWARD
DD
DD SWITCH
SWITCH
E RF OUT
DAP OUT
Power A RF OUT
CRTL
RF OUT
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
RF IN RF OUT RF OUT RF IN RF OUT
RF
OUTPUT
Ref.854442XX
FORWARD
REFLECTED
RF IN 2
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN
LOAD 50
DAP L
CRTL BUS
1
AUX DET1 GND
AC5P
AUX DET2 250V AC POWER
DAP NL
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT B
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
Ref. 854119XX
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
I/O
Connecting Cables
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
GND
IEC13
250V AC POWER
Installation
DAP NL B
CTRL BUS
Ed 04
Technical Manual
Figure 3.7: Internal connection diagram for dual drive in case of two coupled amplifiers.
AUX DET1 A
AUX DET2 A
DAP NL A
ASI 1 IN
RF OUT TEST
ASI 2 IN
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
DAP NL
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT A A2 RF IN
DAP OUT
Power IN 0º LOAD 50
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter Ref.854442XX

Ref. 854119XX
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
page 87
I/O
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
A CRTL BUS
2
GND GND
IEC13 AC5P
250V AC POWER 250V AC POWER
OUT
RF IN 1 0º
DD
SWITCH
DD SWITCH CRTL E RF OUT IN SPLITTER
RF OUT
2 WAY
Ref. 01450773
OUT
RF IN 2 -90º
ASI 1 IN
RF OUT TEST
ASI 2 IN
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
DAP NL
HARMONIC
A1 RF IN
FILTER
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
FORWARD
FORWARD
FORWARD
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT B
DAP OUT
Power IN -90º OUT A RF OUT
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
RF IN RF OUT RF OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN RF OUT
RF
Exciter OUTPUT
IP SOCKET2
Ref.854442XX
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
Ref. 854119XX 3dB
HYBRID COUPLER
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
I/O
B 1
Connecting Cables
CTRL BUS CRTL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
GND GND
IEC13 AC5P
250V AC POWER 250V AC POWER
DAP NL B
AUX DET2 B
Installation
AUX DET1 B
CTRL BUS
Ed 04
Technical Manual
Figure 3.8: Internal connection diagram for dual drive in case of three coupled amplifiers.
DAP NL A
AUX DET2 A
AUX DET1 A
AC5P
250V
RF OUT TEST
A1 RF IN
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN
CTRL BUS
1
GND
AC5P
250V
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
DAP NL
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT A
page 88
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
Ref. 854119XX DAP OUT
Power
RF OUT TEST
GNSS ANT
10MHz IN
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
1PPS IN Ref.85444211
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
I/O IN
LOAD 50
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
A 0º
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
GND
LOAD 50
2
IEC13
250V AC POWER CTRL BUS
OUT
DD SWITCH 0º
IN
Ref. 85451021 -90º LOAD 50
RF IN 1 OUT
-90º A2 RF IN GND
DD SWITCH CTRL
RF OUT E RF OUT IN SPLITTER
4 WAY
HARMONIC FILTER
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
FORWARD
-180º
FORWARD
FORWARD
A3 RF IN IN
-180º OUT RF OUT OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN
RF OUT
RF IN 2 RF
OUT AC5P OUTPUT
250V
-90º
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN
IN
-90º LOAD 50
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
RF OUT TEST
DAP NL
DAP OUT
Power
LOCAL
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
REMOTE
E RF OUT B Ref.85444211
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
Ref. 854119XX
GNSS ANT
AC5P
250V
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
CTRL BUS
3
I/O
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
B GND
GND
IEC13
AC POWER RF OUT TEST
Power
250V DAP OUT
A4 RF IN
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
Connecting Cables
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS
4
GND
AUX DET1 B
Installation
AUX DET2 B
DAP NL B
Ed 04
Connecting Cables
DAP NL A
AUX DET2 A
AUX DET1 A
AC5P
250V
RF OUT TEST
A4 RF IN
DAP OUT
Power
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN / RF IN
CTRL BUS
4
GND
AC5P
250V
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
DAP NL
LOCAL
REMOTE
E RF OUT A
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
RF OUT TEST
GNSS ANT
DAP OUT
Power
10MHz IN
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
1PPS IN Ref.85444211
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
I/O IN
LOAD 50
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
A 0º
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
GND
LOAD 50
IEC13
250V AC POWER
RF IN 1
DD SWITCH
Ref. 85451021
OUT
0º
OUT
CTRL BUS
3 IN
-90º LOAD 50
-90º A3 RF IN GND
DD SWITCH CTRL
RF OUT E RF OUT IN SPLITTER
4 WAY
HARMONIC FILTER
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
REFLECTED
FORWARD
-180º
FORWARD
FORWARD
A2 RF IN IN
-180º OUT RF OUT OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN RF OUT RF IN
RF OUT
RF IN 2 RF
OUT AC5P OUTPUT
250V
-90º
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
FORWARD
REFLECTED
ASI 1 IN
ASI 2 IN / RF IN
IN
-90º LOAD 50
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
LOAD 50
DAP L
AUX DET1
AUX DET2
RF OUT TEST
DAP NL
DAP OUT
Power
LOCAL
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
REMOTE
E RF OUT B Ref.85444211
IP SOCKET1 RF OUT
IP SOCKET2 Exciter
GNSS ANT
AC5P
250V
10MHz IN
1PPS IN
10MHz OUT
1PPS OUT
CTRL BUS
2
I/O
CTRL BUS
INTERLOCK
1+1 SWITCH
B GND
GND
IEC13
AC POWER RF OUT TEST
Power
250V DAP OUT
A1 RF IN
RF IN
Amplifier RF OUT
Ref.85444211
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS 1
GND
AUX DET1 B
AUX DET2 B
DAP NL B
Figure 3.9: Internal connection diagram for dual drive in case of four coupled amplifiers.
3.2.4 Connecting internal cables for 1+1

Following instructions are needed to carry out the 1+1 connections that are detailed at
figure 2.29:
1. Connect the RF OUT connector (RF power output) at rear side of the Transmitter
A to the RF connector 1 at coaxial switch.
B to the RF connector 3 at coaxial switch.
3. Connect an adequate dummy load to the RF connector 4 at coaxial switch.
4. Connect the CRTL bus interfaces at rear side of the Transmitter A and Transmit-
ter B using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
5. Connect the 1+1 SWITCH interfaces at rear side of the Transmitter A and Trans-
mitter B and sub-D connector at coaxial switch using the 1+1 connection cable
D-sub (figure 3.10 or figure 3.11 according to the coaxial switch model).
page 89 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
POS I (NC) 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14

POS I (C) 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
POS I (NO) 3 INTERLOCK (NC) 16 3 16
POS I (NO) 4 GND 17 POS I (NO) 4 GND 17
POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18 POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18
POS I (NC) 6 19 6 19
GND 7 VDC 20 GND 7 VDC 20
POS II (NC) 8 ACTUATOR B 21 8 ACTUATOR B 21
POS II (C) 9 POS II (NC) 22 POS II (C) 9 22
POS II (NO) 10 POS II (C) 23 POS II (NO) 10 23
INTERLOCK (NO) 11 POS II (NO) 24 11 24
INTERLOCK (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NC) 25 12 25
ACTUATOR (C) 13 ACTUATOR (C) 13
D-Sub male, 25-pin.

COAXIAL SWITCH TX A
2-WAY (DPDT)
SPINNER
BN 512690
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14
2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
3 16
POS I (NO) 4 GND 17
POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18
6 19
1 GND 7 VDC 20
2 8 ACTUATOR B 21
3 POS II (C) 9 22
INTERLOCK ANTENNA (C) 4 POS II (NO) 10 23
INTERLOCK LOAD(C) 5 11 24
6 12 25
7 ACTUATOR (C) 13
INTERLOCK ANTENNA (NO) 8
INTERLOCK LOAD (NO) 9
D-Sub male, 25-pin.

9
TX B
EXTERNAL
INTERLOCKS
Figure 3.10: Connection cable D-sub for control of 1+1 switch (7/16"), including antenna
and/or dummy load interlock loops.
page 90 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
J2 GND 1
VAC 2
3 2 1
GND 3 187..264VAC
VAC 4
5
50/60Hz
5 4
5-poles AC female
COAXIAL SWITCH
2-WAY (DPDT)
SPINNER 7/8''
BN 512698
VDC 1 ACTUATOR POS II 14 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14

VDC 2 ACTUATOR POS I 15 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
ACTUATOR (C) 3 16 3 16
GND 4 POS II (NC) 17 POS I (NO) 4 GND 17
POS I (NO) 5 POS II (C) 18 POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18
POS I (C) 6 POS II (NO) 19 6 19
7 20 GND 7 VDC 20
POS I (NO) 8 INTERLOCK (C) 21 8 ACTUATOR B 21
POS I (C) 9 INTERLOCK (NO) 22 POS II (C) 9 22
POS I (NC) 10 23 POS II (NO) 10 23
11 INTERLOCK (C) 24 11 24
POS II (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NO) 25 12 25
POS II (NO) 13 ACTUATOR (C) 13
D-Sub male, 25-pin.

J1
TX A
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14
2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
3 16
POS I (NO) 4 GND 17
POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18
6 19
1 GND 7 VDC 20
2 8 ACTUATOR B 21
3 POS II (C) 9 22
INTERLOCK ANTENNA (C) 4 POS II (NO) 10 23
INTERLOCK LOAD(C) 5 11 24
6 12 25
7 ACTUATOR (C) 13
INTERLOCK ANTENNA (NO) 8
INTERLOCK LOAD (NO) 9
D-Sub male, 25-pin.

9
TX B
EXTERNAL
INTERLOCKS
Figure 3.11: Connection cable D-sub for control of 1+1 switch (7/8"), including antenna
and/or dummy load interlock loops.
page 91 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
3.2.5 Connecting internal cables for N+1

Following instructions are needed to carry out the N+1 connections that are detailed at
figure 3.12:
1. Connect the RF OUT connector (RF power output) at rear side of each main trans-
mitter A to the RF connector 1 at corresponding coaxial switch.
B to the RF connector 3 at coaxial switch 1.
3. Connect the RF connector 4 at each coaxial switch with the RF connector 3 of

next coaxial switch up to N.
4. Connect an adequate dummy load to the RF connector 4 at the N coaxial switch.
5. Connect the CRTL bus interfaces at rear side of all Transmitters using a connec-
tion cable 9-pin D-sub.
6. Connect the 1+1 SWITCH interfaces at rear side of Transmitters A and Trans-
mitter B and sub-D connectors at coaxial switches using the N+1 connection
cable D-sub (figure ??).
CTRL BUS
RF OUT
#1
Band-pass Filter
2 RF switch 1
RF OUT 1 3
#2
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
2
RF OUT 1 3
...
N+1 SWITCH CTRL

#N
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
2
RF OUT 1 3
Dummy load
page 92 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
EXCITER
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14
2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
3 16
4 GND 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
B 10
11
12
13
23
24
25
D-Sub male, 25-pin.
POS I (NC) 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14

EXCITER
POS I (C) 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
POS I (NO) 3 INTERLOCK (NC) 16 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14
POS I (NO) 4 GND 17 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18 3 16
POS I (NC) 6 19 POS I (NO) 4 GND 17
GND 7 VDC 20 POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18
POS II (NC) 8 ACTUATOR B 21 6 19
POS II (C) 9 POS II (NC) 22 GND 7 VDC 20
POS II (NO) 10
INTERLOCK (NO) 11
INTERLOCK (C) 12
ACTUATOR (C) 13
POS II (C) 23
POS II (NO) 24
INTERLOCK (NC) 25 R#1 A1
8
POS II (C) 9
POS II (NO) 10
11
12
ACTUATOR B 21
22
23
24
25
ACTUATOR (C) 13

D-Sub male, 25-pin.
COAXIAL SWITCH COAXIAL SWITCH
2-WAY (DPDT) 2-WAY (DPDT)
SPINNER N SPINNER 7/16''
BN 754066C0002 BN 512690
EXCITER
R#2
POS II (NO) 10 POS II (C) 23 8 ACTUATOR B 21
A2
INTERLOCK (NO) 11 POS II (NO) 24 POS II (C) 9 22
INTERLOCK (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NC) 25 POS II (NO) 10 23
ACTUATOR (C) 13 11 24
12 25
ACTUATOR (C) 13

D-Sub male, 25-pin.
BN 754066C0002 BN 512690
...
EXCITER
R#n
POS II (NO) 10 POS II (C) 23 8 ACTUATOR B 21
An
INTERLOCK (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NC) 25 POS II (NO) 10 23
ACTUATOR (C) 13 11 24
12 25
ACTUATOR (C) 13

D-Sub male, 25-pin.
BN 754066C0002 BN 512690
Figure 3.13: Connection cable for control of coaxial switches of N+1 system.
page 93 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
3.2.6 Connecting the antenna system
CAUTION:
Risk of RF burns
Before connecting the antenna cable, make sure that the device cannot produce any
RF at the output.
1. Connect the antenna system (band-pass filter) to the RF OUT connector (RF power
output).
3.2.7 Connecting INTERLOCK loop

1. Connect the external interlock system to the INTERLOCK pins in INTERLOCK
connector at rear side of the exciter (see figure 2.12) or 1+1 SWITCH connector
at rear side of the exciter (see detailed pinout at figure 2.14). In case of 1+1 con-
figuration, the interlock pins (for the safety loop from antenna and load) can be
included into the sub-D connection from the coaxial switch (see detailed pinout
at figures 3.10 or 3.11).
In case of external interlock loop devices are not available, establish the safety interlock
loop by connecting the short-circuit (dummy plug) for the interlock pins at INTERLOCK
connector (see figure 2.12) or 1+1 SWITCH connector (see detailed pinout at figure 2.14)
at rear side of the exciter.
3.2.8 Notes on the AC Power Connection

Prior to connect the AC power cables, please make sure that the AC source is OFF. You
should therefore make sure that the connector is within reach and easily accessible at all
times (length of connecting cables approx. 2 m).
The AC power connectors are located on the rear panel of the device.
For AC input of amplifiers, please see detailed pinout of figure 2.21 in order to connect
the desired line(s).
Please heed the connection data found in the section 2.12.
page 94 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
3.2.9 GNSS antenna installation (HW accessory)

GNSS antenna post mount kit
Antenna and post mounting kit is not normally included with the device. Must be order as
an accessory.
The post mounting kit allows you to mount the GNSS antenna onto a vertical or horizontal
post. Follow these steps to correctly assemble the kit:
1. Clamp the antenna (2) on the post bracket (1).
2. Attach the antenna (2) to the post bracket (1) with the four screws (3).
3. Insert the cable socket (4) into the antenna socket.
4. Insert the plastic cable tie (5).
5. Wind the heat shrink sleeve around the connector adapter.
6. Rotate the post clamp (6) to obtain vertical and horizontal mounting.
7. Attach the post bracket (1) to the post with the post clamp (6), use the two screws
(7), nuts and lock washers.
Antenna Installation
This procedure describes the main steps of a successful antenna installation:
• Where to install the antenna?
• How to evaluate the signal attenuation due to cables between the antenna and the
GNSS Timing Receiver?
• How to choose cable type?
Where to Install the Antenna?
The antenna must be located in place with direct view of GPS or GLONASS satellites.
Usually the best place is on the roof with no important masks due to other buildings for
page 95 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
instance. It is important to avoid proximity with high power transmitter which could radi-
ate energy at L1 frequency (1 575.42 ± 1.023 MHz). Usually the exact coordinates of
antenna is unknown and the GNSS Timing Receiver will determinate this location auto-
matically. In that nominal case a proper sky visibility is required: a vertical observation
cone in sky open view of a semi-angle higher or equal to 65◦ - optimum at 85◦ - is rec-
ommended. See figure below.
How to Evaluate the Signal Attenuation?
Cables are required to connect antenna to GNSS Timing Receiver. Two types of cables
are mostly used. The cable attenuation is proportional to length. Typical attenuations at
1575 MHz are:
Cable type RG58 RG213

Attenuation 0.9 dB/m 0.35 dB/m
Once the cable path is defined between antenna and GNSS Timing Receiver, estimate
the attenuation based on cable lengths. Typical attenuation based on standard cable
lengths (including 0.5 dB for connectors):
Cable type RG58 attenuation RG213 attenuation

10m 9.5dB 4dB
25m 23dB 9.5dB
50m No cable 18 dB
100m No cable 35.5 dB
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended protecting the GNSS Timing Receiver with light-
ning protection. This protection must be installed at the cable entrance into the building
with a proper earth/ground connection The Lightning Protection attenuation is typically 1
dB.
How to Choose Cable Type?
To ensure correct signal reception, the overall system of antenna / cable / protection (and
line amplifier / splitter if used) requires a relative gain which must be higher than 15dB
and preferably less than 30 dB to avoid signal saturation.
The gain at the receiver is the sum of:
• Antenna gain (G1)
• Line amplifier gain if used (G2)
• Lightening protection loss (G3)
page 96 Ed 04
Connecting Cables
• Cable losses (G4)
• N-N adapter loss if used (G5 = - 0.5 dB).
Then global gain of installation must be
15 dB <=G1 + G2 + G3 + G4 + G5 <=30 dB
The recommended maximum bent radius is 100 mm (RG213) and 20 mm (RG58).
page 97 Ed 04
Technical Manual Commissioning
4 Commissioning
4.1 Putting into operation

4.1.1 Connecting to the AC Power Supply
The AC power connectors are located on the rear panel of the device.
CAUTION:
Risk of injuries
Prior to switching on the equipment, please make sure that the following conditions
are met:
• The equipment is in place and tightly screwed on.
• Signal levels at the inputs are within specified limits.
• Output signals are correctly connected and not overloaded.
Any non–compliance of the described conditions may endanger people and may
cause damage to the equipment.
1. Turn on the AC source providing to the device into position ON.

The system boots up and a presentation screen with the logo in the frontal display
is shown during the process. The booting process takes less than a minute and is
complete once the graphical overview menu appears on the front display.
page 98 Ed 04
Putting into operation
4.1.2 1+1 (Passive reserve) configuration
NOTE:
Be sure that the 1+1 connections have been carried out as is indicated in section
3.2.4. In order to prevent automatically switching, 1+1 can be pre-configured at
factory into manual switching mode or even disabled.
1. At Transmitter A, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights up (or-
ange blinking).
The Transmitter A is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see
section 5.2) or via Web application (see section 5.3).
2. Follow the steps of single configuration procedure (section 4.1.5).
3. Set parameter Type of redundancy to 1+1 [Device A] at System > Service

> Install HW / SW > Install HW menu.
4. At Transmitter B, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights up (or-
ange blinking).
The Transmitter B is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see
6. Set parameter Type of redundancy to 1+1 [Device B] at System > Service

7. Check that parameter Control status is OK at Setup > Redundancy menu.

Now both transmitters are correctly connected through the control bus, so
any change in the 1+1 configuration parameters is automatically updated in
both transmitters at the same time.
8. Set the Redundant system IP address (at Setup > Redundancy menu) for the
remote control of the 1 + 1 system (including both transmitters) as one device.
9. Configure the switching mode into automatic mode (at Setup > Redundancy
menu).
10. Check that the Device A: Status is ANTENNA at Setup > Redundancy menu.
11. Check that the Device B: Status is LOAD: Ready at Setup > Redundancy menu.
(It might be necessary to wait for the result of the first automatic verification).
12. Press, in both devices, the LOCAL key so that the associated LED is off.
The devices are now in remote mode.
page 99 Ed 04
4.1.3 N+1 configuration
NOTE:
Be sure that the N+1 connections have been carried out as is indicated in section
3.2.5. In order to prevent automatically switching, N+1 can be pre-configured at
1. At each Transmitter An, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights
up (orange blinking).
The Transmitter is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see
2. Follow the steps of single configuration procedure (section 4.1.5 for transmitters/re-
transmitter).
3. Set parameter Type of redundancy to N+1 [An] at System > Service > Install
HW / SW > Install HW menu.
ange blinking).
5. Set parameter Type of redundancy to N+1 [B] at System > Service > Install
6. Check that parameter Control status is OK at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu.
7. Set the N value with the number of main transmitters of the N+1 system (at Setup
> Redundancy > Configuration menu).
8. Set the N+1 system IP address (at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu) for the remote control of the N+1 system using an unique IP address.
9. Save the configuration of each Transmitter A by pressing the corresponding syn-

chronize button at Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization menu.
10. Configure the N+1 switching mode into automatic mode (at Setup > Redundancy
> Configuration menu).
11. Check that the Device An: Status is ANTENNA at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu.
12. Check that the Device B: Status is LOAD: Ready at Setup > Redundancy >
Configuration menu. (It might be necessary to wait for the result of the first
automatic verification).
13. Press, in all devices, the LOCAL key so that the associated LED is off.
page 100 Ed 04
4.1.4 DD (Dual Drive) configuration
NOTE:
Be sure that the dual drive connections have been carried out as is indicated in
section 2.8. In order to prevent automatically switching, DD is pre-configured at
1. At Exciter A, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights up (orange
blinking).
The Exciter A is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see section
5.2) or via Web application (see section 5.3).
3. Set parameter Type of redundancy to DD [Exciter A] at System > Service

4. At Exciter B, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights up (orange
blinking).
The Exciter B is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see section
6. Set parameter Type of redundancy to DD [Exciter B] at System > Service

7. Check that parameter Control status is OK at Setup > Redundancy menu.

Now both exciters are correctly connected through the control bus, so any
change in the DD configuration parameters is automatically updated in both
exciters at the same time.
8. Set the Redundant system IP address (at Setup > Redundancy menu) for the
remote control of the DD system (including both exciters) as one device.
9. Configure the switching mode into automatic mode (at Setup > Redundancy
menu).
10. Check that the Device A: Status is ANTENNA at Setup > Redundancy menu.
11. Check that the Device B: Status is LOAD: Ready at Setup > Redundancy menu.
page 101 Ed 04
4.1.5 Single configuration for Transmitters
NOTE:
For coupling amplifiers.
Be sure that the single drive connections have been carried out as is indicated in
section 3.2.2.
The number of amplifier stages installed must be according with the device config-
uration. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu
and check that the parameter Number of amplifier stages corresponds to the
number of amplifier stages installed.
The control addressing of each amplifier stage must be pre-configured in order
to prevent communication problems. If not, reset the control address as is detailed
in section 2.3.2 of all amplifiers, disconnect the CTRL BUS interface at rear side
of all amplifiers, connect the CTRL BUS interface and assign the corresponding
address as detailed in section 2.3.2 for each amplifier stage one by one.
1. Press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights up (orange blinking).
The device is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see section
2. Check the selected input (at Setup > Input menu). Enable the desired inputs (IP
socket 1, IP socket 2, ASI 1 and ASI 2) and then select the desired input switching
mode (manual or automatic).
3. Check the selected standard of the modulator (parameter Standard at Setup >
Exciter > Modulator > General menu).
4. Set the modulation parameters. Select (at Setup > Exciter > Modulator >
System menu) the Input mode:
• DVB-T. No input mode selection needed. Single TS input in any case.

• DVB-T2. A mode for a single TS input or B mode for T2MI input. In B mode,
please set the same T2MI PID of the input flow.
• ISDB-T. TS for a single TS input or BTS for a Broadcast TS input.
• ATSC 1.0. No input mode selection needed.
NOTE: • For a more detailed description of the standard modulation parameters, please
refer to operation chapter.
5. Check the network type (at Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network menu).
In case of SFN operation, check (at Setup > Reference > Reference source
menu) that the Reference parameter is selected as you desire.
6. Check the output central frequency at main screen (or at Setup > Exciter > RF
output > RF configuration menu).
page 102 Ed 04
7. Check the INTERLOCK connections detailed in 3.2.7 section.
8. Press the RF ON/OFF key so that the associated LED lights up (green).
RF signal is not mute now, so the transmitter is ready for transmitting power.
9. Check the output power at main screen (or at Setup > Exciter > Amplifier >
Configuration menu).
10. Check, at the exciter, that frontal LED indicators INPUT and RF OUTPUT keep
green and LED indicator ALARMS keeps off.
11. Check, at the amplifier, that frontal LED indicators keep green.
12. Connect the measurement instrument to the RF OUT TEST connector at the front
panel to check signal quality.
13. Check the device date and time (at System > General menu).
14. At the EventLog menu, delete all entries using the Clean icon button.
15. Press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED is off.
The device is now in remote mode.
page 103 Ed 04
Technical Manual Operation
5 Operation
5.1 Introduction
Operation of the equipment can be done in the following ways:
• Local operation via front display and keys.
• Local and remote operation via web interface.
5.1.1 Local and remote operation

The equipment has two modes of operation, local and remote.
With the instrument in local mode, operation can be done via front display and keys or via
web GUI using local IP address. Remote operation is restricted to monitoring functions.
With the instrument in remote mode, operation can be done via Web GUI using remote
IP address. Local operation is restricted to monitoring functions.
Switching between local and remote operation can be done with the front panel LOCAL
key (and the associated LED) or via GUI (web or front display).
In case of device in local mode, after a configurable time (at System > General
menu) without any operation, the device changes into remote mode automatically
in order to avoid an accidentally blocking of remote access.
page 104 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
5.2 Operation via front display and keys

menu.
To configure the device into local operation mode, press the LOCAL key. The associated
LED lights up (orange blinking).
5.2.1 Main menu overview

5.2.1.1 Transmitter overview
Figure 5.2: Transmitter overview.
• 1) Input selection. The assignment for each input (from 1 to 4) is detailed at Setup
> Input > Input switching menu.
The status of each input is indicated with the corresponding link . A drawing
line indicates that the signal is correctly detected.
The seamless status is indicated with an S at the input box and a dot (.) at each
input with seamless switching ready. For example, following image indicates seam-
less ready for inputs 3 and 4:
• 2) Modulation standard. DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T or ATSC 1.
page 105 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
• 3) Network mode. SFN or MFN.
In case of PRBS test mode is enable, instead of the network type, PRBS is shown.
In case of a mute is working, instead of the modulation standard and the network
type, MUTED is shown.
In case of RF OFF, instead of the standard and the network type, RF OFF is shown.
In case of an interlock loop is open, ITK R, ITK 1 or ITK 2 is shown instead of the
standard and the network type.
• 4) Exciter block. In case of no signal at the exciter output, the drawing line at the
output of this block is not printed.
• 5) Power amplifier block. Indicates the forward and the reverse power, both in watts
and graphically. In case of configuring a power offset 6=0 for the forward power,
symbol + or - is added to the forward power indication (W+ for positive values or W-
for negative values).
• 6) Device output. In case of no signal at the power amplifier output, the drawing
line to the antenna and even the antenna is not printed.
• 7) Output RF frequency.
• 8) Ethernet link status indicating for each of the 4 Ethernet ports (viewing the device
from the rear to the front) if link is up (full) or down (empty). For example, icon
indicates that GbE1 is link up, GbE2 and GbE3 are link down and GbE4 is disabled.
• 9) Synchronization module status.
GNSS receiver mode OCXO mode
Locked and synchronized Locked and synchronized
In holdover mode In holdover mode (external

(antenna detected) 1PPS not detected)
(antenna not detected). 1PPS detected).
Unlocked Unlocked (external
(antenna detected). 1PPS detected).
(antenna not detected). 1PPS not detected).
• 10) Micro SD card. In case of a micro SD card is detected, symbol is shown.
• 11) Device name.
• 12) IP address (local or remote depending on the mode) and the device time are
swapped each 4 seconds. Icon is displayed in case of device time is syn-
chronized with the built-in GNSS receiver. Icon is displayed in case of device
page 106 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
time is synchronized with a NTP server. In case of not synchronized source, sym-
bol ? is shown at right side of the NTP or GNSS icon (for example, for NTP
not synchronized).
• 13) Current alarm status. In case of an alarm is set, symbol is shown.
• 14) EventLog. In case of new entries at EventLog, symbol ( E for new

events and A for new alarms) is shown.
5.2.1.2 Dual drive redundancy overview

When the dual drive redundancy is enabled, an overview menu with the DD status is
overlaid on the main overview menu.
Figure 5.3: DD redundancy overview (Exciter A).
• 1),2) Exciter (A/B) redundancy status:
– Ready. Exciter ready for an automatic switchover if needed.

– Not Ready. Exciter is not ready for an automatic switchover.
– Power off. Transmitter Power supply is off.
– Switc. Max / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready because maximun number
of switching per day that are allowed have been reached.
– Manual. Manual switching mode.
– Error. Communication, SW or unknown error.
Symbol at the signal path indicates that the RF signal is not present. ITK
indicates that an interlock loop is open.
• 3) dual drive switch status. It indicates current switching status: towards ampli-
fier/antenna, towards load or unknown ( ).
• 4) Amplifier / Antenna.
• 5) Load.
• 6) Scroll. It indicates that scroll is available between two main overview screens.
The empty arrow indicates the available direction for scroll.
• 7) DD label. It indicates that the DD redundancy performance is enabled.
• 8), 9) ,10), 11), 12), 13) and 14) have the same meaning as in single drive overview.
page 107 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
5.2.1.3 1+1/N+1 redundancy overview
When the 1+1 redundancy is enabled, an overview menu with the 1+1 status is overlaid
on the main overview menu.
Figure 5.4: 1+1 redundancy overview (Transmitter A).
• 1),2) Transmitter (A/B) redundancy status:
– Ready. Transmitter ready for an automatic switchover if needed.

– Verifying / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
because is performing an automatic verification.
– Verif. NOK / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
because the result of last automatic verification was not successful.
– Verif. OK / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
although the result of last automatic verification was successful. The trans-
mitter is able to monitoring continuously the status of the device even out of
the verification process, so although the last verification was successful the
device could be not ready.
– No Verif. / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
because first automatic verification was not performed.
indicates that an interlock loop is open.
• 3) Coaxial switch status. It indicates current switching status: towards antenna,
towards load or unknown ( ).
• 4) Antenna.
• 5) Load.
• 7) 1+1 or N+1 label. It indicates that the 1+1 or N+1 redundancy performance is
enabled.
page 108 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
5.2.2 Menu keys
Figure 5.5: Frontal keys.
Key Description
5.2.3 Menus navigation

From overview screen is possible to access to menus navigation by pressing any cursor
or OK key.
Navigation can be done through a menu tree or through a parameter menu:
Menu tree view
Figure 5.6: Menu tree view.
• 1) Menu path.
• 2) Selected lower-level menu.
• 3) Lower-level menu.
page 109 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
• 4) Scroll bar.
Use the cursor key or BACK key to back to previous menu.
Use the cursor keys to select a lower-level menu path or a parameter menu and
enter with cursor key .
Parameter menu view
Figure 5.7: Parameter menu view.
• 1) Title.
• 2) Parameter and 3) value.
• 4) Selected parameter and 5) selected value. In case of a non-editable value, the
selection box does not appear.
Use the cursor keys to select a parameter and enter into the editing mode with cur-
sor key .
Figure 5.8: Editing mode.
Into the editing mode 1), editing cursor is indicated with the flashing of the character. Use
the cursor keys to edit the parameter and the OK key to exit of the editing mode.
The icon 2) at the right corner of the screen indicates that there are changes pending
for applying.
Once all the desired changes are done in the parameters of the menu, press the OK key,
and answer the question in order to apply or not all changes.
page 110 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
Use the cursor key or BACK key to back to previous menu. In case of pending changes
a question screen let us to maintain or discard the changes.
Menu Status view

An specific menu is used for displaying the status menu. The information shown at this
menu is the current status of the predefined alarms listed and detailed at section 5.5.3.
Figure 5.9: Menu status view.
For each alarm, possible statuses are:
• OFF ( ): The alarm is not triggered.
• ON ( ): The alarm is triggered.
• NOT APPLY ( ): The alarm does not apply for the current device configura-
tion.
Icon indicates that current alarm is a group containing more alarms under. For ac-
cessing to this submenu, use the cursor keys to select the desired submenu and
enter into the submenu with cursor key .
Menu EvenLog view

An specific menu is used for displaying the EvenLog menu. See section 5.5.4 for more
information.
Figure 5.10: Menu EvenLog.
page 111 Ed 04
Operation via front
display and keys
EvenLog menu is composed by two options, one of them allows you to enter into the Log
viewer for checking the information of the all log entries and the other one allows you to
performance an operation with eventlog from the possible options:
• Clean log. Clean all entries.
• Mark as read. Mark as read all the old entries in order to notice the new alarms
without having to clean the previous entries.
• -. No option selected.
Figure 5.11: Menu EvenLog > Log viewer.
The information displayed at EvenLog > Log viewer screen is divided into following
fields:
• 1) Timestamp with date and hour (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss) of the entry.
• 2) Index: Index of the current entry and total number of entries.
• 3) Type of entry: event (Information) or alarm (Alarm) indicating if the alarm is

triggered (ON) or not (OFF).
• 4) Read status of the entry: Read or Unread.
• 5) Id: Unique identifier of the alarm or event.
• 6) Description of the alarm or event.
• 7) Extra description about the entry for a more detailed information.
page 112 Ed 04
Operation via Web GUI
5.3 Operation via Web GUI

Local or remote operation can be done through the Web GUI. The intuitive and respon-
sive design of the web interface based on HTLM5 allows the operation of the equipment
using a PC, laptop or mobile devices.
For local operation use the local IP address of the device. For remote operation use the
remote IP address of the device.
5.3.1 Connecting Ethernet interface

To allow the device to be put into operation more conveniently at the installation location,
a PC/laptop can be connected via the Ethernet interface.
It is recommended the use of an RJ-45 cable which complies with the CAT 5 or CAT 6
specification.
Section 2.2.2.3 detailed the Ethernet configuration.
The IP address of the Ethernet interface that is used in the device must be in the IP sub-
net of the PC or the remote monitoring network. You can configure the network address
of the PC or, alternatively, change the IP address of the device.
In any case it is possible to access to the address data needed for communication via the
frontal display and keys.
1. On the display, select the System > Network interfaces menu.
2. Check the desired IP address. Remote IP address for remote control (factory de-
fault 192.168.0.100) or Local IP address for local control (factory default 192.168.1.1).
NOTE:
Local IP interface is only up if device is set into local mode.
3. Configure the network address of the PC with an IP address in the same subnet
(for example, for Local IP address = 192.168.1.1 , configure the network address
of your PC to 192.168.1.10) and subnet mask = 255.255.255.000.
4. Connect the network interface of the PC to Ethernet port (GbE x with x=1,2,3,4) on
the rear side of the device (see section 2.2.2.3 for more details).
page 113 Ed 04
5.3.2 Log on via web browser

1. Log on to web GUI using the previously connected PC (see the chapter 5.3.1) and
an up-to-date web browser entering the IP network address of the device. The login
dialog box appears.
In case of using a web browser with a version not fully compatible with the device
GUI, a warning message is shown at the bottom right corner of the screen.
2. Log in with the user name and the password.
User accounts:
User Password (default) Permissions

admin admin all permissions
public public read permissions only
NOTE:
The default passwords can be changed. In case of forgetting a password, default
values can be reset for each user account via the web GUI or via front display and
keys in System > WEB interface menu.
3. The entry screen of the web GUI appears in the browser.
NOTE:
In case of 1+1 (or dual drive) configuration, a unique IP address (different from
the remote IP addresses from both transmitters) is available in order to get access
to a WEB GUI overview of the 1+1 system. This IP can be set in any of the
devices in the Setup > Redundancy at Redundant system IP address parameter
(see section 5.5.2.27). When you log on the web browser using the unique IP, the
entry page with the dynamic diagram of blocks of the system 1+1/DD appears
(image 5.12). At the top of this entry page a menu bar is available to access to
the web GUI of each device and also to the split view of both webpages at the
same time (image 5.13).
In case of N+1 configuration, when you log on the web browser using the unique
IP, the entry page with the dynamic diagram of blocks of the system N+1 appears
(image 5.14). At the top of this entry page a menu bar is available including,
besides the home page link, a link to access to the web GUI of each device and
also a link for the split view of two webpages (the selected device A and device B)
at the same time.
page 114 Ed 04
Figure 5.12: Home page of web GUI for 1+1/DD systems.
Figure 5.13: Split view of web pages of devices A and B.
page 115 Ed 04
Figure 5.14: Home page of web GUI for N+1 systems.
5.3.3 Web GUI description
• 1) Device name.
• 2) Device date and time. In case of a date and time is set from a synchronized
page 116 Ed 04
source, an icon indicating the current status is shown:
GNSS receiver: Synchronized
NTP server : Synchronized
Not synchronized
Symbol is attached to the date when a SD card is detected.
• 3) Local IP or remote IP access and user account.

• 4) Logout link.
• 5) Web page refresh link. In case of automatic refresh, the icon is flashing on the
screen each time that the web page is refreshed (after a configured timeout). In
case of manual refresh, click on the icon to perform a refresh of the web page.
• 6) Menu bar. indicates that some alarm is set. indicates

new entries at EventLog: the number of new events inside the gray bubble and the
number of new alarms inside the color bubble. At the right side a shortcut icon is
available to a quick access to the System > Service > Maintenance log menu.
• 7) System overview. Block diagram with a summary of the current status of the de-
vice. It is possible to click over each block in order to use it as a shortcut to access
to corresponding menu window.
Different blocks are shown in the diagram depends on the device type and config-
uration, but as a general rule, the colors code for the blocks and arrows statuses
is:
– Green: Signal OK.

– Red: Signal fault.
– Orange: Signal warning.
– Gray: Not apply or not status available.
RF ON/OFF button for enabling or disabling RF output signal.

INTERLOCK R, INTERLOCK 1 or INTERLOCK 2 is shown when the correspond-
ing interlock loop is open.
When a switching block is configured into a manual mode a letter M is shown inside
the block.
When some of the External alarms (Input #1 and/or Input #2) are enabled the I/O
interface box appears at the screen to summarizes the status of each input:
where icon indicates open status and icon indicates close status. Green
color of the icon indicates that the current status is the stand-by status and red
color indicates that the current status is opposite to the stand-by status (so the
corresponding alarm has been triggered).
page 117 Ed 04
When dual drive redundancy is enabled the dual drive switch box appears at the
screen, before the amplifier to summarizes the status of device A and B (green
means ready and red means not ready):
When 1+1 or N+1 redundancy is enabled the coaxial switch box appears at the
screen, after the amplifier to summarizes the status of device A and B (green
means ready, red means not ready and yellow means verification towards load
in progress):
• 8) Forward / Reverse power (current value and dynamic graphical bars).
• 9) Frequency box. For displaying current output central frequency of the device.
• 10) LOCAL/REMOTE box. For displaying local or remote mode operation.
• 11) Menu window. Display the available parameters of the menu selected in the
menu bar or quickly by clicking on a block of the system overview.
• 12) Spectrum window. Display a measured continuous trace of the spectrum of the
feedback signal. Click in the icon at system overview to run spectrum trace.
Selected trace is indicated by icon .
page 118 Ed 04
Menu window
• 1) Submit button for applying new values. This button is enabled when a value is
changed with a correct format.
• 2) Restore saved values. This button is enabled when a value is changed.

• 3) The introduced value has a correct format.
• 4) The introduced value has not a correct format.
• 5) The device returns an error at this parameter. Move the mouse over the icon at
right side of the parameter until a orange bubble appears with the detailed informa-
tion about the error.
• 6) Expand the menu window. Half screen or full screen .
page 119 Ed 04
Menu Status view

• NOT APPLY ( ): The alarm does not apply for the current device configuration.
Icons indicate that current alarm is a group containing more alarms under. Ex-
pands the alarms group by clicking on the icon and collapse the group by clicking on
the icon .
page 120 Ed 04
Menu EvenLog view

information.
The entries of the log are displayed into a table divided into following columns:
• Index. Index of the current entry over the total.
• Timestamp: Date and hour (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss) of the entry.

• Id: Unique identifier of the alarm or event.
• Level: Level of the alarm or event. Possible values are high (1) for events listed
in section 5.5.1.7 or alarms groups listed in section 5.5.3 or low(0) for the alarms
listed in section 5.5.3.
• Event: Description of the alarm or event.
• Status: Status of the entry. Possible values for alarms entries are OFF ( ) or ON
( ). For events entries the only possible value is information ( ). Passing the
pointer of the mouse over the status icon it is possible to see the previous status of
corresponding alarm.
• Details: Extra description about the entry for a more detailed information.
By clicking over each cell at the head row of the table it is possible to sort each column
in ascending or descending. Using the textbox at the subhead row is possible to perform
a quick search by text in each column.
Possible operations with the log are available at bottom menu bar:
• Perform an advanced search (see figure 5.17):
– 1) Adding new rules: Combo for selecting the type of the rule from the options:
all (AND) or any (OR). Combo for adding a subgroup of rules. Combo for
adding a new rule.
page 121 Ed 04
– 2) Defining the rule: Combo with the selected column. Combo with the
searching options. Combo or textbox with the string to search.
– 3) The rule to apply for the searching.
– 4) Button for show or hide the rule to apply for the searching.
– 5) Button for performing the search.
– 6) Button for reseting the rules definition.
– 7) Combo for selecting the templates with a predefined rules.
– 8) Exit from the advanced search dialog.
• Export to csv (comma-separated values) file all entries.
• Clean all entries.
• Mark as read all the old entries in order to notice the new alarms without having
to clean the previous entries.
• Select desired page and the number of entries for page.
Figure 5.17: Evenlog advanced search dialog box.
5.3.4 Log out

For closing your session correctly, use the logout link at the upper right side of the
screen.
page 122 Ed 04
Monitoring and Control
via SNMP
5.4 Monitoring and Control via SNMP

5.4.1 Introduction
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used for monitoring and controlling a
wide variety of different units in a network.
A description of the unit - the MIB (Management Information Base) - must be loaded in
the central unit (manager ) from where the devices are monitored.
A proprietary MIB and IRT MIBs are available. MIBs from IRT (EBU Tech 3323) allow
managing devices using SNMP irrespective of the manufacturer. However, functionality
is limited using IRT MIBs.
The device contains a program SNMP agent which can answer queries from the man-
ager and execute commands. Furthermore, the agent may of its own accord, generate a
message and send it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a
fault.
The SNMP agent supports versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c detailed in the RFC1901 to
RFC1908. Through the SNMP agent you can:
• Check the state of device parameters (GET).
• Set the device parameters (SET).
• Send automatic notifications Traps or Informs (v1Trap, v2Trap or v2Inform) to a

maximum of 4 destination IP addresses when alarms and events are triggered.
These four IP addresses are factory configured to default values and can only be
modified via SNMP.
The MIB required for monitoring and controlling the system is stored as directly in the
device and can be downloaded. All of the information required for configuration is con-
tained in the MIB file itself and structured in branches called OID (ObjectIdentifier:unique
designation of a data point).
5.4.2 Configuration
On device side SNMP settings are configurable via web GUI, via front display and keys
or via SNMP.
The SNMP communications are carried out through the remote Ethernet interface of the
device. Follow the instructions on section 5.3.1 using the Remote IP address to con-
necting Ethernet interface.
In case of 1+1 configuration, a unique IP address (different from the remote IP ad-
dresses from both transmitters) is available for the SNMP communications of the 1 + 1
system (including both transmitters) as one device using the module dvbPassiveReserve
from IRT MIBs.
In case of N+1 configuration, a unique IP address (different from the remote IP ad-
dresses from the transmitters, but in the same subnet) is available for the SNMP com-
munications of the N+ 1 system using the module dvbnPlus1 from IRT MIBs. Follow the
page 123 Ed 04
via SNMP
instructions on section 4.1.3 to set this IP address correctly.
The parameters for SNMP agent configuration are available at menu System > SNMP
(see section 5.5.1.4 for a more detailed information about each parameter).
Main parameters are Read community and Write community.
NOTE:
For GET/SET queries, the device has reserved the UDP port 161. It is not
possible to change it.
On remote manager side to monitor the device it is necessary the MIB file of the device
and a program that can interpret it.
A link to download the MIB file (*.mib) is available in MIB at menu System > SNMP (see
section 5.5.1.4):
This unique file contains a proprietary MIB with the general definitions of the device and
also the definitions for all type of devices including all hardware and software options. A
detailed description of this MIB is given below.
Load the MIB file and set the following parameters in order to correctly configure the
SNMP Manager:
• SNMP protocol version: SNMPv1/SNMPv2.
• Read Community: the same as in the device.
• Write Community: the same as in the device.

• Port number: 161. UDP port number for SET/GET queries.
Following screenshot can be used as an example of a simple SNMP query:
page 124 Ed 04
via SNMP
In this example, manager performs a GET query to the OID name (.1.3.6.1.4.1.23180.2.
1.1.2.1.1.2.0) in the device with the IP address 192.168.3.225. The reply from the SNMP
agent of the device is "2U_lab1".
The configuration parameters to send automatic notifications Traps or Informs to a max-

imum of 4 destination IP addresses are available at menu System > SNMP (see section
5.5.1.4 for a more detailed information about each parameter).
On the device side configure the trap sink, at least following parameters: Sink status to
Enabled, Destination IP and Destination port.
On the remote manager side set the same port (162 by default) as in the device side
and UDP transport protocol.
To perform a test of the trap sending, set an OID sendTestTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.23180.2.1.1.2.1.5.8.0)

to the value 1, which triggers a testTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.23180.2.1.1.2.10.0.500). Following
screenshot shows the result of reception of this trap:
page 125 Ed 04
via SNMP
5.4.3 MIB description

This section provides a detailed description of the MIBs definitions.
5.4.3.1 TREDESS-FS-MIB
Proprietary MIB with the general definitions of the device and also the definitions for all
type of devices including all hardware and software options.
MIB module has following structure:
• system. Contains definitions for the general system configuration according to the
parameters of the system menu.
• setup. Contains definitions for the configuration of the transmitter according to the
parameters of the setup menu.
• status. Contains definitions for the predefined alarms of the device according to
status menu.
page 126 Ed 04
via SNMP
• eventTx. Contains definitions for the available traps.
• conformance. MIB module that contains definitions of groups of managed objects

for the SNMP conformance.
page 127 Ed 04
Technical Manual
5.4.3.1.1 MIB module: system
Module Name Access Description
general
general language read-write Parameter Language. See section 5.5.1.1.
general name read-write Parameter Name. See section 5.5.1.1.
general temperature read-only Parameter Control board temperature. See section 5.5.1.1.
general location read-write Parameter Location. See section 5.5.1.1.
general operationMode read-only Parameter Operation mode. See section 5.5.1.1.
general autoreturnToRemote read-write Parameter Auto return to remote mode. See section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime
general.dateTime dateTimeSource read-only Current source of date and time (Manual, GNSS or NTP). Parameter
page 128
Date/time > Current. See section 5.5.1.1.

general.dateTime dateTimeStatus read-only Current status of source of date and time (synchronized/desynchronized).
Parameter Date/time > Current. See section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime dateTime1 read-write Date and time main source. Parameter Date/time > Main source. See
section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime dateTime2 read-write Date and time secondary source. Parameter Date/time > Secondary
source. See section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime localTime read-write Current data and time of the device. Parameter Date/time > Current to
read and parameter Date/time > Manual to set manually. See section
5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime utcOffset read-write Parameter Date/time > UTC offset. See section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime ntpServer read-write Parameter Date/time > NTP Server. See section 5.5.1.1.

general.dateTime ntpRefresh read-write NTP server refresh. Parameter Date/time > Update period. See section
5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime ntpClient read-only Parameter Date/time > NTP Status. See section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime ntpServerStatus read-only Parameter Date/time > Local NTP Server. See section 5.5.1.1.
via SNMP
Operation
general.dateTime timezone read-write Parameter Date/time > Time zone. See section 5.5.1.1.
Ed 04
Technical Manual
networkInterfaces
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz dhcp read-write Parameter Remote interface > DHCP. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz remoteIp read-write Parameter Remote interface > Remote IP address. See section
5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz remoteNetmask read-write Parameter Remote interface > Netmask. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz remoteGateway read-write Parameter Remote interface > Gateway. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz dnsServer read-write Parameter Remote interface > DNS Server. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.remoteInterfaz macAddr read-only Parameter Remote interface > MAC address. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.localInterfaz
page 129
networkInterfaces.localInterfaz localIp read-only Parameter Local interface > Local IP address. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.linkStatus
networkInterfaces.linkStatus gbe1 read-only Parameter Links status > GbE1. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration ethernetMode read-write Not available.
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration.
networkModeConfiguration
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration. networkGbe1 read-write Not available.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
ifaceModeConfiguration
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration. ifaceGbe1 read-write Parameter Ports configurations > GbE1. See section 5.5.1.2.
page 130
webInterface
webInterface.autorefreshWeb
webInterface.autorefreshWeb autorefreshWebConfig read-write Parameter Web autorefresh > Autorefresh. See section 5.5.1.3.
webInterface.autorefreshWeb autorefreshWebTime read-write Parameter Web autorefresh > Timeout. See section 5.5.1.3.
webInterface.usersControl
webInterface.usersControl user read-write Parameter User control > User to change its password. See section
5.5.1.3.
webInterface.usersControl actualPassword read-write It is necessary before change the user password, set this OID one time
with the actual password. Parameter User control > Actual password
to change user password. See section 5.5.1.3.
webInterface.usersControl newPassword read-write New password for selected user. Parameter User control > New pass-

word to change user password. See section 5.5.1.3.
webInterface.usersControl confirmNewPassword read-write Confirm the previous password. Parameter User control > Confirm
new password to change user password. See section 5.5.1.3.
webInterface.setDefaultPasswords
webInterface.setDefaultPasswords adminUserPassword read-write Parameter Set default passwords > admin. See section 5.5.1.3.
via SNMP
Operation
webInterface.setDefaultPasswords publicUserPassword read-write Parameter Set default passwords > public. See section 5.5.1.3.
Ed 04
via SNMP
The MIB module eventConfiguration.alarmsConfiguration allows you to set up the set-
tings for the specific alarms available in the device in the same way as in the GUI menu
system > Events configuration > Alarms (see section 5.5.1.6). This module is composed
by tables, as many as groups detailed in the section 5.5.3. Each row at these tables
corresponds with an alarm from the list that is detailed at section 5.5.3:
Table Name Description

geralTable Fault summation and Warning summation. See
section 5.5.3.
amplifierTable Amplifier. See section 5.5.3.
amplifierStage1Table Amplifier stage 1. See section 5.5.3 (Available for
medium power).
medium power).
medium power).
medium power).
asiTable ASI input. See section 5.5.3.
ipInputTable IP input. See section 5.5.3.
rxDtt1Table DTV Rx 1. See section 5.5.3.
rfInTable RF input. See section 5.5.3.
cancellerTable IF processor. See section 5.5.3.
modulatorTable Modulator. See section 5.5.3.
rfOutTable RF output. See section 5.5.3.
synchronizationTable Synchronization module. See section 5.5.3.
errorHwTable HW error. See section 5.5.3.
fanTable Fan. See section 5.5.3.
externalTable External alarm. See section 5.5.3.
powerSupplyTable AC power supply. See section 5.5.3.
Following screenshot shows asiTable as example:
Each column corresponds with a setting available for each alarm:
page 131 Ed 04
via SNMP
Column Name Description
..Index Corresponding row index.
..AlarmName English label of the alarm.
..AlarmStatus Status of the alarm (section 5.5.3). This OID returns the same
value as the corresponding OID of status MIB module de-
tailed below.
..On Parameter On. See section 5.5.1.6.
..Log Parameter Log. See section 5.5.1.6.
..Fault Parameter Fault. See section 5.5.1.6.
..Warning Parameter Warning. See section 5.5.1.6.
..Led Parameter LED. See section 5.5.1.6.
..1p1 Parameter 1+1. See section 5.5.1.6.
..Ext1 Parameter R#1. See section 5.5.1.6.
..Trap Parameter SNMP. See section 5.5.1.6.
..DD Parameter DD. See section 5.5.1.6 (Available for medium
power).
The MIB module eventConfiguration.eventsConfiguration allows you to set up the set-

tings for the specific events available in the device in the same way as in the GUI menu
system > Events configuration > Events (see section 5.5.1.7). This module is composed
by a table where each row corresponds with an event of the list that is detailed in the
section 5.5.1.7.
Each column corresponds with a setting available for each event:

eventsIndex Corresponding row index.
eventName English label of the event.
eventOn Parameter On. See section 5.5.1.7.
eventLog Parameter Log. See section 5.5.1.7.
eventTrap Parameter SNMP. See section 5.5.1.7.
page 132 Ed 04
Technical Manual
ioInterface
ioInterface.input01
ioInterface.input01 input01Status read-only Parameter Input #1 > Current status. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.input01 input01Description read-write Parameter Input #1 > Description. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.input01 input01StandByStatus read-write Parameter Input #1 > Stand-by status. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.input01 input01Mode read-write Parameter Input #1 > Mode. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.input01 input01Duration read-write Parameter Input #1 > Pulse duration. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.input02
page 133
ioInterface.output01
ioInterface.output01 output01Status read-only Parameter Output relay #1 > Current status. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.output01 output01Description read-write Parameter Output relay #1 > Description. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.output01 output01StandByStatus read-write Parameter Output relay #1 > Stand-by status. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.output01 output01Mode read-write Parameter Output relay #1 > Mode. See section 5.5.1.8.
ioInterface.output01 output01Duration read-write Parameter Output relay #1 > Pulse duration. See section 5.5.1.8.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
snmp
snmp readCommunity1 read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Read community 1. See section
5.5.1.4.
snmp writeCommunity1 read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Write community 1. See section
5.5.1.4.
snmp fastTrapSync read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to send a trap for each alarm triggered. See
section 5.5.1.4.
snmp enableAuthenTraps read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to enable authentication trap. Parameter Agent
configuration > Authentication trap. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp trapKeepaliveEnable read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to enable keepalive trap. Parameter Agent
page 134
configuration > Enable keepalive trap. See section 5.5.1.4.

snmp trapKeepalive read-write Timeout in seconds for keepalive trap. Parameter Agent configuration
> Keepalive trap. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp sendTestTrap read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to send the testTrap. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp lastUpdate read-only Parameter MIB version. See section 5.5.1.4.
5.5.1.4.
5.5.1.4.
snmp trapsLocalMode read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Traps in local mode. See section
5.5.1.4.
snmp.trapSinkTable Table for trapsinks configuration
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry Entry for a trapsink

snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkIndex Index trap sink from #1 to #4
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkEnable read-write Set to value = 1 to enable. Parameter Trap sink # > Sink status. See
section 5.5.1.4.
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkVersion read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Traps versions. See section 5.5.1.4.
via SNMP
Operation
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkIpAddress read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Destination IP. See section 5.5.1.4.
Ed 04
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkPort read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Destination port. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkInformTimeout read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Inform timeout. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkInformRetry read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Informs retries. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkCommunity read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Trap community. See section 5.5.1.4.
Technical Manual
deviceInfo
deviceInfo partNumber read-only Parameter Part Number. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo serialNumber read-only Parameter Serial Number. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo softwareVersion read-only Parameter Software version. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo softwareId read-only Parameter Software ID. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis ctrlBoard read-only Hardware basis > CTRL Board. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis ctrlCBoard read-only Hardware basis > CTRLC Board. See section 5.5.1.9.
page 135
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis ctrlMBoard read-only Hardware basis > CTRLM Board. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis signalBoardGf read-only Hardware basis > Signal board Gf. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis signalBoardTx read-only Hardware basis > Signal board Tx. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis extraDigitalDacModulator read-only Not available
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis satelliteBoard read-only Not available
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis terrestialReceiver1Board read-only Hardware basis > Rx1T. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis terrestialReceiver2Board read-only Not available
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis satelliteReceiver1Board read-only Not available
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis ctrlBusInterface read-only Hardware basis > CTRL bus interface. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis onePlusOneRedundancy read-only Hardware basis > 1+1R. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis nPlusOneRedundancy read-only Not available.

deviceInfo.hardwareBasis dualDriveRedundancy read-only Hardware basis > DD. See section 5.5.1.9. Available for medium power.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis externalFeedback read-only Hardware basis > External Feedback. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis relay1p1Interface read-only Hardware basis > 1+1 relay interface. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis amplifierHw read-only Hardware basis > Power Amplifier. See section 5.5.1.9.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions gnssReceiverHw read-only Hardware options > GNSS receiver. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions externalReferenceHw read-only Hardware options > External reference. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions redundantPsuHw read-only Hardware options > Redundant PSU for 3HU devices. See section
page 136
5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions ocxoReferenceHw read-only Hardware options > OCXO. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions
deviceInfo.softwareOptions snmpSw read-only Software options > SNMP. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions dvbtSw read-only Software options > DVB-T. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions dvbt2Sw read-only Software options > DVB-T2. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions isdbtSw read-only Software options > ISDB-T. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions deecSw read-only Software options > DEEC. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions isdbtRemuxSw read-only Software options > ISDB-T Remux. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions onePlusOneSw read-only Software options > 1+1 Redundancy. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions dualDriveSw read-only Software options > DD Redundancy. See section 5.5.1.9. Available
for medium power.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
service
service.serviceReset
service.serviceReset systemReset read-write To perform the System Reset. See section
5.5.1.10.
service.serviceReset rfReset read-write To perform the RF Reset. See section
5.5.1.10.
service.serviceSystemCalibration
service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration
service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration inputStatusCalibration read-only RF Input calibration status. See section ??.
serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration cancelInputCalibration read-write Set to 1 to remove the RF input calibration.
page 137
See section ??.

service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration inputLevelMeasureCalibration read-write Set measure to calibrate RF input. See section
??.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration powerStatusCalibration read-only Forward power calibration status. See section
5.5.1.12.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration powerLevelMeasureCalibration read-write Set measure to calibrate Forward power. See
section 5.5.1.12.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.phaseRf
service.serviceSystemCalibration.phaseRf automaticRfPhaseAdjustment read-only Automatic fine adjust of RF phase for medium
power amplifier stages. See section 5.5.1.13.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection

service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection linearStatusPrecorrection read-only Linear precorrection status. See section
5.5.1.14.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection startLinearPrecorrectionBBPF read-write Set to 1 to launch linear precorrection before
band-pass filter. See section 5.5.1.15.
via SNMP
Operation
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection startLinearPrecorrectionABPF read-write Set to 1 to launch linear precorrection after
Ed 04
Technical Manual
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec-
tion
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec- nonLinearStatusPrecorrection read-only Non linear optimization status. See section
page 138
tion 5.5.1.15.
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec- cancelNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Set to 1 to remove non linear optimization.
tion See section 5.5.1.15.
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec- startNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Set to 1 to launch non linear optimization.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration acApparentPower read-only AC Apparent power for 3HU devices. See
section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration acEfficiency read-only AC Efficiency for 3HU devices. See section
5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration efficiencyStatusCalibration read-only Efficiency improvement status. See section
5.5.1.16.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration.
efficiencyImprovement
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyStatusCalibration read-write Efficiency improvement status. See section
efficiencyImprovement 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. cancelEfficiencyCalibration read-write Set to 1 to remove efficiency improvement.
page 139
efficiencyImprovement See section 5.5.1.16.

service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyShoulderCalibration read-write Set to 1 to launch efficiency improvement by
efficiencyImprovement shoulders. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyShoulderMeasure read-only Current shoulders (average) measure. See
efficiencyImprovement section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyShoulderTarget read-write Shoulders target. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyMerCalibration read-write Set to 1 to launch efficiency improvement by
efficiencyImprovement MER. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyMerMeasure read-only Current MER (rms) measure. See section
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyMerTarget read-write MER (rms) target. See section 5.5.1.16.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
service.serviceCooling
service.serviceCooling.fan01
service.serviceCooling.fan01 fan01Status read-only Parameter Fan 1 status. See section 5.5.1.19.
service.serviceColling.fan01 fan01OperatingTime read-only Parameter Fan 1 operating time. See section 5.5.1.19.
service.serviceColling.fan01 fan01Reset read-write Set to 1 to reset operating time for fan 1. Parameter Fan 1 reset. See
section 5.5.1.19.
service.serviceCooling.fan02 fan02OperatingTime read-only Parameter Fan 2 operating time. See section 5.5.1.19.
service.serviceCooling.fan02 fan02Reset read-write Set to 1 to reset operating time for fan 2. Parameter Fan 2 reset. See
page 140
section 5.5.1.19.
section 5.5.1.19.
service.serviceCooling fanSpeed read-only Parameter Speed. See section 5.5.1.19.
service.serviceCooling. exter- Table for medium power amplifier stages cooling
nalAmplifierCoolingTable
service.serviceCooling. exter- Entry for a stage
nalAmplifierCoolingTable. ex-
ternalAmplifierCoolingEntry

service.serviceCooling. exter- externalAmplifierCoolingIndex Index stage from #1 to #4
service.serviceCooling. exter- amStFanSpeed read-only Parameter Fans speed of the stage. See section 5.5.1.20.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
service.serviceCooling. exter- amStFan1OperatingTime read-only Parameter Fan 1 operating time of the stage. See section 5.5.1.20.
nalAmplifierCoolingTable. exter-
nalAmplifierCoolingEntry
service.serviceCooling. exter- amStFan2OperatingTime read-only Parameter Fan 2 operating time of the stage. See section 5.5.1.20.
page 141
service.servicePowerSupply
service.servicePowerSupply dcLine1Voltage read-only Parameter DC line 1. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA For 3HU devices
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAstatus read-only Parameter PSU-A: Status. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAacInputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-A: AC input voltage. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAdcOutputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-A: DC output voltage. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAtemperature read-only Parameter PSU-A: Temperature. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB For 3HU devices
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBstatus read-only Parameter PSU-B: Status. See section 5.5.1.17.

service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBacInputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-B: AC input voltage. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBdcOutputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-B: DC output voltage. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBtemperature read-only Parameter PSU-B: Temperature. See section 5.5.1.17.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
via SNMP
page 142 Ed 04
Technical Manual
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- Table for medium power amplifier stages power supply
nalAmplifierPSTable
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- Entry for a stage
nalAmplifierPSTable. externalAm-
plifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- externalAmplifierPSIndex Index stage from #1 to #4
plifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- amStDcLineVoltage1 read-only Parameter DC line 1 voltage of the stage. See section 5.5.1.18.
page 143
plifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- amStDcLineVoltage2 read-only Parameter DC line 2 voltage of the stage. See section 5.5.1.18.
plifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- amStPsuAStatus read-only Parameter PSU-A:status of the stage. See section 5.5.1.18.
plifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- amStPsuBStatus read-only Parameter PSU-B:status of the stage. See section 5.5.1.18.
plifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. exter- amStPsuCStatus read-only Parameter PSU-C:status of the stage. See section 5.5.1.18.
plifierPSEntry

service.serviceSwUpgrade Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeMode Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeServer Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeUser Not available
via SNMP
Operation
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradePassword Not available
Ed 04
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwDaily Not available

service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwPeriodic Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwFile Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwStatus Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwCheckNow Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwDownloadNow Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeNow Not available
Technical Manual
5.4.3.1.2 MIB module: setup
input
input.socket1
input.socket1 socket1Enable read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Enable. See section 5.5.2.1.
page 144
input.socket1 socket1TransmissionMode read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Transmission mode. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1UnicastIp read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Unicast IP. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1MulticastIp read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Multicast IP. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1SourceIp read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Source IP (multicast). See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1VlanEnable read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Enable VLAN. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1VlanId read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > VLAN Identifier. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1Port read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Port. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1Protocol read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Protocol. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1BufferDuration read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Buffer duration. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1Fec read-only Parameter IP socket 1 > FEC (RTP). See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1InputBitrate read-only Parameter IP socket 1 > Input bitrate. See section 5.5.2.1.
input.socket1 socket1Latency read-only Parameter IP socket 1 > Latency. See section 5.5.2.1.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
input.socket2
page 145

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
input.inputSwitching
input.inputSwitching sourceSelected read-only Parameter Input switching > Source selected. See sec-
tion 5.5.2.7.
input.inputSwitching switchingMode read-write Parameter Input switching > Switching mode. See sec-
tion 5.5.2.7.
input.inputSwitching maximumLatency read-write Not available.
input.inputSwitching.inputSwitchingHysteresis
input.inputSwitching.inputSwitchingHysteresis nonSeamlessHysteresis read-write Parameter Input switching > Automatic switching hys-
teresis > Error (Non-seamless). See section 5.5.2.7.
input.inputSwitching.inputSwitchingHysteresis higherPriorityHysteresis read-write Parameter Input switching > Automatic switching hys-
page 146
teresis > Higher priority. See section 5.5.2.7.

input.inputSwitching.inputSwitchingHysteresis asiBypassEqualizers read-write Parameter Input switching > ASI equalizers bypass.
See section 5.5.2.7.
input.inputSwitching.input1
input.inputSwitching.input1 input1Priority read-write Parameter Input switching > Priorities for automatic
switching > Source 1. See section 5.5.2.7.
input.inputSwitching.input1 input1Status read-only Parameter Input switching > Assignments / Status / Bi-
trate / Latency > Source 1. See section 5.5.2.7.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
input.asi1
input.asi1 asi1Enable read-write Parameter ASI 1 > Enable. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.asi2
input.dttReceiver1
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1Enable read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Enable. See section
5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1Standard read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Standard. See section
5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1Bandwidth read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Bandwidth. See section
page 147
5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1InputFrequencyMode
read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Input frequency mode.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1PlpId read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > PLP ID for DVB-T2. See
section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode dttReceiver1Channel read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Channel Mode > Channel.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode dttReceiver1ChannelOffset read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Channel Mode > Channel
offset. See section 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode dttReceiver1ChannelResolution read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Channel Mode > Channel
resolution. See section 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1. dttRe-

ceiver1CentralFrequencyMode
input.dttReceiver1. dttRe- dttReceiver1Frequency read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Central Frequency Mode
ceiver1CentralFrequencyMode > Central frequency. See section 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1Status
via SNMP
Operation
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1Status dttReceiver1StatusReceiver read-only Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Status > Status. See sec-
Ed 04
tion 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1Status dttReceiver1InputFrequency read-only Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Status > DTT receiver 1
temperature. See section 5.5.2.5.
Technical Manual
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt-
tReceiver1TModulation
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1Constellation read-only Parameter Modulation > Constellation. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1Fec read-only Parameter Modulation > FEC. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1GuardInterval read-only Parameter Modulation > Guard Interval. See section
tReceiver1TModulation 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1Fft read-only Parameter Modulation > FFT. See section 5.5.2.3.
page 148
tReceiver1TMeasures
input.dttReceiver1. dttReceiver1DvbT. dttReceiver1Cber read-only Parameter Measures > CBER. See section 5.5.2.3.
dttReceiver1TMeasures
input.dttReceiver1. dttReceiver1DvbT. dttReceiver1Vber read-only Parameter Measures > VBER. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2.
dttReceiver1T2System
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2Profile read-only Parameter System > T2 profile. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2Version read-only Parameter System > T2 version. See section 5.5.2.6.

input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2CellId read-only Parameter System > Cell ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2NetworkId read-only Parameter System > Network ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2SystemId read-only Parameter System > System ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
Technical Manual
dttReceiver1T2Frame
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2L1SignallingModulation read-only Parameter T2 frame > L1-post signalling constellation.
dttReceiver1T2Frame See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2L1PostScrambling read-only Parameter T2 frame > L1-post scrambling. See section
dttReceiver1T2Frame 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PreambleFormat read-only Parameter T2 frame > Preamble format. See section
page 149
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2ExtendedCarrierMode read-only Parameter T2 frame > Extended carrier mode. See sec-
dttReceiver1T2Frame tion 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2FftSize read-only Parameter T2 frame > FFT size. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2Frame
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2GuardInterval read-only Parameter T2 frame > Guard interval. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PaprReduction read-only Parameter T2 frame > PAPR reduction. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PilotPattern read-only Parameter T2 frame > Pilot pattern. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2Frame
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2FramesPerSuperframe read-only Parameter T2 frame > Number of T2 frames per super-

dttReceiver1T2Frame frame. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2OfdmSymbolsPerSuperframe
read-only Parameter T2 frame > Number of OFDM symbols per
dttReceiver1T2Frame T2 frame. See section 5.5.2.6.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1NumberOfPlps read-only Parameter PLP > Total number of PLPs. See section
dttReceiver1T2PLP 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1PlpId read-only Parameter PLP > Selected PLP ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpType read-only Parameter PLP > PLP type. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpMode read-only Parameter PLP > PLP mode. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
page 150
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpGroupId read-only Parameter PLP > PLP group ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpConstellation read-only Parameter PLP > PLP constellation. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpRotatedConstellation read-only Parameter PLP > Rotated constellation. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2FecType read-only Parameter PLP > FEC type. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2CodeRate read-only Parameter PLP > Code rate. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2NumberOfFecBlocks read-only Parameter PLP > Number of FEC blocks. See section

input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2TypeOfTimeInvervaling read-only Parameter PLP > Type of time-interleaving. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2LengthOfTimeInvervalingread-only Parameter PLP > Length of time-interleaving. See sec-
dttReceiver1T2PLP tion 5.5.2.6.
via SNMP
Operation
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2InBandSignalling read-only Parameter PLP > In-band signalling. See section
Ed 04
Technical Manual
dttReceiver1T2Measures
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2BerBeforeLdpc read-only Parameter Measures > BER before LDPC. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2BerBeforeBch read-only Parameter Measures > BER before BCH. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2BbframeErrorRatio read-only Parameter Measures > BBFRAME error ratio. See section
dttReceiver1T2Measures 5.5.2.6.
exciter
page 151
exciter.rfInput
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputFrequencyMode read-write Parameter Input frequency mode. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputFrequency read-only Parameter Input frequency. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputLevel read-only Parameter Input level. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputLevelThreshold read-write Parameter Input level threshold. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration.
inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputChannel read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel. See section ??.
.inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputChannelOffset read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel offset. See section ??.
inputChannelMode

exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputChannelResolution read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel resolution. See section ??.
inputChannelMode
inputCentralFrequencyMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputCentralFrequency read-write Parameter Central Frequency Mode > Central frequency. See
via SNMP
Operation
inputCentralFrequencyMode section ??.
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller
exciter.echoCanceller.ecGeneral
exciter.echoCanceller.ecGeneral ecTemperature read-write Parameter IF board temperature. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecBandwidth read-only Parameter Bandwidth. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecBandwidthAdaptation read-write Parameter Bandwidth adaptation. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecAdditionDelay read-write Parameter Additional delay. See section ??.
page 152
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecCurrentDelay read-only Parameter Current delay. See section ??.

exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecInputLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Input. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecReferenceLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Reference. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecCancellationLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Cancellation. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecOutputCancellation read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Output. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows

exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows ecEnable read-write Parameter Echo cancellation. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows muteGainMarginThreshold read-write Parameter Gain margin threshold. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows ecGainMargin read-only Parameter Gain margin. See section ??.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows. ecWindowSpeed
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows. ecWindowSpeed ecWindow01 read-write Parameter Window speed > Window 1. See section ??.
page 153

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector ecLinearPrecorrection read-write Parameter Amplitude equalization > Enable. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector ecNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Parameter Non-linear precorrection > Enable. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector.
ecPrecorrectorLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorInput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Input. See section ??.
page 154
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorStatus read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Status. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorFeedback read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Feedback. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorOutput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Output. See section ??.
ecSpectrumMeasures
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecShoulderAlarm read-write Parameter Spectrum measures > Shoulder alarm. See section
ecSpectrumMeasures ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecLowerShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Lower shoulder. See section

exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecUpperShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Upper shoulder. See section
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecInBandLevelVariation read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > In-band level variation. See
ecSpectrumMeasures section ??.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorTemperature read-only Parameter Modulator board temperature. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorStandard read-write Parameter Modulator standard. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorTestMode read-write Parameter Test mode. See section 5.5.2.8.
page 155
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsType read-write Parameter PRBS type. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsPid read-write Parameter PRBS PID. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsIn read-write Parameter PRBS invert. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtBandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.9.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtCellIdEnable read-write Parameter Enable Cell ID. See section 5.5.2.9.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtCellId read-write Parameter Cell ID. See section 5.5.2.9.

dvbtSystem
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtNetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtAutoconfigurationMip read-write Parameter Autoconfiguration from MIP. See section
5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtLocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork.
dvbtMip
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtMaximumNetworkDelay read-only Parameter MIP > Maximum network delay. See section
page 156
dvbtMip 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtTimeOffset read-only Parameter MIP > Time offset. See section 5.5.2.10.
dvbtMip
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtTransmitterId read-write Parameter MIP > Transmitter ID. See section 5.5.2.10.
dvbtMip
dvbtTimingInformation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtCurrentNetworkDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Current network de-
dvbtTimingInformation lay. See section 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtInputBufferDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Input buffer delay.
dvbtTimingInformation See section 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtProcessingDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Processing delay.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtNetworkDelayMargin read-only Parameter Timing information > Network delay mar-
dvbtTimingInformation gin. See section 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Modulator delay. See
dvbtTimingInformation section 5.5.2.10.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
dvbtModulation
page 157
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtConstellation read-write Parameter Constellation. See section 5.5.2.11.

dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtFec read-write Parameter FEC. See section 5.5.2.11.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtGuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section 5.5.2.11.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtFft read-write Parameter FFT. See section 5.5.2.11.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtAutoconfigurationFromDttRcvread-write Parameter Autocofiguration from DTT receiver. See sec-
dvbtModulation tion 5.5.2.11.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Profile read-write Parameter DVB-T2 profile. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2InputMode read-write Parameter Input mode. See section 5.5.2.12.
page 158
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2T2miPid read-write Parameter T2MI PID. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Bandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Version read-write Parameter T2 version. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
dvbt2System.dvbt2CellId
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdT2mi read-only Parameter Cell ID > T2MI value. See section 5.5.2.12.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdOverwrite read-write Parameter Cell ID > Overwrite. See section 5.5.2.12.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdUser read-write Parameter Cell ID > User value. See section 5.5.2.12.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
dvbt2System.dvbt2NetworkId
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdT2mi read-only Parameter Network ID > T2MI value. See section
dvbt2System.dvbt2NetworkId 5.5.2.12.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdOverwrite read-write Parameter Network ID > Overwrite. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdUser read-write Parameter Network ID > User value. See section
page 159
dvbt2System.dvbt2SystemId
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdT2mi read-only Parameter T2 system ID > T2MI value. See section
dvbt2System.dvbt2SystemId 5.5.2.12.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdOverwrite read-write Parameter T2 system ID > Overwrite. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdUser read-write Parameter T2 system ID > User value. See section
dvbt2System.dvbt2Frequency
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FrequencyT2mi read-only Parameter T2 frequency > T2MI value. See section

dvbt2System.dvbt2Frequency 5.5.2.12.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FrequencyOverwrite read-write Parameter T2 frequency > Overwrite. See section
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2NetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2SfnRelativeReference read-only Parameter SFN reference (relative). See section
5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2SfnAbsoluteReference read-only Parameter SFN reference (absolute). See section
5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2TimeStamp read-only Parameter T2MI Timestamp. See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2SuperFrameDuration read-only Parameter T2 Super Frame duration. See section
5.5.2.13.
page 160
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2LocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section 5.5.2.13.

dvbt2Network.dvbt2IndividualAddresssing
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2TimeOffset read-only Parameter Individual Addressing > Time offset.
dvbt2Network.dvbt2IndividualAddresssing See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2TransmitterId read-write Parameter Individual Addressing > Transmitter ID.
dvbt2Network.dvbt2TimingInformation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2InputBufferDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Input buffer delay.
dvbt2Network.dvbt2TimingInformation See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2ProcessingDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Processing delay.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkDelayMargin read-only Parameter Timing information > Network delay
dvbt2Network.dvbt2TimingInformation margin. See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Delay read-only Parameter Timing information > Modulator delay.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2L1SignallingModulation read-write Parameter L1-post signaling constellation. See
dvbt2Frame section 5.5.2.14.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2L1PostScrambling read-write Parameter L1-post scrambling. See section
dvbt2Frame 5.5.2.14.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2LiteCompatible read-only Parameter T2-Lite compatible. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PreambleFormat read-write Parameter Preamble format. See section 5.5.2.14.
page 161
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2MisoGroup read-write Parameter MISO group. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2ExtendedCarrierMode read-write Parameter Extended carrier mode. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FftSize read-write Parameter FFT size. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2GuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PaprReduction read-write Parameter PAPR reduction. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PilotPattern read-write Parameter Pilot pattern. See section 5.5.2.14.

dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FramesPerSuperframe read-write Parameter Number of T2 frames per superframe.
dvbt2Frame See section 5.5.2.14.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2OfdmSymbolsPerSuperframe read-write Parameter Number of OFDM symbols per T2
via SNMP
Operation
dvbt2Frame frame. See section 5.5.2.14.
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp numberOfPlps read-only Parameter Number of PLPs. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp.
dvbt2PlpTable
dvbt2PlpTable.dvbt2PlpEntry
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpIndex Index for PLP table
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpId read-write Parameter PLP ID. See section 5.5.2.15.
page 162
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpType read-write Parameter PLP type. See section 5.5.2.15.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpMode read-write Parameter PLP mode. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpGroupId read-write Parameter PLP Group ID. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpConstellation read-write Parameter PLP Constellation. See section
dvbt2PlpTable.dvbt2PlpEntry 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. rotatedConstellation read-write Parameter Rotated Constellation. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. fecType read-write Parameter FEC type. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. codeRate read-write Parameter Code Rate. See section 5.5.2.15.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. numberOfFecBlocks read-write Parameter Number of FEC blocks. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. typeOfTimeInvervaling read-write Parameter Type of time-interleaving. See section
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. lengthOfTimeInvervaling read-write Parameter Lenght of time-interleaving. See sec-

dvbt2PlpTable.dvbt2PlpEntry tion 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. inBandSignalling read-write Parameter In-band signaling. See section
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.
page 163
isdbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.16.
isdbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtInputMode read-write Parameter Input mode. See section 5.5.2.16.
isdbtSystem
isdbtNetwork
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtNetwork
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtLocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtNetwork

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork.
iip
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtMaximumNetworkDelay read-only Parameter IIP Network Synchronization Informa-
iip tion > Maximum network delay. See section
5.5.2.17.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtTimeOffset read-only Parameter IIP Network Synchronization Informa-
iip tion > Time offset. See section 5.5.2.17.
page 164
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtStaticDelay read-only Parameter IIP Network Synchronization Informa-

iip tion > Static delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtTransmitterId read-write Parameter IIP Network Synchronization Informa-
iip tion > Equipment ID. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtTimingInformation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtCurrentNetworkDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Current network
isdbtTimingInformation delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtInputBufferDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Input buffer de-
isdbtTimingInformation lay. See section 5.5.2.17.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtProcessingDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Processing de-

exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtNetworkDelayMargin read-only Parameter Timing information > Network delay
isdbtTimingInformation margin. See section 5.5.2.17.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT.isdbtNetwork. isdbtDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Network delay
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtRfDelay read-write Parameter RF delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtNetwork
page 165
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtFft read-write Parameter FFT Mode. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtGuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPartialReception read-write Parameter Partial reception. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFiltering read-write Parameter Filtering type. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLA read-write Parameter Layer A > PID filtering. See section
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLA read-write Parameter Layer A > PIDs. See section 5.5.2.18.
page 166
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtConstellationLA read-write Parameter Layer A > Constellation. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLA read-write Parameter Layer A > Code Rate. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTimeIntervalLengthLA read-write Parameter Layer A > Time interleaving length.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA See section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNumberOfSegmentsLA read-write Parameter Layer A > Number of segments. See
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBitrateLA read-only Parameter Layer A > Bitrate (In / Out). See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtServicesA read-write Parameter Layer A > Services names. See section

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLB read-write Parameter Layer B > PID filtering. See section
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLB read-write Parameter Layer B > PIDs. See section 5.5.2.18.
page 167
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtConstellationLB read-write Parameter Layer B > Constellation. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLB read-write Parameter Layer B > Code Rate. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTimeIntervalLengthLB read-write Parameter Layer B > Time interleaving length.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB See section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNumberOfSegmentsLB read-write Parameter Layer B > Number of segments. See
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBitrateLB read-only Parameter Layer B > Bitrate (In / Out). See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtServicesB read-write Parameter Layer B > Services names. See section

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLC read-write Parameter Layer C > PID filtering. See section
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLC read-write Parameter Layer C > PIDs. See section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtConstellationLC read-write Parameter Layer C > Constellation. See section
page 168
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLC read-write Parameter Layer C > Code Rate. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTimeIntervalLengthLC read-write Parameter Layer C > Time interleaving length.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC See section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNumberOfSegmentsLC read-write Parameter Layer C > Number of segments. See
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBitrateLC read-only Parameter Layer C > Bitrate (In / Out). See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtServicesC read-write Parameter Layer C > Services names. See section
isdbtPSI

isdbtPSI.isdbtPAT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtAvailablePrograms read-only Parameter Program Association Table > Avail-
isdbtPSI.isdbtPAT able programs. See section 5.5.2.19.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
isdbtPSI.isdbtBIT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtAffiliationId read-write Parameter Broadcast Information Table > Affilia-
isdbtPSI.isdbtBIT tion ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkId read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Network
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkName read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Network
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT name. See section 5.5.2.19.
page 169
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTransportStreamId read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Transport

isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Stream ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOriginalNetworkId read-only Parameter Network Information Table > Original
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Network ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtAreaCode read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Area
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT code. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOverwriteAreaCode read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Overwrite
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Area code. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtFrequency read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Fre-
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT quency. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOverwriteFrequency read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Overwrite
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Frequency. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtRemoteControlIdKey read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Remote

isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Control Key ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBypassRemoteControlIdKey read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Bypass
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Remote Control Key ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOverwriteRemoteControlIdKey read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Overwrite
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTSName read-write Parameter Network Information Table > TS Name.

isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT See section 5.5.2.19.
Technical Manual
isdbtPSI.isdbtTOT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCountry read-write Parameter Time Offset Table > Country code.
isdbtPSI.isdbtTOT See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtRegionId read-write Parameter Time Offset Table > Region ID. See
isdbtPSI.isdbtTOT section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector.
modLinearPrecorrection
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modLinearPrecorrectionEnable read-write Parameter Linear precorrection > Enable. See
page 170
modLinearPrecorrection section 5.5.2.20.

modNonLinearPrecorrection
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modNonLinearPrecorrectionEnable read-write Parameter Non linear precorrection > Enable.
modNonLinearPrecorrection See section 5.5.2.20.
modPrecorrectorLevels
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modPrecorrectorInput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Input. See
modPrecorrectorLevels section 5.5.2.20.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modPrecorrectorStatus read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Status. See
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modPrecorrectorFeedback read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Feedback.
modPrecorrectorLevels See section 5.5.2.20.

exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modPrecorrectorOutput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Output. See
modSpectrumMeasures
via SNMP
Operation
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modShoulderAlarm read-write Parameter Spectrum measures > Shoulder
Ed 04
modSpectrumMeasures alarm. See section 5.5.2.20.

exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modLowerShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Lower
modSpectrumMeasures shoulder. See section 5.5.2.20.
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modUpperShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Upper
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modIn-bandLevelVariation read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > In-band
modSpectrumMeasures level variation. See section 5.5.2.20.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modThresholdMer read-write Parameter Spectrum measures > MER alarm.
modSpectrumMeasures See section 5.5.2.20.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modMer read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > MER. See
modSpectrumMeasures section 5.5.2.20.
page 171
rfOutput
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputFrequencyMode read-write Parameter Output Frequency mode. See sec-
rfOutput tion 5.5.2.21.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputFrequency read-only Parameter Output frequency. See section
rfOutput 5.5.2.21.
rfOutput.outputChannelMode
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputChannel read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel. See sec-
rfOutput.outputChannelMode tion 5.5.2.21.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputChannelOffset read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel offset.
rfOutput.outputChannelMode See section 5.5.2.21.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. ouputChannelResolution read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel resolu-

rfOutput.outputChannelMode tion. See section 5.5.2.21.
rfOutput.outputCentralFrequencyMode
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputCentralFrequency read-write Parameter Central Frequency Mode > Central
via SNMP
Operation
rfOutput.outputCentralFrequencyMode frequency. See section 5.5.2.21.
Ed 04
Technical Manual
exciter.rfOutput.mutes
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteOutputStatus read-only Parameter Status. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteCauses read-only Parameter Mute causes. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes mutesRf read-write Equivalent to RF ON/OFF button at web GUI or hard
key at frontal side.
page 172
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteTsError read-write Parameter TS error mute. See section 5.5.2.22.

exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteMpegOverflow read-write Parameter Input Overflow mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteT2miError read-write Parameter T2MI error mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteBtsError read-write Parameter BTS error mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes mmuteSfnReference read-write Parameter SFN reference mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteSfnMargin read-write Parameter SFN margin mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes mute10MHz read-write Parameter 10MHz mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteGainMargin read-write Parameter Gain margin mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteErrorMip read-write Parameter MIP Error mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes tsErrorMuteHysteresis read-write Parameter TS error mute hysteresis. See section
5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteCausesBinary read-only All mute causes of section 5.5.2.22 serialized at a

unique variable of 32 bits. Parameter exclusive for
SNMP. See tables 5.2 and 5.3.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
via SNMP
Bit Meaning
absence10mhz (0) 10MHz: 10MHz mute.
btsError (1) BTS error: BTS error mute.
sfnMargin (2) SFN margin: SFN margin mute.
sfnReference (3) SFN Reference: SFN Reference mute.
t2miError (4) T2MI error: T2MI error mute.
inputOverflow (5) Input overflow: Input Overflow mute.
tsError (6) TS error: TS error mute.
rfOff (7) RF off: Manual RF OFF.
rfInput (8) RF input: In case of input RF signal level is under the input
level threshold.
redundancyInitialization (9) Redundancy (Initialization): Device muted due to the re-
dundancy premises (during initialization process).
elevatedPower (10) Elevated power: Exceeded output power self-protection. See
section 2.3.4.2.
redundancySwitching (11) Redundancy (Switching): Device muted due to the redun-
dancy premises (during switching process).
redundancyLoad (12) Redundancy (Load): Device towards load muted due to the
redundancy premises.
redundancyAntenna (13) Redundancy (Antenna): Device towards antenna muted due
to the redundancy premises.
reversePower (14) Reverse power: Excessive reflected power self-protection.
temperature (15) Temperature: Overtemperature self-protection. See section
2.3.4.5.
Table 5.2: Meaning of the 32 bits (from bit 0 to bit 15) of the value of OID ex-
citer.rfOutput.mutes.muteCausesBinary. 1 = active. 0 = inactive.
page 173 Ed 04
via SNMP
Bit Meaning
muteCausesBin16 (16)
interlock2 (19) Interlock 2: In case of external INTERLOCK loop 2 of IN-
TERLOCK connector of medium power exciter is opened. See
section 2.2.9.
section 2.2.9.
interlock (21) Interlock R: In case of external INTERLOCK loop of 1+1
SWITCH connector is opened. See section ??.
rfLoop (22) RF loop: In case of external RF loop is opened. This safety
mute function is configurable (see section 2.2.2.4 for more
details).
hwErrorPd (23) HW error PD: General hardware error self-protection. See
section 2.3.4.3.
mipError (30) MIP error: MIP error mute.
gainMargin (31) Gain margin: Gain margin mute.
page 174 Ed 04
Technical Manual
reference
page 175
reference.referenceSource
reference.referenceSource referenceSourceStatus read-only Parameter Reference. See section 5.5.2.23.
reference.referenceSource referenceSwitchMode read-write Parameter Switching mode. See section 5.5.2.23.
reference.referenceSource synchronizationReady read-write Parameter Synchronization module ready. See
section 5.5.2.23.
reference.referenceSource externalReferenceOutputs read-write Parameter External reference outputs. See sec-
tion 5.5.2.23.
reference.referenceSource selected10Mhz read-only Parameter Selected 10MHz. See section 5.5.2.23.
reference.referenceSource selected1Pps read-only Parameter Selected 1PPS. See section 5.5.2.23.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
reference.synchronization
reference.synchronization synchronizationEnable read-write Parameter Mode. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization receiverType read-only Parameter Receiver type. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization receiverSerial read-only Parameter Serial Number. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization synchronizationStatus read-only Parameter Status. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization satellitesAntenna read-only Parameter Satellites antenna. See section
5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization input1pps read-only Parameter 1PPS input. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization synchronizationTemperature read-only Parameter Synchronization module temperature.
page 176

reference.synchronization synchronizationHoldover read-only Parameter Holdover time. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization synchronizationHoldoverThreshold read-write Parameter Holdover limit. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization endlessHoldoverThresholdEnable read-write Parameter Endless holdover. See section
5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization latitude read-only Parameter Latitude. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization longitude read-only Parameter Longitude. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization altitude read-only Parameter Altitude. See section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization synchronizationDate read-only Parameter synchronization module date. See
section 5.5.2.24.
reference.synchronization satellite01 read-only Parameter Satellite 1. See section 5.5.2.24.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
via SNMP
Following screenshot shows satellitesConstellationTable as example. Column index 1
shows the GPS satellites (up to 8) information and Column index 2 shows the GLONASS
satellites (up to 8) information:

reference.synchronization. Table for satellite GPS /
satellitesConstellationTable GLONASS information
reference.synchronization.
satellitesConstellationTable.
satellitesConstellationEntry
reference.synchronization. constellationIndex Index satellite constella-
satellitesConstellationTable. tion from #1 (GPS) to #2
satellitesConstellationEntry (GLONASS)
reference.synchronization. satellite01Info read-only Information about satellite 1.
satellitesConstellationTable. Parameter Satellite 1. See
satellitesConstellationEntry section 5.5.2.24.
page 177 Ed 04
Technical Manual
amplifier
amplifier configuredPower read-write Parameter Configured power. See section ??.
amplifier powerDisplayOffset read-write Parameter Power offset. See section ??.
page 178
amplifier forwardPower read-only Parameter Forward power. See section ??.

amplifier reversePower read-only Parameter Reverse power. See section ??.
amplifier exceededPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Exceeded power threshold. See section ??.
amplifier decreasedPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Decreased power threshold. See section ??.
amplifier reverserPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Reverse power threshold. See section ??.
amplifier amplifierStageTemperature read-only Parameter Amplifier stage temperature. See section ??.
amplifier ldmosTransistor1Current read-only Parameter LDMOS transistor 1 current. See section ??.
amplifier decreasedPowerThresholdNonCrit read-write Parameter Decreased power threshold [Non critical]. See section
??.

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
amplifier.amplifierStageTable Table for medium power amplifier stages status
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. Entry for a stage
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amplifierStageIndex Index stage from #1 to #4
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStControlStatus read-only Parameter Control status of the stage. See section 5.5.2.26.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStHwStatus read-only Parameter HW status of the stage. See section 5.5.2.26.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStMuteSelfProtection read-only Parameter Mute (Self-protection) of the stage. See section 5.5.2.26.
page 179
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStForwardPower read-only Parameter Forward power of the stage. See section 5.5.2.26.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStReversePower read-only Parameter Reverse power of the stage. See section 5.5.2.26.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStRfPhase read-write Parameter RF phase of the stage. See section 5.5.2.26.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStTemperature read-only Parameter Amplifier stage temperature of the stage. See section
amplifierStageEntry 5.5.2.26.
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStCurrent1 read-only Parameter LDMOS transistor 1 current of the stage. See section

via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
redundancy
redundancy.redundancy1p1
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1DeviceIdentifier read-only Parameter Device identifier. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1ControlBusStatus read-only Parameter Control status. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SystemIp read-write Parameter 1+1 system IP address. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1EnableNCB read-write Not available.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 rPrDdSwitchToAntenna read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Switch to antenna. See
section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1StatusNCB read-only Not available.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SwitchingCausesNCB read-only Not available.
page 180
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Mode read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Redundancy mode. See
section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1PriorityAB read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Priority. See section
5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1priorityNCB read-write Not available.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1AutoReturn read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Auto-return. See section
5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Switchings read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Performed switchings
(today). See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1MaximumSwitchings read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Maximum switchings /
day. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1InputTest read-write Not available.

redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1InputValidation read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Input validation. See
section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1PowerValidation read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Power validation. See sec-
tion 5.5.2.27.
via SNMP
Operation
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SwitchingHysteresis read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Switching hysteresis.
Ed 04
Technical Manual
redundancy.redundancy1p1.
r1p1DeviceA
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusA read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device A > Status. See
r1p1DeviceA section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. switchingCausesA read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device A > Switching
page 181
r1p1DeviceA causes. See section 5.5.2.27.

r1p1DeviceB
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusB read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device B > Status. See
r1p1DeviceB section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. switchingCausesB read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device B > Switching
r1p1DeviceB causes. See section 5.5.2.27.
r1p1RfStatus
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusWhenAntenna read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > RF status > When an-
r1p1RfStatus tenna. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusWhenLoad read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > RF status > When load.

r1p1RfStatus See section 5.5.2.27.
via SNMP
Operation
Ed 04
Technical Manual
r1p1AutoVerifications
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVerificationsStatus read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Enable. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDuration read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Duration. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVPerformedVerifications read-only Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Performed verifications. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVMaxVerifications read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Maximum verifications. See section 5.5.2.27.
page 182
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVNexVerification read-only Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Next verification in. See section 5.5.2.27.
r1p1AutoVReiterated
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedEnable read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications: Re-
r1p1AutoVReiterated iterated with cadence > Enable. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedPeriod read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications: Re-
r1p1AutoVReiterated iterated with cadence > Period. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedCadence read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications: Re-
r1p1AutoVReiterated iterated with cadence > Cadence. See section 5.5.2.27.
r1p1AutoVDaily
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDailyEnable read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications:

r1p1AutoVDaily Daily > Enable. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDailyTime read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications:
r1p1AutoVDaily Daily > Time. See section 5.5.2.27.
via SNMP
Operation
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion
Ed 04
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1PriorityInversionEnable read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Automatic priority inver-
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion sion > Enable. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1PriorityInversionPeriod read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Automatic priority inver-
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion sion > Period (days). See section 5.5.2.27.
Technical Manual
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1PriorityInversionTime read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Automatic priority inver-
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion sion > Time. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Reset read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to perform a reinitialization of redun-
dancy counters. Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Reset.
redundancy.
r1p1Synchronization
redundancy. r1p1SyncWeb read-write Parameter Synchronization > WEB interface. See section
r1p1Synchronization 5.5.2.28.
redundancy. r1p1SyncDate read-write Parameter Synchronization > Date, time and language.
page 183
r1p1Synchronization See section 5.5.2.28.

redundancy. r1p1SyncSnmp read-write Parameter Synchronization > SNMP. See section 5.5.2.28.
r1p1Synchronization
redundancy. r1p1SyncEvents read-write Parameter Synchronization > Events configuration
r1p1Synchronization [Alarms, Events, I/O interface]. See section 5.5.2.28.
redundancy. r1p1SyncInput read-write Parameter Synchronization > Input [IP, ASI, RX, Switch-
r1p1Synchronization ing]. See section 5.5.2.28.
redundancy. r1p1SyncRfInput read-write Parameter Synchronization > RF input. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncCanceller read-write Parameter Synchronization > Canceller. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncModulator read-write Parameter Synchronization > Modulator. See section

redundancy. r1p1SyncRfOutput read-write Parameter Synchronization > RF output. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncAmplifier read-write Parameter Synchronization > Amplifier. See section
via SNMP
Operation
redundancy. r1p1SyncExternalAmplifier read-write Parameter Synchronization > Amplifier (Medium power).
Ed 04

redundancy. r1p1SyncReference read-write Parameter Synchronization > Reference. See section
via SNMP
5.4.3.1.3 MIB module: status
The MIB module status allows you to check the current status for the specific alarms
available in the device in the same way as in the GUI menu Status (see section 5.5.3).
A GET query to each OID (read-only access) from this module can return one of the
following values:
• desactivedAlarm (0). This value is returned when the alarm is not triggered (OFF).
• activedAlarm (1). This value is returned when the alarm is triggered (ON).
• disabledAlarm (2). This value is returned when the alarm is disabled by the user
(NOT APPLY).
• noApplyAlarm (3). This value is returned when the alarm does not apply for the
current device configuration (NOT APPLY).
• initAlarm (6). This value is returned while the device is during the starting process
and the current status is still not available.
Module Name Description

faultSummationStatus Alarm Fault summation. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.1.
warningSummationStatus Alarm Warning summation. See
section 5.5.3.2.
statusAmplifier
statusAmplifier amplifierStatus Group alarm Amplifier. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.
statusAmplifier exceededOutputPower Alarm Exceeded power. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.3.
statusAmplifier decreasedOutputPower Alarm Decreased power. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.4.
statusAmplifier reflectPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.6.
statusAmplifier temperatureAmplifierStatus Alarm Temperature. See section
??.
statusAmplifier decreasedOutputPowerNonCriticalAlarm Decreased power [Non
critical]. See section 5.5.3.5.
statusAsiInput
statusAsiInput asiInputStatus Group alarm ASI input. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.
statusAsiInput asi1ErrorStatus Alarm ASI 1 error. See section
5.5.3.14.
5.5.3.15.
statusIpInput
statusIpInput ipInputStatus Group alarm IP input. See section
5.5.3.
statusIpInput ipSocket1ErrorStatus Alarm Socket 1 error. See section
5.5.3.16.
5.5.3.17.
page 184 Ed 04
via SNMP
statusSatelliteReceiver1 Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1satReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1unlockSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1rfSignalSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1lnbOverloadSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1temperatureSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2satReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2unlockSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2rfSignalSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2lnbOverloadSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2temperatureSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusTerrestialReceiver1
dttReceiver1AlarmStatus Group alarm DTT re-
ceiver 1. See section
5.5.3.
unlockDttReceiver1Status Alarm Unlock. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.18.
rfSignalDttReceiver1Status Alarm RF signal quality.
temperatureDttReceiver1Status Alarm Temperature.
statusTerrestialReceiver2 Not available.
dttReceiver2AlarmStatus Not available.
unlockDttReceiver2Status Not available.
rfSignalDttReceiver2Status Not available.
temperatureDttReceiver2Status Not available.
statusModulator
statusModulator modulatorStatus Group alarm Modulator.
See section 5.5.3.
statusModulator tsErrorStatus Alarm TS error. See
section 5.5.3.21.
statusModulator mipErrorStatus Alarm MIP error. See
section 5.5.3.22.
statusModulator mpegOverflowStatus Alarm Input Overflow.
page 185 Ed 04
via SNMP

statusModulator t2miErrorStatus Alarm T2MI error. See section
5.5.3.24.
statusModulator btsErrorStatus Alarm BTS error. See section
5.5.3.25.
statusModulator sfnErrorStatus Alarm SFN reference. See
section 5.5.3.26.
statusModulator sfnMargin Alarm SFN margin. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.27.
statusModulator temperatureModulatorStatus Alarm Temperature. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.28.
statusModulator modulatorOutputStatus Alarm Output level. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.29.
statusModulator modulatorShouldersStatus Alarm Shoulders. See section
5.5.3.30.
statusModulator modulatorMerStatus Alarm MER. See section
5.5.3.31.
statusModulator modulatorExternalFeedbackStatusAlarm External feedback
(Medium power). See section
5.5.3.32.
statusRfInput
statusRfInput rfInputStatus Alarm RF input. See section
??.
statusEchoCanceller
statusEchoCanceller echoCancellerStatus Group alarm IF processor.
See section 5.5.3.
statusEchoCanceller inputLevelStatus Alarm Input level. See section
??.
statusEchoCanceller reference10MHzStatus Alarm 10MHz reference. See
section ??.
statusEchoCanceller temperatureECStatus Alarm Temperature. See sec-
tion ??.
statusEchoCanceller outputLevelStatus Alarm Output level. See sec-
tion ??.
statusEchoCanceller cancellerShouldersStatus Alarm Shoulders. See section
??.
statusEchoCanceller gainMarginStatus Alarm Gain margin . See sec-
tion ??.
statusEchoCanceller cancExternalFeedbackStatus Not available.
statusRfOutput
statusRfOutput rfOutputStatus Alarm RF output. See section
5.5.3.34.
synchronizationModule
synchronizationModule synchronizationModuleStatus Group alarm Synchronization
module. See section 5.5.3.
synchronizationModule synchronizationAntennaStatus Alarm Satellites antenna. See
section 5.5.3.35.
synchronizationModule synchronizationUnlockStatus Alarm UnLock. See section
5.5.3.36.
page 186 Ed 04
via SNMP

synchronizationModule synchronizationHoldoverStatus Alarm Holdover not avail-
able. See section 5.5.3.37.
synchronizationModule synchronizationHwErrorStatus Alarm HW error. See section
5.5.3.38.
synchronizationModule temperatureSynchronizationStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section 5.5.3.39.
synchronizationModule input10MhzStatus Alarm 10MHz input. See
section 5.5.3.40.
synchronizationModule input1ppsStatus Alarm 1PPS input. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.41.
statusHwError
statusHwError hwErrorStatus Group alarm HW error. See
section 5.5.3.
statusHwError ldmosTransistorsStatus Alarm LDMOS transistors.
See section ??.
statusHwError internalErrorStatus Alarm Internal error. See
section 5.5.3.45.
statusHwError localOscillatorStatus Alarm Local oscillator. See
section 5.5.3.46.
statusHwError internalDcSupplyVoltageStatus Alarm Internal DC sup-
ply voltage. See section
5.5.3.47.
statusHwError nonLinearSenseFeedback Alarm Non-linear sense
feedback. See section ??.
statusHwError amplifierOutputSample Alarm Amplifier output
sample. See section ??.
statusFan
statusFan fanStatus Group alarm Fan. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.
statusFan fan1Status Alarm Fan 1. See section
5.5.3.48.
statusFan fan2Status Alarm Fan 2. See section ??.
statusFan fan3Status Alarm Fan 3. See section ??.
statusExternal
statusExternal externalStatus Group alarm External alarm.
See section 5.5.3.
statusExternal external1Status Alarm Input #1. See section
5.5.3.49.
5.5.3.50.
statusPowerSupply
statusPowerSupply acPowerSupplyStatus Group alarm AC power sup-
ply. See section 5.5.3.
statusPowerSupply psuAStatus Alarm PSU A. See section
??.
statusPowerSupply psuBStatus Alarm PSU B. See section
??.
page 187 Ed 04
via SNMP

statusAmplifierStage1
statusAmplifierStage1 amplifierStage1Status Group alarm Amplifier:
Stage 1. See section 5.5.3.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1InputLevelStatus Alarm Input level Stage 1.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1ExceededPowerStatus Alarm Exceeded power
Stage 1. See section 5.5.3.8.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1DecreasedPowerStatus Alarm Decreased power
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1ReflectedPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power
Stage 1. See section
5.5.3.10.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1TemperatureStatus Alarm Temperature Stage 1.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1HwErrorStatus Alarm HW error Stage 1.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1PsusErrorStatus Alarm PSUs error Stage 1.
5.5.3.10.
page 188 Ed 04
via SNMP

5.5.3.10.
5.5.3.10.
page 189 Ed 04
via SNMP
5.4.3.1.4 MIB module: eventTx
The eventTx module contains the traps available for the device. The table below lists all
available traps.
Each predefined alarm of the device (detailed at section 5.5.3) triggers a corresponding
trap with a change of its status (desactivedAlarm (0), activedAlarm (1) or disabledAlarm
(2) from status MIB module that are detailed at section 5.4.3.1.3 ). Following is detailed
the information sent with each trap of this type:
• The status of the corresponding OID from status MIB module (section 5.4.3.1.3).
• eventTrapLogId. Unique identifier of the alarm.
• eventTimeStamp. Date and hour (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss) of the alarm log entry.
• eventInitialStatus. Previous status of the alarm.
• eventFinalStatus. Current status of the alarm.
• eventAdditionalText. Extra description about the alarm log entry for a more detailed
information.
• redundancyId. Redundancy Identifier. Information for redundancy systems. The

sender is A (1) or B (2);otherwise will be without redundancy (0).
Each event of the detailed at section 5.5.1.7 triggers a corresponding trap. Following is
detailed the information sent with each trap of this type:
• eventTrapLogId. Unique identifier of the event.

• eventTimeStamp. Date and hour (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss) of the event log entry.
• eventAdditionalText. Extra description about the event log entry for a more detailed
information.
page 190 Ed 04
via SNMP
Trap OID from status Description

faultSummationTrap faultSummationStatus Alarm Fault summation.
warningSummationTrap warningSummationStatus Alarm Warning summa-
tion. See section 5.5.3.2.
amplifierSumTrap amplifierStatus Group alarm Amplifier.
See section 5.5.3.
exceededOutputPowerTrap exceededOutputPower Alarm Exceeded power.
decreasedOutputPowerTrap decreasedOutputPower Alarm Decreased power.
reflectedPowerTrap reflectPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power.
temperatureAmplifierTrap temperatureAmplifierStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section ??.
asiInputTrap asiInputStatus Group alarm ASI input.
See section 5.5.3.
asi1ErrorTrap asi1ErrorStatus Alarm ASI 1 error. See
section 5.5.3.14.
section 5.5.3.15.
ipInputSumTrap ipInputStatus Group alarm IP input. See
section 5.5.3.
ipSocket1ErrorTrap ipSocket1ErrorStatus Alarm Socket 1 error. See
section 5.5.3.16.
section 5.5.3.17.
satReceiver1Trap Not available.
unlockSatReceiver1Trap Not available.
rfSignalSatReceiver1Trap Not available.
lnbOverloadSatReceiver1Trap Not available.
temperatureSatReceiver1Trap Not available.
dttReceiver1Trap dttReceiver1AlarmStatus Group alarm DTT receiver
1. See section 5.5.3.
unlockDttReceiver1Trap unlockDttReceiver1Status Alarm Unlock. See section
5.5.3.18.
rfSignalDttReceiver1Trap rfSignalDttReceiver1Status Alarm RF signal quality.
temperatureDttReceiver1Trap temperatureDttReceiver1StatusAlarm Temperature. See
section 5.5.3.20.
page 191 Ed 04
via SNMP

dttReceiver2Trap Not available.
unlockDttReceiver2Trap Not available.
rfSignalDttReceiver2Trap Not available.
temperatureDttReceiver2Trap Not available.
modulatorSumTrap modulatorStatus Group alarm Modula-
tor. See section 5.5.3.
tsErrorTrap tsErrorStatus Alarm TS error. See
section 5.5.3.21.
mipErrorTrap mipErrorStatus Alarm MIP error. See
section 5.5.3.22.
mpegOverflowTrap mpegOverflowStatus Alarm Input Overflow.
t2miErrorTrap t2miErrorStatus Alarm T2MI error. See
section 5.5.3.24.
sfnReferenceTrap sfnErrorStatus Alarm SFN reference.
sfnMarginTrap sfnMargin Alarm SFN margin. See
section 5.5.3.27.
temperatureModulatorTrap temperatureModulatorStatus Alarm Temperature.
modulatorOutputTrap modulatorOutputStatus Alarm Output level.
rfOutputTrap rfOutputStatus Alarm RF output. See
section 5.5.3.34.
cancellerShouldersTrap cancellerShouldersStatus Alarm Shoulders. See
section ??.
input10MhzTrap input10MhzStatus Alarm 10MHz input.
input1ppsTrap input1ppsStatus Alarm 1PPS input. See
section 5.5.3.41.
synchronizationModuleTrap synchronizationModuleStatus Group alarm Synchro-
nization module. See
section 5.5.3.
synchronizationAntennaTrap synchronizationAntennaStatus Alarm Satellites an-
tenna. See section
5.5.3.35.
synchronizationUnlockTrap synchronizationUnlockStatus Alarm UnLock. See
section 5.5.3.36.
synchronizationHoldoverTrap synchronizationHoldoverStatus Alarm Holdover not
available. See section
5.5.3.37.
synchronizationHwErrorTrap synchronizationHwErrorStatus Alarm HW error. See
section 5.5.3.38.
temperatureSynchronizationTrap temperatureSynchronizationStatus Alarm Temperature.
reference10MHzTrap reference10MHzStatus Alarm 10MHz refer-
ence. See section
??.
page 192 Ed 04
via SNMP

acPowerSupplyTrap acPowerSupplyStatus Group alarm AC power sup-
psuATrap psuAStatus Alarm PSU A. See section
??.
psuBTrap psuBStatus Alarm PSU B. See section
??.
hwErrorTrap hwErrorStatus Group alarm HW error. See
section 5.5.3.
ldmosTransistorsTrap ldmosTransistorsStatus Alarm LDMOS transistors.
See section ??.
internalErrorTrap internalErrorStatus Alarm Internal error. See
section 5.5.3.45.
localOscillatorTrap localOscillatorStatus Alarm Local oscillator. See
section 5.5.3.46.
internalDcSupplyVoltageTrap internalDcSupplyVoltageStatus Alarm Internal DC sup-
5.5.3.47.
fanSumTrap fanStatus Group alarm Fan. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.
fan1Trap fan1Status Alarm Fan 1. See section
5.5.3.48.
fan2Trap fan2Status Alarm Fan 2. See section ??.
fan3Trap fan3Status Alarm Fan 3. See section ??.
externalAlarmTrap externalStatus Group alarm External alarm.
See section 5.5.3.
externalAlarm1Trap external1Status Alarm Input #1. See section
5.5.3.49.
5.5.3.50.
btsErrorTrap btsErrorStatus Alarm BTS error. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.25.
nonLinearSenseFeedbackTrap nonLinearSenseFeedback Alarm Non-linear sense
feedback. See section ??.
modulatorShouldersTrap modulatorShouldersStatus Alarm Shoulders. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.30.
rfInputTrap rfInputStatus Alarm RF input. See section
??.
echoCancellerTrap echoCancellerStatus Group alarm IF processor.
See section 5.5.3.
inputLevelTrap inputLevelStatus Alarm Input level. See sec-
tion ??.
temperatureECTrap temperatureECStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section ??.
outputLevelTrap outputLevelStatus Alarm Output level. See
section ??.
amplifierOutputSampleTrap amplifierOutputSample Alarm Amplifier output
page 193 Ed 04
via SNMP

gainMarginStatusTrap gainMarginStatus Alarm Gain margin . See
section ??.
cancExternalFeedbackStatus- cancExternalFeedbackStatus Not available.
Trap
modulatorMerStatusTrap modulatorMerStatus Alarm MER. See section
5.5.3.31.
modExternalFeedbackStatus- modulatorExternalFeedback- Alarm External feedback
Trap Status (Medium power). See sec-
tion 5.5.3.32.
amplifierStage1SumTrap amplifierStage1Status Group alarm Amplifier:
5.5.3.
aS1InputLevelTrap aS1InputLevelStatus Alarm Input level Stage 1.
aS1ExceededPowerTrap aS1ExceededPowerStatus Alarm Exceeded power
5.5.3.8.
aS1DecreasedPowerTrap aS1DecreasedPowerStatus Alarm Decreased power
5.5.3.9.
aS1ReflectedPowerTrap aS1ReflectedPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power
5.5.3.10.
aS1TemperatureTrap aS1TemperatureStatus Alarm Temperature Stage
1. See section 5.5.3.11.
aS1HwErrorTrap aS1HwErrorStatus Alarm HW error Stage 1.
5.5.3.
5.5.3.8.
5.5.3.9.
5.5.3.10.
page 194 Ed 04
via SNMP

5.5.3.
5.5.3.8.
5.5.3.9.
5.5.3.10.
5.5.3.
5.5.3.8.
5.5.3.9.
5.5.3.10.
aS1PsusErrorTrap aS1PsusErrorStatus Alarm PSUs error Stage 1.
decreasedOuputPowerNonCrit- decreasedOutputPowerNon- Alarm Decreased power
Trap Critical [Non critical]. See section
5.5.3.5.
page 195 Ed 04
via SNMP
Trap Description
dateAndTimeReferenceEventTrap Event Date and time source. See section 5.5.1.7.
systemInitEventTrap Event System init. See section 5.5.1.7.
guiOperationEventTrap Event GUI operation. See section 5.5.1.7.
muteEventTrap Event Mute. See section 5.5.1.7.
inputSourceSelectedEventTrap Event Input source selected. See section 5.5.1.7.
selectedReferenceEventTrap Event Selected reference. See section 5.5.1.7.
outputRelay1Trap Event Output relay #1. See section 5.5.1.7.
forcedMfnEventTrap Event Forced MFN (reference error). See section
5.5.1.7.
localModeTimeoutEventTrap Event Local mode timeout. See section 5.5.1.7.
redundancyEventTrap Event Redundancy. See section 5.5.1.7.
configurationFromBackupEventTrap Event Configuration backups. See section 5.5.1.7.
systemShutdownEventTrap Event System shutdown. See section 5.5.1.7.
lockingStart1ppsEventTrap Event 1PPS locking restart. See section 5.5.1.7.
Trap Description
testTrap Test trap. Set OID sendTestTrap to the value 1 to
send.
keepaliveTrap keepalive trap sent automatically after a user-
configurable timeout. See section 5.5.1.4.
5.4.3.1.5 MIB module: conformance
The conformance module contains definitions of groups of managed objects for the
SNMP conformance.

objectGroups
objectGroups groupFS Group of objects of transmitter
objectGroups groupEvents Contains all the objects from test branch
of the MIB
objectGroups groupObsoleted Obsoleted OIDs
objectGroups groupFSevents Traps group
groupCompilance
groupCompilance fsBasicCompilance Contains all groups
page 196 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5 Menu structure

The menus are structured in a tree disposition as follows:
• System.
– General.
– Network interfaces.
– WEB interface.
– SNMP.
∗ Agent.
∗ IRT.
– Events configuration.
∗ Alarms.
∗ Events.
∗ I/O interface.
– Device info.
– Service.
∗ Reset.
∗ SW Upgrade.
∗ Forward Power.
∗ RF phase.
∗ Linear precorrection.
∗ Non-linear precorrection.
∗ Efficiency.
∗ Power supply.
· Exciter.
· Stage 1.
· Stage 2 (b) .
· Stage 3 (b) .
· Stage 4 (b) .
∗ Cooling.
· Exciter.
· Stage 1.
· Stage 2 (b) .
· Stage 3 (b) .
· Stage 4 (b) .
· Rack 1 (f ) .
· Rack 2 (f ) .
· Rack 3 (f ) .
· Rack 4 (f ) .
∗ Configuration backups.
∗ Install HW / SW.
∗ Service report.
∗ Maintenance log.
• Setup.
page 197 Ed 04
Menu structure
– Input.
∗ IP socket 1.
∗ IP socket 2.
∗ ASI 1.
∗ ASI 2.
∗ DVB-T/T2 Receiver 1(e) .
∗ Input switching.
– Exciter.
∗ Modulator.
· General.
· System.
· Network.
· T2 frame(a1) .
· PLP(a1) .
· Modulation(a2) .
· Program Specific Information(a3) .
· Precorrector.
∗ RF output.
· RF configuration.
· Mutes.
– Reference.
∗ Reference source.
∗ Synchronization module(c) .
– Amplifier.
∗ Configuration.
∗ Stage 1 .
∗ Stage 2 (b) .
∗ Stage 3 (b) .
∗ Stage 4 (b) .
– Redundancy(d) .
∗ Configuration.
∗ Syncronization .
• Status.
• EventLog.
(a1)
Only available in DVB-T2 standard.
(a2)
Only available in DVB-T or ISDB-T standard.
(a3)
Only available in ISDB-T standard.
(b)
Only available if the corresponding amplifier is installed.
(c)
Only available with Synchronization module hardware option.
(d)
Only available any redundancy software option enabled.
(e)
Only available with DVB-T/T2 receiver hardware option.
(f )
Only available if the corresponding rack coolong control module is installed.
page 198 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.1 System Menu

5.5.1.1 System > General
Language
Selects the language for the GUIs (Web and frontal display). Selectable languages are
spanish, english or french.
Name
A text parameter of up to 15 alphanumeric characters to set the name of the device.
Control board temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the control board.
Location
A text parameter of up to 15 alphanumeric characters to set the location of the de-

vice. This parameter is used to fill the value for the SNMP OID sysLocation available
at iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib-2.system.
Operation mode
Allows you check the operation mode of the device: local or remote.
Auto return to remote mode
In case of device in local mode, after this configurable time (2 minutes, 30 minutes or
12 hours) without any operation, the device changes into remote mode automatically in
order to avoid an accidentally blocking of remote access. It is possible to select the option
disabled to avoid the automatically return.
Date / time
Current
Current data and time of the system, current source (Manual, GNSS, NTP or TDT) and
current status (Sync or Not Sync).
Main source
To set the main date and time source. Possible values are Manual, GNSS, NTP or TDT.
Secondary source
To set the secondary date and time source in case of a fault in the main source. Possible
values are - (disabled), GNSS, NTP or TDT.
page 199 Ed 04
Menu structure
Manual
To set a date and time with format yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss. Click at the icon to apply the
current date and time from local host. Only with main source manual selected.
Time zone
Allows you to select the country/zone with the corresponding UTC time offset and daylight-
saving rule. This parameter can be set with a disdabled value.
UTC offset
To set a GMT offset manually. From -12 to +14. Only configurable by the user with the
parameter time zone disabled and a non-manual source selected.
NTP Server
To set the IP address of main NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. Only with NTP.
Alternative NTP Server

To set, optionally, the IP address of a sencodary NTP (Network Time Protocol) server.
Only with NTP.
Update period
To set the Update period in minutes of NTP server. Only with NTP.
NTP Status
To show the status of the communication with the NTP server: Synchronized, Syntax
Error, Server Connection Error, Server Dropped Leap Not In Sync., Server Dropped Leap
Not In Sync. No Data, Server Dropped Strata Too High, Server Dropped Step Time
Server, No server suitable for synchronization found, Unknown Error, Not Synchronized.
Local NTP Server
To show the status of local NTP Server. In case of the date and time of the device is
synchronized with the data from the GNSS, the device automatically starts a NTP server
in the device IP address that can be use for another devices to get the date and time.
Possible values of this parameter are running or not running.
page 200 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.1.2 System > Network interfaces

Remote interface
DHCP
DHCP client. If this parameter is enabled the configuration of the Ethernet remote inter-
face is done by a DHCP server.
Remote IP address
IP address of Ethernet interface for remote operation. Factory default 192.168.0.100.
Netmask
Network mask of Ethernet interface for remote operation.
Gateway
Gateway address of Ethernet interface for remote operation. For access from an external
network. Factory default 192.168.0.1.
DNS Server
Allows configuring an address for a DNS server that can be used for example for config-
uring the NTP server by name instead for IP address.
MAC address
MAC address of Ethernet interface.
Local interface
Local IP address
IP address of Ethernet interface for local operation. Factory default 192.168.1.1.
NOTE:
Local interface is only link up when the device is in LOCAL mode.
Ports configurations
GbE1..GbE4
Indicates the functionality for each Ethernet port (GbE1: Local, GbE2: Remote, GbE3:
IP socket 1, GbE4: IP socket 2). See section 2.2.2.3 for more detailed information.
Links status
GbE1..GbE4
Status of the link for each Ethernet connection. Possible values are: Disabled, DOWN
when link is not possible and 10M, 100M or 1000M when link is up.
page 201 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.1.3 System > WEB interface

Web autorefresh
Autorefresh
For enabling or disabling automatic refresh of the web page.
Timeout
Timeout in seconds for the automatic refresh of the web page. This parameter can be set
from 1 to 100 seconds.
User control
This menu allows you to change the passwords for the available Web user accounts.
User accounts:
User
Selects the user account.
Actual password
Type the actual password for selected user account.
New password
Type the new password for selected user account.
Confirm new password
Retype the new password for selected user account.
Set default passwords

This menu allows you to set the passwords to its default values for the available Web user
accounts.
admin
To set the default password for admin user account.
public
To set the default password for public user account.
5.5.1.4 System > SNMP > Agent

This menu allows you to manage the SNMP agent.
page 202 Ed 04
Menu structure
MIBs IRT files
Link for downloading a ZIP file with the IRT MIBs.
MIB
Link for downloading the MIB file.
MIB version
Indicates the current version of the proprietary MIB.
Send a trap test
To perform a test of the trap sending. Trap test button set OID sendTestTrap to the value
1, which triggers a testTrap.
Send the traps from activated alarms
To perform the sending of a trap for each of the current triggered alarms in the device.
Traps sync button set OID fastTrapSync to the value 1.
Agent configuration
Read community 1
For defining the read community 1 for GET queries. By default: public.
Read community 2
Write community 1
For defining the write community 1 for SET queries. By default: private.
Write community 2
Authentication trap
For enabling or disabling the sending of the authentication trap. By default: enabled.
Authentication trap is the standard trap snmpTrapOID (OID: .1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5) that

the SNMP agent sent when a query with a wrong read/write community is received.
Enable keepalive trap
For enabling or disabling the Enable keepalive trap. By default: disabled.
If this parameter is enabled, the SNMP Agent resends a keepaliveTrap after the timeout
that is defined in the next parameter.
page 203 Ed 04
Menu structure
Keepalive trap
For defining Keepalive trap retries timeout in seconds. By default: 10s.
Traps in local mode
For enabling or disabling the traps sending in local mode. By default: Disabled.
Send initial traps
For enabling or disabling the sending of all traps at the system init. By default: Disabled.
Sink index # (up to 4)

Sink status
For enabling or disabling the trap sink.
Traps versions
For selecting the trap version. Possible values are: v1Trap, v2Trap, v2Inform
Destination IP
For defining the trap sink destination IP address.
Destination port
For defining the trap sink destination UDP port. By default: 162.
Inform timeout
Only for informs. For defining, in seconds, timeout for resend the inform if acknowledg-
ment is not received. By default: 5s.
Informs retries
Only for informs. Number of retries for send inform while acknowledgment is not re-
ceived. By default: 0.
Trap community
For defining the trap community for current sink. By default: public.
5.5.1.5 System > SNMP > IRT

This menu allows you to check the status of the OID values of the IRT MIB managed
by then agent. Beside, for each OID, this menu allows you to enable the sending of the
corresponding trap and to enable the priority. The modules from the IRT MIB that are
shown in this menu depends on the device configuration (single drive, dual drive or N+1).
This menu contains also a link for downloading a ZIP file with the IRT MIB files needed
for the SNMP manager.
page 204 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.1.6 System > Events configuration > Alarms

This menu allows you to set up the settings for the specific alarms available in the device
(see section 5.5.3).
For each alarm following settings are available:
Setting Description
On To enable or disable the alarm
Log To enable or disable that each change at the alarm status will be
registered as a new entry at the EventLog.
SNMP To enable or disable the corresponding SNMP trap.
Fault To add the alarm to the Fault summation.
Warning To add the alarm to the Warning summation.
LED To link the status of the alarm with the status of ALARMS LED
at frontal panel. Red in case of Fault is also checked, orange in
case of Warning is also checked.
R#1 To link the triggered of the alarm with the activation the output
relay #1 in the output I/O connector at the rear panel. Relay #1 is
normally open. Closed when the alarm is triggered.
DD To enable or disable the alarm as a switching cause for DD re-
dundancy.
1+1 To enable or disable the alarm as a switching cause for 1+1 re-
dundancy.
N+1 To enable or disable the alarm as a switching criterion for N+1
redundancy.
5.5.1.7 System > Events configuration > Events

This menu allows you to enable or disable that each triggered event from the list will be
For each event following settings are available:
Setting Description
On To enable or disable the event
Log To enable or disable that each event will be registered as a new
entry at the EventLog.
The list of events available are:
1. System init. Device initialization.
2. System shutdown. Device shutdown.
3. GUI operation. Any configuration change performed by the user.
4. Mute. Any of the mutes of the device (including the RF ON/OFF) is switching off
RF output.
5. Forced MFN. The device change into the MFN forced by a reference lost.
6. Input source selected. Any change in the switching input selector.
page 205 Ed 04
Menu structure
7. Selected reference. Any change in the switching reference input selector.
8. Date and time source. Any change in the source of the device date and time.
9. Output relay #1. Any change in the output status of the relay #1.
11. Local mode timeout. The device change automatically into the remote mode due
to 30 minutes without any user operation.
12. Redundancy. Any change in the redundancy status.
13. 1PPS locking restart. Restart of the locking algorithm process of the OCXO when
abrupt changes are detected in the 1PPS signal from the external input.
14. Standard auto-configuration. Auto-configuration of modulation standard from

DVB-T to DVB-T2 (or viceversa).
15. Configuration backups. Any action performed at the Configuration backups menu.
5.5.1.8 System > Events configuration > I/O interface

This menu allows you to manage the two inputs and the two outputs of the I/O interface
port.
Input #
Current status
Allows you to check the current status of the input #. The possible values are open or
closed.
Description
Allows you to define an user description for the input #.
Stand-by status
Allows you to define the stand-by status (open or closed) for the input #.
Mode
Allows you to define if the activation for the input # is by level or by pulse. RF loop
mode allows you to configure this input for external RF loop (see section 2.2.2.4 for more
details).
Pulse duration
In case of activation by pulse, this parameter allows you to define the pulse duration in
seconds.
Output relay #
Current status
Allows you to check the current status of the output relay #. The possible values are open
or closed.
page 206 Ed 04
Menu structure
Description
Allows you to define an user description for the output relay #.
Stand-by status
Allows you to define the stand-by status (open or closed) for the output relay #.
Mode
Allows you to define if the actuation of the output relay # is a level change or a pulse.
Pulse duration
In case of actuation by pulse, this parameter allows you to define the pulse duration in
seconds.
5.5.1.9 System > Device info

Part Number
Part number of the device.
Serial Number
Serial number of the device.
Software version
Software version of the device.
Software ID
Identifier of the Software release.
Hardware basis
A list with the Hardware basis installed in the device.
Hardware options
A list with the Hardware options installed in the device.
NOTE:
Hardware options detailed in section 2.11 can be installed by the user.
Software options
A list with the software options installed in the device.
NOTE:
Software options detailed in section 2.11 can be installed by the user.
page 207 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.1.10 System > Service > Reset

This menu allows you to perform the reset actions for service or troubleshooting purpose:
• System reset. To perform a reinitialization of all memories/FPGAs and a reboot of

operating system/application. See section 7.4.1 for more details.
• RF reset. To perform a RF output restart in order to restore the exciter and the am-
plifier stages from an automatic self-protection. See section 7.4.2 for more details.
5.5.1.11 System > Service > SW Upgrade

This menu allows you to perform a software upgrade of the device.
5.5.1.12 System > Service > Forward power

This menu allows you to perform a power calibration of the device.
Needed steps are:

1. Connect the power meter to RF output port. Previously to disconnect/connect the
RF output port make sure that the device is not producing any RF signal.
2. Set the power displayed at power meter in watts into the corresponding field.
3. Press Calibrate button to perform the calibration.
4. Check that the current power displayed in the power meter and in the device are
the same.
It is possible to check the result of the forward power calibration process.
5.5.1.13 System > Service > RF phase

This menu allows you to perform the automatic process for fine adjusting of the phase
of each stage in case of coupled amplifiers in order to get the best balance between the
amplifier stages, that correspons with the maximum value of the forward power at the
combiner output (keeping the gain of each amplifier stage).
The procedure takes about a minute and it is performed by the transmitter itself without
the necessity of any additional measurement equipment.
Be sure that the transmitter maintains the output power during this process and press
Execute button.
5.5.1.14 System > Service > Linear Precorrection

This menu allows you to perform a manual and one-shot calibration of the linear precor-
rection for the two available types of digital linear precorrection: after band-pass filter
to correct the group delay and compensate the frequency response of the output channel
band-pass filter or before band-pass filter to equalize the response of amplitude at the
output of the amplifier.
For calibration before band-pass filter, needed steps are:
page 208 Ed 04
Menu structure
1. Press Calibrate button at Before BPF title to perform the calibration. Process takes
less that a minute. The device must be turn on during the process.
2. Once the calibration is finished it is posible to check the result of the precorrection
process at the status parameter. Possible values for status parameter are:
• Not calibrated. If the calibration process was not performed never or in case
of a change of the output frequency.
• Calibrated before BPF. If the calibration process was successfully.
For calibration after band-pass filter, needed steps are:
1. Connect a sample of the output of the band-pass filter to the feedback input
port (labelled as DAP L) at rear side of the device. The level must be within the
limits in the specifications of this port.
2. Press Calibrate button at After BPF to perform the calibration. Process takes about
3 minutes. The device must be turn on during the process.
3. Once the calibration is finished the message Linear precorrection calibrated suc-
cessfully. Disconnect the signal at the ’DAP L’ input port is shown. Disconnect the
signal at the feedback input port to complete the process.
It is possible to check the result of the precorrection process at the status parameter.
Possible values for status parameter are:
• Not calibrated. If the calibration process was not performed never or in case of a
change of the output frequency.
• Calibrated after BPF. If the calibration process was successfully.
NOTE:
The values of the linear precorrection are deleted once an output frequency
change is performed. So this process must be repeated in case of change
of output frequency.
5.5.1.15 System > Service > Non-linear Precorrection

This menu allows you to perform a manual and one-shot optimization of the Non-linear
precorrection.
To launch this optimization is only needed to press the Execute button.
Process takes about 2 minutes. The device must be turn on during the process.
It is possible to check the result of the precorrection process at the status parameter and
also to remove the optimization by pressing the Remove optimization button.
page 209 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.1.16 System > Service > Efficiency

This menu allows you to perform the Efficiency Improvement process. A target is fixed
by the user and the device automatically adjust the power amplifier transistors biasing in
order to get the best available efficiency for such target. Possible targets are Shoulders
(average between upper and lower) or MER rms.
To launch this process is only needed to press the Execute button.
It is possible to check the result of the process and also to remove the improvement by
pressing the Remove improvement button.
It is possible to check the current measure of AC Apparent power (VA) and AC Effi-
ciency (%) of the device.
5.5.1.17 System > Service > Power supply > Exciter

This menu allows you to check up to 3 internal DC voltages of the exciter:
• DC line 1: 1.1V.
• DC line 2: 5V.
• DC line 3: 23V.
5.5.1.18 System > Service > Power supply > Stage X

This menu allows you to check up to 3 internal DC voltages of the amplifier stage X (X =
1..4):
DC line 1 voltage
Indicates the current voltage of the DC line 1 of the amplifier stage.
DC line 2 voltage
Indicates the current voltage of the DC line 2 of the amplifier stage.
PSU-Z status (Z =A,B,C)
Indicates the current status of the corresponding power supply unit (see figure 2.19) of
the amplifier stage. When the power supply is correctly installed, this parameter shows
information about its internal status (Input voltage, Input current, Output voltage, Output
current, Temperature, Fan1 speed and Fan2 speed). Another possible statuses are: Not
installed or Communication error.
5.5.1.19 System > Service > Cooling > Exciter

This menu allows you to perform service tasks related with fan of the exciter:
• Fan 1 status. To check the fan status: running, stand by or failed.
• Speed. To check the fan speed (% maximum speed).
page 210 Ed 04
Menu structure
• Fan 1 operating time. To check the fan operating time in hours.
• Fan 1 reset button. To perform a reinitialization of the operating time counter of fan
in case of a fan replacement. See section 8.11 for more details.
5.5.1.20 System > Service > Cooling > Stage X

This menu allows you to perform service tasks related with two fans of each amplifier
stage X (X = 1..4):
• Fan speed. To check the fans speed (% maximum speed).

• Fan 1 operating time. To check the fan 1 operating time in hours.
• Fan 2 operating time. To check the fan 2 operating time in hours.
1 in case of a fan replacement. See section 8.11 for more details.
2 in case of a fan replacement. See section 8.11 for more details.
5.5.1.21 System > Service > Cooling > Rack X

This menu allows you to perform service tasks related with rack cooling control module
X (X = 1..4):
Tag
Allows you to define an user description for the module.
Control status
Indicates the status of the control bus (CAN) between the module and the exciter. Possi-
ble statuses are:
• Ok. Control communication ok.
• Communication error. Communication error between the module and the exciter.
Check the CTRL bus connection and addressing.
• Error (SW version). Module microcontroller software version error. Upgrade or

reinstall the software of the device at System > Service > SW upgrade.
• Error (no SW version). Module microcontroller without software version. Upgrade

or reinstall the software of the device at System > Service > SW upgrade.
• Error (No address). Module without control addressing. Set the correct address
• Error (Collision). Module addressing problem. Set the correct address (see section
2.3.2).
page 211 Ed 04
Menu structure
HW status
Indicates the general status of the module. Possible statuses are:
• Ok. HW status OK.
• EEPROM. Internal communication error with the EEPROM memmory.
• TEMP. Internal communication error with the temperature sensor.
• PRESION. Internal communication error with the pressure sensor.
• FAN1, FAN2. FAN 1/2 is not detected.
• Comm. Communication error between the module and the exciter. Check the
CTRL bus connection and addressing.
Cooling mode
For selecting the cooling mode. Possible values are:
• Pressure. Automatic control of turbines speed for air pressure difference.
• Temperature. Automatic control of turbines speed for temperature.
• Manual. Manual regulation of the turbines speed.
Fan 1
For enabling the control of the turbine 1.
Fan 2
For enabling the control of the turbine 2 (if exist).
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature in o C measured at the module board.
The design of the module chassis, with large slots that allow the free circulation of air into
the module, allows to consider the temperature measured on the module board as the
measurement of ambient temperature inside the rack where it is installed.
Target
In case of temperature cooling mode, this parameter allows you to set the target for the
temperature of the rack that turbines must keep.
Manual mode
Fan 1 speed
In case of manual mode, this parameter allows you to set manually the speed (% of the
maximum speed) of the turbine 1.
page 212 Ed 04
Menu structure
Fan 2 speed
Fan 1
Speed
This parameter allows you to check the configured speed (% of the maximum speed) to
the turbine 1.
Tachometer
This parameter allows you to check the speed (in rpm) measured from the tachometer of
the turbine 1.
Operating time
This parameter allows you to check the operating time (in hours) of the turbine 1.
Fan rest
This button allows you to performa reinitialization of the operating time couter of the
turbine 1.
Fan 2
Speed
the turbine 2.
Tachometer
the turbine 2.
Operating time
Fan rest
turbine 2.
Identify
Board index
This parameter allows you to check the control address of the module.
page 213 Ed 04
Menu structure
Identify
This button allows you to identify visually the current module. When Identify button is
pressed, the LED indicators are blinking during a few seconds in order to get a visual
indentification of the module.
5.5.1.22 System > Service > Configuration backups

This menu allows you to manage the configuration files (with .trc extension).
Through this menu is possible to save the current configuration to a file and apply this
configuration (partially or completely) to the same device or to another device.
5.5.1.23 System > Service > Install HW / SW

This menu allows you to install a new hardware or software option into the device.
5.5.1.23.1 Install HW
• Synchronization board. Allows you to install the GNSS HW option or the Exter-
nal reference module (default). Follow the instructions detailed at section 8.4.1 or
8.4.2, respectively.
• Type of redundancy. Allows you to select the type of redundancy from the avail-
ables: SD (Single Drive), 1+1 [Device A], 1+1 [Device B], Dual Drive [Exciter
A], Dual Drive [Exciter B], N+1 [B], N+1 [An] (n=1,2,...,N). Follow the instructions
detailed at section 4.1.
• Number of amplifier stages. Allows you to install the number of stages (from 1 to
4) that composes the amplifier.
• PSU amplifier stage: Stage index X . For the amplifier stage X (X =1..4), allows
you to install or uninstall a power supply unit of the amplifier (PSU-A; PSU-B;
PSU-C). Follow the instructions detailed at section 8.4.5 or 8.4.6, respectively.
• Rack cooling. Allows you to install the rack cooling control modules (detailed at
section 2.10) up to 4. The parameter Detected boards allows you to detect if a
new module has been connected into the control bus. Once detected, it is possible
to assign one of the free control addresses (at parameter Assign address) or re-
move the address previously assigned (at parameter Delete address). To install (or
desinstall) one of the detected modules check (or uncheck) the corresponding box
at Installl rack cooling x (x=1..4). To complete the installation (or desinstallation)
of a cooling rack module follow the instructions of the section ?? (or ??).
5.5.1.23.2 Install SW
The device is able to detect automatically which SW option is being active. Follow the
instructions detailed at section 8.5.
5.5.1.24 System > Service > Service report

This menu allows you to generate and download a service report with current status of
the device.
page 214 Ed 04
Menu structure
To launch this process is only needed to press the Generate button. After a few seconds
a compressed file with extension .bin will be available to send to to your customer support
contact.
5.5.1.25 System > Service > Maintenance log

The maintenance log is is a plain text field that allows you to write down annotations
about the device that can be checked in the future.
Write directly into the text box and press the Apply button to save the changes.
A shortcut icon is available at the menu bar of the web GUI to a quick access to this menu.
page 215 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.2 Setup Menu

5.5.2.1 Setup > Input > IP socket 1
This menu allows you to configure the IP socket 1 for inputs with transport streams over
IP.
Enable
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the socket.
Transmission mode
This parameter allows you to select the transmission mode: Unicast or multicast.
Unicast IP
This parameter allows you to set the Unicast IP address for the socket.
Multicast IP
This parameter allows you to set the Multicast IP address for the socket.
Source IP (multicast)
This parameter allows you to set the IP address as source for multicast services.
IGMP version 3 adds support for source filtering; that is, the ability for a system to report
interest in receiving packets only from specific source addresses sent to a particular mul-
ticast address. This facility eases the allocation of IPv4 multicast addresses.
Use value 0.0.0.0 to avoid source filtering, it means to accept packets from all addresses.
Enable VLAN
Allows enabling or disable the VLAN.
VLAN Identifier
Allows setting the VLAN identifier from 1 to 4094.
Port
This parameter allows you to set the port for the socket.
NOTE:
RFC 3550 indicates that RTP should use an even UDP port number, with the
corresponding RTCP stream using the next higher (odd) port number.
page 216 Ed 04
Menu structure
Protocol
This parameter allows selecting the protocol for the encapsulation of the incoming trans-
port stream. The possible values are: RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) or UDP (User
Datagram Protocol).
Buffer duration
This parameter allows setting the buffer duration in ms in order to absorb the network
jitter and the FEC process. Check section 2.2.3.3 for a more detailed information about
the configuration of this parameter.
FEC (RTP)
Indicates the rows and columns in case of RTP with FEC (Forward Error Correction).
Input bitrate
Indicates the data rate (in Mbps) for the IP Socket input stream.
Latency
Indicates the latency (in ms) for the IP Socket.
This is the latency that will be incurred by the FEC process and jitter buffer (both are
determined by the buffer duration parameter). This parameter does not include additional
latencies caused by the seamless process and the modulator processing.

This menu allows you to configure the IP socket 2 for inputs with transport streams over IP.
The available parameters of this menu are the same as for the IP socket 1.
5.5.2.3 Setup > Input > ASI 1

This menu allows you to configure the ASI 1 input enabling.

5.5.2.5 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T)

This menu allows you to configure the DTT receiver 1 for re-transmitter operation.
Enable
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the receiver.
Standard
This parameter allows you to select the standard of the incoming signal: DVB-T or DVB-
T2.
page 217 Ed 04
Menu structure
Bandwidth
This parameter allows you to select the bandwidth of the incoming signal from a list of
availables.
Input frequency mode
Selects the input frequency configuration mode. The central input frequency of the device
can be set in two different modes:
• Channel Mode. By selecting the desired channel and the frequency offset.
• Central Frequency Mode. By selecting directly the desired central frequency.
Input frequency
Indicates the current input central frequency of the device.
Channel Mode
Channel
This parameter allows you to select the input channel.
The input frequency is set as a function of the channel and the bandwidth.
Channel offset
This parameter allows you to set the input frequency offset for the selected channel. Pos-
sible values are: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Input frequency offset in MHz = (Input channel offset) x (Channel resolution).
Channel resolution
This parameter allows you to configure the offset resolution in order to set the input
frequency. There are three possible steps: 1/6 MHz, 1/7MHz or 1/8MHz.
Central Frequency Mode

Central frequency
This parameter allows you to set the input central frequency directly in Hz.
Status
Status
Indicates the current locking status: Locked or unlocked.
DTT receiver 1 temperature
Indicates the current temperature measured into the DTT receiver 1 board.
Modulation
Indicates the DVB-T modulation parameters detected in the incoming signal.
page 218 Ed 04
Menu structure
Constellation
Indicates the COFDM modulation constellation detected in the incoming signal.
FEC
Indicates the COFDM modulation encoding rate detected in the incoming signal.
Guard Interval
Indicates the COFDM modulation guard interval detected in the incoming signal.
FFT
Indicates the COFDM modulation FFT detected in the incoming signal.
Measures
Indicates the current measures of the incoming signal. The number and the type of the
measurements depends on the standard.
CBER
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) before Viterbi of the incoming
DVB-T signal.
VBER
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) after Viterbi of the incoming
DVB-T signal.
5.5.2.6 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T2)

Enable
Standard
T2.
Bandwidth
availables.
page 219 Ed 04
Menu structure
Input frequency
PLP ID
This parameter allows you to set the identifier of the PLP into the incoming signal to be
demodulated.
Channel Mode
Channel
Channel offset
sible values are: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Channel resolution

Central frequency
Status
Status
System
Indicates general parameters of DVB-T2 modulation detected in the incoming signal.
T2 profile
Indicates the T2 profile detected in the incoming signal.
T2 version
Indicates the T2 version detected in the incoming signal.
page 220 Ed 04
Menu structure
Cell ID
Indicates the Cell ID detected in the incoming signal.
Network ID
Indicates the Network ID detected in the incoming signal.
System ID
Indicates the System ID detected in the incoming signal.
T2 frame
Indicates T2 frame parameters of DVB-T2 modulation detected in the incoming signal.
L1-post signalling constellation
Indicates the L1-post signalling constellation detected in the incoming signal.
L1-post scrambling
Indicates the L1-postscrambling detected in the incoming signal.
Preamble format
Indicates the preamble format detected in the incoming signal.
Extended carrier mode
Indicates the extended carrier mode detected in the incoming signal.
FFT size
Indicates the FFT size detected in the incoming signal.
Guard interval
Indicates the guard interval detected in the incoming signal.
PAPR reduction
Indicates the PAPR reduction method detected in the incoming signal.
Pilot pattern
Indicates the pilot pattern detected in the incoming signal.
Number of T2 frames per superframe
Indicates the number of T2 frames per superframe detected in the incoming signal.
Number of OFDM symbols per T2 frame
Indicates the number of OFDM symbols per T2 frame detected in the incoming signal.
page 221 Ed 04
Menu structure
PLP
Indicates parameters of the PLP selected for the DVB-T2 modulation detected in the
incoming signal.
Total number of PLPs
Indicates the number of PLPs detected in the incoming signal.
Selected PLP ID
Indicates the identifier of the selected PLP from the PLPs detected in the incoming signal.
PLP type
Indicates the PLP type of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
PLP mode
Indicates the PLP mode of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
PLP group ID
Indicates the PLP group ID of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
PLP constellation
Indicates the PLP constellation of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Rotated constellation
Indicates the rotated constellation status of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
FEC type
Indicates the FEC type of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Code rate
Indicates the code rate of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Number of FEC blocks
Indicates the number of FEC blocks of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Type of time-interleaving
Indicates the type of time-interleaving of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Length of time-interleaving
Indicates the length of time-interleaving of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
In-band signalling
Indicates the in-band signalling of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
page 222 Ed 04
Menu structure
Measures
Indicates the current measures of PLP selected for the DVB-T2 modulation detected the
incoming signal.
BER before LDPC
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) before LDPC of the incoming
signal.
BER before BCH
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) before BCH of the incoming
signal.
BBFRAME error ratio
Indicates the current measure of the BBFRAME error ratio of the incoming signal.
5.5.2.7 Setup > Input > Input switching

ASI equalizers bypass
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the bypass function for the cable equal-
izers of ASI inputs (ASI 1 and ASI 2). This option is only available with a compatible
hardware.
ASI equalizers are integrated circuits designed to equalize and restore signals (frequency
selective) received over 75Ω coaxial cable. The activation of the ASI equalizers (disabling
the bypass) is only advisable when the coaxial cable is too long. In the rest of cases it is
advisable to disable the ASI equalizers (enabling the bypass).
Source selected
This parameter allows you to check the selected input from the available sources.
Switching mode
This parameter allows you to select the input switching mode. Possible values are:
• -: None input selected.
• Automatic: Source is automatic selected from the available sources.
• Source x (x=1..4): Source x (x=1..4) is manually selected.
Automatic switching hysteresis

Error (Non-seamless)
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time (in seconds) to switch to another
input after a failure detected in the selected input.
Higher priority
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time (in seconds) to switch to a higher
priority input without failure in the selected input.
page 223 Ed 04
Menu structure
Priorities for automatic switching

Source x (x=1..4)
This parameter allows you to set the priority level for the automatic switching. Possibles
values are: Disabled (no switching) and 1 (highest priority) to 4 (lowest priority).
Assignments / Status / Bitrate / Latency

Source x (x=1..4)
For each source x (x=1..4), each line allows you to check:
• Assignments. The input assigned (IP socket 1, IP socket 2, ASI 1 or ASI 2) for the
source x (x=1..4). This assignment cannot be changed by the user.
• Status. The current status of the source x (x=1..4) that are taken into account for
the switching. Possible statuses are Disabled, Ok or Error.
• Bitrate. Data rate (in Mbps) of the source x (x=1..4). This the data rate of the
stream that feeds the modulator.
• Latency. Latency (in ms) for the source x (x=1..4). This is the latency that will be in-
curred by the seamless process including latency due to the process for absorbing
abrupt variations in the input bitrate.
5.5.2.8 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > General

Modulator board temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the signal board, where the modulator is placed.
This measurement is taken into account for the fans performance (as detailed in section
2.3.5) and for the trigger of Modulator > Temperature alarm.
Modulator standard
Select the modulation standard of the modulator between DVB-T, DVB-T2 and ISDB-T/Tb.
The modulation parameters that are explained below are related to the standard selected
here. Some of them make sense on all standards, others will be exclusive to DVB-T,
DVB-T2 or ISDB-T/Tb.
NOTE:
For each standard, the corresponding software option must be activated to
allow selects it.
Standard auto-configuration
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the automatic configuration of modulation
standard from DVB-T to DVB-T2 (or viceversa) detected into the input stream.
page 224 Ed 04
Menu structure
Test mode
The modulator is able to generate a test signal introducing a PRBS sequence in order to
generate a RF output signal without input signal.
NOTE:
With the test mode disabled, in case of MFN and without input, the modulator
introduces null packets in order to generate a RF output.
PRBS type
This parameter allows selecting the PRBS type:
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 223 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 220 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 217 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 215 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T V.29.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.153 / ITU-T 0.150 / 220 -1.
This parameter is only available in PRBS test node.
PRBS PID
This parameter allows setting the PRBS PID from 0 to 8191.
PRBS invert
This parameter allows enabling or disabling the PRBS invert.
5.5.2.9 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T)

The possible parameters for DVB-T are the following:
Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz. This parameter is
read only when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
page 225 Ed 04
Menu structure
Enable Cell ID
This parameter allow you to enable or disable the cell identifier parameter (Cell ID).
Cell ID
It allows the user to set the cell identifier where the transmitter is located.
5.5.2.10 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T)

Network type
Determines the frequency network operation. Possible values are SFN (Single Frequency
Network) and MFN (Multiple Frequency Network).
In order to enable SFN, a valid time 1PPS and frequency 10MHz reference signals must
be connected to the modulator. In case of SFN reference alarm, the modulator automat-
ically switch into MFN mode. This is indicated with MFN*.
In MFN mode and without a valid input transport stream detected, the modulator intro-
duces null packets (and makes a timely PCR restamping) and allows to generate RF
output signal.
Autoconfiguration from MIP
This parameter allows you to enable the autoconfiguration of the modulation parameters
(constellation, FEC, guard interval, FFT and bandwidth) from the MIP detected into the
input transport stream. This parameter is available both in SFN mode and MFN mode.
Local delay
Local delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) set by the user from -2000µs to 2000µs . Only
available in SFN.
MIP
Maximum network delay
Value extracted from the MIP. Maximum network delay in µs with a resolution of 100
nanoseconds. Only available in SFN.
Time offset
Delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) configured remotely by the network operator through
the MIP. Only available in SFN.
page 226 Ed 04
Menu structure
Transmitter ID
Uniquely identifies the transmitter. With this identifier, the network operator is able to
configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission, or
different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network. User configurable from 0 to
65535.
Timing information
Current network delay
Indicates the current network delay in µs with a resolution of 100 nanoseconds. Only
available in SFN.
Input buffer delay
Indicates the current delay in µs due to input buffer. It corresponds to the sum of variables
LIP SOCKET + LIN P U T SW IT CHIN G , that are detailed at section 2.2.3.2.
Processing delay
Indicates the current delay in µs due to modulation process. It corresponds to the variable
LM ODU LAT ION , that is detailed at section 2.2.3.2. Only available in SFN.
Network delay margin
Indicates the current network delay margin in µs. It corresponds to the variable LM ARGIN ,
that is detailed at section 2.2.3.2. Only available in SFN.
Modulator delay
In MFN performance, indicates the current latency in µs due to modulation process. It

corresponds to the sum of variables LM ODU LAT ION + LM ARGIN , that are detailed at
section 2.2.3.2. Only available in MFN.
5.5.2.11 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (DVB-T)

This menu is only available for DVB-T standard.
Autocofiguration from DTT receiver
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the automatic configuration of the modu-
lation parameters (constellation, FEC, guard interval, FFT) using the information from the
transport stream from the built-in DTT receiver (if available).
Constellation
This parameter allows you to select the COFDM modulation constellation: QPSK, 16QAM
or 64QAM. This parameter is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
FEC
This parameter allows you to select the COFDM modulation encoding rate:1/2, 2/3, 3/4,
5/6 or 7/8. This parameter is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
page 227 Ed 04
Menu structure
Guard Interval
This parameter allows you to select the COFDM modulation guard interval:1/4, 1/8, 1/16
or 1/32. This parameter is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
FFT
This parameter allows you to select COFDM modulation FFT: 8K or 2K. This parameter
is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
5.5.2.12 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T2)

The possible parameters for DVB-T2 are the following:
DVB-T2 profile
The DVB-T2 modulator can work with the two T2 profiles: Base or Lite. Readonly in B
Mode.
Input mode
This parameter allows you to select the input mode depending on the DVB-T2 input type:
A Mode for TS input and B Mode for T2MI input. See section 2.2.3.5.
T2MI PID
T2MI information is inserted into the payload of MPEG-2 TS packets (and transmitted
over ASI as explained before). This parameter defines the PID used to identify the T2MI
data. The parameter PID is configurable from 0 to 8191.
Bandwidth
When working with a TS input type, it sets the bandwidth of the OFDM signal. In case of
T2MI input type, it reads the timestamp field sent in the T2MI flow.
The possible values are: 1.7 MHz (T2MI), 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz and 8 MHz. 10MHz can
be read from the T2MI flow but the modulator does not support this bandwidth.
Readonly in B Mode.
T2 version
DVB-T2 standard version according with ETSI EN 305 755 (v1.1.1, v1.2.1 or v1.3.1).
Readonly in B Mode.
Cell ID
T2MI value
Cell identifier read from T2MI flow where the transmitter is located. Only available in B
Mode.
page 228 Ed 04
Menu structure
Overwrite
Allows to overwrite the value from T2MI with the user value. Only available in B Mode.
User value
Allows the user to set the cell identifier from 0 to 65535.
Network ID
T2MI value
Uniquely identifies the DVB network. Value read from T2MI flow. Only available in B
Mode.
Overwrite
User value
Allows the user to set the network Id value from 0 to 65535.
T2 system ID
T2MI value
DVB-T2 System identifier that uniquely identifies a T2 system within the DVB network.
Value read from T2MI flow. Only available in B Mode.
Overwrite
User value
Allows the user to set the value from 0 to 65535.
T2 frequency
T2MI value
With T2MI input type, it indicates the output frequency registered in the T2MI flow. Only
available in B Mode.
Overwrite
Allows to overwrite the value of T2 frequency from T2MI with the RF central output fre-
quency of the device. Only available in B Mode.
5.5.2.13 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T2)

page 229 Ed 04
Menu structure
Network type
In T2MI case, in order to enable SFN, a valid time 1PPS and frequency 10MHz refer-
ence signals must be connected to the modulator. The emission information is received
through the T2MI and may use relative or absolute timing. In case of SFN reference
alarm, the modulator automatically switch into MFN mode. This is indicated with MFN*.
In TS case, the modulator cannot operate in SFN without the timing information that it’s
only delivered by T2MI. In MFN mode and without a valid input transport stream detected,
the modulator introduces null packets (and makes a timely PCR restamping) and allows
to generate RF output signal.
SFN reference (relative)
This parameter indicates the status (Ok or Nok) of the reference for relative T2MI Times-
tamp needed for SFN tasks. The status of this parameter is linked with the status of SFN
reference alarm detailed in section 5.5.3.
SFN reference (absolute)
This parameter indicates the status (Ok or Nok) of the reference for absolute T2MI
Timestamp needed for SFN tasks.
For a SFN performance with absolute T2MI Timestamp, the device must be synchronized
with a date and precise time as detailed in section 2.2.2.2 and also SFN reference
(relative) must be OK. Otherwise SFN reference (absolute) is Nok.
T2MI Timestamp
The T2MI Timestamp is a T2MI packet type which is always present in T2MI flow: It in-
dicates the OFDM signal bandwidth and provides a time reference needed for the trans-
mission of the signal in SFN mode. The possible values for this parameter are:
• Null: Null Timestamp (no time reference included).
• Relative: Relative Timestamp (includes a time reference relating to the 1PPS sig-
nal).
• Absolute: Absolute Timestamp (includes an absolute time reference). As absolute

time reference is used the date and time synchronized source of the device (at
System > General menu). It is possible to selected a main source and even a
secondary (redundant) source for time reference. Possible sources are satellite
position system (ie GPS) and a NTP server.
T2 Super Frame duration
The duration in µs of a T2 Super Frame. The resolution is 100 nanoseconds.
Local delay
Local delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) set by the user from -2000 µs to 2000 µs .
Only available in SFN.
page 230 Ed 04
Menu structure
Individual Addressing
Time offset
Individual Addressing Delay is configured remotely by the network operator through the
T2MI input. This parameter is displayed in µs with a 100ns resolution. Only available in
SFN.
Transmitter ID
Allows uniquely identify the transmitter. With this identifier, network operator has the abil-
ity to configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission,
or different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network.
Each modulator needs an unique ID in order to receive exclusive modulation parameters

from the T2MI source through IA (Individual Addressing) packets which are also sent
through the input signal.
Timing information
Input buffer delay
Processing delay
Modulator delay

5.5.2.14 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > T2 Frame (DVB-T2)

This menu is only available for DVB-T2 standard.
In case of B mode selected as input mode all the parameters at this menu are readonly
and set from the received T2MI.
Defines the L1 constellation. Increasing the constellation depth reduces the number of
symbols needed to define the L1 signalling but also loses robustness at reception when
decoding that information. The possible values are: BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM and 64QAM.
page 231 Ed 04
Menu structure
L1-post scrambling
Indicates if the L1-post signalling is scrambled (enabled) or not (disabled). This feature is
not available for versions of the standard DVB-T2 prior to 1.3.1.
T2-Lite compatible
Indicates if the current T2 profile is compatible with T2-Lite profile or not. This feature is
Preamble format
Determines the preamble format: SISO or MISO.

MISO processing allows the initial frequency domain coefficients to be processed by a
modified Alamouti encoding, which allows the T2 signal to be split between two groups
of transmitters on the same frequency in such a way that the two groups will not interfere
with each other.
MISO group
When working with a TS input type, this parameter allows user to set the MISO group.
When working with a T2MI input type, it reads the MISO group field sent in the T2MI flow.
In case of no MISO group detected in input flow, user must set the MISO group.
The possible values are: 1 or 2.
Allows you to enable or disable the extended carrier mode.
The extended-carrier option has the benefit of increasing the data capacity.
FFT size
Defines the OFDM output signal carrier number (1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K or 32K). Increasing
the FFT size will give a greater delay tolerance for the same fractional guard interval,
allowing larger Single Frequency Networks (SFNs) to be constructed.
Alternatively, larger FFTs allow the same delay tolerance to be achieved with a smaller
overhead due to the guard interval. On the other hand, the larger FFT sizes have a
greater vulnerability to fast time-varying channels, i.e. have lower Doppler performance.
Guard Interval
Selects the guard interval: 1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32 1/128. The simplest view
is to treat the guard interval as a hard limit to the channel extent that can be tolerated by
the system.
The greatest capacity is given by selecting the minimum value but there are other con-
straints like the choice of FFT, concerning the degree of Doppler effects to be expected
in the scenario of interest.
page 232 Ed 04
Menu structure
PAPR reduction
Peak Average Power Ratio. Selects among the reduction techniques. The reduction in
crest factor results in a system that can either transmit more bits per second with the
same hardware, or transmit the same bits per second with lower output power.
The meaning of PAPR reduction options depends on the DVB-T2 version.
In version 1.1.1:
• -: No PAPR used.
• ACE: Only ACE-PAPR used.
• TR: Only TR-PAPR used.
• ACE-TR: Both ACE and TR used.
In version 1.2.1 and 1.3.1:
• TR-P2: L1-ACE used and TR only in P2 symbols.
• ACE: Only L1-ACE and ACE used.
• TR: Only L1-ACE and TR used.
• ACE-TR: L1-ACE, ACE and TR used.
Pilot pattern
Defines the pattern of the pilot carriers. Several pilot patterns are available, named PP1 to
PP8, with the intention of providing efficient options for different channel scenarios. Each
pattern can support time and frequency variations up to corresponding Nyquist limits.
Defines the number of T2 frames per superframe.
Defines the number of OFDM symbols per T2 frame.
5.5.2.15 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > PLP (DVB-T2)

PLP index
Selects the PLP index whose data will be displayed at the rest of the parameters of this
menu.
The possible selected values are from 1 to 8. The symbol - indicates that any PLP is
selected.
page 233 Ed 04
Menu structure
Number of PLPs
The number of the PLPs detected (up to 8) at the T2MI input.
PLP ID
A unique PLP identifier in the DVB-T2 system.
PLP type
PLP type: Common, Data 1 or Data 2. Type of the associated PLP. In TS mode, this
parameter is always set to Data 1.
PLP mode
Indicates whether Normal Mode (NM) or High Efficiency Mode (HEM) is used for the
current PLP.
PLP Group ID
Identifies with which PLP group within the T2 system the current PLP is associated.
PLP Constellation
Indicates the modulation used by the associated PLP: 256QAM, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK
or BPSK.
Rotated Constellation
Indicates whether constellation rotation is in use or not by the associated PLP.
FEC type
Indicates the FEC type used by the associated PLP: 64K or 16K.
Code Rate
Indicates the code rate used by the associated PLP: 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5 or 5/6.
Indicates the number of FEC blocks contained in the current Interleaving Frame for the
current PLP.
When a TS entry type is used, the value of the parameter number of FEC blocks (per in-
terleave frame for a particular PLP) is calculated based on: the OFDM signal bandwidth ,
the FFT size, the guard interval, the pilot carriers pattern and the constellation, according
to [ETSI TS 102 831 V1.1.1, page 55]. The table below shows some configurations of
this parameter as an example:
• BW = 8MHz
• Data symbol = 40
• Type of time-interleaving = 0
• Length of time-interleaving = 2
page 234 Ed 04
Menu structure
• PLP mode = Normal

Guard Pilot FFT Const. N. blocks
Interval pattern
1/128 PP7 32K 16QAM 67
64QAM 100
256QAM 134
16K 16QAM 33
64QAM 49
256QAM 66
8K 16QAM 16
64QAM 24
256QAM 32
1/32 PP4 32K 16QAM 65
64QAM 97
256QAM 130
16K 16QAM 32
64QAM 48
256QAM 64
8K 16QAM 15
64QAM 23
256QAM 31
Indicates the type of time-interleaving.
Indicates the number of T2-frames to which every Interleaving Frame is mapped or the
number of TI-blocks per Interleaving Frame depending on the time-interleaving type.
In-band signalling
Indicates whether the current PLP carries in-band signalling A and/or B (A -, A B, - B, -

-). In TS mode this parameter is always set to - - (Non in-band signaling).ling).
5.5.2.16 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (ISDB-T)

The possible parameters for ISDB-T are the following:
Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 5MHz, 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz.
Input mode
This parameter allows you to select the input mode: (TS or BTS).
NOTE:
TS input is only available to select when the ISDB-T Remux software option
is activated.
page 235 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.2.17 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (ISDB-T)

Network type
output signal.
Local delay
RF delay
This parameter allows to added another time delay to the local delay in µs (with a 100ns
resolution) set by the user from -2000 µs to 2000 µs. Can be used to add a specific delay
keeping the same value for local delay for different transmitters at the same location. Only
available in SFN.
IIP Network Synchronization Information (Only in SFN)

Maximum network delay in µs with a resolution of 100 nanoseconds. Only available in

SFN.
Time offset
Delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) configured remotely by the network operator. Only
available in SFN.
Static delay
Static delay measure displayed in µs with a 100ns resolution. Only available in SFN.
Equipment ID
ity to configure optional parameters for each of the transmitters of the network. User
configurable from 0 to 65535.
page 236 Ed 04
Menu structure
This parameter is only available in SFN.
Timing information
available in SFN.
Input buffer delay
Processing delay
Modulator delay

5.5.2.18 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (ISDB-T)

FFT Mode
This parameter allows you to select COFDM modulation FFT: 2K, 4K or 8K. Readonly in
BTS.
Guard Interval
or 1/32. Readonly in BTS.
Partial reception
This parameter allows enabling or disabling partial reception. Readonly in BTS.
page 237 Ed 04
Menu structure
Filtering type
Allows you to enable the filtering capabilities (see section 2.2.8 for more details). Possible
values are:
• Disabled. No filtering.
• PIDs. Filtering by PID.
• Programs. Filtering by program.
• Advanced. Filtering by PID with possibility of renaming PIDs and programs.
NOTE:
Filtering parameters are only available with the ISDB-T Remux software op-
tion activated.
Layer A, B or C
In case of BTS mode all the parameters at this menu are readonly and set from the re-
ceived flow. For each layer following parameters are shown:
Filter items
It is possible to select from the input transport stream which items will be transmitted into
the layer. Only available when a filtering type is selected. See section 2.2.8 for more
details.
Services names
This parameter allows you to rename a program into the layer. Only available when a
advanced filtering type is selected. See section 2.2.8 for more details.
Constellation
The modulation used by the associated PLP: DQPSK, QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
Code Rate
The code rate used by the associated layer: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8.
Time interleaving length
The Time interleaving length used by the associated layer: 0, 1, 2, 4, 8 or 16.
Number of segments
The number of segments from 1 to 13 for the selected layer.
page 238 Ed 04
Menu structure
Bitrate (In / Out)
This parameter indicates the measurement of the bitrate in Mbps for the input and for the
output of the selected layer.
5.5.2.19 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Program Specific Information
(ISDB-T)
The equipment displays some critical information contained in the incoming BIT (Broad-
cast Information Table) as well as the incoming NIT (Network Information Table).
User can modify several parameters as Network ID, Transport Stream ID, Affiliation ID,
Virtual channel / Remote Control ID, Area code, Frequency, Transport Stream name and
Network name depending on the operating mode (BTS/TS) in order to complete the min-
imum TS remultiplexing requirements.
These NIT/BIT tables are created from scratch when operating in TS input (as they may
not be present at the input stream).
All of the remaining PSI tables (PAT, PMT, SDT, EIT,...) are also updated with the over-
written information and their CRC are recalculated in order to maintain the overall TS
coherence.
Program Association Table

Available programs
This parameter allows you to check the progrma numbers of the available services de-
tected at the incoming stream.
Broadcast Information Table

Affiliation ID
This parameter allows you to set the affiliation ID. Readonly in BTS.
Network Information Table

Network ID
This parameter allows you to set the Network ID. Readonly in BTS.
Network name
This parameter allows you to set the Network name. Readonly in BTS.
Transport Stream ID
This parameter allows you to check the Transport Stream ID.
Original Network ID
This parameter allows you to check the Original Network ID. Only in BTS.
page 239 Ed 04
Menu structure
Area code
This parameter allows you to set the Area code. Readonly in BTS.
Overwrite Area code
This parameter allows you to overwrite the incoming Area code in BTS mode.
Frequency
This parameter allows you to set the Frequency. Readonly in BTS.
Overwrite Frequency
This parameter allows you to overwrite the incoming Frequency in BTS mode.
Remote Control Key ID
This parameter allows you to set the Remote Control Key ID. Readonly in BTS.
Bypass Remote Control Key ID
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the bypass of the remote incoming Control
Key ID in BTS mode.
Overwrite Control Key ID
This parameter allows you to overwrite the incoming Control Key ID in BTS mode.
TS Name
This parameter allows you to set the TS Name. Readonly in BTS.
Time Offset Table

Country code
This parameter allows you to set Country code. Only in TS.
Region ID
This parameter allows you to set Region ID. Only in TS.
5.5.2.20 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector

Linear precorrection
Enable
Allows you to apply or not apply the saved values for the linear precorrection at this
output frequency. This menu is only available after a calibration process was successful
(see 5.5.1.14).
page 240 Ed 04
Menu structure
Non linear precorrection

Enable
Allows you to enabling the non-linear precorrection.
Precorrector levels
Input
Level in dBFS (decibels full scale) of the signal at the input of the precorrector.
Status
Status of the precorrector. Possible statuses are: locked and unlocked.
Feedback
Level in dBFS (decibels full scale) of the signal at the feedback input of the precorrector.
Output
Level in dBFS (decibels full scale) of the signal at the output of the precorrector.
Spectrum measures
Shoulder alarm
Allows you to set a threshold of the shoulder measurement in dB that triggers the shoul-
der alarm.
Lower shoulder
Value (in dB) of the lower shoulder attenuation of the precorrector feedback signal. This
signal can be graphically viewed at the spectrum window by clicking at icon.
Upper shoulder
Value (in dB) of the upper shoulder attenuation of the precorrector feedback signal. This
In-band level variation
Value (in dB) of the amplitude inside of the modulation band of the precorrector feedback
signal. This signal can be graphically viewed at the spectrum window by clicking at
icon.
MER alarm
Allows you to set a threshold of the Modulation Error Ratio (MER) rms measurement in
dB that triggers the MER alarm.
MER
Value (in dB) of the Modulation Error Ratio (MER) rms of the signal of the precorrector
feedback signal.
page 241 Ed 04
Menu structure
BER
Value of the Bit Error Ratio (BER) estimated from the signal of the precorrector feedback
signal.
5.5.2.21 Setup > Exciter > RF Output > RF Configuration

The central output frequency of the device can be set in two different modes:
Output Frequency mode
Selects the output frequency configuration mode.
Output frequency
Indicates the current output central frequency of the device.
Channel Mode
Channel
This parameter allows you to select the output channel.
The output frequency is set as a function of the channel and the bandwidth.
Channel offset
This parameter allows you to set the output frequency offset for the selected channel.
Possible values are: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Output frequency offset in MHz = (Output channel offset) x (Channel resolution).
Channel resolution
This parameter allows you to configure the offset resolution in order to set the output

Central frequency
This parameter allows you to set the central frequency directly in Hz.
5.5.2.22 Setup > Exciter > RF Output > Mutes

The device is provided with the possibility to switch off the output power (mute) in an
automatic way in case of an unwanted status detected. See Muting of RF output signal
at sections 2.2.3.9 for more details.
It is also possible to mute the output power manually at RF ON/OFF button via web
interface (see section 5.3.3) or via frontal RF ON/OFF hard key (see section 5.2).
page 242 Ed 04
Menu structure
Status
Allows you to check the output status due to the mutes performance. The possible values
are:
• -: No mutes triggered.
• Muted: Any mute triggered.
• Muted (Self-protection): Any mute triggered due to self-protection (see section
2.3.4).
Mute causes
Allows you to check the current mutes that cause the device is not producing any RF at
output, including automatic mutes, self-protection mutes or manual RF OFF (more details
at sections 2.2.3.9):
• RF off: Manual RF OFF, RF ON/OFF button via web interface (see section 5.3.3)
or via frontal RF ON/OFF hard key (see section 5.2).
• TS error: TS error mute.
• Input overflow: Input Overflow mute.
• MIP error: MIP error mute.
• T2MI error: T2MI error mute.
• SFN Reference: SFN Reference mute.
• SFN margin: SFN margin mute.
• BTS error: BTS error mute.
• RF input: In case of input RF signal level is under the input level threshold.
• Gain margin: Gain margin mute.
• 10MHz: 10MHz mute.
• Temperature: Overtemperature self-protection. See section 2.3.4.5.
• Reverse power: Excessive reflected power self-protection. See section 2.3.4.1.
• Elevated power: Exceeded output power self-protection. See section 2.3.4.2.
• Redundancy (Antenna): Device towards antenna muted due to the redundancy
premises.
• Redundancy (Load): Device towards load muted due to the redundancy premises.
• Redundancy (Switching): Device muted due to the redundancy premises (during
switching process).
• Redundancy (Initialization): Device muted due to the redundancy premises (dur-
ing initialization process).
• Interlock: In case of external INTERLOCK loop is opened. Check the INTERLOCK
connections detailed in 3.2.7 section.
• RF loop: In case of external RF loop is opened. This safety mute function is
configurable (see section 2.2.2.4 for more details).
Following mutes are only available with the Transmitter hardware basis:
page 243 Ed 04
Menu structure
TS error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of errors at the selected
input transport stream.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the TS alarm.
The device recovers automatically after fault condition is removed.
T2MI error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of T2MI errors at the
selected input.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the T2MI alarm.
This mute is only available in DVB-T2.
BTS error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of BTS errors at the
selected input.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the BTS alarm.
This mute is only available in ISDB-T.
Input Overflow mute
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the alarm Input overflow:
• Mute enabled: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the transmission
buffer is filled due to a high rate of entry thus activating the alarm Input overflow.
• Mute disabled: Whenever the maximum storage capacity of the buffer is exceeded
(alarm Input overflow triggered) the modulator clears the buffer to start again.
MIP error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the transmitter in case of MIP is not de-
tected on the transport stream on the active input.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the alarm MIP error.
page 244 Ed 04
Menu structure
If this mute option is disabled, the modulator will change to MFN network mode (displayed
as MFN* in Network type at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network ) and the
transmission signal will keep on without interruption.
SFN reference mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of a synchronized
reference is not available for SFN operation.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the SFN reference alarm.
When this mute is enabled, the output is switched off immediately when SFN reference
alarm is triggered.
SFN margin mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output when the device detects that the SFN oper-
ation is not possible.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the SFN margin alarm.
When this mute is enabled, the output is switched off immediately when SFN margin
alarm is triggered.
5.5.2.23 Setup > Reference > Reference source

This menu allows you to configure the frequency and time reference switching options.
See section 2.2.3.4 for more details.
Reference
This parameter allows you to check the current source for the frequency and time refer-
ence of the device.
Switching mode
This parameter allows you to select the switching mode. Possible configurations are
detailed at section 2.2.3.4.
Synchronization module ready
This parameter allows you to set the GPS ready condition for the automatic switching.
Possible values are:
• Locked: Synchronization module is ready only when its status is locked.
• Locked, Holdover: Synchronization module is ready when its status is locked and
even when is in holdover mode.
page 245 Ed 04
Menu structure
External reference outputs
This parameter allows you mute the 10MHz and 1PPS external outputs from the selected
reference. Possible values are:
• Auto: Outputs are muted in case of a selected reference status.
• Enabled: Outputs are not muted.
• Disabled: Outputs are permanently muted.
Selected 10MHz
Indicates the status of the 10MHz input signal to the signal board. Possible values are:
• -: This signal is not taken into account by the modulator.
• Detected: Signal detected at modulator board.
• Not detected: Signal not detected at modulator board.
Selected 1PPS
Indicates the status of the 1PPs input signal to the modulator board. Possible values are:
5.5.2.24 Setup > Reference > Synchronization module
NOTE:
This menu is only available with synchronization module hardware option
installed.
This menu allows you to configure and check the synchronization module parameters.
Mode
This parameter allows you to select the synchronization module mode:
• Disabled: External 10MHz and 1PPS signals are passing to the signal board di-
rectly.
• GNSS receiver: GPS/GLONASS satellite receiver is used to synchronize a OCXO

placed inside.
• OCXO: An external 1PPS signal is used to synchronize a 10 MHz OCXO placed

inside.
Receiver type
Indicates the type of the receiver: GPS or GNSS.
page 246 Ed 04
Menu structure
Serial Number
For checking the serial number of the synchronization module.
Status
For checking the status of the synchronization module:
• Unlocked: The OCXO / satellite receiver is unlocked.
• Locked: The OCXO / satellite receiver is locked.

• Holdover: The OCXO / satellite receiver is in holdover mode.
• Not detected: The synchronization module hardware is not detected (for example
with HW option enabled but module not correctly inserted into the slot).
Satellites antenna
For checking the status of the satellites antenna: Detected or Not detected.
1PPS input
For checking the status of the external 1PPS input in OCXO mode: Detected or Not
detected.
Synchronization module temperature
Temperature in o C measured at the Synchronization module board.
This measurement is taken into account for the for the trigger of Temperature alarm.
Holdover time
Time (hh:mm:ss) in holdover mode. This time is only available with the OCXO in holdover
mode.
Endless holdover
When this parameter is enabled, the holdover mode is keeping forever, so the following
parameter holdover limit has no effect.
Holdover limit
This parameter allows configuring the threshold (in hours) from 0 to 255 to finish the
holdover mode and triggers the Holdover not available alarm.
The drift of the time signal is a conservative estimation based on the characteristics of the
OCXO of the synchronization module. The synchronization module is not able to provide
an exact value of this drift.
Latitude
Indicates the Latitude (in decimal degrees) obtained from the GPS receiver.
page 247 Ed 04
Menu structure
Longitude
Indicates the Longitude (in decimal degrees) obtained from the GPS receiver.
Altitude
Indicates the Altitude (in meters) obtained from the GPS receiver.
Synchronization module date
UTC date and time (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss UTC) obtained from the satellite receiver and
its status (Ok / Nok).
Constellation
In case of GNSS receiver, this parameter allows selecting the type of the satellite constel-
lation (GPS or GLONASS) which information will be displayed in following parameters.
Satellite x (x = 1..8)
Indicates the status of the satellite x (x=1..8). Possible values are:
• Unlocked: The Satellite is unlocked.
• ID i (SNR = ydB): Satellite identifier (i) locked and signal to noise ratio in dB (y).
5.5.2.25 Setup > Amplifier > Configuration

Power offset
This parameter allows you to set an offset for the indication of the forward power for
example to display the power after the band-pass filter.
Configured power
This parameter allows to regulate the output power of the transmitter. The output power
configured at this parameter takes into account the offset configured previously.
Nevertheless, the regulation range for this parameter is referred to the power before the
band pass filter at the RF output connector at the rear side.
To change the output power, set the desired value (within allowable regulation margin) in
watts and apply. After a few seconds check the current output power measured.
Forward power
Indicates the current forward power (in watts) that is transmitting the complete transmitter
(including all amplifier stages). For getting this indication is tacking into account the level
measured with a resolution of 100mW and also the offset configured previously.
In case of only one amplifier stage it is used the level measured in the detector placed at
the amplifier output. But, in case of two or more coupled amplifiers, for this indication it is
used the level measured at the RF forward probe of the directional coupler placed at the
combiner output.
page 248 Ed 04
Menu structure
Reverse power
Indicates the current reverse power (in watts) measured in the detector placed at the am-
plifier output.
In case of only one amplifier stage, for this indication it is used the level measured in the
detector placed at the amplifier output. In this case, the minimum reverse power that the
device is able to detect correctly is 3% of the forward power. In this case symbol "<" is
displayed before.
In case of two or more coupled amplifiers, for this indication it is used the level measured
at the RF reverse probe of the directional coupler placed at the combiner output. In this
case, there is no limitation for the minimum value that the device is able to indicate.
Exceeded power threshold
Threshold from 0.5dB to 2dB (in 0.1dB steps) for the Forward power measure that trig-
gers the Exceeded power alarm. This threshold is used also for the Exceeded power
alarm of each amplifier stage.
Decreased power threshold
Threshold from -1dB to -6dB (in 0.1dB steps) for the Forward power measure that trig-
gers the Decreased power alarm. This threshold is used also for the Decreased power
alarm of each amplifier stage.
Decreased power threshold [Non critical]
gers the Decreased power [Non critical] alarm.
Reverse power threshold
Threshold from -12dB to -8dB (in 1dB steps) for the Reverse power measure that triggers
the Reflected power alarm. This threshold is used also for the Reflected power alarm
of each amplifier stage.
5.5.2.26 Setup > Amplifier > Stage X

This menu allows you to manage the amplifier stage X (X = 1..4).
Control status
Indicates the status of the control bus (CAN) between the amplifier and the exciter. Pos-
sible statuses are:

• Communication error. Communication error between the amplifier and the ex-
citer. Check the CTRL bus connection and addressing.
• Error (SW version). Amplifier stage microcontroller software version error. Upgrade
• Error (no SW version). Amplifier stage microcontroller without software version.

Upgrade or reinstall the software of the device at System > Service > SW upgrade.
page 249 Ed 04
Menu structure
• Error (No address). Amplifier stage without control addressing. Set the correct
address (see section 2.3.2).
• Error (Collision). Amplifier stage addressing problem. Set the correct address (see
section 2.3.2).
HW status
Indicates the general status of the amplifier stage. Possible statuses are:
• EEPROM, ADC, LED1, LED2. Internal damaged at amplifier stage.
• TEMP. Overtemperature at amplifier stage.
• FAN1, FAN2. FAN damaged at amplifier stage.
• TRT1, TRT2, TRT3, TRT4, TRT5, TRT6. LDMOS transistor damaged at amplifier
stage.
• Comm. Communication error between the amplifier and the exciter. Check the
Mute (Self-protection)
Allows you to check the current self-protection mute (see section 2.3.4) that cause the
amplifier stage is not producing any RF at output:
• -. No self-protections.
• Temperature. Overtemperature self-protection.
• Reverse power. Excessive reflected power self-protection.
• Elevated power. Exceeded output power self-protection.
• HW error PD. General hardware error self-protection.
• Attenuated power. LDMOS currents self-protection.
Forward power
Indicates the current forward power (in watts) that is transmitting the amplifier stage. For
getting this indication is tacking into account the level measured in the detector placed at
the amplifier output with a resolution of 100mW.
This measurement (together with the exceeded power threshold at Setup > Amplifier
> Configuration menu) is also taken into account for exceeded power self-protection (as
detailed in section 2.3.4.2).
page 250 Ed 04
Menu structure
Reverse power
plifier stage output with a resolution of 100mW.
The minimum reverse power that the device is able to detect correctly is 3% of the forward
power. In this case symbol "<" is displayed before.
This measurement (together with the Reverse power threshold at Setup > Amplifier >
Configuration menu) is taken into account for excessive reflected power self-protection
(as detailed in section 2.3.4.1) and for the trigger of Reflected power alarm.
RF phase
Allows to perform a fine correction of the phase of the amplifier stage in case of cou-
pling more than one stage. Possible values are from 0 (minimum phase correction) to 3
(maximum phase correction). See section 2.4 for more details.
Amplifier stage temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the amplifier stage output.
This measurement is taken into account for the fans performance (as detailed in sec-
tion 2.3.5), for overtemperature self-protection (as detailed in section 2.3.4.5) and for the
trigger of Temperature [Amplifier] alarm.
LDMOS transistor x (x=1..6) current
Indicates the consumption currents of the LDMOS transistors at output stage of power
amplifier stage in amperes with a resolution of 10mA.
These measurements are taken into account for LDMOS currents self-protection (as de-
tailed in section 2.3.4.4) and for the trigger of LDMOS transistors alarm.
Addressing
Delete the address of this power stage
This button allows you to delete the addressing of the current amplifier stage.
Assign address to the detected power stage
This button allows you to assign the addressing (stage number from 1 to 4 and A or B in
a 1+1) to the current detected amplifier stage.
Identify power stage
This button allows you to identify visually the current amplifier stage. When Identify button
is pressed, all the frontal LED indicators are blinking during a few seconds in order to get
a visual indentification of the stage.
page 251 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.2.27 Setup > Redundancy

Device identifier
This parameter allows to identify each device for the communication through the control
bus (sub-D, 9-pins). One of the devices must be identified as A and the other as B in
order make possible the communication and the redundancy control. Otherwise, redun-
dancy is not possible.
It can be configurable at menu of section 5.5.1.23.1.
Control status
Indicates the current status of the communication through the control bus. This com-
munication is only correct when both devices are correctly identified and cabling between
the control bus (CTRL bus interface) in both devices is correctly connected.
Redundant system IP address
IP address to control of the redundant system with a SNMP manager (both devices with
one IP address). This IP address is different from the remote IP of each device.
This system IP is only reachable in device identified as Device A to avoid IP conflicts (by
default, switching to Device B in case of a supply failure in device A).
The SNMP agent from any of the devices is able to answer with the complete information
about both devices. It is also possible to enter to the web GUI of both devices using this
unique IP.
Dual Drive Redundancy

Switch to antenna
This parameter allows you to perform a switchover, indicating what device is towards
antenna: Device A or Device B.
Redundancy mode
This parameter allows you to set the switching mode (manual or automatic).
Priority
This parameter allows you to set the priority level of the devices involved in the dual drive
redundancy:
• A=B. Both devices with the same priority.

• A>B. The device A has a higher priority level than device B.
• A<B. The device B has a higher priority level than device A.
Auto-return
This parameter allows you to enable the auto-return when the failure device is recovered.
page 252 Ed 04
Menu structure
Performed switchings (today)
Indicates the number of switchings performed in the current day.
Maximum switchings / day
This parameter allows you to set the maximum number of switchings allowed per day.
Input validation
This parameter allows you to set the timing in seconds for the validation of input alarms.
Set 0 second for disabling the input validation.
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time in seconds before switching. Set 0
second for disabling this timing.
Device A / B
Status
Indicates the current status of the device A / B for the 1+1 redundancy:
• Disabled. The DD redundancy performance is disabled.
• COMM error. Communication error through the control bus between A and B
(CTRL bus interface).
• PSUs-off. Power supply off.
• SW version error. Device A and B has different SW version.
• ANTENNA: OK. Exciter towards the antenna without automatic switching causes
triggered.
• ANTENNA: NOK. Exciter towards the antenna with any automatic switching cause
triggered.
• ANTENNA: Manual. Exciter towards the antenna in manual switching mode.
• LOAD: Ready. Exciter towards the load ready for an automatic switchover if needed.
• LOAD: Not Ready. Exciter towards the load is not ready for an automatic switchover.
• LOAD: Manual. Exciter towards the load in manual switching mode.
Switching causes
For the corresponding exciter A / B, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered
(from System > Events configuration > Alarms menu ) that causing a not ready status.
page 253 Ed 04
Menu structure
RF status
When antenna
This parameter allows to define the RF status of the Exciter when is switched to the
antenna: transmitting power (RF ON) or not (RF OFF).
When load
This parameter allows to define the RF status of the Exciter when is switched to the load:
transmitting power (RF ON) or not (RF OFF).

Enable
This parameter allows to enable or disable the automatic inversion of the priority level
(A>B to A<B or vice versa).
Period (days)
This parameter allows to set the number of days for the automatic inversion of the priority.
Time
This parameter allows to set the time of the day (hh:mm in 24h format) to perform the
automatic inversion of the priority.
Reset
Button Counters reset allows to perform a reinitialization of counter performed switchings
(today).
1+1 Redundancy
Switch to antenna
This parameter allows you to perform a switchover, indicating what device is towards
antenna: Device A or Device B.
Redundancy mode
Priority
This parameter allows you to set the priority level of the devices involved in the 1+1 re-
dundancy:

page 254 Ed 04
Menu structure
Auto-return
Input validation
Power validation
This parameter allows you to set the timing in seconds for the validation of power alarms.
Device A / B
Status
• Disabled. The 1+1 redundancy performance is disabled.
• Unknown. The position of the coaxial switch is unknown.
• ANTENNA: OK. Transmitter towards the antenna without automatic switching causes
triggered.
• ANTENNA: NOK. Transmitter towards the antenna with any automatic switching
cause triggered.
page 255 Ed 04
Menu structure
• ANTENNA: Manual. Transmitter towards the antenna in manual switching mode.
• LOAD: Ready. Transmitter towards the load ready for an automatic switchover if
needed.
• LOAD: Not Ready (Verifying). Transmitter towards the load is not ready for an
automatic switchover because is performing an automatic verification.
• LOAD: Not Ready (Last verification NOK). Transmitter towards the load is not
ready for an automatic switchover because the result of last automatic verification
was not successful.
• LOAD: Not Ready (Last verification OK). Transmitter towards the load is not
ready for an automatic switchover although the result of last automatic verifica-
tion was successful. The transmitter is able to monitoring continuously the status
of the device even out of the verification process, so although the last verification
was successful the device could be not ready.
• LOAD: Not Ready (No Verified). Transmitter towards the load is not ready for an
automatic switchover because first automatic verification was not performed.
• LOAD: Not ready (Maximum switchings). Transmitter towards the load is not
ready because maximun number of switching per day that are allowed have been
reached.
• LOAD: Manual. Transmitter towards the load in manual switching mode.
Switching causes
For the corresponding device A / B, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered
RF status
When antenna
This parameter allows to define the RF status of the device when is switched to the
When load
This parameter allows to define the RF status of the device when is switched to the load:
Enable
This parameter allows to enable or disable the automatic verifications. In case of auto-
matic redundancy mode, this parameter can be disabled in order to avoid undesirabled
verifications (transmitting RF power) in the device towards the load.
Duration
This parameter allows to define the time duration in minutes of the verification process to
the load.
page 256 Ed 04
Menu structure
Performed verifications
Indicates the number of verifications performed without success. It is automatically set to

0 after a successful verification.
Maximum verifications
This parameter allows to set the maximum number of verifications allowed without suc-
cess.
Next verification in
Indicates the remaining time for the next verification.
Automatic verifications: Reiterated with cadence

Enable
This parameter allows to enable or disable the time (and the cadence of retries) in be-
tween the fault happens in a device and the beginning of the verification test.
Period
This parameter allows to set the period time in minutes.
Cadence
This parameter allows to set the cadence of retries. Possible values are:
• Simple: A retry is performed based on the period set in previous parameter.
• Double: The first retry is attempted at the period set in previous parameter, whereas
the second retry is attempted at a double of that time, the third at the double of the
previous one and so on, until the number of programmed retries is over. (For exam-
ple, 3 retries set to 15 min => 1st retry at 15 minutes after the fault; if the transmitter
stays faulty, the 2nd retry is performed 30 minutes after the first unsuccessful retry;
3rd retry at 60 minutes of the previous retry and so on...)
Automatic verifications: Daily

Enable
This parameter allows to enable or disable the time of the day to perform the automatic
verifications after the fault happens in a device.
Time
next verification after the fault happens in a device.
page 257 Ed 04
Menu structure

Enable
Period (days)
Time
Reset
Button Counters reset allows to perform a reinitialization of redundancy counters: Per-
formed switchings (today) and Performed verifications.
5.5.2.28 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization

This menu allows checking the current synchronization status of the configuration param-
eters at the redundant devices (A/B) and, in case of the configuration is not synchronized
, sending the configuration from this device to the other device. See section 2.7 for more
details.
All the configuration parameters are grouped into following groups according to the struc-
ture of configuration menus (see section 5.5):
• WEB interface.
• SNMP.
• Modulator.
• RF output.
• Reference.
device.
5.5.2.29 Setup > Redundancy > Configuration (N+1 [B])

This menu is only available in the reserve transmitter (Device B).
page 258 Ed 04
Menu structure
Device identifier
bus (sub-D, 9-pins). One of the devices must be identified as B, A1, A2,..., An in order
make possible the communication and the N+1 control. Otherwise, N+1 redundancy is
not possible.
Control status
the control bus (CTRL bus interface) in all devices is correctly connected.
This system IP is only reachable in device identified as Device B to avoid IP conflicts (by
default, switching to Device A1 in case of a supply failure in device B).
about all devices. It is also possible to enter to the web GUI of all devices using this
unique IP.
N value
This parameter allows to configure the number of main transmitters of the N+1 system.
N+1 Redundancy
Manual switching
This parameter allows you to perform a switchover manually, indicating what device is
towards antenna: Device An or Device B.
Redundancy mode
Auto-return
This parameter allows you to enable the auto-return when the failure device is recov-
ered. This automatic restoration will only be performed after the verification that the fault
that caused the switching is not present and only when a second transmitter (with the
automatic switchings activated) presents a fault so it needs to make use of the reserve
transmitter.
page 259 Ed 04
Menu structure
Maximum restorations / window
This parameter allows you to set the maximum number of switchings allowed into the
predefined temporal window.
Window (days)
Indicates the duration in days of the temporal window to the counter of switchings.
Input error test
This parameter allows you to set the timing in seconds for the validation of input alarms
as switching criterion. Set 0 second for disabling the input validation.
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time in seconds before switching once a
criterion for switchover is validated. Set 0 second for disabling this timing.
Device B
Applied configuration
This parameter allows to check wich configuration is applying the device B. Possible
configuration sets (From Device A1 to Device An) must be previously stored at device B
memory.
Status
Indicates the current status of the device B for the N+1 redundancy:
• Disabled. The N+1 redundancy performance is disabled.

• COMM error. Communication error through the control bus (CTRL bus interface).
• SW version error. Device B has different SW version.
triggered.
cause triggered.

needed.
page 260 Ed 04
Menu structure
was not successful.
reached.
Switching causes
For the device B, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered (from System >
Events configuration > Alarms menu ) that causing a not ready status.
Device An
Status
Indicates the current status of the device An for the N+1 redundancy. The possible values
are the same as previously detailed for Device B.
Switching causes
For the device A, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered (from System >
Performed restorations (window)
Indicates the number of switchings performed into the predefined temporal window.
RF status and priority

Device to load
Priority management
This parameter allows to enable or disable the priority management for the automatic
switching.
page 261 Ed 04
Menu structure
Antenna n
Priority
This parameter allows to set the priority level for the automatic switching. Possibles
values are: Disabled (no switching) and 1 (highest priority) to n (lowest priority).
RF status
antenna n: transmitting power (RF ON) or not (RF OFF).
Enable
Duration
the load.

cess.

Enable
Period
page 262 Ed 04
Menu structure
Cadence

Enable
Time
Automatic verifications: Alarm

Enable
This parameter allows to enable or disable the automatic verification in case of a fault in
other transmitter with enabled switchings and independently of the priority.
Reset
formed switchings and verifications.
5.5.2.30 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [B])

This menu allows checking the current synchronization status (Synchronized or Not syn-
chronized) of the configuration of the main transmitters stored at the reserve transmitter
memory and, in case of a configuration is not synchronized, saving the configuration from
the main transmitter to the reserve transmitter memory by pressing Synchronize button.
5.5.2.31 Setup > Redundancy > Status (N+1 [A])

This menu is only available in the main transmitters (Devices A).
page 263 Ed 04
Menu structure
Control status
munication is only correct when the device is correctly identified and cabling between the
control bus (CTRL bus interface) in all devices is correctly connected.
Status
Indicates the current status of the device for the N+1 redundancy. The possible values
Switching causes
Indicates a list with the switching causes triggered (from System > Events configuration
> Alarms menu ) that causing a not ready status.
Manual switching
5.5.2.32 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [A])

This menu allows configuring the device with the configuration parameters stored at the
device B.
• WEB interface.
• SNMP.
• Modulator.
• RF output.
• Reference.
page 264 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3 Status
This menu provides the current status of all the alarms relating to the device functions.
Sections 5.2.3 and 5.3.3 detailed the GUI views of this menu.
Possible statuses for each alarm are:
• OFF: The alarm is not triggered.
• ON : The alarm is triggered.
• NOT APPLY: The alarm does not apply for the current device configuration.
Alarms are grouped into several groups getting a simplified overview of the device. The
status of each group is determined by the status of each individual alarm inside the group
(summatory of alarms).
Following are the possible alarms:
Alarm ID Description
Fault summation 1 Section 5.5.3.1.
Warning summation 2 Section 5.5.3.2.
Amplifier 3
Exceeded power 4 Section 5.5.3.3.
Decreased power 5 Section 5.5.3.4.
[Non critical]
Reflected power 6 Section 5.5.3.6.
Amplifier: Stage X 3s
Input level 2s Section 5.5.3.7.
Exceeded power 4s Section 5.5.3.8.
Decreased power 5s Section 5.5.3.9.
Reflected power 6s Section 5.5.3.10.
Temperature 7s Section 5.5.3.11.
HW error 8s Section 5.5.3.12.
PSUs error 9s Section 5.5.3.13.
(a)
ASI input 8
ASI 1 error 9 (a)
Section 5.5.3.14.
ASI 2 error 10 (a)
Section 5.5.3.15.
(a)
IP input 11
Socket 1 error 12 (a)
Section 5.5.3.16.
Section 5.5.3.17.
(e)
DTT receiver 1 24
Unlock 25 (e)
Section 5.5.3.18.
RF signal quality 26 (e)
Section 5.5.3.19.
Temperature 27 (e)
Section 5.5.3.20.
page 265 Ed 04
Menu structure
(a)
Modulator 32
TS error 33 (a)
Section 5.5.3.21.
MIP error 34 (a)
Section 5.5.3.22.
Input overflow 35 (a)
Section 5.5.3.23.
T2MI error 36 (a)
Section 5.5.3.24.
BTS error 81 (a)
Section 5.5.3.25.
SFN reference 37 (a)
Section 5.5.3.26.
SFN margin 38 (a)
Section 5.5.3.27.
Temperature 39 (a)
Section 5.5.3.28.
Output level 40 (a)
Section 5.5.3.29.
Shoulders 83 (a)
Section 5.5.3.30.
MER 40s (a)
Section 5.5.3.31.
External feedback 83s (a)
Section 5.5.3.32.
BER 84s (a)
Section 5.5.3.33.
RF output 41 Section 5.5.3.34.
Synchronization module 45
Satellites antenna 46 (b)
Section 5.5.3.35.
UnLock 47 (b)
Section 5.5.3.36.
Holdover not available 48 (b)
Section 5.5.3.37.
HW error 49 Section 5.5.3.38.
Temperature 50 Section 5.5.3.39.
10MHz input 43 Section 5.5.3.40.
1PPS input 44 (b)
Section 5.5.3.41.
(c)
Rack cooling
Temperature (c)
Section 5.5.3.42.
Pressure difference (c)
Section 5.5.3.43.
HW error (c)
Section 5.5.3.44.
HW error 57
Internal error 59 Section 5.5.3.45.
Local oscillator 60 Section 5.5.3.46.
Internal DC supply voltage 61 Section 5.5.3.47.
Fan 62
Fan 1 63 Section 5.5.3.48.
External alarm 66
Input #1 67 Section 5.5.3.49.
(d)
Redundancy
Communication error (d)
Section 5.5.3.51.
RF switch error (d)
Section 5.5.3.52.
Reserve not ready (d)
Section 5.5.3.53.
(a)
Only available with Transmitter hardware basis.
(b)
Only available with Synchronization module GNSS hardware option.
(c)
Only available with rack cooling control module.
(d)
Only available with redundancy option enabled.
page 266 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.1 Fault summation

Summatory of fault alarms: one or more faults triggered.
User can define which of the alarms are considered as fault alarm (see 5.5.1.6 section).
5.5.3.2 Warning summation

Summatory of warning alarms: one or more warning triggered.
User can define which of the alarms are considered as warning alarm (see 5.5.1.6 sec-
tion).
5.5.3.3 Amplifier :: Exceeded power

It is triggered when the measure of forward power (detected at the output of the com-
plete transmitter) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Exceeded power threshold
at Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.25.
5.5.3.4 Amplifier :: Decreased power

plete transmitter) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Decreased power
threshold at Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.25.
5.5.3.5 Amplifier :: Decreased power [Non critical]

threshold [Non critical] at Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.25.
5.5.3.6 Amplifier :: Reflected power

It is triggered when the measure of reverse power (detected at the output of the com-
plete transmitter) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Reverse power threshold at
Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.25.
5.5.3.7 Amplifier: Stage X :: Input level

It is triggered when the RF level detected at the input of the amplifier stage 1 is under the
minimum to guarantee a correct performance of the amplifier stage.
5.5.3.8 Amplifier: Stage X :: Exceeded power

It is triggered when the measure of forward power (detected at the output of the am-
plifier stage 1) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Exceeded power threshold at
Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.26.
Exceeded power threshold is also taken into account for exceeded power self-protection
(as detailed in section 2.3.4.2).
page 267 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.9 Amplifier: Stage X :: Decreased power

It is triggered when the measure of forward power (detected at the output of the amplifier
stage 1) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Decreased power threshold
at Setup > Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.26.
5.5.3.10 Amplifier: Stage X :: Reflected power

It is triggered when the measure of reverse power (detected at the output of the amplifier
stage 1) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Reverse power threshold at Setup >
Amplifier > Configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.26.
Together with this alarm, a self-protection due to excessive reflected power is triggered
5.5.3.11 Amplifier: Stage X :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of amplifier stage temperature (Setup > Amplifier >
Stage 1 menu) exceeds 80o C. These thresholds are not user-configurable. See section
5.5.2.26.
If the temperature keeps increasing the overtemperature self-protection can be trig-

gered (as detailed in section 2.3.4.5).
5.5.3.12 Amplifier: Stage X :: HW error

It is triggered when a general hardware problem is detected at the amplifier stage X.
Including a problem with the LDMOS consumption.
5.5.3.13 Amplifier: Stage X :: PSUs error

It is triggered when a problem is detected at any power supply at the amplifier stage X.
5.5.3.14 ASI input :: ASI 1 error

It is triggered when errors are detected at the frame from ASI 1 input, so the correspond-
ing transport stream is not valid.
Corresponding ASI input must be enabled. See section 5.5.2.3.

5.5.3.16 IP input :: Socket 1 error

It is triggered when the device is not able to establish a correct link with the IP socket 1
configured at menu Setup > Input > IP socket 1. See section 5.5.2.1.
page 268 Ed 04
Menu structure

5.5.3.18 DTT receiver 1 :: Unlock

It is triggered when the DTT receiver is not able to lock with the incoming RF signal. See
section 5.5.2.5.
5.5.3.19 DTT receiver 1 :: RF signal quality

It is triggered when the quality measures of the receiver from the incoming signal are un-
der the defined thresholds (not user-configurable) to ensure the adequate performance
of the receiver. See section 5.5.2.5:
Measurement Threshold
BER before Viterbi (DVB-T) 4.0e−4
5.5.3.20 DTT receiver 1 :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of DTT receiver 1 temperature (Setup > Input > DTT
receiver 1 menu) exceeds 80o C. This threshold is not user-configurable.
5.5.3.21 Modulator :: TS error

It is triggered when a problem is detected on the transport stream on the active input
(indicated in Source selected parameter at menu Setup > Input > Input switching, see
section 5.5.2.7). This alarm may be caused by the following events:
• Synchronization errors on the transport stream.

• Restamping errors caused by a transport stream input bitrate higher than expected.
TS error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.22 Modulator :: MIP error

It is triggered when MIP (Mega-frame Initialization Packet) is not detected correctly on
the transport stream on the active input (indicated in Source selected parameter at
menu Setup > Input > Input switching, see section 5.5.2.7).
The parameter Autoconfiguration from MIP at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Net-
work must be enabled. This alarm is available in SFN and in MFN.
MIP error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.23 Modulator :: Input Overflow

Indicates an overflow in the buffer of the modulator caused by a high data rate on the
transport stream on the active input in relation with the modulation parameters config-
uration.
Input Overflow mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
page 269 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.24 Modulator :: T2MI error

It is triggered when a problem is detected on the DVB-T2 Modulator Interface (T2MI)
from the active input (indicated in Source selected parameter at menu Setup > Input >
Input switching, see section 5.5.2.7).
This alarm only appears when choosing Mode B as Input mode at menu Setup > Exciter
> Modulator > at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network and may be triggered by
the following events:
• Synchronization and/or continuity errors on the TS stream that encapsulates the

T2MI.
• T2MI timeout error if a T2MI packet with the expected T2MI PID is not received for
5 seconds.
• Synchronization and/or continuity errors and/or CRC errors on the T2MI stream.
• T2MI timestamp has not been received yet.
• The number of received PLPs exceed the maximum allowed.
T2MI error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.25 Modulator :: BTS error

It is triggered when a problem is detected on the BTS (broadcast transport streams)
BTS error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.26 Modulator :: SFN reference

It is triggered when the time and/or frequency reference to the modulator is not valid for
SFN.
At the start-up of the modulator, if the 10MHz or 1PPS signals are not present, this
alarm is triggered and SFN operation is not possible.
signal keeps from a synchronized source and this alarm will not be triggered.
See section 2.2.3.4 for more details about the possible sources for the time and frequency
reference. Active source and switching options can be configured at menu Setup > Ref-
erence > Reference source, see section 5.5.2.23).
Besides the above, in case of working in DVB-T2 with absolute T2MI Timestamp, the
device must be synchronized with a date and precise time as detailed in section 2.2.2.2.
Parameter SFN reference (absolute) at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (see
section 5.5.2.13) must be Ok.
SFN reference mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
page 270 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.27 Modulator :: SFN margin

It is triggered when the modulator, working on SFN network mode, detects that the trans-
mission is not carried out into the temporal window of the corresponding PPS
edge.
At certain cases, due to the inner limitations of the relative reference, the modulator could
not be able to detect this situations. In case of working in DVB-T2 with absolute T2MI
Timestamp the modulator is able to detect this situation always.
SFN margin mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.28 Modulator :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of Modulator board temperature (Setup > Exciter >
Modulator > General menu) exceeds 70o C. This threshold is not user-configurable.
5.5.3.29 Modulator :: Output level

It is triggered when the modulator does not provide signal at intermediate frequency.
5.5.3.30 Modulator :: Shoulders

It is triggered when the measure of the spectrum shoulders of the amplifier output sam-
ple (Lower shoulder or Upper shoulder at Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector
menu) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Shoulder alarm at Setup > Ex-
citer > Modulator > Precorrector menu).
5.5.3.31 Modulator :: MER

It is triggered when the measure of the MERrms of the transmitter output sample (MER at
Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector menu) decreases under a user-configurable
threshold (MER alarm at Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector menu).
5.5.3.32 Modulator :: External feedback

It is triggered when the RF level detected at the feedback input of the exciter is under the
minimum to guarantee a correct performance of the precorrector.
5.5.3.33 Modulator :: BER

It is triggered when the measure of the BER of the transmitter output sample (BER at
Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector menu) decreases under 1.0E-4.
5.5.3.34 RF output
It is triggered when the level of the RF signal detected at the output of the signal board
is not enough to excite the amplifier.
page 271 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.35 Synchronization module :: Satellites antenna

Indicates that the GNSS satellites antenna is shorted or not connected.
It might be triggered if the antenna is power supplied externally instead with the 5VDC
from built-in receiver.
Antenna and satellites status can be checked at Setup > Reference > Synchronization
module menu (see section 5.5.2.24).
5.5.3.36 Synchronization module :: UnLock

It is triggered when synchronization module is unlock. The OCXO placed inside the syn-
chronization module can be synchronized with an external 1PPS signal or with the built-in
GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) satellite receiver.
When this alarm is triggered (unlocked) after a synchronized status, taking into account
the stability of OCXO, synchronization module enters into a holdover mode to keep pro-
viding the synchronization signals for SFN operation for a longer time.
5.5.3.37 Synchronization module :: Holdover not available

It is triggered when the Holdover time reaches the user-configurable holdover limit
(both parameters are available at Setup > Reference > Synchronization module menu,
see section 5.5.2.24).
Holdover status is always preceded by a unlocked status, that is preceded by a syn-

chronized status. When this alarm is triggered, holdover is not available and the SFN
operation is not possible.
5.5.3.38 Synchronization module :: HW error

It is triggered when an internal hardware failure is detected at the synchronization
module.
5.5.3.39 Synchronization module :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of synchronization module temperature (Setup >
Reference > Synchronization module menu) exceeds 80o C. This threshold is not user-
configurable.
5.5.3.40 Synchronization module :: 10MHz input

It is triggered when the external 10MHz synchronization signal is not detected at the
corresponding input of the Synchronization module at the rear side of the device.
The detection of this alarm is only available when the active reference source is an
external one (see section 2.2.3.4). Active source and switching options can be config-
ured at menu Setup > Reference > Reference source, see section 5.5.2.23).
page 272 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.41 Synchronization module :: 1PPS input

It is triggered when the external 1PPS synchronization signal is not detected at the
5.5.3.42 Rack cooling :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of temperature (System > Service > Cooling > Rack
menu) exceeds 70o C. This threshold is not user-configurable.
5.5.3.43 Rack cooling :: Pressure difference

It is triggered when the rack cooling control module is not able to compensate the differ-
ence of the air pressure between inside and outside the rack.
5.5.3.44 Rack cooling :: HW error

It is triggered when an internal hardware failure in the rack cooling control module is
detected.
5.5.3.45 HW error :: Internal error

It is triggered when an internal hardware failure is detected.
5.5.3.46 HW error :: Local oscillator

It is triggered when any of the local oscillators (Upconverter or downconverter) is un-
locked due to an internal failure.
5.5.3.47 HW error :: Internal DC supply voltage

It is triggered when any of the voltages of the internal DC lines measured in the exciter
(menu System > Service > Power supply > Exciter, see section 5.5.1.17) and that are
generated from the DC output voltage from AC power supply is out of its usual range.
5.5.3.48 Fan :: Fan 1

It is triggered when a failure is detected in the fan 1 at the rear side of the device. The
fan placed closer to the output RF connector, first from the left looking from rear to front.
If the temperature keeps increasing because of the fan failure, the overtemperature self-
protection can be triggered (as detailed in section 2.3.4.5).
page 273 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.3.49 External alarm :: Input #1

It is triggered when the input #1 from external I/O interface is triggered.
Pinout of I/O port at the rear side of the device is detailed at figure 2.11. Configuration
options for external inputs are detailed at menu System > Events configuration > I/O
interface in section 5.5.1.8.

5.5.3.51 Redundancy :: Communication error

It is triggered when the a communication problem is detected into the control bus with
some of the devices needed for the N+1 redundancy system.
5.5.3.52 Redundancy :: RF switch error

It is triggered when is not possible to managed any RF switch in a N+1 system.
5.5.3.53 Redundancy :: Reserve not ready

It is triggered when the reserve transmitter (transmitter B) is not ready for a switchover in
a N+1 system.
page 274 Ed 04
Menu structure
5.5.4 EventLog
EventLog registers all the changes in the status of the alarms listed in section 5.5.3 and
also the events listed in section 5.5.1.7.
EventLog information is displayed in a paginated list of a maximum of 5000 entries. Each

page can be list 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 500 or 5000 (all) entries.
For each entry in the log, the following information is displayed by columns:
• Index: Index of the entry into the total list of entries.
• Timestamp: Timestamp with date and hour (hh:mm:ss dd/mm/yyyy ) of the entry.
in section 5.5.1.7 or alarms groups listed in section 5.5.3 or low (0) for the alarms
• Status: Status of the entry. Possible values for alarms entries are OFF or ON. For
events entries the only possible value is information.
Possible operations with EventLog are:
• Perform a search or a filter for any text in the columns.

• Mark as read all the old entries in order to notice the new alarms without having to
clean the previous entries.
page 275 Ed 04
Technical Manual Maintenance
6 Maintenance
6.1 Software upgrade

This section is about the procedure for upgrading the software of the device. Sections
6.1.1 and 6.1.2 details the step by step procedures for a single drive configuration, but
the section 6.1.3 adds some notes to take into account about the upgrade of devices in a
redundancy (DD or 1+1) configuration.
Software version file (with extension *.trf ) is a packet containing the different versions
for the subassemblies inside the device.
Software upgrade can be done directly by selecting the file with the software version
or from a remote server. Next sections detail the instructions for completing a software
upgrade process following both methods.
CAUTION:
Service maybe affected.
Service maybe affected during the upgrading process.
page 276 Ed 04
Software upgrade
6.1.1 Software upgrade from file

Using the Web GUI, the procedure for performing a software upgrade is as follows:
1. Log on to the Web GUI (see the chapter 5.3.2).
2. Go to System > Service > SW Upgrade menu.
3. Select the file with new software version (with extension *.trf ) and click on Upgrade.
First step is upload the file to the device...
NOTE:
The uploading process of the file take several minutes depending on the file size
and network speed, but the service is not affected during this step. Please do not
reload the page during this process.
page 277 Ed 04
Software upgrade
Once the uploading is finished, the device processes the file...
..and starts the upgrading process...
The device restart on service mode and a progress bar and a detailed event log
with the steps is shown to check the status of the upgrading process...
During this time the service is affected because the output power is totally switch
off. Once the process is complete, the device will restart again.
4. Clean the cache memory of web browser (see section 6.1.4).
5. Check new version at System > Device info > Software version.
page 278 Ed 04
Software upgrade
Error control
During the upgrade, in case of a problem detected by the device, an error window pop-
up is shown with the corresponding error message. For example:
Possible error codes during the upgrade are:
• Maximum execution time exceeded. Timeout for the uploading process of the
file with version is expired. Check the network connection speed, maybe too slowly
for the file size.
• Internal error (-6)..(-11). Internal error during the uploading process of the file with
the version. Perform a device reset and retry.
• File already exists. A file from a previous incorrect uploading process was stored
in the device. Perform a device reset and retry.
• Error uploading the file. Error during the uploading process of the file. Check the
file and the network connection with the device.
• Device connection failure. It is not possible to connect with the device. Check
the network connection with the device.
• Error uploading the file. General error during the uploading process of the file.
Check the file and the network connection with the device.
• An error occurred while preparing the upgrade. Perform a device reset and
retry.
• Corrupted file. The file with the version is corrupted. Try with an adequate file
(with extension .trf ).
• Error extracting upgrade file. Error extracting the file with the version. Please,
contact with service support to ask for a correct one.
• Bad upgrade file content. The file with the version was incorrectly generated.
Please, contact with service support to ask for a correct one.
page 279 Ed 04
Software upgrade
After the upgrade, in case of an incoherence between the current packet version in-
stalled and the version of some subassembly, for example, in case of installing a GNSS
receiver with an older version, the device is able to detect this issue. At menu System
> Device info is possible to check which is the hardware subassembly with the version
error:
In this case, each time that user enters at the GUI, a warning window pop-up is shown
with the message "There is a problem with software version. To try to solve it reinstall
software at System > Service > SW Upgrade menu":
Then, go to System > Service > SW Upgrade menu and at Reinstall current software
version press the Reinstall button:
page 280 Ed 04
Software upgrade
6.1.2 Software upgrade from server

Software upgrade procedure from a remote server is splitted into three sequenced steps:
1. Check. Check for a new version file available at the remote server.
2. Download. Download the file with the available new version from the remote
server.
3. Upgrade. Launch the upgrade process using the previously downloaded file with
the new version.
Each one of these steps can be done manually or automatically (except the upgrade
step, that must be launched manually).
3. At Upgrade from server > Server configuration, select the upgrade type:
• Manual. The three steps (Check,Download and Upgrade) must be done

manually by pressing the corresponding button.
• Auto: Check available upgrade. Check step is done automatically. Down-
load and Upgrade steps must be done manually by pressing the correspond-
ing button. A text file named manifest.list with the structure of the figure 6.1
must be stored in the server together with the version file.
• Auto: Check and download. Check and Download steps are done auto-
matically. Upgrade must be done manually by pressing the corresponding
button. A text file named manifest.list with the structure of the figure 6.1 must
be stored in the server together with the version file.
4. Fulfill the server configuration parameters and confirm by pressing Apply button:
• Server address. Remote address of the server and path to the file inside the
server (i.e. 192.168.2.129/repository ) . FTP protocol is assumed by default.
Prepend http:// to the address in case of using HTTP protocol.
page 281 Ed 04
Software upgrade
• Server user. User for login at FTP server.

• Server password. Password for login at FTP server.
• Daily check. In automatic types of upgrade allows to set the time of the day
in 24 hours format (00:00) to check periodically for new version files available.
• Upgrading file. In manual type of upgrade allows to set the name of the
file using for upgrading. Can be the *.trf file with the version itself or a text
file named manifest.list with the structure of the figure 6.1 and stored in the
server together with the version file.
• Version file. Name of the *.trf file with the version ready for upgrading.
5. Check for a new version file available at the remote server. Manually by pressing
Check now button or automatically selecting Auto: Check available upgrade type.
Parameter Status shows the message Upgrade file available if an upgrade file is
available at the server for the device.
6. Download the file with the available new version from the remote server. Manually
by pressing Download now button or automatically selecting Auto: Check and
download type.
Parameter Status shows the message Downloading file... and parameter Down-
load shows the data that is downloading.
When it finishes, parameter Status shows the message File downloaded. Upgrade
available .
page 282 Ed 04
Software upgrade
7. Launch the upgrade process using the previously downloaded file with the new
version by pressing Upgrade now button.
Parameter Status shows the message Validating new version... and starts the
upgrading process...
page 283 Ed 04
Software upgrade
Figure 6.1: Structure of manifest.list file.
Error control
• There is not an upgrade available. manifest.list file is found on the server path,
but there are not available upgrade file for the device with the requirements defined
into the manifest.list. Check the requirements defined into the manifest.list.
• Wrong .trf filename in manifest.list. manifest.list file is found on the server path,
but the name of the *.trf file defined into the manifest.list is wrong. Check the name
of the *.trf file defined into the manifest.list.
• Error: Wrong URL Server. Check the URL of the server.
page 284 Ed 04
Software upgrade
• Error: server not achievable. It is not possible to reach the URL of the server.
Check the URL.
• Error: manifest.list not found on this URL. manifest.list file is not found on the
server path. Save the manifes.list file on the server.
• Error: file not found on this URL. *.trf file with the version is not found on the
server path. Check the path and name of *.trf file and/or the name defined on the
manifest.list.
• Error: remote file is forbidden. Check the server and /or file permissions.
• Error: network is unreachable. Check the URL.
• Error: the access is unauthorized. Check the server and /or file permissions.
• Error: connect refused. Check the server and /or file permissions and the lo-
gin/password parameters.
• Error: login incorrect. Check the login parameter.
• Error: not an http or ftp server. Check the server protocol, prepend http:// to the
address only in case of using HTTP protocol.
• Removing local file error. Error removing the local file. Try again.
• Error: Downloading process failed. Try again.
• Error: An error occurred while preparing the upgrade. Try again.
• Error: Corrupted file. The file with the version is corrupted. Try with an adequate
file (with *.trf extension).
• Error: Bad upgrade file content. The file with the version was incorrectly gener-
ated. Please, contact with service support to ask for a correct one.
• Internal error. Internal error during the uploading process of the file with the ver-
sion. Try again.
error:
page 285 Ed 04
Software upgrade
page 286 Ed 04
Software upgrade
6.1.3 Notes for redundancy configurations

Dual drive redundancy
To upgrade a complete dual drive transmitter, the exciter A and exciter B must be up-
graded following the steps of the previous sections.
The amplifier stage is provided with a microcontroller that maybe necessary upgrade.
This upgrade, if needed, is including into the exciter upgrading process. The output power
of the amplifier stage is switch off during the upgrading process that takes about 30 sec-
onds. In case of coupling amplifiers, each stage is upgrading one by one in order to
reduce the impact over the total output power. In dual drive configuration, the micro-
controller into each amplifier stage is only upgraded from the exciter A
In order to minimize the time that the service is affected, upgrade process should be
done when the exciter to upgrade is towards the load. By this way, the time that the
service is affected (power switch off) is reduced only to the time needed for switching the
exciters plus the time of upgrading each amplifier stage (reduced power).
1+1 redundancy
To upgrade a complete 1+1 transmitter, the transmistter A and transmistter B must be
upgraded following the steps of the previous sections.
The amplifier stage is provided with a microcontroller that maybe necessary upgrade.
This upgrade, if needed, is including into the exciter upgrading process. The output power
of the amplifier stage is switch off during the upgrading process that takes about 30 sec-
onds. In case of coupling amplifiers, each stage is upgrading one by one.
done when the exciter to upgrade is towards the load. By this way, the time that the
service is affected (power switch off) is reduced only to the time needed for switching the
transmitter.
page 287 Ed 04
Software upgrade
6.1.4 Clean cache memory on web browser

It is advisable to log on the WEB interface using in your browser the private navigation
mode. Anyway, following are detailed some examples of methods to clean the cache
memory for the most usual browsers and operating systems:
Chrome for Desktop

• Open “Clear browsing data” dialog by keyboard shortcut: Control+Shift+Delete
(Windows) or Shift+Command+Delete (Mac):
• Mark only the option "Cached images and files" and at "Obliterate the following
items from" drop-down, select "the beginning of time".
• Click the "Clear browsing data" button.
Firefox for Desktop

• Open “Clear your recent history” dialog by keyboard shortcut: Control+Shift+Delete
(Windows) or Shift+Command+Delete (Mac).
• Mark only the option "cache" and at "Time Range to clear" drop-down, select "Ev-
erything".
• Click the "Clear Now" button.
Opera for Desktop

Internet Explorer 9, 10, and 11

• Open “Delete Browsing History window” dialog by keyboard shortcut: Control+Shift+Delete.
• Mark only the option "Temporary Internet Files". Make sure there is no check next
to “Preserve favorite website data.” If this is checked, you won’t be able to delete
the entire cache.
• Click the "Delete" button.
Microsoft Edge
• Open “Clear browsing data” dialog by keyboard shortcut: Control+Shift+Delete.
• Mark only the option "Cached data and files".
• Click the "Clear" button.
page 288 Ed 04
Software upgrade
Safari for macOS

• Click the “Safari” menu and select “Clear History.” A pop-up will appear.
• Select “All History” from the drop-down menu.
• Click the “Clear History” button. Note that clearing the browser cache in Safari will
also clear your web history and cookies.
Safari for Windows

• Click the Edit menu and select “Empty cache.” Now you’ll see a pop-up window
asking if you really want to delete the cache.
• Click “Empty” to erase the cache.
Safari for iOS

• Tap the “Settings” app on your device’s home screen.
• Tap “Safari” in the Settings list. Now you’ll see a list of Safari’s options.
• Tap the “Clear Cookies and Data” link. A pop-up will ask if you really want to delete
the data. Tap again to confirm. For iOS 6 or older, this option is called “Clear
History and Website Data”.
Chrome for Android
• Tap the menu and select “Settings”.
• Tap “Privacy” and then tap “Clear browsing data”.
• Mark only the option "Cached images and files".
• Tap “Clear browsing data”.
page 289 Ed 04
Cleaning of equipment
6.2 Cleaning of equipment

Cleaning of equipment is essentially restricted to cleaning the fans. Make sure that all
fan openings are not obstructed and that the airflow holes are unobstructed, this helps to
prevent overheating condition.
It is advisable replace the fans after the interval recommended at section 8.11, following
the instructions detailed there.
Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it from the power supply completely.
Dust can be removed manually with a brush or with the help of a vacuum cleaner or
blower. If manual cleaning is chosen, the technician should be grounded to prevent ESD,
either through conductive shoes or through a static grounding strap. If a blower is used,
protect equipment from ESD grounding the nozzle, which should be metallic.
Cleaning agents contain substances that can damage the appliance, i.e. cleaning agents
containing solvents can damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts. Never use chem-
ical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or diluent for cellulose lacquers. To clean
the outside of the device is sufficient to use a lint-free soft cloth.
page 290 Ed 04
Technical Manual Troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Fault Diagnosis via LED

7.1.1 Exciter LED
LED Status Description

POWER Off Check power supply flowchart.
RF OUTPUT Red No output power. Check output power flowchart.
Orange RF overpower alarm (Check device alarms troubleshoot-
ing) or amplifier overtemperature (check the environment
of the installation).
Blinking Reflected power alarm. Check reflected power alarm
flowchart.
Off RF OFF. Set RF ON at RF ON/OFF button via web in-
terface (see section 5.3.3) or via frontal RF ON/OFF hard
key (see section 5.2).
Red Input fault. Check input cabling and configuration.
INPUT
Orange Selected input OK but the other enabled inputs are faulty.
Check input cabling and configuration of the non-selected
inputs.
Off No selected input enabled. Enabled or selected an input
at web interface (see section 5.3.3) or frontal display (see
section 5.2).
Orange Warning. Check device alarms troubleshooting (section
ALARMS
7.2).
Red Alarm. Check device alarms troubleshooting (section
7.2).
page 291 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
LED
7.1.2 Amplifier LED

AMPLIFIER ON Off Check power supply flowchart.
RF IN Red No input level detected power. Check the exciter output
and input cabling.
REFLECTED Red Reflected power alarm. Check reflected power alarm
POWER flowchart.
TEMPERATURE Red Temperature alarm. Check device alarms trou-
bleshooting (section 7.2).
OUT POWER Red No output power. Check output power flowchart.
LOW
FANS Red Fan failure. Replace the failure fan (see 8.11).
TRANSISTORS Red LDMOS transistors failure. Replace the amplifier
stage.
NOTE:
When the amplififer has no configured any index addressing for the control bus,
all LED indicators are blinking in red. Go to Setup > Amplifier > Stage X menu
and at Addressing section assign address to the detected power stage by pressing
Assign button. Be sure that the CTRL bus cabling is correctly conected.
page 292 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
alarms status
7.2 Fault Diagnosis via alarms status

Alarm ID Diagnosis
Fault summation 1 See diagnosis of fault alarms.
Warning summation 2 See diagnosis of warning alarms.
Amplifier 3 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Exceeded power 4 Amplifier or signal board damaged.
Decreased power 5 Go to "No output power" flowchart (section 7.3).
[Non critical]
Reflected power 6 Go to "Reflected power alarm" flowchart (section
7.3).
Amplifier: Stage X 3s
Input level 2s No input level detected at amplifier. Check the ex-
citer output and input cabling.
Exceeded power 4s Amplifier or signal board damaged.
Decreased power 5s Go to "No output power" flowchart (section 7.3).
Reflected power 6s Go to "Reflected power alarm" flowchart (section
7.3).
Temperature 7s Overtemperature at amplifier stage.
HW error 8s The amplifier stage is damaged.
ASI input 8 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
ASI 1 error 9 Check ASI 1 input signal cabling.
IP input 11 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Socket 1 error 12 Check IP socket 1 configuration and Ethernet ca-
bling.
bling.
DTT receiver 1 24
Unlock 25 Check receiver 1 configuration and input RF ca-
bling.
RF signal quality 26 Check input RF cabling.
Temperature 27 Overtemperature at DTT receiver 1 board.
page 293 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
alarms status
Alarm ID Diagnosis
Modulator 32 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
TS error 33 Check configuration of input switching and
input transport stream coding.
MIP error 34 Check input transport stream coding.
Input overflow 35 Check if modulation settings are in accor-
dance with input transport stream coding.
T2MI error 36 Check input T2-MI from T2 gateway.
BTS error 81 Check input BTS.
SFN reference 37 Go to "SFN Reference" flowchart (section
7.3).
SFN margin 38 Go to "SFN problems" flowchart (section
7.3).
Temperature 39 Overtemperature at transmitter signal board.
Output level 40 Go to "No output power" flowchart for trans-
mitters (section 7.3).
Shoulders 83 Reduce output power. Digital precorrector,
signal board or amplifier damaged.
MER 40s Reduce output power. Digital precorrector,
signal board or amplifier damaged.
External feedback 83s No feedback level detected. Check the feed-
back level and cabling.
RF output 41 Insufficient level at amplifier input.
Synchronization module 45 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Satellites antenna 46 Check antenna and cabling.
UnLock 47 Go to "Sync. module" flowchart (section
7.3).
Holdover not available 48 Go to "Sync. module" flowchart (section
7.3).
HW error 49 Replace the sync. module for a spare one.
See section 8.6.
Temperature 50 Overtemperature at synchronization mod-
ule.
10MHz input 43 Check external 10MHz cabling.
1PPS input 44 Check external 1PPS cabling.
HW error 57 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Internal error 59 The device is damaged.
Local oscillator 60 The device is damaged.
Internal DC supply voltage 61 The device is damaged.
Fan 62 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Fan 1 63 Replace the fan 1. See section 8.11.
External alarm 66 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Input #1 67 Check external device connected to external
input contact pin #1.
page 294 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
7.3 Fault Diagnosis via flowchart

RF service failure
The POWER LED is YES Go to "No output power"

Green? flowchart.
NO
Press the AC power switch

into position ON and Check
the power plug and fuse.
The POWER LED is

Green?
NO
Replace (if possible) the

AC power supply with a
spare one.
The POWER LED is YES The AC Power Supply is

Green? damaged.
NO
The device is damaged.
page 295 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
No output power [TRANSMIT-

TER]. Output power alarm is set.
RF OUTPUT LED: Red.
No Mute causes (section

5.5.2.22).
YES
HW error alarm? The device is damaged.
NO
Modulator: Output level NO

alarm?
YES
YES Check input signal cabling

ASI/IP Input alarm?
and configuration.
NO
MIP / TS / T2MI / BTS YES Check input coding and

error alarm? modulator configuration.
NO
page 296 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
Reflected power alarm
Unplug the antenna cable and

connect a dummy load to the RF
output interface of the device (be-
fore band-pass filter).
Reflected power YES

alarm?
NO
Connect a dummy load to the RF

output interface of the device (af-
ter band-pass filter).
Reflected power NO
Check the antenna cabling.
alarm?
YES
The band-pass filter is damaged

or not correctly frequency ad-
justed.
page 297 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
SFN problems
Check SFN cases detailed at figure 7.1.
NO Set to SFN at menu Setup

Network mode = SFN? > Exciter > Modulator >
Network.
YES
YES Go to "SFN Reference"

SFN reference alarm?
flowchart.
NO
Check Input buffer delay
NO parameter at menu Setup >
SFN margin alarm?
Exciter > Modulator > Net-
work. See section 2.2.3.3.
YES
Check if the time reference is the same in

the transmitter and in the source of trans-
port stream.
page 298 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
Figure 7.1: Possible SFN scenarios.
page 299 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
SFN Reference
DVB-T2 with absolute YES Check date and time. See

reference? section 2.2.2.2.
NO
Reference source = YES Check 10MHz and 1PPS

External? external cabling.
NO
Reference source = Exter- YES Go to "Sync. module"

nal[OCXO] or GNSS re-
flowchart.
ceiver ?
NO
Set Reference source to External, Exter-

nal[OCXO] or GNSS receiver.
Sync. module
Check
YES YES 10MHz
Sync. module 10MHz input
and 1PPS
mode = OCXO? alarm?
external
cabling.
NO NO
Wait for locking time.

Satellites an- NO If satellite SNR is
tenna alarm? not enough improve
antenna installation.
YES
Check satellites an- Replace the sync. module for

tenna and cabling. a spare one. See section 8.6
page 300 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
SNMP communication
problems
Follow the instructions

Remote Ethernet NO on section 5.3.1 using
interface correctly
the Remote IP address
connected?
.
YES
NO Follow the instructions

SNMP SW option li-
on section 8.5 to install
censed?
SNMP SW option.
YES
Correct Community
(case-sensitive)?
YES
Is firewall blocking incom-

ing SNMP packets?
YES
Is Trap receiver started and

correctly configured?
YES
Contact service support.
page 301 Ed 04
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
Incorrect SW version
DURING Follow the instructions

During or after a SW
on section 6.1.1 during
upgrading?
the upgrade.
AFTER

After a new HW instal-
on section 6.1.1 after
lation or replacement?
the upgrade.
YES
Reinstall new HW or replacement.
Follow the instructions on section 6.1.1 after the upgrade.
page 302 Ed 04
Reset
7.4 Reset
7.4.1 System Reset
This procedure performs a reinitialization of all memories/FPGAs and a reboot of operat-
ing system/application
1. Log on to the exciter via web browser (see the chapter 5.3.2).
2. Go to System > Service > Reset menu.
3. Press System reset button.

As a result of this reset, the web access will be temporarily lost.
7.4.2 RF Reset
This procedure performs a RF output restart in order to restore the exciter and the am-
plifier stages from an automatic self-protection. For example for overtemperature or for
reflection protection.
This procedure must be performed once the installation of the device has been restored
to previous status of the self-protection.
3. Press RF reset button.
page 303 Ed 04
Technical Manual Service
8 Service
8.1 Change of the output frequency

The response curve of the detectors and couplers used to measure the output power is
not perfectly flat over the whole UHF band, and also because the linearity of the output
stage LDMOS transistors is not constant with the frequency.
A preadjusting process it is performed at factory in order to keep the output power without
significant variations in UHF band. Generally, if the frequency variation is small (less than
24 MHz) there will be no need for any readjustment whatsoever.
In any case the procedure must be as follows:
1. Connect a spectrum analyzer (and the power meter) to the device RF output inter-
face and measure the actual spectrum trace and power. Be sure that the device is
not producing any RF output before connecting the analyzer and using an adequate
coupling device.
2. Log on to the device via web browser (see the chapter 5.3.2).
3. Go to Setup > Exciter > RF Output > RF configuration menu and set the desired
output central frequency.
4. Click in Apply button for recording the new channel.

The output power displayed in the Forward power measurement would be the
same as before the channel was changed but the current power could have slightly
changed. In any case, you can adjust the device output power to the desired value
at System > Service > Power calibration menu. After the calibration, set the
desired power in Configured Power parameter and check the output power in the
power meter or spectrum analyzer.
NOTE: For the non-linear precorrection, although the Digital Adaptative Predistorter
(DAP) is continuously adjusting the precorrection parameters, for getting the op-
timal MER rms value, a service task is available in order to try an optimization of
the precorrector performance process only for this channel (see section 5.5.1.15).
For getting the optimal energy efficiency the service task to do is the efficiency
improvement only for this channel (see section 5.5.1.16)
For the linear precorrection, a service task is available in order to try an opti-
mization of the amplitude response only for this channel, before or after band-pass
filter as needed (see section 5.5.1.14).
page 304 Ed 04
Amplifier stage
replacement
8.2 Amplifier stage replacement

The scope of this procedure is the replacement (including the installation and removal) of
an amplifier stage unit.
8.2.1 Removing amplifier stage
NOTE: Previously to remove the amplifier, delete the current addressing to convert the
amplifier into a spare one for a new configuration. Go to Setup > Amplifier >
Stage X menu and at Addressing press the Delete button or simply pressing for
3 seconds the RESET button at front panel.
1. Disconnect the AC cabling from the corresponding AC connector at the rear side of
the amplifier.
2. Disconnect all RF and control cabling at the rear side of the amplifier.
3. Remove the screws (4x) at frontal side of the amplifier.
4. Remove the amplifier from the rack.
NOTE: In case that the amplifier stage is not replaced for a spare one, through the desired
GUI, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu and set the parameter Number
of amplifier stages with the corresponding value.
8.2.2 Installing amplifier stage
NOTE: The number of amplifier stages installed must be according with the device config-
uration. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu
and check that the parameter Number of amplifier stages corresponds to the
number of amplifier stages installed.
NOTE: Previously to insert the new amplifier assure that the spare one has no addressing
(all LED indicators must be blinking in red). In other case, remove the address by
pressing for 3 seconds the RESET button at front panel or with only this amplififer
connected to the control bus (D-sub 9-pins connector labeled as CTRL BUS at
rear side), go to Setup > Amplifier > Stage X menu and at Addressing press the
Delete button.
1. Insert the amplifier into the rack.

2. Connect all RF and control cabling at the rear side of the amplifier.
3. Fasten the screws (4x) at frontal side of the amplifier.
4. Connect the AC cabling from the corresponding AC connector at the rear side of
the amplifier.
5. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Amplifier > Stage X menu and press the
Assign button at parameter Assign address to the detected power stage. You
can use the identify button to get a visual checking (LED indicators blinking for a
few seconds).
page 305 Ed 04
Amplifier stage
replacement
8.2.3 Fine phase adjusting for coupled amplifiers

1. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Amplifier > Stage 1 menu.
2. Increase RF phase value from 0 up to 3, checking if the total output power, mea-
sured at the directional coupler after the output combiner increases its value or
not.
3. Repeat this steps for the rest of amplifiers in order to get the maximum value of
the total output power.
page 306 Ed 04
Exciter replacement
8.3 Exciter replacement

an exciter unit.
8.3.1 Removing exciter

the exciter.
2. Disconnect all RF and control cabling at the rear side of the exciter.
3. Remove the screws (4x) at frontal side of the exciter.
4. Remove the exciter from the rack.
8.3.2 Installing exciter

1. Insert the exciter into the rack.
2. Connect all RF and control cabling at the rear side of the exciter.
3. Fasten the screws (4x) at frontal side of the exciter.
the exciter.
5. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu and set
at parameter Number of amplifier stages the corresponding value. And for each
amplifier stage, enable the corresponding Power supply units.
6. In case of a redundant system, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu
and select at parameter Type of redundancy the value according to the type of
redundancy.
page 307 Ed 04
Install/Uninstall a HW
option
8.4 Install/Uninstall a HW option

This section details the steps to install a new HW option in the device.
8.4.1 Install the Synchronization board (GNSS)

1. Remove the External reference module following the instructions detailed at sec-
tion 8.8.1.
2. Insert the Synchronization board (GNSS) following the instructions detailed at

section 8.6.2.
4. Go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu, Install HW.
5. At Synchronization board select the GNSS receiver option.
6. Click in Apply button.
7. Go to System > Device info menu and at Hardware options check that the GNSS
receiver option is installed.
8.4.2 Uninstall the Synchronization board (GNSS)

1. Remove the Synchronization board (GNSS) following the instructions detailed at
section 8.6.1.
2. Insert the External reference module following the instructions detailed at section
8.8.2.
5. At Synchronization board select the External reference option.
7. Go to System > Device info menu and at Hardware options check that the Ex-
ternal reference option is installed.
8.4.3 Install the Synchronization board (OCXO)

tion 8.8.1.
2. Insert the Synchronization board (OCXO) following the instructions detailed at

section 8.6.2.
5. At Synchronization board select the OCXO option.
7. Go to System > Device info menu and at Hardware options check that the OCXO
option is installed.
page 308 Ed 04
Install a SW option
8.4.4 Uninstall the Synchronization board (OCXO)

1. Remove the Synchronization board (OCXO) following the instructions detailed at
section 8.6.1.
8.8.2.
8.4.5 Install AC power supply unit into the ampliffier

1. Insert the new AC power supply into the corresponding slot (see figure 2.19) fol-
lowing the instructions detailed at section 8.10.2.
4. At PSU amplifier stage check the corresponding PSU.
6. Go to Setup > Amplifier > Stage 1 menu and check the status of the corresponding
PSU.
8.4.6 Uninstall AC power supply unit into the ampliffier

1. Remove the AC power supply from the corresponding slot (see figure 2.19) fol-
lowing the instructions detailed at section 8.10.1.
4. At PSU amplifier stage uncheck the corresponding PSU.
6. Go to Setup > Amplifier > Stage 1 menu and check the status of the corresponding
PSU.
8.5 Install a SW option

Prior to enable a new SW option in the device, you must order the activation code (8-digit
alphanumeric string) to your customer support contact. The information needed for or-
dering the code is the serial number of the device in which the SW option will be installed.
The procedure must be as follows:
page 309 Ed 04
Install a SW option
1. Log on to the Exciter via web browser (see the chapter 5.3.2).
2. Go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu, Install SW.
3. Type the previously requested Activation code in the textbox.
5. Go to System > Device info menu and at Software options check that the new
SW option is installed.
page 310 Ed 04
GNSS receiver
replacement
8.6 GNSS receiver replacement

the optional GNSS receiver module.
The design of the device allows a plug and play installation of the GNSS module. So, it
is possible to perform this procedure while the device is running.
CAUTION:
Synchronization signals maybe affected.
Synchronization signals maybe affected during the installation of the GNSS receiver.
8.6.1 Removing GNSS receiver

1. Disconnect the cables of the GNSS Receiver Module that are connected (ANTENNA,
10MHz IN, 1PPS IN, 10MHz OUT or 1PPS OUT).
2. Remove the screws (4x) on the four corners of the GNSS Receiver cover using a
PH2 screwdriver.
3. Remove the GNSS Receiver Module from the slot pulling by the two handles at the
same time.
4. Through the desired GUI, go to System > Device Info > HW Options and check
that the GNSS receiver is not detected.
NOTE: GNSS slot must not be empty. In case that the GNSS is not replaced for a spare
one, External Reference module (or OCXO module) must be inserted instead.
Go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at Synchronization board
select the External reference (or OCXO ) option and click in Apply button. Follow
the steps of procedure 8.8.2 (or 8.7.2) for completing the removal.
8.6.2 Installing GNSS receiver

1. Insert the module into the slot pushing by the two handles at the same time.
2. Fasten the module with the screws (4x) on the four corners of the module using a
PH2 screwdriver.
3. Connect the cables of the GNSS Receiver Module that are needed (ANTENNA,
that the GNSS receiver is correctly detected.
page 311 Ed 04
OCXO module
replacement
8.7 OCXO module replacement

the optional OCXO module.
The design of the device allows a plug and play installation of the OCXO module. So, it
CAUTION:
Synchronization signals maybe affected during the installation of the OCXO module.
8.7.1 Removing OCXO module

1. Disconnect the cables of the OCXO module that are connected (10MHz IN, 1PPS
IN, 10MHz OUT or 1PPS OUT).
2. Remove the screws (4x) on the four corners of the OCXO module cover using a
PH2 screwdriver.
3. Remove the OCXO module from the slot pulling by the two handles at the same
time.
that the OCXO is not detected.
NOTE: OCXO module slot must not be empty. In case that the OCXO module is not
replaced for a spare one, External Reference module (or GNSS receiver) must
be inserted instead. Go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at
Synchronization board select the GNSS receiver (or OCXO ) option and click in
Apply button. Follow the steps of procedure 8.8.2 (or 8.6.2) for completing the
removal.
8.7.2 Installing OCXO module

PH2 screwdriver.
3. Connect the cables of the OCXO module that are needed (10MHz IN, 1PPS IN,
10MHz OUT or 1PPS OUT).
that the OCXO is correctly detected.
page 312 Ed 04
External reference
module replacement
8.8 External reference module replacement

8.8.1 Removing External reference module
1. Disconnect the cables of the External reference module that are connected ( 10MHz
IN, 1PPS IN, 10MHz OUT or 1PPS OUT).
2. Remove the screws (4x) on the four corners of the module using a PH2 screw-
driver.
3. Remove the module from the slot pulling by the two handles at the same time.
that the External Reference module is not detected.
NOTE: Module slot must not be empty. In case that the External Reference module
is not replaced for a spare one, a GNSS receiver (or a OCXO ) must be inserted
instead. Follow the steps of procedure 8.4.1 (or 8.4.3) for completing the installa-
tion.
8.8.2 Installing External reference module

PH2 screwdriver.
3. Connect the cables of the External reference module that are needed ( 10MHz IN,
1PPS IN, 10MHz OUT or 1PPS OUT).
that the External Reference module is correctly detected.
page 313 Ed 04
module replacement
8.9 Rack cooling control module replacement

a rack cooling control module.
8.9.1 Removing a rack cooling control module
NOTE: Previously to remove the module, delete the current addressing to convert the
module into a spare one for a new configuration. Go to Setup > Service > Install
HW/SW menu and at Cooling rack: Remove address select the option rack
cooling x and press the Apply button or simply pressing for 3 seconds the RESET
button at front panel until LED indicators blinking in red.
1. Disconnect the control bus connector labelled as CTRL bus (Sub-D, 9 pins).
2. Disconnect all the cabling of turbines control and sensor inputs (if exist).
3. Remove the screws that fasten the module to the rack.
4. Remove the module from the rack.
NOTE: In case that the module is not replaced for a spare one, through the desired GUI,
go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu and, at Cooling rack, uncheck the
corresponding box of Install cooling rack x .
8.9.2 Installing a rack cooling control module

1. Insert the module into the rack.
2. Fasten the screws that fasten the module to the rack.
3. Connect all the cabling of turbines control and sensor inputs (if exist).
4. Connect the control bus connector labelled as CTRL bus (Sub-D, 9 pins).
NOTE: When the control bus (connector labelled as CTRL bus Sub-D, 9 pins) is connected,
the module is powered from the bus. Check visually that the new module has
not any control address pre-configured (LED indicators blinking in red). If not,
remove the control address by pressing the RESET button for 3 seconds until LED
indicators blinking in red.
5. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu and, at
Cooling rack, check that the parameter detected boards has a new value. If
not, maybe the module is not correctly connected to the control bus or the control
address was not correctly removed and could be needed repeat the previous step.
6. At the same Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu, at Cooling rack, select in
the parameter assign address the desired cooling rack x option and check the
corresponding box at Installl cooling rack x. Press Apply button to confirm the
changes.
7. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Cooling > Rack x menu (at web
GUI, could be needed refresh the web browser) and check that the value of the
parameter control status is Ok.
page 314 Ed 04
module replacement
8. At the same Setup > Service > Cooling > Rack x menu, select in the parameter
cooling mode the desired option and check the box of Fan 1 (and Fan 2 in case of
two turbine). Press Apply button to confirm the changes and after that check that
the value of the parameter HW status is Ok. Check section 2.10 for more details
about the cooling rack control module.
page 315 Ed 04
Amplifier AC power
supply installation
8.10 Amplifier AC power supply installation

the AC power supply unit for a power amplifier.
The design of the device allows a hot-swap installation of each AC power supply unit
(see figure 2.19). So, it is possible to perform this procedure without turning off the AC
source providing to the device.
CAUTION:
RF service maybe affected.
In case of no power supply redundancy, an RF service fault will be caused.
page 316 Ed 04
Amplifier AC power
supply installation
8.10.1 Removing AC power supply

1. Remove, using a PH2 screwdriver, the 7 screws (2) on the power supply units
slots cover (1) at frontal side of the amplifier to get access to the power supply unit.
2. Press the clip (3) and pull the unit out with the handle/grid (4).
3. Fasten the slot cover with the screws (7x).
NOTE: In case of removing a redundant power supply, if this slot will be empty, please
go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at PSU amplifier stage 1
unmark the corresponding PSU option and click in Apply button in order to avoid
monitoring the alarms from the redundant power supply slot.
8.10.2 Installing AC power supply

1. Remove, using a PH2 screwdriver, the 7 screws (2) on the power supply slot cover
(1) at frontal side of the amplifier to get access to the power supply unit.
2. Grasp the handle/grid (2) and push inside the slot through the rail keeping the
handle/grid open.
Please use adequate force to insert power supply into the slot. Slamming power
supply into the device can damage the connectors both on the rear of the supply
and inside the device.
3. Close the handle/grid (4) toward the clip to fasten the PSU into the slot.
4. Check that LED indicators ( ) at the front of the power supply keeps green.
5. Fasten the slot cover with the screws (7x).
page 317 Ed 04
Fans replacement
8.11 Fans replacement

The scope of this procedure is the replacement of the fans provided at the rear side of
the devices.
Following chart summarizes replacement procedures of replaceable fans in each device:
Device No fans Recommended interval for fans replace-

ment
Exciter 1 Every 27000 operating hours at 60o C
Amplifier 2 Every 45000 operating hours at 40o C
As a general rule it is recommended that all fans will be replaced at the same time.
It is possible to perform this procedure while the device is running. Although the device
is able to run without any fans for a brief period of time, it is recommended replace the
fans one by one. The disconnection of a fan will generate an alarm in the device.
page 318 Ed 04
Fans replacement
1. Withdraw the three wires (control, + and -) from its power socket (1). Press the
corresponding locking lever (1a)(1b)(1c) downward while doing so.
2. Use the appropriate socket screwdriver to remove the four socket screws (2) fas-
tening the fan and the protection grid (3).
3. Remove the fan and the protection grid (3).
4. Replace the new fan with the protection grid (3) so that the type plate faces the
protection grid, fastening it with the socket screws (2).
5. Insert the three wires (control, + and -) to its power socket (1). Press the corre-
sponding locking lever (1a)(1b)(1c) downward while doing so.
6. Through the desired GUI, go to System > Service > Cooling (System > Service
> Cooling > Exciter for exciter fan or System > Service > Cooling > Stage X for
amplifier stage X fans) and at the reset of operating time counter of corresponding
fan press the adequate button.
7. Check that there are not alarms related the fans.
page 319 Ed 04
Change of fuse
8.12 Change of fuse

8.12.1 Exciter
CAUTION:
An RF service fault will be caused. Only fuses at following chart must be use.
Exciter
Fuse: 3.15A / 250V
1. Switching off the equipment. Press the AC power switch on the rear panel of the
device into position OFF.
2. Remove the power cable from the connector at the rear side of the device.
3. Retire the fuses slot (1) using a small screwdriver (or similar).
4. Exchange the spare fuse (2) for a new one.
5. Insert the fuses slot.
6. Connect the power cable in the connector at the rear side of the device.
7. Switching on the equipment. Press the AC power switch on the rear panel of the
device into position ON.
8. Check that POWER LED at the front of the device keeps green.
page 320 Ed 04
Saving and restoring
configuration
8.13 Saving and restoring configuration

The device allows to save its complete configuration into a backup file (with .trc exten-
sion). The device is able to restore (partially or completely) the configuration contained
into a file of this type.
Configuration backup files are managed at System > Service > Configuration backups
menu.
Figure 8.1: Backup file manager.
The files are displayed into a table divided into following columns:
• Index. Index of the current file.
• Checkbox. For applying an action (detailed below) over a multiple files.
• File: Name (and extension) of the configuration file.
• Date: Date and hour (yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss) of the uploaded or saved file.
• Storage: Internal memory (Internal) or micro SD card (microSD).
• Actions: Icons with links to the possible individually actions (detailed below).
in ascending or descending.
Possible operations with the Backup file manager:
• Perform a complete restoration of the device from the selected configuration file.
• Perform a partially restoration of the device from the selected configuration file.
• Rename selected configuration file.
• Download selected configuration file.
• Remove selected(s) configuration file(s).
• Save current configuration to a file.
• Upload a configuration file to the internal memory of the device.
page 321 Ed 04
configuration
• Copy selected(s) configuration file(s) to the micro SD card.
• Select desired page and the number of files for page.
factory.trc is an special configuration file saved at factory that cannot be removed by the
user.
8.13.1 Saving configuration

2. Go to System > Service > Configuration backups menu.
3. Click at icon (Save current configuration).
4. Type at Configuration name a name for the file. By default, the name of the file is
the name of the device concatenated with the current timestamp.
6. The new configuration file is stored into the internal memory of the device and can
be managed with the file manager.
8.13.2 Restoring configuration

Two types of restorations are available:
• Complete restoration. The whole device configuration is restored even the user
calibrations (input level, power, precorrection,and efficiency improvements), ex-
cept the parameters of the System > Service > Install HW/SW menu and the
System > Service > Maintenance log menu. This restoration can only be per-
formed into the same device from which file was generated.
• Partial restoration. The configuration can be restored by blocks. Parameters

Name and Location of the System > Service > Install HW/SW menu, RF ON/OFF,
the parameters of the System > Service > Install HW/SW menu, the parameter of
System > Service > Maintenance log menu and user calibrations (input level,
power, precorrection,and efficiency improvements) are not included. This restora-
tion can be performed into all the same type devices (for example, all transmitters).
The available blocks are:
Network interfaces Remote, local and ports configuration

WEB interface WEB users/passwords
Autorefresh and timeout
Date, time and language Language
Date and time
SNMP Agent configuration
Trap sinks configurations
Events configuration Alarms
Events
I/O interface
page 322 Ed 04
configuration
Input IP sockets
ASIs
Input switching
Modulator General
System
Network
Modulation
T2 Frame(DVB-T2)
PLP(DVB-T2)
Precorrector
RF output RF configuration
Mutes (except RF ON/OFF)
Amplifier [Configuration] Amplifier > Configuration
Reference Reference source
Synchronization module
Redundancy Redundancy
NOTE: In case of a backup file generated from a device with a different software version,
the restoration process could be not results successful.
3. For Complete restoration, click at icon (Restore the system with this con-
figuration) in the desired file row and click in Apply button.
4. For Partial restoration, click at icon (Allow configure some system values
with this configuration file) in the desired file row, select the desired configuration
blocks and click in Apply button.
5. Check that the new configuration has been applied into the device.
page 323 Ed 04
UNE-EN ISO 9001
ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
TRedess 2010, S.L.
Volta do Castro, s/n
.
15706 Santiago de Compostela
S PA I N
GPS N: 42° 51’ 52.93”, W: 8° 34’ 5.19”

T +34 981 534 203
F +34 981 522 052

www.tredess.com
Technical Manual
Air-cooled
low power
transmitters
85411xxx 85412xxx
85413xxx 85414xxx
for digital TV
networks
.
UNE-EN ISO 9001

ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
as follows:
Hereby, TRedess 2010, S.L. declares that the radio equipment type 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU.

Por la presente, TRedess 2010, S.L. declara que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico 85411911,
85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 es conforme con la
Directiva 2014/53/UE.

de rádio 85411911, 85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921
está em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE.

comme suit:
85411911, 85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 est con-
forme à la directive 2014/53/UE.

Il fabbricante, TRedess 2010, S.L., dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio 85411911,
85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 è conforme alla diret-
tiva 2014/53/UE.
Wortlaut:
Hiermit erklärt TRedess 2010, S.L., dass der Funkanlagentyp 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.

Tímto TRedess 2010, S.L. prohlašuje, že typ rádiového zarízení 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 je v souladu se smernicí 2014/53/EU.
formes som følger:
Hermed erklærer TRedess 2010, S.L., at radioudstyrstypen 85411911, 85411921, 85411931,
85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 er i overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU.

Käesolevaga deklareerib TRedess 2010, S.L., et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp 85411911,
85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL
nõuetele.

TRedess 2010, S.L. ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU.
Ar šo TRedess 2010, S.L. deklare, ka radioiekarta 85411911, 85411921, 85411931,
85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 atbilst Direktivai 2014/53/ES.

taip:
Aš, TRedess 2010, S.L., patvirtinu, kad radijo irenginiu tipas 85411911, 85411921, 85411931,
85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 atitinka Direktyva 2014/53/ES.

következo:
TRedess 2010, S.L. igazolja, hogy a 85411911, 85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911,
85414911, 85414921 típusú rádióberendezés megfelel a 2014/53/EU irányelvnek.

prevista kif gej:
B’dan, TRedess 2010, S.L., niddikjara li dan it-tip ta’ taghmir tar-radju 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 huwa konformi mad-Direttiva
2014/53/UE.
volgt geformuleerd:
Hierbij verklaar ik, TRedess 2010, S.L., dat het type radioapparatuur 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 conform is met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU.

TRedess 2010, S.L. niniejszym oswiadcza, ze typ urzadzenia radiowego 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 jest zgodny z dyrektywa 2014/53/UE.
Pelny tekst deklaracji zgodnosci UE jest dostepny pod nastepujacym adresem interne-
towym: http://doc.tredess.com.

Prin prezenta, TRedess 2010, S.L. declara ca tipul de echipamente radio 85411911,
85411921, 85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 este în conformitate
cu Directiva 2014/53/UE.

TRedess 2010, S.L. týmto vyhlasuje, že rádiové zariadenie typu 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 je v súlade so smernicou 2014/53/EÚ.

TRedess 2010, S.L. potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme 85411911, 85411921, 85411931,
85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.
TRedess 2010, S.L. vakuuttaa, että radiolaitetyyppi 85411911, 85411921, 85411931,
85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.

Härmed försäkrar TRedess 2010, S.L. att denna typ av radioutrustning 85411911, 85411921,
85411931, 85412921, 85413911, 85414911, 85414921 överensstämmer med direktiv
2014/53/EU.
Air-cooled low power transmitters 85411xxx 85412xxx 85413xxx 85414xxx
CONTENTS
Contents

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1 AC Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1.1 1HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1.2 2HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.1.3 3HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.2 Control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.2.1 Control addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.2.2 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.2.3 Multiport Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.2.4 I/O contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.3 Signal board (Transmitters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3.1 DVB-T/T2 receiver (re-transmitter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3.2 Input switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3.3 Transmitter latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3.4 Frequency and time reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.3.5 Digital modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.3.7 Linear digital precorrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.3.8 IF / Upconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.4 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.5 Self-Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.6 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.8 Synchronization module (GNSS) (HW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2.10 1+1 Redundancy (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.11 N+1 Redundancy (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2.12 ISDB-T Remux (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.13 Hardware and software options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3 Rack cooling control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.4 Interface description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.5 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
page 1 Ed 02
CONTENTS
2.5.1 Transmitter specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3 Installation 59
3.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.1.3 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.2.1.1 ASI Inputs of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.2.1.2 TS over IP Inputs of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.2.1.3 RF Input of Re-transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.2.2 Connecting internal cables for 1+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.2.3 Connecting internal cables for N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.2.5 Connecting INTERLOCK loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.2.7 GNSS antenna installation (HW accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4 Commissioning 71
4.1.2 1+1 (Passive reserve) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.1.3 N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.1.4 Single configuration for Transmitters / Re-transmitter . . . . . . . . 74
5 Operation 75
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.2.1.1 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.2.1.2 1+1/N+1 redundancy overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.2.2 Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.3.4 Log out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.4.3 MIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.4.3.1 TREDESS-FS-MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.4.3.1.2 MIB module: setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.5 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.5.1 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5.5.1.1 System > General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
page 2 Ed 02
CONTENTS

5.5.1.4 System > SNMP > Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5.5.1.5 System > SNMP > IRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5.5.1.10System > Service > Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.5.1.11System > Service > SW Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.5.1.12System > Service > Forward power . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.5.1.13System > Service > Linear Precorrection . . . . . . . . . 177
5.5.1.14System > Service > Non-linear Precorrection . . . . . . . 178
5.5.1.15System > Service > Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.5.1.16System > Service > Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.5.1.17System > Service > Cooling > Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.5.1.18System > Service > Cooling > Rack X . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.5.1.19System > Service > Configuration backups . . . . . . . . 182
5.5.1.20System > Service > Install HW / SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.5.1.20.1 Install HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.5.1.20.2 Install SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.5.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
5.5.2.3 Setup > Input > ASI 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.5.2.4 Setup > Input > ASI 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.5.2.5 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T) . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.5.2.6 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T2) . . . . . . . . . 187
5.5.2.7 Setup > Input > Input switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5.5.2.8 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > General . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.5.2.9 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T) . . . . . . 193
5.5.2.10 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T) . . . . . 194
5.5.2.11 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (DVB-T) . . . . 195
5.5.2.12 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T2) . . . . . 196
5.5.2.13 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T2) . . . . . 197
5.5.2.14 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > T2 Frame (DVB-T2) . . . . 199
5.5.2.15 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > PLP (DVB-T2) . . . . . . . 201
5.5.2.16 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (ISDB-T) . . . . . 203
5.5.2.17 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (ISDB-T) . . . . . 204
5.5.2.18 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (ISDB-T) . . . . 205
5.5.2.19 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Program Specific Information (ISDB-T)207
5.5.2.20 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector . . . . . . . . 208
5.5.2.25 Setup > Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5.5.2.26 Setup > Redundancy > Configuration (1+1) . . . . . . . . 218
5.5.2.27 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (1+1) . . . . . . . 223
5.5.2.28 Setup > Redundancy > Configuration (N+1 [B]) . . . . . . 223
5.5.2.29 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [B]) . . . . 228
5.5.2.30 Setup > Redundancy > Status (N+1 [A]) . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.5.2.31 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [A]) . . . . 229
page 3 Ed 02
CONTENTS
5.5.3 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

5.5.3.1 Fault summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
5.5.3.7 Amplifier :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
5.5.3.12 DTT receiver 1 :: Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.5.3.13 DTT receiver 1 :: RF signal quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.5.3.14 DTT receiver 1 :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.5.3.15 Modulator :: TS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.5.3.16 Modulator :: MIP error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.5.3.17 Modulator :: Input Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.5.3.18 Modulator :: T2MI error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.5.3.19 Modulator :: BTS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
5.5.3.20 Modulator :: SFN reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.5.3.21 Modulator :: SFN margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.5.3.22 Modulator :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.5.3.23 Modulator :: Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.5.3.24 Modulator :: Shoulders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.5.3.25 Modulator :: MER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.5.3.26 Modulator :: BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.5.3.27 RF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.5.3.35 Rack cooling :: Pressure difference . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.5.3.36 Rack cooling :: HW error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.5.3.38 HW error :: LDMOS transistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.5.3.42 HW error :: Non-linear sense feedback . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.5.3.43 Fan :: Fan 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.5.3.44 Fan :: Fan 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.5.3.45 Fan :: Fan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.5.3.46 AC power supply :: PSU A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5.5.3.47 AC power supply :: PSU B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.5.3.50 Redundancy :: Communication error . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.5.3.51 Redundancy :: RF switch error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.5.3.52 Redundancy :: Reserve not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5.5.4 EventLog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
page 4 Ed 02
CONTENTS
6 Maintenance 241
6.1.3 Notes for redundancy configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.4 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.4.1 System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.4.2 RF Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8 Service 266
8.2.1 Install the Synchronization board (GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
8.2.2 Uninstall the Synchronization board (GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
8.2.5 Install the redundant 3HU AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
8.2.6 Uninstall the redundant 3HU AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
8.4 GNSS receiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.4.1 Removing GNSS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.4.2 Installing GNSS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.7 Rack cooling control module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.7.1 Removing a rack cooling control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.7.2 Installing a rack cooling control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.8 AC power supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
8.8.1 1HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
8.8.2 2HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
8.8.3 3HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8.8.3.1 Removing AC power supply (3HU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.8.3.2 Installing AC power supply (3HU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.10 Change of fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8.10.1 1HU/2HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
8.10.2 3HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
page 5 Ed 02
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
network.

protection.


page 6 Ed 02
page 7 Ed 02
Technical Manual Design and Characteristics
2.1 Overview
The Fourth Series low power is a family of standalone transmitters for digital television
standards of outstanding compactness including AC power supply, digital signal proces-
sor and power amplifier in the same 19" rackmount chassis.
Key features:

• MFN and SFN operation.
• Output power before band-pass filter up to 75W (DVB-T) in a 1HU unit, up to 150W
(DVB-T) in a 2HU unit and up to 400W (DVB-T) in a 3HU unit.
• Ultra-Wide-Band Doherty (UWBD), available for 3HU devices.
• Multiple 2xASI inputs and 2xTS over IP inputs with programmable seamless switch-
ing between all inputs.
• DVB-T/T2 receiver option for re-transmitter operation.
• Digital Adaptive pre-correction.
• Air-cooled system based on fans.
• 1+1 and N+1 redundancy configurations with no need of switching unit.
page 8 Ed 02
Overview
Figure 2.1: Fourth Series 1HU Transmitter.
Figure 2.2: Fourth Series 2HU Transmitter.
Figure 2.3: Fourth Series 3HU or 3HU UWBD Transmitter.
page 9 Ed 02
Overview
Types and power options:
Type Height DVB-T Power ATSC 1.0 Power

Transmitter 1U 10W 15W
Re-transmitter 1U 10W 15W
page 10 Ed 02
Device description
2.2 Device description

AC Power Supply Unit provides an unique DC voltage to operate the device. All neces-
sary internal voltages are generated through DC/DC converters inside each of the main
Monitoring status of the power supply unit is performed into control board of the device
(see section 5.5.1.16).
Different power supply units are provided depending on the power amplifier and chassis.
2.2.1.1 1HU devices

The enclosed power supply module for the 1HU devices (figure 2.4) allows its easily
replacement by the user (see section 8.8.1).
Figure 2.4: Power supply unit for 1HU devices.
Main features of the power supply are:

• Universal AC input / Full range (90 VAC - 264 VAC ).
• Nominal DC output voltage 41.5VDC .
• Rated power 450W.
• Built-in active PFC function, PF>0.95.
• High efficiency up to 89.5
• Withstand 300VAC surge input for 5 seconds.
• Built-in constant current limiting circuit.
• Built-in cooling Fan ON-OFF control.
• Built-in DC OK signal.
• Overload self-protection: 105% - 125% rated output power. The protection type is
a constant current limiting. The unit recovers automatically after fault condition is
removed.
• Overvoltage self-protection: 57.6 - 67.2V. Shut down output voltage, re-power on
to recover.
• Overtemperature self-protection: Shut down output voltage and recovers automat-
ically after temperature goes down.
page 11 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.1.2 2HU devices

• AC input active surge current limiting.
• High efficiency up to 92
• Forced air cooling by built-in DC with fan speed control function.
• High power density 9.44W/inch3 .
• DC OK Signal.
removed.
• Overvoltage self-protection: 56.6V - 66.2V. Shut down output voltage, re-power on

to recover.

page 12 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.1.3 3HU devices

The enclosed power supply module for the 3HU devices (with AB class amplifiers or
Doherty amplifiers) (figure 2.6) allows its easily replacement by the user (see section
8.8.3).
• Nominal DC output voltage 41.5VDC (AB class amplifiers) or 48VDC (Doherty am-
plifiers).
• Output voltage trimming function for Doherty amplifiers.
• Withstand 300VAC surge input for 5s.
• Forced air cooling by built-in DC with fans (2x) speed control function.

• Built-in remote sense function.
• PMBus serial communication.
• Alarm control (see table 5.5).
a constant current limiting. The unit will shut down output voltage after 5 seconds
and it will be necessary re-power on to recover.

to recover.

page 13 Ed 02
Device description
The unit is provided with a DC OK LED indicator at frontal side. When DC output voltage
≥80±5% of the rated value, the green LED on the front panel will light up. When DC
output voltage <80±5% of the rated value, the red LED on the front panel will be turned
on.
3HU devices can be optionally provided with two redundant power supply units con-
nected in parallel operation (see section 8.8.3 for installing or removing the redundant
unit).
POWER SUPPLY 2 (Redundant)
POWER SUPPLY 1 (Basic)
Figure 2.7: Two redundant power supply units for 3HU devices (frontal view).
Built-in Oring MOSFET in each power supply unit that the single unit can be hot-swapped
without turning off the AC source providing to the device.
page 14 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.2 Control board

• Device kernel.
• Monitoring and control of all the device components and modules.
• Transport stream inputs switching.
• Transport stream inputs seamless management.
• Passive reserve (1+1) and N+1 redundancy management.
2.2.2.1 Control addressing

Control communication between the transmitter needed for the redundancy configura-
tions, is carried out through a CAN bus using the CTRL interface (detailed at section
2.4).
For a correct communication, each device connected to the control bus must be pre-
configured with an unique control address following the addressing schema of figure
2.8.
TRANSMITTER A TRANSMITTER B
TRANSMITTER B TRANSMITTER A1
1+1 TRANSMITTER A2
...
TRANSMITTER An
n+1
Figure 2.8: Control bus addressing schema.
To configure the addressing, go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu (see
section 5.5.1.20.1):
• Type of redundancy. Choose the appropriate option: SD (Single Drive), 1+1

[Device A], 1+1 [Device B], N+1 [B] or N+1 [An] (n=1,2,...,N).
page 15 Ed 02
Device description

The date and precise time are required to make correct Eventlog entries and also for
the absolute T2MI timestamp.
from the NTP server, as long as the NTP server is ready. Optionally, an alterna-
tive NTP server can be set in case of failure of the main NTP server. In case of
a problem with the main NTP server, the device automatically retries with the al-
ternative NTP server, and if the problem persists, the device automatically retries
each minute.
• Input transport stream. The information contained into the input transport stream
allows synchronizing the UTC date and time of the device. In case of DVB-T/ISDB-
T/DVB-T2 A mode the transport stream contains a number of service information
tables (SI), among which is the Time and Date Table (TDT ) or the Time Offset Table
(TOT ) including UTC date. In case of DVB-T2 B mode (T2MI input) the information
about the date and time is extracted from the T2MI timestamp as long as absolute
reference is used.
For configuring the time zone corresponding to the correct local time two options are
available: to set directly the offset or to set the country/zone with the corresponding lo-
cal time (UTC time offset and daylight-saving rule) from a list of zones availables that is
based on database from IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) that represent the
local time for many representative locations around the globe.
source in case of lost of synchronization with the main source.
2.2.2.3 Multiport Ethernet

The Ethernet interface of the device has an unique MAC address composed by 4 Giga-
bit ports (GbE1, GbE2, GbE3, GbE4) as is detailed in figure 2.9.
page 16 Ed 02
Device description
Figure 2.9: Ethernet interface at the rear side of the device: GbE1, GbE2, GbE3 and GbE4.
Each port is reserved for an unique functionality:
• GbE1: Local control through the WEB GUI.

• GbE2: Network access for remote control (SNMP or WEB GUI).

192.168.1.1.
NOTE:

electrical relay outputs distributed in the 8-pin I/O connector at the rear panel.
page 17 Ed 02
Device description
Regarding the outputs, it is possible to define the stand-by status (open or closed) and
also the actuation mode (by level or by pulse). In case of actuation by pulse, it is possi-
ble to define the time duration (seconds) of the pulse generated. See section 5.5.1.8 for
more details about the configuration of the outputs.
details.
page 18 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.3 Signal board (Transmitters)

2.2.3.1 DVB-T/T2 receiver (re-transmitter)
A built-in digital DVB-T/T2 receiver can be provided optionally for re-transmitter operation
(regenerative transposer).
The built-in receiver is a separate board that is supplied with a DC voltage from the con-
trol board.
The incoming RF signal is introduced to the Tuner. Then the signal is converted to
intermediate frequency. The IF signal is introudced into the demodulator where is de-
modulated and coverted into a MPEG-2 Transport Stream.
The transport stream generated into the receiver is introduced into the control board
substituting one of the transport stream input reserved for ASI.
2.2.3.2 Input switching

The device is able to select the input transport stream for the modulator from up to 4
inputs: up to 2 ASI inputs (or DVB-T/T2 receiver inputs) and up to 2 IP inputs.
Each IP socket can be configured with transmission mode unicast or multicast. UDP or
RTP transport protocols are available and also VLAN is available for each IP socket.
Input switching can be be done manually or automatically with up to 4 different priori-

ties from 1(highest) to 4 (lowest). Seamless switching is available for all inputs.
For automatic switching between inputs without seamless, two different hysteresis are
available:
• Non-seamless error hysteresis. Time (in seconds) to switch to another input after
a failure detected in the selected input. Failure must keep during hysteresis time.
• Higher priority hysteresis. Time (in seconds) to switch to a higher priority input
without failure in the selected input.
2.2.3.3 Transmitter latency

The signal processing time of the transmitter or simply Latency (LT OT AL ) is the con-
catenation of latencies from the different blocks through the signal path:
LT OT AL = LIP SOCKET + LIN P U T SW IT CHIN G + LM ODU LAT ION + LM ARGIN
Where:
• LIP SOCKET : IP socket input latency. Only available for IP sockets, its value
depends on the configuration of the parameter buffer duration detailed below.
• LIN P U T SW IT CHIN G : Input switching buffer latency. The latency of the switch-
ing buffer tends to the minimum delay needed for the input switching that guaran-
tees an appropriate performance of the seamless algorithm. This latency depends
on the bitrate of the input transport stream. For example for a bitrate of 19.9Mbps,
the optimal latency is approximately 50ms, while for a bitrate of 50Mbps, the optimal
latency is approximately 20ms.
page 19 Ed 02
Device description
• LM ODU LAT ION : It is the time required for the modulator to prepare the infor-
mation to be broadcast. In DVB-T2 this value corresponds to a little more than
the duration of a T2 frame (maximum frame duration is 250ms). In DVB-T and in
ISDB-T this value is negligible.
• LM ARGIN : It is the time that the modulator waits to transmit the information al-
ready prepared. In SFN, this value is the time remaining until the transmission. In
MFN, this value is less than 10ms.
IP socket buffer duration
The buffer duration parameter (available at Input > Ip socket Menu) usefulness depends
strongly on the transport protocol employed (RTP or UDP).
Both UDP and RTP: The buffer duration helps to reduce the influence of an occa-
sional lack of received data. It means that if no data is received during a time gap, the
system will output the data stored within this internal buffer.
If the time gap with no data received is shorter than the buffer duration configured, the
system output will have no errors at all.
RTP: By using RTP, it is possible to rearrange IP packets that are not received in the
right order. This disorder is due to the network packet jitter (the variability over time of
the delay between the source of the stream and the end device). The buffer duration
should be large enough to eliminate the jitter influence on the received data. An IP net-
work should have a packet jitter shorter than ±20 ms (ETSI TS 102 034 V1.4.1, section
7.2.1.1). This means that using a buffer duration of 40 ms should normally be enough.
Maybe the IP gateway is close enough to the transmitter and the packet jitter is much
shorter than this theoretical maximum value. In this case, the buffer duration parameter
could be adjust to a shorter value, depending on the particular network.
RTP (with FEC): When the IP gateway is configured in RTP FEC (Forward Error
Correction), it is also possible to check the integrity of the received packets. This in-
volves fixing packets received with errors or even insert packets that were lost due to
network problems. Depending on the FEC and the input IP bitrate, it is necessary to
configure a suitable buffer duration to take advantage of the FEC capability.
The following table summarizes the buffer duration (latency) that would be needed for
different input bitrates and FEC configurations to recover the maximum number of IP
packets.
The FEC can consist of columns (L) and rows (D). The restrictions are
L * D = 100; 1 = L = 20; 4 = D = 20;
The bigger the product L*D, the more capability of recovering packets. However, the data
redundancy will also be bigger and, therefore, the IP network will be more congested.
page 20 Ed 02
Device description
Overhead Latency Latency Latency Recovery Buffer

(3Mbps) (30 Mbps) (100 Mbps) size
Bytes
XOR(10,10) 10% 350.9 ms 35.1 ms 10.5 ms 10 IP 132800
pkts Bytes
XOR(20,5) 20% 350.9 ms 35.1 ms 10.5 ms 20 IP 132800
pkts Bytes
Bytes
XOR(10,5) 20% 175.5 ms 17.5 ms 5.3 ms 10 IP 66400
pkts Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
2.2.3.4 Frequency and time reference

Frequency (10MHz) and time (1PPS) reference is used as clock for the modulator, and
as a reference for generating the upconverter local oscillator.
The 10MHz and 1PPS reference can be selected from following sources:
• Internal. Not valid for SFN. This internal reference is a 10 MHz VTCXO, whose
stability is 1ppm.
• Internal [OCXO]. Not valid for SFN. Reference is obtained from a 10 MHz OCXO
placed inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option) but without
taking into account external synchronization from 1PPS interface.
• External [OCXO]. An external 1PPS signal is used to synchronize a 10 MHz OCXO

placed inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option). 1PPS and
10MHz output signals from the synchronization module (OCXO) are used as SFN
reference for the modulator. In case of loss of external 1PPS signal, taking into
account the stability of OCXO, the device allows to set a configurable limit for the
holdover time keeping the SFN operation for a longer time.
• External. Reference signals (10MHz and 1PPS) from an external source are pass-
ing directly to the modulator (without passing through the OCXO) as SFN reference.
In case of loss of external 10MHz signal, due to the stability of VTCXO, reference
signal is not valid for SFN operation.
• Built-in GNSSS. GNSS satellite receiver is used to synchronize a OCXO placed

inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option). 1PPS and 10MHz
output signals from the synchronization module (OCXO) are used as SFN refer-
ence for the modulator. In case of loss of satellite information, taking into account
the stability of OCXO, the device allows to set a configurable limit for the holdover
time keeping the SFN operation for a longer time.
At the start-up of the modulator, if the 10MHz or 1PPS signals are not present, SFN op-
eration is not possible. The modulator output signal can be switched off or not depending
page 21 Ed 02
Device description
on the SFN reference mute configuration.
signal keeps from a synchronized source.
The device allows selecting the reference in an automatic mode between the GNSS sig-
nals (high priority) and the external signals. In case of a GNSS, can be considered valid
the synchronized signals only when the GNSS is locked or when the GNSS is locked or
in holdover mode.
2.2.3.5 Digital modulator

The modulator receives as inputs the 10MHz frequency reference signal and the 1PPS
time reference signal to process all synchronization tasks in SFN mode.
It also receives the Transport Stream from the input switching to deliver an output sig-
nal at intermediate frequency, compatible with DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T/Tb and ATSC 1.0
standards.
The modulator is able to work with the types of input that are available in DVB-T2, TS and
T2MI:
TS (TRANSPORT STREAM)
This communication protocol encapsules video, audio and data services according to
the MPEG-2 specifications. Taking into account that this kind of stream does not con-
tain modulation information, user must set up the different parameters on the transmitter
equipment (bandwidth, FFT size, code rate, etc). The modulator introduces that incoming
information into one PLP and transmits it over a RF T2 signal.
The transmitter admits TS input streams up to 50.34Mbps. However, this capacity de-
pends on the chosen configuration parameters (bigger or smaller bandwidths, more or
less dense constellations, more or less redundant codes, etc).
While this mode can not exploit the full potential of DVB-T2, the main advantage is that
it allows the user to have an RF T2 signal without any additional equipment other than a
TS source.
Even more, the modulator introduces null packets (and makes a timely PCR restamping)
if the input bitrate is less than the nominal one for the selected configuration. Thus, the
modulator allows TS input configured to generate RF output signal even without an input
(a PRBS sequence in test mode).
DVB-T2 modulation has a large number of signaling parameters and not all the possi-
ble combinations of them are valid. Thus, when a configuration is applied a validation
process is performed. If the set of parameters entered is valid, those parameters are
recorded. Otherwise an error is reported.
page 22 Ed 02
Device description
T2MI (T2 MODULATION INTERFACE)
This input type transports audio, video and data in accordance with the TS MPEG-2
specifications. This information is encapsulated in turn grouped into one or more PLPs
(distinguishing operation thus Single and Multiple PLP). Besides this digital content, this
signal includes all the configuration information needed by the modulator therefore it’s
not necessary to manually enter it into the equipment. It also contains information on the
broadcast time allowing SFN (Single Frequency Network) operation.
The maximum input bitrate that it’s supported by the modulator for a T2MI input is 72Mbps.
The PLPs data is processed and encapsulated in a more or less complex way into T2
frames. These frames also contain basic signaling (L1) containing detailed modulation
settings so that receivers are able to decode the data. T2 frames are grouped into T2
super frames and finally sent over RF.
The T2 modulator automatically resets on any change of the modulation parameters that
are received through T2MI.

distorter (DAP).
The performance mode of the DAP features an automatic adaptive way of getting the
best shoulders attenuation by means of an internal algorithm, ensuring MER rms > 35dB
at any frequency.

mode, a threshold for the shoulders attenuation (or for the MER rms) must be defined
by the user. Once reached that target, the device reduces the consumption of the LD-
MOS transistors to the minimum level to guarantee a shoulders attenuation (or MER rms)
over the target. See section 5.5.1.15 to perform this improvement.
2.2.3.7 Linear digital precorrector

For linear distortion, the device implements a digital adaptive precorrector with two differ-
ent types of digital linear precorrection mutually exclusive:
• After band-pass filter to correct the group delay and compensate the frequency
response of the output channel band-pass filter.
• Before band-pass filter to equalize the response of amplitude at the output of the
amplifier.
For both types, in order to apply linear precorrection values, a manual and one-shot
calibration must be performed previously using, respectively, a sample of the output of
the band-pass filter or an internal sample of the output of the amplifier. See 5.5.1.13
procedure to more details.
page 23 Ed 02
Device description


• In case of absence of a valid input transport stream in SFN mode. The device
returns automatically to normal operation when mute cause is recovered.
• In case of errors in the input transport stream in MFN mode. This mute function
is configurable. The device returns automatically to normal operation when mute
cause is recovered.
• In case of errors in the input T2MI flow. This mute function is configurable and only
available for DVB-T2. The device returns automatically to normal operation when
• In case of errors in the input BTS flow. This mute function is configurable and
only available for ISDB-T/Tb. The device returns automatically to normal operation
when mute cause is recovered.
• In case of a MPEG overflow in the input transport stream. This mute function
is configurable and only available for DVB-T. The device returns automatically to
normal operation when mute cause is recovered.
• In case of MIP (Mega-frame Initialization Packet) is not detected correctly on the
transport stream on the active input. This mute function is configurable and only
available for DVB-T. The device returns automatically to normal operation when
• In case of loss of SFN synchronization signals. This mute function is configurable.
ered.
• In case of the modulator is out of the SFN margin. This mute function is config-
urable. The device returns automatically to normal operation when mute cause is
recovered.
• In case of external Interlock loop is opened. External Interlock is a safety loop
for muting the RF output signal when is open. RF output is muted when loop is
opened, but the device remains switched on. RF returns as soon as Interlock loop
is closed again.
page 24 Ed 02
Device description

Main function of the power amplifier is to amplify the RF output of the signal board in the
entire UHF frequency band.
For output power up to 275W (1HU, 2HU or 3HU) the output stage of the amplifier is
designed with LDMOS power transistors in AB class.
For output power up to 400W (3HU), the amplifier design is based on Ultra Wide Band
Doherty technology. Ultra Wide Band Doherty technology allows getting high efficiency
power amplifiers with no tuning required along the UHF bandwidth (470MHz-790MHz):
the same amplifier hardware is used for all frequencies.
The output signal quality is improved by the digital precorrector at signal board.
Power control of the amplifier is performed by the signal board.
monitoring.
Different power amplifier modules are provided depending on the output power):
• Up to 10W (DVB-T) devices. 2 LDMOS transistors in AB class.

• Up to 400W (DVB-T) devices. 4 LDMOS transistors (2 UWB Doherty pallets).
Power amplifier allows to regulate the output power slightly over these limits at the ex-
pense of not meeting the requirements.
page 25 Ed 02
Device description
amplifier output.
(at Setup > Amplifier menu) reverse power threshold from 8dB to 12dB, the output
power is reduced in 8dB for 5 seconds. After 10 seconds more, the output power will
be totally switched off until performing a RF reset (See section 7.4.2) or a System reset
(See section 7.4.1). If the reverse power returns to normal level into these 10 seconds
more, the output power will return to the normal level.

section 7.4.1).


tions are performed according to the LDMOS currents measured at amplifier stage.
For 3HU Doherty amplifiers, when any of the LDMOS currents are out-of-range (see table
o
2.1), the output power is reduced following the formula Presult = Pinitial ( NNo _T_Transistors
ransistors_ok 2
_total
) .
For non-Doherty amplifiers, when any of the LDMOS currents are out-of-range (see table
2.1), the output power is proportionally reduced to the number of damaged transistors
o
following the formula Presult = Pinitial NNo _T_Transistors
ransistors_ok
_total
.
Device Lower limit Upper limit

1HU 150mA 3A
2HU 300mA 10A
3HU / 3HU UWBD 300mA 10A
Table 2.1: LDMOS currents thresholds.
page 26 Ed 02
Device description

formed according to the temperature measured at amplifier stage.
The output power will be totally switched off when the Amplifier board temperature
("Amp Ta ") (and/or the signal board temperature ("Signal Ta ")) is above 85o C (in
1HU/2HU devices) or above 90o C (in 3HU devices) until performing a RF reset (See sec-
tion 7.4.2) or a System reset (See section 7.4.1).
Previous to reach the temperature limit, when the "Amp Ta " > 80o C (in 1HU/2HU devices)
or "Amp Ta " > 85o C (in 3HU devices), fans start to work to the maximum speed.

board, the amplifier heat sink fins, and then leaves the unit via the fans on the rear panel.
The device is provided with fans at the rear side (three in 1HU devices and two in
2HU/3HU devices) which draw in cool air via the ventilation openings at the front panel
and blow the warm air out via the rear panel. This fans are mounted on the outside of the
rear panel and can therefore be changed without needing to open the device cover.
Working cycle of the fans is 100% being their speed controlled by the temperatures of the
device, signal board temperature ("Signal Ta ") and/or Amplifier board temperature
("Amp Ta ").
When the "Amp Ta " > 80o C (in 1HU/2HU devices) or "Amp Ta " > 85o C (in 3HU devices),
fans start to work to the maximum speed.
Different types of fans are provided depending on the output power amplifier.
The AC power supply module is provided with fans (one in 450W and two in 750W /
2000W). Cooling air passes through the power supply and leaves the unit via the ventila-
tion openings at the rear panel. These fans are placed into the power supply chassis, so
its replacement must be done together with the power supply module.
page 27 Ed 02
Device description

menu.
Key Description
LED Description
LOCAL Local operation (orange blinking) or remote operation (off ).
page 28 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.8 Synchronization module (GNSS) (HW option)

The optional built-in synchronization module (GNSS) provides the device with a fre-
Two modes of performance are available in the synchronization module: GNSS re-
ceiver mode and OCXO mode.
GNSS receiver mode

GNSS satellite receiver (GPS and/or GLONASS in a concurrent performance) is used
to synchronize a 10MHz OCXO placed inside the synchronization module. 1PPS and
10MHz output signals from the synchronization module are used as SFN reference for
the modulator.
a longer time.
UTC date and time from the GNSS receiver can be used to synchronize the date and
time of the device (see section 2.2.2.2).
OCXO mode
page 29 Ed 02
Device description
for a longer time.

for a longer time.
page 30 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.10 1+1 Redundancy (SW option)

Passive Reserve or 1+1 functionality in transmitters (gap fillers and transposers) is per-
formed with 2 transmitters (Transmitter A and Transmitter B) without the necessity of
any additional module.
transmitters.
Communication between both transmitters as well as power supply redundancy for the
(connectors D-Sub, 9-pin) between Transmitter A and Transmitter B. See section 2.2.2.1
for a detailed configuration of the addressing.
The control of the coaxial switch is provided by the interconnection between the 1+1
SWITCH interface (connectors D-Sub) in both transmitters (Transmitter A and Trans-
mitter B) with the control connector (D-Sub) at coaxial switch.
carry out the passive reserve functionality.
CTRL BUS
1+1 SWITCH
RF OUT RF OUT
1 3
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
Control and monitoring of the 1+1 redundancy performance can be done from any of
both transmitters through any of available user interfaces (see section 5.5.2.26 for more
details). A unique IP address (different from the IP addresses from both transmitters) is
available for the remote control and monitoring of the 1 + 1 system (including both trans-
mitters) as one device.
The 1+1 redundancy can be set into manual mode or automatic mode with different
priorities (low and high).
page 31 Ed 02
Device description
Alarms menu by marking at 1+1 column the desired alarms of the device.
is detailed below.

• (c) In case of a fault in the transmitter to the antenna with enabled switchings and
independently of the priority. This option is always enabled and it is not user-
configurable.
are configurable.

page 32 Ed 02
Device description

Validation of power alarms as switching criterion

In order to avoid unnecessary switchings due to RF output power recoverings, an extra
temporisation in seconds can be configured for validating this power alarm as a criterion
for the switchover. For disable this temporisation, set the value to 0 seconds.
When an Decreased power failure is detected in the transmitter towards antenna, the
device waits the configured time before validating this alarm as a criterion for switchover.
If input failure persists, the criterion is validated, if not this alarm is not taken into account
for a switchover.


• WEB interface.
• SNMP.
• Modulator.
• RF output.
page 33 Ed 02
Device description
• Amplifier.
• Reference.
device.
page 34 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.11 N+1 Redundancy (SW option)

N+1 functionality (N up to 11) in transmitters/Re-transmitters is based on a distributed
architecture with no need of an external automatic switching module.
Communication between all transmitters as well as power supply redundancy for the
(connectors D-Sub, 9-pin). See section 2.2.2.1 for a detailed configuration of the ad-
dressing.
The control of each coaxial switch is provided by the interconnection between the 1+1
SWITCH interface (connectors D-Sub) in each transmitters with the control connector
(D-Sub) at each coaxial switch.
carry out the N+1 functionality.
CTRL BUS
RF OUT
#1
Band-pass Filter
2 RF switch 1
RF OUT 1 3
#2
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
2
RF OUT 1 3
...
N+1 SWITCH CTRL

#N
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
2
RF OUT 1 3
Dummy load
Figure 2.14: N+1 connections diagram.
The Reserve transmitter stores the configuration from the N main transmitters and it is
page 35 Ed 02
Device description
able to perform all the actions needed for managing the complete N+1 system, including
the routing of the input signal, the autoconfiguration with the appropiate settings and the
commands needed for the coaxial switch. It is possible (even with a failure in the re-
serve transmitter) to check and monitoring the status of the N+1 redundancy from any of
the main transmitters through any of available user interfaces (see section 5.5.2.26 for
more details). A unique IP address (different from the IP addresses from any transmitter)
is available for the remote control and monitoring of the N+1 system.
The N+1 redundancy can be set into manual mode or automatic mode with up to N
different priority levels.
Alarms menu by marking at N+1 column the desired alarms of the device.
is detailed below.

• (c) In case of a fault in other transmitter with enabled switchings and independently
of the priority.
are configurable.
page 36 Ed 02
Device description
Restorations
The automatic restoration will only be performed after the verification that the fault that
caused the switching is not present and only when a second transmitter (with the au-
tomatic switchings activated) presents a fault so it needs to make use of the reserve
transmitter.
The maximum number of automatic restorations in a transmitter is also configurable. The

time window in which the restorations can be performed can be configurable in days.


To store the configuration from each of the main transmitters into the corresponding
memory slot at reserve transmitter, a synchronization menu is available in order to
synchronize the current whole configuration of each main transmitter with the stored
configuration of each main transmitter into the memory of the reserve transmitter. In
case of a non synchronized status, user can save manually the configuration into the
reserve transmitter memory.
page 37 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.12 ISDB-T Remux (SW option)

ISDB-T Remux functionality provides the transmitter ISDB-T/Tb with services filtering
capabilities. Three performance modes are available:
1. Filtering by PID:
• It is required that the PID of the services at the input are known previously.
• A unique service is assumed for each layer.
2. Filtering by program number:
• It is not required that the PID of the services at the input are known previously.
• The available programs are shown at the Program Specific Information menu.
3. Advanced filtering:
• It is required that the PID and its typology (audio, video, ...) of the services at
the input are known previously.
• PID of each service can be renamed.
• Each program can be renamed.
• Tables PAT, PMT, SDT, NIT, BIT and TOT are generated.
• The rest of the tables (L-EIT, H-EIT) are updated according to the configured
fields.
To access to the remux mode the parameter Input mode must be set into TS at the menu
Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (ISDB-T) (see section 5.5.2.16).
At the menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Program Specific Information (ISDB-T) (see
section) it is possible to check some critical information contained in the incoming PAT
(Program Association Table), BIT (Broadcast Information Table), NIT (Network Informa-
tion Table), as well as the incoming TOT (Time Offset Table):
page 38 Ed 02
Device description
At the menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (ISDB-T) (see section) it is possi-
ble to acces to the remux filtering options and the layers configuration:
Filtering by PID
At the following example three services are available at the input (### HD, ### Noticias
and ###) and we want to send the service ### into the layer A, the service ### HD into
the layer B and we do not want to use the service ### Noticias.
Mandatory tables (PAT, PMT, SDT, NIT, BIT, TOT, L-EIT, H-EIT) must be routed manually.
Filtering by program number

At the following example we have the same three services available at the input than be-
fore(### HD, ### Noticias and ###) and we want to send the service ### into the layer
A, the services ### HD and ### Noticias into the layer B.
page 39 Ed 02
Device description
Advanced filtering
In this mode the list of elements into each layer must be entered with the following format:
Over the same example as before we want:
• Send the service ### into the layer A, the services ### HD and ### Noticias into
the layer B.
• Rename all the PIDs.
• At the service ### remove the video PID and keep the audio PID.
• Rename the service ### Noticias into Servicio de noticias.
page 40 Ed 02
Device description
2.2.13 Hardware and software options.

Hardware options
• Synchronization module (GNSS). The optional built-in GNSS module provides
eration. The OCXO placed inside the synchronization module can be synchronized
receiver.

• 3HU redundant power supply. 3HU devices can be optionally provided with a
redundant power supply unit. Built-in Oring MOSFET in each power supply unit
that the single unit can be hot-swapped without turning off the AC source providing
to the device.
Figure 2.17: 3HU redundant power supply.
page 41 Ed 02
Device description
Software options
• SNMP. Provides the device with SNMP agent. See section 5.4 for more details.
• DVB-T. Provides the transmitter with DVB-T standard modulation.
• DVB-T2. Provides the transmitter with DVB-T2 standard modulation.
• ISDB-T. Provides the transmitter with ISDB-T/Tb standard modulation.
• ISDB-T Remux. Provides the transmitter ISDB-T/Tb with services filtering capabil-
ities. It is possible to select from the input transport stream which PIDs or programs
will be transmitted into each layer. See section 2.2.12 for more details.
• ATSC1. Provides the transmitter with ATSC 1.0 standard modulation.
• 1+1 Redundancy. Provides the device with the 1+1 redundancy functionality. See
• N+1 Redundancy. Provides the device with the N+1 redundancy functionality. See
page 42 Ed 02
module
2.3 Rack cooling control module

Description
In order to manage the cooling of the rack where the transmitters are installed an optional
module is available, called rack cooling control module, that is able to manage up to
two turbines and up to two external sensors for general purpose (door sensor, ...).
Figure 2.18: Rack cooling control module.
This module regulates automatically the speed of the cooling turbines of the rack as
a function of the air pressure difference between inside and outside the rack or as a
function of the temperature at inside the rack:
• Control for air pressure difference. The module is provided with a digital differ-
ential pressure sensor that measures the difference of the air pressure between
inside and outside the rack. The microcontroller regulates the speed of the cooling
turbines to equalize the pressure difference.
• Control for temperature. For the racks where is not possible to use the pressure
sensor to manage the speed of the turbines, the module is also provided with a
temperature sensor. The microcontroller regulates the speed of the cooling tur-
bines to keep the temperature inside the rack in around a target defined by the
user.
Beside the automatic control, is possible to set manually the speed (a % of the maximum
speed) of each turbine.
This module is provided with two general purpose inputs isolated through optocouplers
that allow connecting up to two external sensors, in example a open door sensor.
page 43 Ed 02
module
This module incorporates a microcontroller capable of autonomously performing the nec-
essary functions of control and monitoring of the turbines and sensors, but for powering it
and also for configuring it is needed to interconect the module with a transmitter through
the control bus interface CTRL bus (D-Sub conector, 9-pins).
The diagram of the figure 2.19 details the connections needed for installing the rack cool-
ing control module.
PWM
TACH
CTRL FAN 1
10V
GND
OUT
AIR
PRESSURE FAN 1
IN
SENSOR
PWM
CTRL FAN 2 TACH
10V
GND
RACK COOLING FAN 2

CONTROL
SENSOR 2 SENSOR 2
SENSOR 1 SENSOR 1
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS
CTRL BUS
TRANSMITTER
RACK
Figure 2.19: Conection diagram of the rack cooling control module.
Configuration, measurements and alarms menus of this module are integrated into
the user interface of the transmitter where is installed. At the corresponding section of
operation chapter in this manual are detailed all the configuration parameters and mea-
surements availables.
For monitoring the status of the module followig alarms have been pre-defined:
• Temperature. It is triggered when the temperature of the module (the temperature
page 44 Ed 02
module
inside the rack) exceeded 70o C.
• Pressure difference. It is triggered when the difference of the air pressure is too
high for being managed by the speed of the rack cooling turbines.
• HW error. It is triggered under the following conditions:
– When the configured speed for a turbine and the measure of the tachometer
from this turbine are incoherents.
– With a communication problem into the control bus between the module and
the transmitter where is installed.
– With an internal hardware failure detected in the module.
Figure 2.20: Interface description of the rack cooling control module.
The pinout of the connector CTRL BUS (D-Sub male, 9-pins), that is the control and
power supply interface of the module, is detailed at the figure 2.21.
Figure 2.21: Pinout connector CTRL BUS (D-Sub male, 9-pins).
page 45 Ed 02
module
The connectors of the tubes for the differential pressure sensor are detailed in the figure
2.22.
Figure 2.22: Differential pressure sensor connection tubes. Dimensions in mm.
The interface for the control of the turbines and the external sensors is a terminal
block conector with the pinout detailed in the figure 2.23.
Figure 2.23: Conector for controlling the turbines and the external sensors.
The RESET button allows cleaning the control address for the communication through
the control bus with the transmitters in case of a new installation or a communication con-
flict. To perform the reset press the button, with a needle or similar, for at least 3 seconds
until the LED indicators blink in red.
page 46 Ed 02
module
The LED indicators provide a visual interface for a quick diagnosis about the status of
the module. The table 2.4 details the description of possible statuses of each LED indi-
cator.
LED Description
PWR Power supply OK (green)
FANS Turbines control OK (green).
Any turbine NOK (HW error) (orange).
All turbines NOK (HW error) (red ).
ALARM Without alarms (green).
Pressure diff. or Ta Alarm (orange).
Pressure diff. and Ta Alarm (red ).
Table 2.4: LED indicator status of the rack cooling control module.
FANS and ALARM LED indicators are blinking in red when the module has no control
address. When a communication problem is detected in the control bus both LED indica-
tors blinking in its current color. When the microcontroller of the module, due to a failure,
has not firmware (boot mode) both LED indicators keep in orange fixed.
Specifications
No turbines controlled 2
Turbine control voltage 0-10 VDC/PWM
Turbine tachometer measurement Yes
No general purpose inputs 2
Differential pressure range -125Pa to 125Pa
Differential pressure zero-point accuracy 0.08Pa
Differential pressure stability compensation <0.05Pa/year
Temperature range -55◦ C to +125◦ C
Temperature accuracy 2◦ C (-125◦ C to +100◦ C)
3◦ C (-55◦ C to +125◦ C)
Operative Ta range 0 a +45◦ C
Weight 0.15 kg
page 47 Ed 02
2.4 Interface description

Front connectors
RF IN N female, 50Ω (2)
RF input
Rear connectors
AC POWER IEC 60320-C14 AC power supply (1HU / 2HU)
IEC 60320-C20(4) AC power supply (3HU)
RF OUT N female, 50Ω RF power output (1HU / 2HU)
7/16" female, 50Ω RF power output (3HU)
DAP L SMA female, 50Ω RF feedback input for linear precorrector
1:LOCAL RJ45 female, 8-pin Ethernet 1: Web GUI for local operation
2:REMOTE RJ45 female, 8-pin Ethernet 2: Network for remote operation
(SNMP or WEB GUI)
1
2
ASI 1 IN BNC female, 75Ω (1)
Transport stream over ASI input 1
ASI 2 IN BNC female, 75Ω (1)
Transport stream over ASI input 2
ANTENNA(3) SMA female, 50Ω GNSS antenna input
10MHz OUT BNC female, 50Ω Loop-through from External 10MHz or
from GNSS
1PPS OUT BNC female, 50Ω Loop-through from External 1PPS or from
GNSS
I/O Terminal Blocks, 8-pin(5) 2 external inputs and 2 contact outputs
CTRL BUS D-Sub male, 9-pin(6) Control bus (CAN)
1+1 SWITCH D-Sub female, 9-pin(7) 1+1 switch control / Interlock loop (1HU)
D-Sub female, 25-pin(8) 1+1 switch control / Interlock loop
(2HU/3HU)
(1)
Only available for transmitters. In case of a 1HU device, this connector is placed at
front panel.
(2)
Only available for re-transmitters (substituting ASI 2 input).
(3)
Only available with GNSS option.
(4)
2 connectors for PSU A and PSU B. Layout detailed at figure 2.27.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
page 48 Ed 02
Figure 2.24: Rear panel of 1HU Transmitter .
Figure 2.25: Rear panel of 2HU Transmitter.
Figure 2.26: Rear panel of 3HU Transmitter.
Figure 2.27: AC connectors for 3HU devices: PSU A and PSU B.
page 49 Ed 02
Figure 2.28: I/O port pinout: #1 - #2 (Output 2); #3 - #4 (Output 1); #5 - #6 (Input
1 / RF loop); #7 - #8 (Input 2 / RF loop).
Figure 2.29: CTRL BUS port pinout: D-Sub male, 9-pin.
page 50 Ed 02
page 51 Ed 02
Technical Manual
2.5.1 Transmitter specifications
2.5 Specifications
Transmitters 1HU 2HU 3HU 3HU (UWBD)
Maximum output power DVB-T/T2, 75W 150W 275W 400W
ISDBT/Tb (before band-pass filter)
Maximum output power ATSC 1.0 100W 200W 350W 500W
AC supply voltage 90-264V 90-264V 108-264V 108-264V
AC supply frequency 47Hz-63Hz
Power factor >0.95
Maximum AC power consumption(1) 350VA 665VA 1500VA 1300VA
RF output connector N female N female 7/16" female 7/16" female
Dimensions (WxHxD) 19"x1HUx465mm 19"x2HUx480mm 19"x3HUx480mm 19"x3HUx480mm
Weight 15.4kg(2) 15.6kg(2)
page 52
6.4kg 11.4kg
(1)
At full load and including all hardware and software options.
(2)
Including one power supply. Weight of each power supply (up to 2) = 2kg.
Design and Characteristics

Specifications
Ed 02
Specifications
Main:
Frequency range UHF band IV/V, 470 to 862 MHz
470 to 790 MHz (UWB Doherty)
Transmission standards DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T, ISDB-Tb, ATSC
1.0
Input switchover Programmable seamless switching be-
tween all inputs
ASI input:
Number of inputs 2
Impedance 75Ω
Connectors BNC female
IP input:
Number of inputs/outputs 2
Physical Layer IEEE 802.3af
Data Rate 10/100/1000 (Mbps)
Connectors 4 x RJ-45
Port capabilities Switch Gigabit Ethernet
Encapsulation UDP/RTP/RTP-FEC
IP-address assignment DHCP/static
Multicast IGMP v2/v3
Parameterizable jitter tolerance Yes
RF Input (Re-transmitter):
Frequency range 470 to 862MHz
Supported standards DVB-T, DVB-T2
Bandwidth 1.7 MHz, 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Input signal range -78 dBm to -20 dBm
Impedance 50Ω
Connector N female
DVB-T Modulation:
Network operation MFN (input rate and PCR adaptation),
SFN
FFT 2K, 8K
Guard interval 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
FEC encoding 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Constellation QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
Channel bandwidth 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
page 53 Ed 02
Specifications
DVB-T2 Modulation:
T2 version Up to 1.3.1
Profile Base/Lite
Input modes Mode A: TS (Single PLP); Mode B: T2MI
(Single PLP & Multiple PLP)
Network operation TS (MFN with input rate and PCR adap-
tation); T2MI (MFN & relative / absolute
timestamping SFN)
Operation mode SISO / MISO
Channel bandwidth 1.7 MHz, 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
FFT 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K (normal or ex-
tended)
Pilot patterns PP1 to PP8
Guard interval 1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32,
1/128
PAPR reduction yes
PLPs Up to 8 PLPs
PLP efficiency mode Normal & High
PLP FEC type 16K / 64K
PLP code rate 1/3,2/5,1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
PLP constellation QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM (nor-
mal or rotated)
PLP Time interleaving Single / Multiple
ISDB-T Modulation:
Transmit data interfaces Single-Layer Transport Stream
BTS combined hierarchical stream
Hierarchical transmission Three-layer support allows allocation of
the 13 available transmission segments
to the three hierarchical layers
Partial reception Supports priority reception of a single
segment by mobile "1-sec" devices
Network operation SFN BTS using a GPS reference
MFN / SFN with BTS-rate-lock
MFN BTS using NULL packet removal
and insertion
MFN Single-Layer Transport Stream with
input rate and PCR adaptation
OFDM transmission mode Mode 1, 2, 3 (2K, 4K, 8K FFT)
Guard interval 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4
FEC encoding Catenate RS-Viterbi Trellis codes: 1/2,
2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Modulated schemes DQPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM
Time interleaving 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
Channel bandwidth 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
ATSC 1.0 Modulation:

Channel bandwidth 6 MHz
page 54 Ed 02
Specifications
RF output:
MER rms >35 dB
Precorrection Digital adaptive, linear and non-linear
Impedance 50Ω
(2)
(3)
Measured in 10MHz bandwidth before band-pass filter.
Coupling 50dB±4dB
Impedance 50Ω
RF feedback input (Linear precorrection):

Impedance 50Ω
Local oscillator:
≤5x10−9 (-10o C to +60o C) (OCXO HW option)

1PPS level TTL
1PPS trigger by rise-edge
page 55 Ed 02
Specifications

1PPS level TTL
OCXO (HW option):

10MHz signal:

temperature
@10 Hz: -125 dBc / Hz
@100 Hz: -145 dBc / Hz
@1 KHz: -150 dBc / Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc / Hz
1PPS signal:

page 56 Ed 02
Specifications

Receiver:

data connector
10MHz signal:

when GPS locked)
temperature
@10s & 100s: 3x10−11
@100 Hz: -135 dBc / Hz
@1 KHz: -145 dBc / Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc / Hz
1PPS signal:

page 57 Ed 02
Specifications
Operation:
SNMP (SW option).
I/O contacts.
Environmental:
Cooling Forced air
Compliance:
Safety EN 60950-1:2006+A1:2010+A11:2009+A12:2011
EN 60215:1989+A1:92+A2:94
EMC ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09)
ETSI EN 301 489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05)
<1kV input signal)
Standards EN 300744, EN 302755, TS 101191, EN 50083-9,
TR 101290, TS 102773, TS 102831, TS 102034,
ARIB STD-B31, ABNT NBR 15601, ATSC Doc. A/53,
ISO/IEC 13818, RFC 1122, RFC 791, RFC 768, RFC
3550, RFC 2250, RFC 2733, SMTPE 2022-1/-2, EN
300421, EN 302307
page 58 Ed 02
3 Installation

• 19" rackmount transmitter (including HW options in same chassis).
• AC power cable(s).
• Ground wire.
NOTE:
and cabling.
3.1.2 Unpacking
ment is complete.
page 59 Ed 02
Unpacking and Setting Up
3.1.3 Setting Up

1HU devices (75W) 275 W

3HU (UWBD) devices (400W) 900 W
page 60 Ed 02
Connecting Cables

3.2.1.1 ASI Inputs of Transmitter
1. Connect the first transport stream to ASI 1 IN connector.
2. If signal standby is required, connect a second transport stream to ASI 2 IN con-

nector.
3.2.1.2 TS over IP Inputs of Transmitter

1. Connect the IP network with first transport stream to 3:IP SOCKET 1 ethernet
connector at rear side of the device.
2. If signal standby is required, connect a second transport stream to 4:IP SOCKET

2 ethernet connector at rear side of the device.
3.2.1.3 RF Input of Re-transmitter


2. For SFN operation, also connect a 1PPS signal for timing synchronization from an
external reference source to 1PPS IN connector at rear side of the device.
NOTE:
The optional GNSS receiver can be used as a frequency and timing reference, by
connecting the antenna to ANTENNA connector at rear side of the device.
page 61 Ed 02
Connecting Cables
3.2.2 Connecting internal cables for 1+1

Following instructions are needed to carry out the 1+1 connections that are detailed at
figure 3.1:
A to the RF connector 1 at coaxial switch.
B to the RF connector 3 at coaxial switch.
3. Connect an adequate dummy load to the RF connector 4 at coaxial switch.
4. Connect the CRTL bus interfaces at rear side of the Transmitter A and Transmit-
ter B using a connection cable 9-pin D-sub.
5. Connect the 1+1 SWITCH interfaces at rear side of the Transmitter A and Trans-
mitter B and sub-D connector at coaxial switch using the 1+1 connection cable
D-sub (figure 3.2).
CTRL BUS
1+1 SWITCH
RF OUT RF OUT
1 3
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
page 62 Ed 02
Technical Manual
D-sub 25 pins for 2HU/3HU devices.
Figure 3.2: Connection cable for control of 1+1 switch. D-sub 9 pins for 1HU devices or
2HU/3HU DEVICES
POS I (NC) 1 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14

POS I (C) 2
INTERLOCK (NO) 14
2 INTERLOCK (C) 15 1HU DEVICES
INTERLOCK (C) 15
POS I (NO) 3 INTERLOCK (NC) 16 3 16
POS I (NO) 4 GND 17 POS I (NO) 4 GND 17 1 POS I (NO)
POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18 POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18 2 ACTUATOR A
POS I (NC) 6 19 6 19 3 VDC
GND 7 VDC 20 GND 7 VDC 20 4 INTERLOCK (NO)
POS II (NC) 8 ACTUATOR B 21 8 ACTUATOR B 21 5 INTERLOCK (C)
POS II (C) 9 POS II (NC) 22 POS II (C) 9 22 6 POS II (C)
A
POS II (NO) 10 POS II (C) 23 POS II (NO) 10 23 7 POS I (C)
INTERLOCK (NO) 11 POS II (NO) 24 11 24 8 ACTUATOR B
INTERLOCK (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NC) 25 12 25 9 POS II (NO)
ACTUATOR (C) 13 ACTUATOR (C) 13
D-Sub male, 25-pin. D-Sub male, 9-pin.

page 63

BN 754066C0002 BN 512690
2HU/3HU DEVICES
1 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14 1HU DEVICES

2 2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
3 3 16
INTERLOCK ANTENNA (C) 4 POS I (NO) 4 GND 17 1 POS I (NO)
INTERLOCK LOAD(C) 5 POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18 2 ACTUATOR A
6 6 19 3 VDC
7 GND 7 VDC 20 4 INTERLOCK (NO)
INTERLOCK ANTENNA (NO) 8 8 ACTUATOR B 21 5 INTERLOCK (C)
INTERLOCK LOAD (NO) 9 POS II (C) 9 22 6 POS II (C)
B
POS II (NO) 10 23 7 POS I (C)
1 11 24 8 ACTUATOR B
12 25 9 POS II (NO)
ACTUATOR (C) 13
Connecting Cables
9
D-Sub male, 9-pin.

EXTERNAL D-Sub male, 25-pin.
INTERLOCKS
Installation
Ed 02
Connecting Cables
3.2.3 Connecting internal cables for N+1

Following instructions are needed to carry out the N+1 connections that are detailed at
figure 3.3:
1. Connect the RF OUT connector (RF power output) at rear side of each main trans-
mitter A to the RF connector 1 at corresponding coaxial switch.
B to the RF connector 3 at coaxial switch 1.
3. Connect the RF connector 4 at each coaxial switch with the RF connector 3 of

next coaxial switch up to N.
4. Connect an adequate dummy load to the RF connector 4 at the N coaxial switch.
5. Connect the CRTL bus interfaces at rear side of all Transmitters using a connec-
tion cable 9-pin D-sub.
6. Connect the 1+1 SWITCH interfaces at rear side of Transmitters A and Trans-
mitter B and sub-D connectors at coaxial switches using the N+1 connection
cable D-sub (figure 3.4).
CTRL BUS
RF OUT
#1
Band-pass Filter
2 RF switch 1
RF OUT 1 3
#2
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
2
RF OUT 1 3
...
N+1 SWITCH CTRL

#N
Band-pass Filter
(Antenna)
2
RF OUT 1 3
Dummy load
page 64 Ed 02
Connecting Cables
2HU/3HU DEVICES
1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14 1HU DEVICES
2 INTERLOCK (C) 15
3 16
4 GND 17 1
5 18 2
6 19 3
7 20 4 INTERLOCK (NO)
8 21 5 INTERLOCK (C)
9 22 6
B 10
11
12
13
23
24
25
7
8
9
POS I (NC) 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14 2HU/3HU DEVICES

POS I (NO) 3 INTERLOCK (NC) 16 1 INTERLOCK (NO) 14 1HU DEVICES
POS I (NC) 6 19 POS I (NO) 4 GND 17 1 POS I (NO)
GND 7 VDC 20 POS I (C) 5 ACTUATOR A 18 2 ACTUATOR A
POS II (NC) 8 ACTUATOR B 21 6 19 3 VDC
POS II (C) 9 POS II (NC) 22 GND 7 VDC 20 4 INTERLOCK (NO)
POS II (NO) 10
INTERLOCK (NO) 11
INTERLOCK (C) 12
ACTUATOR (C) 13
POS II (C) 23
POS II (NO) 24
INTERLOCK (NC) 25 R#1 A1
8
POS II (C) 9
POS II (NO) 10
11
12
ACTUATOR B 21
22
23
24
25
5
6
7
8
9
INTERLOCK (C)
POS II (C)
POS I (C)
ACTUATOR B
POS II (NO)
ACTUATOR (C) 13

BN 754066C0002 BN 512690

R#2
POS II (NO) 10 POS II (C) 23 8 ACTUATOR B 21 5 INTERLOCK (C)
6 POS II (C)
A2
INTERLOCK (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NC) 25 POS II (NO) 10 23 7 POS I (C)
ACTUATOR (C) 13 11 24 8 ACTUATOR B
12 25 9 POS II (NO)
ACTUATOR (C) 13

BN 754066C0002 BN 512690
...

R#n
POS II (NO) 10 POS II (C) 23 8 ACTUATOR B 21 5 INTERLOCK (C)
6 POS II (C)
An
INTERLOCK (C) 12 INTERLOCK (NC) 25 POS II (NO) 10 23 7 POS I (C)
ACTUATOR (C) 13 11 24 8 ACTUATOR B
12 25 9 POS II (NO)
ACTUATOR (C) 13

BN 754066C0002 BN 512690
Figure 3.4: Connection cable for control of coaxial switches of N+1 system. D-sub 9 pins
for 1HU devices or D-sub 25 pins for 2HU/3HU devices.
page 65 Ed 02
Connecting Cables
CAUTION:
Risk of RF burns
RF at the output.
1. Connect the antenna system (band-pass filter) to the RF OUT connector (RF power
output) at rear side of the device. In case of 1+1 configuration, the antenna sys-
tem (band-pass filter) must be connected to the antenna output connector at coax-
ial switch.
3.2.5 Connecting INTERLOCK loop

1. Connect the external interlock system to the INTERLOCK pins in 1+1 SWITCH
connector at rear side of the exciter (see detailed pinout at figure 2.31). In case of
1+1 configuration, the interlock pins (for the safety loop from antenna and load)
can be included into the sub-D connection from the coaxial switch (see detailed
pinout at figure 3.2).
In case of external interlock loop devices are not available, establish the safety interlock
loop by connecting the short-circuit (dummy plug) for the interlock pins at 1+1 SWITCH
connector (see detailed pinout at section 2.4) at rear side of the device.
page 66 Ed 02
Connecting Cables

Prior to connect the AC power cable, please make sure that the AC source is OFF and
AC power switch is in position OFF. You should therefore make sure that the connector
is within reach and easily accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
The AC power connector and the AC power switch are located on the rear panel of the
device.
Figure 3.5: AC switch and AC power connector with fuses slot for 1HU/2HU devices.
NOTE: 3HU devices are not provided with AC switch. Make sure AC source is OFF.
3HU devices can incorporate a redundant power supply with its AC connector at
rear panel (see figure 2.27).
Please heed the connection data found in the following table:
1HU 2HU 3HU

AC supply : 90-264V 90-264V 108-264V
47-63Hz 47-63Hz 47-63Hz
Fuse: 6.3A / 250V 10A / 250V 20A / 250V
page 67 Ed 02
Connecting Cables
3.2.7 GNSS antenna installation (HW accessory)

GNSS antenna post mount kit
an accessory.
The post mounting kit allows you to mount the GNSS antenna onto a vertical or horizontal
post. Follow these steps to correctly assemble the kit:
GNSS Timing Receiver?
page 68 Ed 02
Connecting Cables
antenna is unknown and the GNSS Timing Receiver will determinate this location auto-
matically. In that nominal case a proper sky visibility is required: a vertical observation
cone in sky open view of a semi-angle higher or equal to 65◦ - optimum at 85◦ - is rec-
ommended. See figure below.
Cables are required to connect antenna to GNSS Timing Receiver. Two types of cables
are mostly used. The cable attenuation is proportional to length. Typical attenuations at
1575 MHz are:

Once the cable path is defined between antenna and GNSS Timing Receiver, estimate
the attenuation based on cable lengths. Typical attenuation based on standard cable
lengths (including 0.5 dB for connectors):

10m 9.5dB 4dB
25m 23dB 9.5dB
50m No cable 18 dB
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended protecting the GNSS Timing Receiver with light-
ning protection. This protection must be installed at the cable entrance into the building
with a proper earth/ground connection The Lightning Protection attenuation is typically 1
dB.
page 69 Ed 02
Connecting Cables
15 dB <=G1 + G2 + G3 + G4 + G5 <=30 dB
page 70 Ed 02
4 Commissioning

The AC power connector and the AC power switch (not provided in 3HU devices) are
located on the rear panel of the device.
NOTE: Connect the equipment to the AC power supply, using the power cable supplied
with the equipment. In 3HU devices with redundant power supply 2 power cables
must be used.
CAUTION:
Risk of injuries
are met:
1. Press the AC power switch on the rear panel (turn on the AC source providing to
the device in case of 3HU devices) into position ON.
page 71 Ed 02
4.1.2 1+1 (Passive reserve) configuration
NOTE:
Be sure that the 1+1 connections have been carried out as is indicated in section
3.2.2. In order to prevent automatically switching, 1+1 can be pre-configured at
1. At Transmitter A, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights up (or-
ange blinking).
The Transmitter A is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see
transmitter).
3. Set parameter Type of redundancy to 1+1 [Device A] at System > Service

ange blinking).
transmitter).
6. Set parameter Type of redundancy to 1+1 [Device B] at System > Service

menu.
Now both transmitters are correctly connected through the control bus, so
any change in the 1+1 configuration parameters is automatically updated in
both transmitters at the same time.
8. Set the 1+1 system IP address (at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu) for the remote control of the 1 + 1 system (including both transmitters) as
one device.
9. Configure the 1+1 switching mode into automatic mode (at Setup > Redundancy
10. Check that the Device A: Status is ANTENNA at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu.
page 72 Ed 02
4.1.3 N+1 configuration
NOTE:
Be sure that the N+1 connections have been carried out as is indicated in section
3.2.3. In order to prevent automatically switching, N+1 can be pre-configured at
1. At each Transmitter An, press the LOCAL key so that the associated LED lights
up (orange blinking).
The Transmitter is now in local mode and can be operated via the display (see
transmitter).
3. Set parameter Type of redundancy to N+1 [An] at System > Service > Install
ange blinking).
5. Set parameter Type of redundancy to N+1 [B] at System > Service > Install
menu.
7. Set the N value with the number of main transmitters of the N+1 system (at Setup
> Redundancy > Configuration menu).
8. Set the N+1 system IP address (at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu) for the remote control of the N+1 system using an unique IP address.
9. Save the configuration of each Transmitter A by pressing the corresponding syn-

chronize button at Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization menu.
10. Configure the N+1 switching mode into automatic mode (at Setup > Redundancy
11. Check that the Device An: Status is ANTENNA at Setup > Redundancy > Configuration
menu.
13. Press, in all devices, the LOCAL key so that the associated LED is off.
page 73 Ed 02
4.1.4 Single configuration for Transmitters / Re-transmitter

2. Enable the desired inputs (IP socket 1, IP socket 2, ASI 1 and ASI 2/DTT
receiver 1 at Setup > Input menu). For a more detailed description of each
inputs configuration, please refer to sections from 5.5.2.1 to 5.5.2.6 at operation
chapter.
3. Check the input switching (at Setup > Input > Input switching menu). Select
the desired input switching mode (manual or automatic). For a more detailed
description of the sinputs configuration, please refer to section 5.5.2.7 at operation
chapter.
4. Check the selected standard of the modulator (parameter Standard at Setup >
Exciter > Modulator > General menu).
5. Set the modulation parameters. Select (at Setup > Exciter > Modulator >
System menu) the Input mode:
• DVB-T. No input mode selection needed. Single TS input in any case.
• DVB-T2. A mode for a single TS input or B mode for T2MI input. In B mode,
please set the same T2MI PID of the input flow.
• ISDB-T. TS for a single TS input or BTS for a Broadcast TS input.
• ATSC 1.0. No input mode selection needed.
NOTE: • For a more detailed description of the standard modulation parameters, please
refer to sections from 5.5.2.8 to 5.5.2.19 at operation chapter.
6. Check the network type (at Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network menu).
In case of SFN operation, check (at Setup > Reference > Reference source
menu) that the Reference parameter is selected as you desire.
8. Check the INTERLOCK connections detailed in 3.2.5 section.
RF signal is not mute now, so the transmitter is ready for transmitting power.
10. Check the output power at main screen (or at Setup > Exciter > Amplifier
menu).
11. Check that frontal LED indicators INPUT and RF OUTPUT keep green and LED
indicator ALARMS keeps off.
panel to check signal quality.
page 74 Ed 02
5 Operation
5.1 Introduction

page 75 Ed 02
Operation via front display
and keys

menu.

5.2.1.1 Transmitter overview
Figure 5.2: Transmitter overview.
• 1) Input selection. The assignment for each input (from 1 to 4) is detailed at Setup
> Input > Input switching menu.
The status of each input is indicated with the corresponding link . A drawing
line indicates that the signal is correctly detected.
The seamless status is indicated with an S at the input box and a dot (.) at each
input with seamless switching ready. For example, following image indicates seam-
less ready for inputs 3 and 4:
• 2) Modulation standard. DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T or ATSC 1.
page 76 Ed 02
and keys
• 3) Network mode. SFN or MFN.
In case of PRBS test mode is enable, instead of the network type, PRBS is shown.
In case of a mute is working, instead of the modulation standard and the network
type, MUTED is shown.
In case of RF OFF, instead of the standard and the network type, RF OFF is shown.
In case of interlock loop is open, ITK R is shown instead of the standard and the
network type.
and graphically. In case of configuring a power offset 6=0 for the forward power,
symbol + or - is added to the forward power indication (W+ for positive values or W-
for negative values).
• 8) Ethernet link status indicating for each of the 4 Ethernet ports (viewing the device
• 9) Synchronization module status:

page 77 Ed 02
and keys
not synchronized).

5.2.1.2 1+1/N+1 redundancy overview

When the 1+1 or N+1 redundancy is enabled, an overview menu with the redundancy
status is overlaid on the main overview menu.
Figure 5.3: 1+1 redundancy overview (Transmitter A).
• 1),2) Transmitter (A/B) redundancy status:
– Ready. Transmitter ready for an automatic switchover if needed.

– Verifying / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
because is performing an automatic verification.
– Verif. NOK / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
because the result of last automatic verification was not successful.
– Verif. OK / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
although the result of last automatic verification was successful. The trans-
mitter is able to monitoring continuously the status of the device even out of
the verification process, so although the last verification was successful the
device could be not ready.
– No Verif. / Not Ready. Transmitter is not ready for an automatic switchover
because first automatic verification was not performed.
indicates that Interlock loop is open.
• 3) Coaxial switch status. It indicates current switching status: towards antenna,
towards load or unknown ( ).
page 78 Ed 02
and keys
• 4) Antenna.
• 5) Load.
• 7) 1+1 or N+1 label. It indicates that the 1+1 or N+1 redundancy performance is
enabled.
page 79 Ed 02
and keys
5.2.2 Menu keys
Key Description

From overview screen is possible to access to menus navigation by pressing any cursor
or OK key.
Menu tree view
• 1) Menu path.
page 80 Ed 02
and keys
• 4) Scroll bar.
Parameter menu view
• 1) Title.
sor key .
for applying.
page 81 Ed 02
and keys
Menu Status view

tion.
Menu EventLog view

information.
page 82 Ed 02
and keys
fields:

page 83 Ed 02


a PC/laptop can be connected via the Ethernet interface.
specification.
Section 2.2.2.3 detailed the Ethernet configuration.
In any case it is possible to access to the address data needed for communication via the
NOTE:
4. Connect the network interface of the PC to Ethernet port (GbE x with x=1,2,3,4) on
page 84 Ed 02

dialog box appears.
GUI, a warning message is shown at the bottom right corner of the screen.
User accounts:

NOTE:
NOTE:
In case of 1+1 configuration, a unique IP address (different from the remote IP
addresses from both transmitters) is available in order to get access to a WEB GUI
overview of the 1+1 system. This IP can be set in any of the devices in the Setup
> Redundancy at Redundant system IP address parameter (see section 5.5.2.26).
When you log on the web browser using the unique IP, the entry page with the
dynamic diagram of blocks of the system 1+1 appears (image 5.11). At the top
of this entry page a menu bar is available to access to the web GUI of each device
and also to the split view of both webpages at the same time (image 5.12).
In case of N+1 configuration, when you log on the web browser using the unique
IP, the entry page with the dynamic diagram of blocks of the system N+1 appears
(image 5.13). At the top of this entry page a menu bar is available including,
besides the home page link, a link to access to the web GUI of each device and
also a link for the split view of two webpages (the selected device A and device B)
at the same time.
page 85 Ed 02
Figure 5.11: Home page of web GUI for 1+1 systems.
Figure 5.12: Split view of web pages of devices A and B.
page 86 Ed 02
Figure 5.13: Home page of web GUI for N+1 systems.
• 1) Device name.
page 87 Ed 02
Not synchronized
Symbol is attached to the date when a SD card is detected.
• 4) Logout link.

uration, but as a general rule, the colors code for the blocks and arrows statuses
is:


INTERLOCK R is shown when the interlock loop is open.
When a switching block is configured into a manual mode a letter M is shown inside
the block.
page 88 Ed 02
When 1+1 or N+1 redundancy is enabled the coaxial switch box appears at the
screen, after the amplifier to summarizes the status of device A and B (green
means ready, red means not ready and yellow means verification towards load
in progress):
• 8) Forward / Reverse power (current value and dynamic graphical bars).
Menu window
page 89 Ed 02
right side of the parameter until a orange bubble appears with the detailed informa-
Menu Status view


the icon .
Menu EvenLog view

information.

page 90 Ed 02

adding a new rule.
page 91 Ed 02
5.3.4 Log out

screen.
page 92 Ed 02
Monitoring and Control via
SNMP

5.4.1 Introduction
fault.

modified via SNMP.
5.4.2 Configuration
or via SNMP.
In case of 1+1 configuration, a unique IP address (different from the remote IP ad-
dresses from both transmitters, but in the same subnet) is available for the SNMP com-
munications of the 1+1 system (including both transmitters) as one device using the mod-
ule dvbPassiveReserve from IRT MIBs. Follow the instructions on section 4.1.2 to set this
IP address correctly.
In case of N+1 configuration, a unique IP address (different from the remote IP ad-
dresses from the transmitters, but in the same subnet) is available for the SNMP com-
munications of the N+ 1 system using the module dvbnPlus1 from IRT MIBs. Follow the
page 93 Ed 02
SNMP
instructions on section 4.1.3 to set this IP address correctly.
NOTE:
section 5.5.1.4):
also the definitions for all type of devices including all hardware and software options. A
detailed description of this MIB is given below.
SNMP Manager:

page 94 Ed 02
SNMP


page 95 Ed 02
SNMP
page 96 Ed 02
SNMP

type of devices including all hardware and software options.
• setup. Contains definitions for the configuration of the transmitter according to the
parameters of the setup menu.
status menu.

page 97 Ed 02
Technical Manual
general
general location read-write Parameter Location. See section 5.5.1.1.
general operationMode read-only Parameter Operation mode. See section 5.5.1.1.
general autoreturnToRemote read-write Parameter Auto return to remote mode. See section 5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime
page 98

section 5.5.1.1.
5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime utcOffset read-write Parameter Date/time > UTC offset. See section 5.5.1.1.

5.5.1.1.
Operation
general.dateTime timezone read-write Parameter Date/time > Time zone. See section 5.5.1.1.
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
networkInterfaces
5.5.1.2.
page 99
networkInterfaces.localInterfaz localIp read-only Parameter Local interface > Local IP address. See section 5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration ethernetMode read-write Not available.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
page 100
webInterface
5.5.1.3.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
SNMP

section 5.5.3.
medium power).
medium power).
medium power).
medium power).
asiTable ASI input. See section 5.5.3.
ipInputTable IP input. See section 5.5.3.
rxDtt1Table DTV Rx 1. See section 5.5.3.
rfInTable RF input. See section 5.5.3.
cancellerTable IF processor. See section 5.5.3.
powerSupplyTable AC power supply. See section 5.5.3.
Following screenshot shows asiTable as example:
page 101 Ed 02
SNMP
tailed below.
..DD Parameter DD. See section 5.5.1.6 (Available for medium
power).

section 5.5.1.7.

page 102 Ed 02
Technical Manual
ioInterface
ioInterface.input01
ioInterface.input02
page 103

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
snmp
5.5.1.4.
5.5.1.4.
section 5.5.1.4.
snmp trapKeepaliveEnable read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to enable keepalive trap. Parameter Agent
page 104
configuration > Enable keepalive trap. See section 5.5.1.4.

snmp trapKeepalive read-write Timeout in seconds for keepalive trap. Parameter Agent configuration
5.5.1.4.
5.5.1.4.
snmp trapsLocalMode read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Traps in local mode. See section
5.5.1.4.

section 5.5.1.4.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
snmp.trapSinkTable.trapSinkEntry trapSinkCommunity read-write Parameter Trap sink # > Trap community. See section 5.5.1.4.
Technical Manual
deviceInfo
page 105
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis extraDigitalDacModulator read-only Not available
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis satelliteBoard read-only Not available
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis terrestialReceiver1Board read-only Hardware basis > Rx1T. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis terrestialReceiver2Board read-only Not available

deviceInfo.hardwareBasis nPlusOneRedundancy read-only Not available.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis dualDriveRedundancy read-only Hardware basis > DD. See section 5.5.1.9. Available for medium power.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions redundantPsuHw read-only Hardware options > Redundant PSU for 3HU devices. See section
page 106
5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.hardwareOptions ocxoReferenceHw read-only Hardware options > OCXO. See section 5.5.1.9.
deviceInfo.softwareOptions dualDriveSw read-only Software options > DD Redundancy. See section 5.5.1.9. Available

for medium power.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
service
5.5.1.10.
service.serviceReset rfReset read-write To perform the RF Reset. See section
5.5.1.10.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration inputStatusCalibration read-only RF Input calibration status. See section ??.
serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration cancelInputCalibration read-write Set to 1 to remove the RF input calibration.
page 107
See section ??.

service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration inputLevelMeasureCalibration read-write Set measure to calibrate RF input. See section
??.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration powerStatusCalibration read-only Forward power calibration status. See section
5.5.1.12.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration powerLevelMeasureCalibration read-write Set measure to calibrate Forward power. See
section 5.5.1.12.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.phaseRf
service.serviceSystemCalibration.phaseRf automaticRfPhaseAdjustment read-only Automatic fine adjust of RF phase for medium
power amplifier stages. See section ??.

service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection linearStatusPrecorrection read-only Linear precorrection status. See section
5.5.1.13.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection startLinearPrecorrectionBBPF read-write Set to 1 to launch linear precorrection before
Operation
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection startLinearPrecorrectionABPF read-write Set to 1 to launch linear precorrection after
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec-
tion
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec- nonLinearStatusPrecorrection read-only Non linear optimization status. See section
page 108
tion 5.5.1.14.
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec- cancelNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Set to 1 to remove non linear optimization.
service.serviceSystemCalibration. nonLinearPrecorrec- startNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Set to 1 to launch non linear optimization.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration acApparentPower read-only AC Apparent power for 3HU devices. See
section 5.5.1.15.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration acEfficiency read-only AC Efficiency for 3HU devices. See section
5.5.1.15.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration efficiencyStatusCalibration read-only Efficiency improvement status. See section

5.5.1.15.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyStatusCalibration read-write Efficiency improvement status. See section
page 109


Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
service.serviceCooling
section 5.5.1.17.
page 110
section 5.5.1.17.
section 5.5.1.17.
service.serviceCooling fanSpeed read-only Parameter Speed. See section 5.5.1.17.
service.serviceCooling. exter- Table for medium power amplifier stages cooling
nalAmplifierCoolingTable
service.serviceCooling. exter- Entry for a stage

service.serviceCooling. exter- externalAmplifierCoolingIndex Index stage from #1 to #4
service.serviceCooling. exter- amStFanSpeed read-only Parameter Fans speed of the stage. See section ??.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
service.serviceCooling. exter- amStFan1OperatingTime read-only Parameter Fan 1 operating time of the stage. See section ??.
service.serviceCooling. exter- amStFan2OperatingTime read-only Parameter Fan 2 operating time of the stage. See section ??.
page 111
service.servicePowerSupply
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA For 3HU devices
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAstatus read-only Parameter PSU-A: Status. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAacInputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-A: AC input voltage. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAdcOutputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-A: DC output voltage. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuA psuAtemperature read-only Parameter PSU-A: Temperature. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB For 3HU devices

service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBstatus read-only Parameter PSU-B: Status. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBacInputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-B: AC input voltage. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBdcOutputVoltage read-only Parameter PSU-B: DC output voltage. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.servicePowerSupply.psuB psuBtemperature read-only Parameter PSU-B: Temperature. See section 5.5.1.16.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable Table for medium power amplifier stages
power supply
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- Entry for a stage
ternalAmplifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- externalAmplifierPSIndex Index stage from #1 to #4
ternalAmplifierPSEntry
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- amStDcLineVoltage1 read-only Parameter DC line 1 voltage of the stage. See
ternalAmplifierPSEntry section ??.
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- amStDcLineVoltage2 read-only Parameter DC line 2 voltage of the stage. See
page 112
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- amStPsuAStatus read-only Parameter PSU-A:status of the stage. See
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- amStPsuBStatus read-only Parameter PSU-B:status of the stage. See
service.servicePowerSupply. externalAmplifierPSTable. ex- amStPsuCStatus read-only Parameter PSU-C:status of the stage. See
service.serviceSwUpgrade Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeMode Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeServer Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeUser Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradePassword Not available

service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwDaily Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwPeriodic Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwFile Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwStatus Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwCheckNow Not available
Operation
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwDownloadNow Not available
service.serviceSwUpgrade serviceSwUpgradeNow Not available
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
input
input.socket1
page 113

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
input.socket2
page 114

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
tion 5.5.2.7.
tion 5.5.2.7.
teresis > Error (Non-seamless). See section 5.5.2.7.
page 115
teresis > Higher priority. See section 5.5.2.7.

input.inputSwitching.inputSwitchingHysteresis asiBypassEqualizers read-write Parameter Input switching > ASI equalizers bypass.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
input.asi1
input.asi2
input.dttReceiver1
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1Enable read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Enable. See section
5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1Standard read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Standard. See section
5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1Bandwidth read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Bandwidth. See section
page 116
5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1InputFrequencyMode
read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Input frequency mode.
input.dttReceiver1 dttReceiver1PlpId read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > PLP ID for DVB-T2. See
section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode dttReceiver1Channel read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Channel Mode > Channel.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode dttReceiver1ChannelOffset read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Channel Mode > Channel
offset. See section 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1ChannelMode dttReceiver1ChannelResolution read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Channel Mode > Channel

resolution. See section 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1. dttRe-
ceiver1CentralFrequencyMode
input.dttReceiver1. dttRe- dttReceiver1Frequency read-write Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Central Frequency Mode
ceiver1CentralFrequencyMode > Central frequency. See section 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1Status
Operation
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1Status dttReceiver1StatusReceiver read-only Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Status > Status. See sec-
SNMP
Ed 02
tion 5.5.2.5.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1Status dttReceiver1InputFrequency read-only Parameter DTT receiver 1 > Status > DTT receiver 1
temperature. See section 5.5.2.5.
Technical Manual
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1Constellation read-only Parameter Modulation > Constellation. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1Fec read-only Parameter Modulation > FEC. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1GuardInterval read-only Parameter Modulation > Guard Interval. See section
tReceiver1TModulation 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT. dt- dttReceiver1Fft read-only Parameter Modulation > FFT. See section 5.5.2.3.
page 117
tReceiver1TMeasures
input.dttReceiver1. dttReceiver1DvbT. dttReceiver1Cber read-only Parameter Measures > CBER. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1. dttReceiver1DvbT. dttReceiver1Vber read-only Parameter Measures > VBER. See section 5.5.2.3.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2Profile read-only Parameter System > T2 profile. See section 5.5.2.6.

input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2Version read-only Parameter System > T2 version. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2CellId read-only Parameter System > Cell ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2NetworkId read-only Parameter System > Network ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttReceiver1T2SystemId read-only Parameter System > System ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
Technical Manual
dttReceiver1T2Frame
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2L1SignallingModulation read-only Parameter T2 frame > L1-post signalling constellation.
dttReceiver1T2Frame See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2L1PostScrambling read-only Parameter T2 frame > L1-post scrambling. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PreambleFormat read-only Parameter T2 frame > Preamble format. See section
page 118
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2ExtendedCarrierMode read-only Parameter T2 frame > Extended carrier mode. See sec-
dttReceiver1T2Frame tion 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2FftSize read-only Parameter T2 frame > FFT size. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2Frame
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2GuardInterval read-only Parameter T2 frame > Guard interval. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PaprReduction read-only Parameter T2 frame > PAPR reduction. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PilotPattern read-only Parameter T2 frame > Pilot pattern. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2Frame

input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2FramesPerSuperframe read-only Parameter T2 frame > Number of T2 frames per super-
dttReceiver1T2Frame frame. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2OfdmSymbolsPerSuperframe
read-only Parameter T2 frame > Number of OFDM symbols per
dttReceiver1T2Frame T2 frame. See section 5.5.2.6.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1NumberOfPlps read-only Parameter PLP > Total number of PLPs. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1PlpId read-only Parameter PLP > Selected PLP ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpType read-only Parameter PLP > PLP type. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpMode read-only Parameter PLP > PLP mode. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
page 119
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpGroupId read-only Parameter PLP > PLP group ID. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpConstellation read-only Parameter PLP > PLP constellation. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2PlpRotatedConstellation read-only Parameter PLP > Rotated constellation. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2FecType read-only Parameter PLP > FEC type. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2CodeRate read-only Parameter PLP > Code rate. See section 5.5.2.6.
dttReceiver1T2PLP
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2NumberOfFecBlocks read-only Parameter PLP > Number of FEC blocks. See section

input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2TypeOfTimeInvervaling read-only Parameter PLP > Type of time-interleaving. See section
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2LengthOfTimeInvervalingread-only Parameter PLP > Length of time-interleaving. See sec-
dttReceiver1T2PLP tion 5.5.2.6.
Operation
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2InBandSignalling read-only Parameter PLP > In-band signalling. See section
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2BerBeforeLdpc read-only Parameter Measures > BER before LDPC. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2BerBeforeBch read-only Parameter Measures > BER before BCH. See section 5.5.2.6.
input.dttReceiver1.dttReceiver1DvbT2. dttRx1T2BbframeErrorRatio read-only Parameter Measures > BBFRAME error ratio. See section
dttReceiver1T2Measures 5.5.2.6.
exciter
page 120
exciter.rfInput
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputFrequencyMode read-write Parameter Input frequency mode. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputFrequency read-only Parameter Input frequency. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputLevel read-only Parameter Input level. See section ??.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputLevelThreshold read-write Parameter Input level threshold. See section ??.
inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputChannel read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel. See section ??.
.inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputChannelOffset read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel offset. See section ??.

inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputChannelResolution read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel resolution. See section ??.
inputChannelMode
Operation
inputCentralFrequencyMode section ??.
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecGeneral ecTemperature read-write Parameter IF board temperature. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecBandwidth read-only Parameter Bandwidth. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecBandwidthAdaptation read-write Parameter Bandwidth adaptation. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecAdditionDelay read-write Parameter Additional delay. See section ??.
page 121
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecCurrentDelay read-only Parameter Current delay. See section ??.

ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecInputLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Input. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecReferenceLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Reference. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecCancellationLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Cancellation. See section ??.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecOutputCancellation read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Output. See section ??.
ecLevels

exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows ecEnable read-write Parameter Echo cancellation. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows muteGainMarginThreshold read-write Parameter Gain margin threshold. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows ecGainMargin read-only Parameter Gain margin. See section ??.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
page 122

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector ecLinearPrecorrection read-write Parameter Amplitude equalization > Enable. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector ecNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Parameter Non-linear precorrection > Enable. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorInput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Input. See section ??.
page 123
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorStatus read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Status. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorFeedback read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Feedback. See section ??.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorOutput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Output. See section ??.
ecSpectrumMeasures

exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecInBandLevelVariation read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > In-band level variation. See
ecSpectrumMeasures section ??.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorTemperature read-only Parameter Modulator board temperature. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorStandard read-write Parameter Modulator standard. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorTestMode read-write Parameter Test mode. See section 5.5.2.8.
page 124
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsType read-write Parameter PRBS type. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsPid read-write Parameter PRBS PID. See section 5.5.2.8.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsIn read-write Parameter PRBS invert. See section 5.5.2.8.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtBandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.9.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtCellIdEnable read-write Parameter Enable Cell ID. See section 5.5.2.9.
dvbtSystem

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtCellId read-write Parameter Cell ID. See section 5.5.2.9.
dvbtSystem
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtNetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section 5.5.2.10.
5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtLocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section 5.5.2.10.
dvbtMip
page 125
dvbtMip 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtTimeOffset read-only Parameter MIP > Time offset. See section 5.5.2.10.
dvbtMip
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtTransmitterId read-write Parameter MIP > Transmitter ID. See section 5.5.2.10.
dvbtMip
dvbtTimingInformation lay. See section 5.5.2.10.

dvbtTimingInformation gin. See section 5.5.2.10.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtDelay read-only Parameter Timing information > Modulator delay. See
dvbtTimingInformation section 5.5.2.10.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
dvbtModulation
page 126
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtConstellation read-write Parameter Constellation. See section 5.5.2.11.

dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtFec read-write Parameter FEC. See section 5.5.2.11.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtGuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section 5.5.2.11.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtFft read-write Parameter FFT. See section 5.5.2.11.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtAutoconfigurationFromDttRcvread-write Parameter Autocofiguration from DTT receiver. See sec-
dvbtModulation tion 5.5.2.11.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Profile read-write Parameter DVB-T2 profile. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2InputMode read-write Parameter Input mode. See section 5.5.2.12.
page 127
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2T2miPid read-write Parameter T2MI PID. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Bandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Version read-write Parameter T2 version. See section 5.5.2.12.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdT2mi read-only Parameter Cell ID > T2MI value. See section 5.5.2.12.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdOverwrite read-write Parameter Cell ID > Overwrite. See section 5.5.2.12.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdUser read-write Parameter Cell ID > User value. See section 5.5.2.12.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdT2mi read-only Parameter Network ID > T2MI value. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdOverwrite read-write Parameter Network ID > Overwrite. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdUser read-write Parameter Network ID > User value. See section
page 128
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdT2mi read-only Parameter T2 system ID > T2MI value. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdOverwrite read-write Parameter T2 system ID > Overwrite. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdUser read-write Parameter T2 system ID > User value. See section

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FrequencyT2mi read-only Parameter T2 frequency > T2MI value. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FrequencyOverwrite read-write Parameter T2 frequency > Overwrite. See section
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2NetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2SfnRelativeReference read-only Parameter SFN reference (relative). See section
5.5.2.13.
5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2TimeStamp read-only Parameter T2MI Timestamp. See section 5.5.2.13.
5.5.2.13.
page 129
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2LocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section 5.5.2.13.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2TimeOffset read-only Parameter Individual Addressing > Time offset.

dvbt2Network.dvbt2TimingInformation margin. See section 5.5.2.13.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Delay read-only Parameter Timing information > Modulator delay.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2L1SignallingModulation read-write Parameter L1-post signaling constellation. See
dvbt2Frame section 5.5.2.14.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2L1PostScrambling read-write Parameter L1-post scrambling. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2LiteCompatible read-only Parameter T2-Lite compatible. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PreambleFormat read-write Parameter Preamble format. See section 5.5.2.14.
page 130
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2MisoGroup read-write Parameter MISO group. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FftSize read-write Parameter FFT size. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2GuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PaprReduction read-write Parameter PAPR reduction. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PilotPattern read-write Parameter Pilot pattern. See section 5.5.2.14.
dvbt2Frame
dvbt2Frame See section 5.5.2.14.
Operation
dvbt2Frame frame. See section 5.5.2.14.
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp numberOfPlps read-only Parameter Number of PLPs. See section 5.5.2.15.
dvbt2PlpTable
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpId read-write Parameter PLP ID. See section 5.5.2.15.
page 131
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpType read-write Parameter PLP type. See section 5.5.2.15.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpMode read-write Parameter PLP mode. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpGroupId read-write Parameter PLP Group ID. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpConstellation read-write Parameter PLP Constellation. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. rotatedConstellation read-write Parameter Rotated Constellation. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. fecType read-write Parameter FEC type. See section 5.5.2.15.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. codeRate read-write Parameter Code Rate. See section 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. numberOfFecBlocks read-write Parameter Number of FEC blocks. See section
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. lengthOfTimeInvervaling read-write Parameter Lenght of time-interleaving. See sec-

dvbt2PlpTable.dvbt2PlpEntry tion 5.5.2.15.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. inBandSignalling read-write Parameter In-band signaling. See section
Technical Manual
page 132
isdbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.16.
isdbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtInputMode read-write Parameter Input mode. See section 5.5.2.16.
isdbtSystem
isdbtNetwork
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtNetwork
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtLocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtNetwork

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
iip
iip tion > Maximum network delay. See section
5.5.2.17.
iip tion > Time offset. See section 5.5.2.17.
page 133

iip tion > Static delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
iip tion > Equipment ID. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtTimingInformation delay. See section 5.5.2.17.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtRfDelay read-write Parameter RF delay. See section 5.5.2.17.
isdbtNetwork
page 134
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtFft read-write Parameter FFT Mode. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtGuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPartialReception read-write Parameter Partial reception. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFiltering read-write Parameter Filtering type. See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLA read-write Parameter Layer A > PID filtering. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLA read-write Parameter Layer A > PIDs. See section 5.5.2.18.
page 135
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLA read-write Parameter Layer A > Code Rate. See section
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA section 5.5.2.18.

exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtServicesA read-write Parameter Layer A > Services names. See section
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLB read-write Parameter Layer B > PID filtering. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLB read-write Parameter Layer B > PIDs. See section 5.5.2.18.
page 136
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLB read-write Parameter Layer B > Code Rate. See section
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB section 5.5.2.18.

exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtServicesB read-write Parameter Layer B > Services names. See section
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLC read-write Parameter Layer C > PID filtering. See section
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLC read-write Parameter Layer C > PIDs. See section 5.5.2.18.
page 137
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLC read-write Parameter Layer C > Code Rate. See section
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC See section 5.5.2.18.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC section 5.5.2.18.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtServicesC read-write Parameter Layer C > Services names. See section

isdbtPSI
isdbtPSI.isdbtPAT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtAvailablePrograms read-only Parameter Program Association Table > Avail-
isdbtPSI.isdbtPAT able programs. See section 5.5.2.19.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
isdbtPSI.isdbtBIT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtAffiliationId read-write Parameter Broadcast Information Table > Affilia-
isdbtPSI.isdbtBIT tion ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkId read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Network
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkName read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Network
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT name. See section 5.5.2.19.
page 138
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTransportStreamId read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Transport

isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Stream ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOriginalNetworkId read-only Parameter Network Information Table > Original
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Network ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtAreaCode read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Area
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT code. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOverwriteAreaCode read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Overwrite
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Area code. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtFrequency read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Fre-
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT quency. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOverwriteFrequency read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Overwrite

isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Frequency. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtRemoteControlIdKey read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Remote
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBypassRemoteControlIdKey read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Bypass
isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT Remote Control Key ID. See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtOverwriteRemoteControlIdKey read-write Parameter Network Information Table > Overwrite
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtTSName read-write Parameter Network Information Table > TS Name.

isdbtPSI.isdbtNIT See section 5.5.2.19.
Technical Manual
isdbtPSI.isdbtTOT
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCountry read-write Parameter Time Offset Table > Country code.
isdbtPSI.isdbtTOT See section 5.5.2.19.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtRegionId read-write Parameter Time Offset Table > Region ID. See
isdbtPSI.isdbtTOT section 5.5.2.19.
page 139
modLinearPrecorrection section 5.5.2.20.

modNonLinearPrecorrection See section 5.5.2.20.

modPrecorrectorLevels See section 5.5.2.20.
modSpectrumMeasures
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
modSpectrumMeasures alarm. See section 5.5.2.20.

exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modLowerShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Lower
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modUpperShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Upper
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modIn-bandLevelVariation read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > In-band
modSpectrumMeasures level variation. See section 5.5.2.20.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modThresholdMer read-write Parameter Spectrum measures > MER alarm.
modSpectrumMeasures See section 5.5.2.20.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modMer read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > MER. See
modSpectrumMeasures section 5.5.2.20.
page 140
rfOutput
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputFrequencyMode read-write Parameter Output Frequency mode. See sec-
rfOutput tion 5.5.2.21.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputFrequency read-only Parameter Output frequency. See section
rfOutput 5.5.2.21.
rfOutput.outputChannelMode
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputChannel read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel. See sec-
rfOutput.outputChannelMode tion 5.5.2.21.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputChannelOffset read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel offset.
rfOutput.outputChannelMode See section 5.5.2.21.

exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. ouputChannelResolution read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel resolu-
rfOutput.outputChannelMode tion. See section 5.5.2.21.
rfOutput.outputCentralFrequencyMode
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. outputCentralFrequency read-write Parameter Central Frequency Mode > Central
Operation
rfOutput.outputCentralFrequencyMode frequency. See section 5.5.2.21.
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
page 141

exciter.rfOutput.mutes mute10MHz read-write Parameter 10MHz mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteGainMargin read-write Parameter Gain margin mute. See section 5.5.2.22.
exciter.rfOutput.mutes tsErrorMuteHysteresis read-write Parameter TS error mute hysteresis. See section
5.5.2.22.

exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteCausesBinary read-only All mute causes of section 5.5.2.22 serialized at a
unique variable of 32 bits. Parameter exclusive for
SNMP. See tables 5.2 and 5.3.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
SNMP
Bit Meaning
absence10mhz (0) 10MHz: 10MHz mute.
btsError (1) BTS error: BTS error mute.
sfnMargin (2) SFN margin: SFN margin mute.
sfnReference (3) SFN Reference: SFN Reference mute.
t2miError (4) T2MI error: T2MI error mute.
inputOverflow (5) Input overflow: Input Overflow mute.
tsError (6) TS error: TS error mute.
rfOff (7) RF off: Manual RF OFF.
rfInput (8) RF input: In case of input RF signal level is under the input
level threshold.
redundancyInitialization (9) Redundancy (Initialization): Device muted due to the re-
dundancy premises (during initialization process).
elevatedPower (10) Elevated power: Exceeded output power self-protection. See
section 2.2.5.2.
redundancySwitching (11) Redundancy (Switching): Device muted due to the redun-
dancy premises (during switching process).
redundancyLoad (12) Redundancy (Load): Device towards load muted due to the
redundancy premises.
redundancyAntenna (13) Redundancy (Antenna): Device towards antenna muted due
to the redundancy premises.
reversePower (14) Reverse power: Excessive reflected power self-protection.
temperature (15) Temperature: Overtemperature self-protection. See section
2.2.5.5.
page 142 Ed 02
SNMP
Bit Meaning
section ??.
section ??.
interlock (21) Interlock R: In case of external INTERLOCK loop of 1+1
SWITCH connector is opened. See section 2.4.
rfLoop (22) RF loop: In case of external RF loop is opened. This safety
mute function is configurable (see section 2.2.2.4 for more
details).
hwErrorPd (23) HW error PD: General hardware error self-protection. See
section 2.2.5.3.
mipError (30) MIP error: MIP error mute.
gainMargin (31) Gain margin: Gain margin mute.
page 143 Ed 02
Technical Manual
reference
page 144
section 5.5.2.23.
tion 5.5.2.23.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
reference.synchronization satellitesAntenna read-only Parameter Satellites antenna. See section
5.5.2.24.
page 145

reference.synchronization endlessHoldoverThresholdEnable read-write Parameter Endless holdover. See section
5.5.2.24.
section 5.5.2.24.

Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
SNMP
Following screenshot shows satellitesConstellationTable as example. Column index 1
shows the GPS satellites (up to 8) information and Column index 2 shows the GLONASS
satellites (up to 8) information:

reference.synchronization. Table for satellite GPS /
satellitesConstellationTable GLONASS information
reference.synchronization.
satellitesConstellationTable.
satellitesConstellationEntry
reference.synchronization. constellationIndex Index satellite constella-
satellitesConstellationTable. tion from #1 (GPS) to #2
satellitesConstellationEntry (GLONASS)
page 146 Ed 02
Technical Manual
amplifier
amplifier configuredPower read-write Parameter Configured power. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier powerDisplayOffset read-write Parameter Power offset. See section 5.5.2.25.
page 147
amplifier forwardPower read-only Parameter Forward power. See section 5.5.2.25.

amplifier reversePower read-only Parameter Reverse power. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier exceededPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Exceeded power threshold. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier decreasedPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Decreased power threshold. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier reverserPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Reverse power threshold. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier amplifierStageTemperature read-only Parameter Amplifier stage temperature. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier ldmosTransistor1Current read-only Parameter LDMOS transistor 1 current. See section 5.5.2.25.
amplifier decreasedPowerThresholdNonCrit read-write Parameter Decreased power threshold [Non critical]. See section

5.5.2.25.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
amplifier.amplifierStageTable Table for medium power amplifier stages status
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. Entry for a stage
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amplifierStageIndex Index stage from #1 to #4
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStControlStatus read-only Parameter Control status of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStHwStatus read-only Parameter HW status of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStMuteSelfProtection read-only Parameter Mute (Self-protection) of the stage. See section ??.
page 148
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStForwardPower read-only Parameter Forward power of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStReversePower read-only Parameter Reverse power of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStRfPhase read-write Parameter RF phase of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStTemperature read-only Parameter Amplifier stage temperature of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry
amplifier.amplifierStageTable. amStCurrent1 read-only Parameter LDMOS transistor 1 current of the stage. See section ??.
amplifierStageEntry

amplifierStageEntry
amplifierStageEntry
amplifierStageEntry
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
amplifierStageEntry
amplifierStageEntry
Technical Manual
redundancy
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1DeviceIdentifier read-only Parameter Device identifier. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1ControlBusStatus read-only Parameter Control status. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SystemIp read-write Parameter 1+1 system IP address. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1EnableNCB read-write Not available.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 rPrDdSwitchToAntenna read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Switch to antenna. See
section 5.5.2.26.
page 149
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Mode read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Redundancy mode. See
section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1PriorityAB read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Priority. See section
5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1AutoReturn read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Auto-return. See section
5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Switchings read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Performed switchings
(today). See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1MaximumSwitchings read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Maximum switchings /
day. See section 5.5.2.26.

redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1InputTest read-write Not available.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1InputValidation read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Input validation. See
section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1PowerValidation read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Power validation. See sec-
tion 5.5.2.26.
Operation
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SwitchingHysteresis read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Switching hysteresis.
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
r1p1DeviceA
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusA read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device A > Status. See
r1p1DeviceA section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. switchingCausesA read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device A > Switching
page 150
r1p1DeviceA causes. See section 5.5.2.26.

r1p1DeviceB
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusB read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device B > Status. See
r1p1DeviceB section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. switchingCausesB read-only Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Device B > Switching
r1p1DeviceB causes. See section 5.5.2.26.
r1p1RfStatus
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusWhenAntenna read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > RF status > When an-
r1p1RfStatus tenna. See section 5.5.2.26.

redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusWhenLoad read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > RF status > When load.
r1p1RfStatus See section 5.5.2.26.
Operation
SNMP
Ed 02
Technical Manual
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVerificationsStatus read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Enable. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDuration read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Duration. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVPerformedVerifications read-only Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Performed verifications. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVMaxVerifications read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Maximum verifications. See section 5.5.2.26.
page 151
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVNexVerification read-only Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications >
r1p1AutoVerifications Next verification in. See section 5.5.2.26.
r1p1AutoVReiterated
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedEnable read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications: Re-
r1p1AutoVReiterated iterated with cadence > Enable. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedPeriod read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications: Re-
r1p1AutoVReiterated iterated with cadence > Period. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedCadence read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications: Re-
r1p1AutoVReiterated iterated with cadence > Cadence. See section 5.5.2.26.

r1p1AutoVDaily
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDailyEnable read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications:
r1p1AutoVDaily Daily > Enable. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDailyTime read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Automatic verifications:
r1p1AutoVDaily Daily > Time. See section 5.5.2.26.
Operation
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion
SNMP
Ed 02
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1PriorityInversionEnable read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Automatic priority inver-
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion sion > Enable. See section 5.5.2.26.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1PriorityInversionPeriod read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Automatic priority inver-
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion sion > Period (days). See section 5.5.2.26.
Technical Manual
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1PriorityInversionTime read-write Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Automatic priority inver-
r1p1AutoPriorityInversion sion > Time. See section 5.5.2.26.
dancy counters. Parameter 1+1/DD Redundancy > Reset.
redundancy.
r1p1Synchronization
redundancy. r1p1SyncWeb read-write Parameter Synchronization > WEB interface. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncDate read-write Parameter Synchronization > Date, time and language.
page 152

redundancy. r1p1SyncSnmp read-write Parameter Synchronization > SNMP. See section 5.5.2.27.
r1p1Synchronization
redundancy. r1p1SyncEvents read-write Parameter Synchronization > Events configuration
r1p1Synchronization [Alarms, Events, I/O interface]. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy. r1p1SyncInput read-write Parameter Synchronization > Input [IP, ASI, RX, Switch-
r1p1Synchronization ing]. See section 5.5.2.27.
redundancy. r1p1SyncRfInput read-write Parameter Synchronization > RF input. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncCanceller read-write Parameter Synchronization > Canceller. See section

redundancy. r1p1SyncModulator read-write Parameter Synchronization > Modulator. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncRfOutput read-write Parameter Synchronization > RF output. See section
redundancy. r1p1SyncAmplifier read-write Parameter Synchronization > Amplifier. See section
Operation
redundancy. r1p1SyncExternalAmplifier read-write Parameter Synchronization > Amplifier (Medium power).
SNMP
Ed 02

redundancy. r1p1SyncReference read-write Parameter Synchronization > Reference. See section
SNMP
following values:
(NOT APPLY).

faultSummationStatus Alarm Fault summation. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.1.
warningSummationStatus Alarm Warning summation. See
section 5.5.3.2.
statusAmplifier
statusAmplifier amplifierStatus Group alarm Amplifier. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.
statusAmplifier exceededOutputPower Alarm Exceeded power. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.3.
statusAmplifier decreasedOutputPower Alarm Decreased power. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.4.
statusAmplifier reflectPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.6.
statusAmplifier temperatureAmplifierStatus Alarm Temperature. See section
5.5.3.7.
statusAmplifier decreasedOutputPowerNonCriticalAlarm Decreased power [Non
critical]. See section 5.5.3.5.
statusAsiInput
statusAsiInput asiInputStatus Group alarm ASI input. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.
5.5.3.8.
5.5.3.9.
statusIpInput
statusIpInput ipInputStatus Group alarm IP input. See section
5.5.3.
5.5.3.10.
5.5.3.11.
page 153 Ed 02
SNMP
statusSatelliteReceiver1 satReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1 unlockSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1 rfSignalSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1 lnbOverloadSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver1 temperatureSatReceiver1Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2 satReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2 unlockSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2 rfSignalSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2 lnbOverloadSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusSatelliteReceiver2 temperatureSatReceiver2Status Not available.
statusTerrestialReceiver1 dttReceiver1AlarmStatus Group alarm DTT re-
ceiver 1. See section
5.5.3.
statusTerrestialReceiver1 unlockDttReceiver1Status Alarm Unlock. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.12.
statusTerrestialReceiver1 rfSignalDttReceiver1Status Alarm RF signal quality.
statusTerrestialReceiver1 temperatureDttReceiver1Status Alarm Temperature.
statusTerrestialReceiver2 Not available.
statusTerrestialReceiver2 dttReceiver2AlarmStatus Not available.
statusTerrestialReceiver2 unlockDttReceiver2Status Not available.
statusTerrestialReceiver2 rfSignalDttReceiver2Status Not available.
statusTerrestialReceiver2 temperatureDttReceiver2Status Not available.
statusModulator
statusModulator modulatorStatus Group alarm Modulator.
See section 5.5.3.
statusModulator tsErrorStatus Alarm TS error. See
section 5.5.3.15.
statusModulator mipErrorStatus Alarm MIP error. See
section 5.5.3.16.
statusModulator mpegOverflowStatus Alarm Input Overflow.
page 154 Ed 02
SNMP

5.5.3.18.
statusModulator btsErrorStatus Alarm BTS error. See section
5.5.3.19.
statusModulator sfnErrorStatus Alarm SFN reference. See
section 5.5.3.20.
statusModulator sfnMargin Alarm SFN margin. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.21.
statusModulator temperatureModulatorStatus Alarm Temperature. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.22.
statusModulator modulatorOutputStatus Alarm Output level. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.23.
5.5.3.24.
statusModulator modulatorMerStatus Alarm MER. See section
5.5.3.25.
statusModulator modulatorExternalFeedbackStatusAlarm External feedback
(Medium power). See section
??.
statusRfInput
??.
statusEchoCanceller
statusEchoCanceller echoCancellerStatus Group alarm IF processor.
See section 5.5.3.
??.
section ??.
statusEchoCanceller temperatureECStatus Alarm Temperature. See sec-
tion ??.
statusEchoCanceller outputLevelStatus Alarm Output level. See sec-
tion ??.
??.
statusEchoCanceller gainMarginStatus Alarm Gain margin . See sec-
tion ??.
statusEchoCanceller cancExternalFeedbackStatus Not available.
statusRfOutput
5.5.3.27.
section 5.5.3.28.
5.5.3.29.
page 155 Ed 02
SNMP

5.5.3.31.
section 5.5.3.32.
section 5.5.3.33.
tion 5.5.3.34.
statusHwError
section 5.5.3.
statusHwError ldmosTransistorsStatus Alarm LDMOS transistors.
section 5.5.3.39.
section 5.5.3.40.
5.5.3.41.
statusHwError nonLinearSenseFeedback Alarm Non-linear sense
feedback. See section
5.5.3.42.
statusHwError amplifierOutputSample Alarm Amplifier output
statusFan
tion 5.5.3.
5.5.3.43.
5.5.3.44.
5.5.3.45.
statusExternal
See section 5.5.3.
5.5.3.48.
5.5.3.49.
statusPowerSupply
statusPowerSupply acPowerSupplyStatus Group alarm AC power sup-
statusPowerSupply psuAStatus Alarm PSU A. See section
5.5.3.46.
statusPowerSupply psuBStatus Alarm PSU B. See section
5.5.3.47.
page 156 Ed 02
SNMP

See section ??.
Stage 1. See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
page 157 Ed 02
SNMP

See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
page 158 Ed 02
SNMP
available traps.
• eventTrapLogId. Unique identifier of the alarm.
information.

• eventTrapLogId. Unique identifier of the event.

information.
page 159 Ed 02
SNMP

See section 5.5.3.
temperatureAmplifierTrap temperatureAmplifierStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section 5.5.3.7.
See section 5.5.3.
section 5.5.3.8.
section 5.5.3.9.
section 5.5.3.
section 5.5.3.10.
section 5.5.3.11.
dttReceiver1Trap dttReceiver1AlarmStatus Group alarm DTT receiver
1. See section 5.5.3.
unlockDttReceiver1Trap unlockDttReceiver1Status Alarm Unlock. See section
5.5.3.12.
rfSignalDttReceiver1Trap rfSignalDttReceiver1Status Alarm RF signal quality.
temperatureDttReceiver1Trap temperatureDttReceiver1StatusAlarm Temperature. See
section 5.5.3.14.
page 160 Ed 02
SNMP

dttReceiver2Trap Not available.
unlockDttReceiver2Trap Not available.
rfSignalDttReceiver2Trap Not available.
temperatureDttReceiver2Trap Not available.
section 5.5.3.15.
section 5.5.3.16.
section 5.5.3.18.
section 5.5.3.21.
section 5.5.3.27.
cancellerShouldersTrap cancellerShouldersStatus Alarm Shoulders. See
section ??.
section 5.5.3.34.
section 5.5.3.
tenna. See section
5.5.3.28.
section 5.5.3.29.
5.5.3.30.
section 5.5.3.31.
ence. See section
??.
page 161 Ed 02
SNMP

acPowerSupplyTrap acPowerSupplyStatus Group alarm AC power sup-
psuATrap psuAStatus Alarm PSU A. See section
5.5.3.46.
psuBTrap psuBStatus Alarm PSU B. See section
5.5.3.47.
section 5.5.3.
ldmosTransistorsTrap ldmosTransistorsStatus Alarm LDMOS transistors.
section 5.5.3.39.
section 5.5.3.40.
5.5.3.41.
tion 5.5.3.
5.5.3.43.
5.5.3.44.
5.5.3.45.
See section 5.5.3.
5.5.3.48.
5.5.3.49.
tion 5.5.3.19.
feedback. See section
5.5.3.42.
tion 5.5.3.24.
rfInputTrap rfInputStatus Alarm RF input. See section
??.
echoCancellerTrap echoCancellerStatus Group alarm IF processor.
See section 5.5.3.
inputLevelTrap inputLevelStatus Alarm Input level. See sec-
tion ??.
temperatureECTrap temperatureECStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section ??.
outputLevelTrap outputLevelStatus Alarm Output level. See
section ??.
amplifierOutputSampleTrap amplifierOutputSample Alarm Amplifier output
page 162 Ed 02
SNMP

gainMarginStatusTrap gainMarginStatus Alarm Gain margin . See
section ??.
cancExternalFeedbackStatus- cancExternalFeedbackStatus Not available.
Trap
modulatorMerStatusTrap modulatorMerStatus Alarm MER. See section
5.5.3.25.
modExternalFeedbackStatus- modulatorExternalFeedback- Alarm External feedback
Trap Status (Medium power). See sec-
tion ??.
5.5.3.
See section ??.
1. See section ??.
See section ??.
5.5.3.
See section ??.
2. See section ??.
See section ??.
page 163 Ed 02
SNMP

5.5.3.
See section ??.
3. See section ??.
See section ??.
5.5.3.
See section ??.
4. See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
decreasedOuputPowerNonCrit- decreasedOutputPowerNon- Alarm Decreased power
Trap Critical [Non critical]. See section
5.5.3.5.
page 164 Ed 02
SNMP
Trap Description
dateAndTimeReferenceEventTrap Event Date and time source. See section 5.5.1.7.
systemInitEventTrap Event System init. See section 5.5.1.7.
guiOperationEventTrap Event GUI operation. See section 5.5.1.7.
muteEventTrap Event Mute. See section 5.5.1.7.
inputSourceSelectedEventTrap Event Input source selected. See section 5.5.1.7.
selectedReferenceEventTrap Event Selected reference. See section 5.5.1.7.
forcedMfnEventTrap Event Forced MFN (reference error). See section
5.5.1.7.
localModeTimeoutEventTrap Event Local mode timeout. See section 5.5.1.7.
redundancyEventTrap Event Redundancy. See section 5.5.1.7.
configurationFromBackupEventTrap Event Configuration backups. See section 5.5.1.7.
systemShutdownEventTrap Event System shutdown. See section 5.5.1.7.
lockingStart1ppsEventTrap Event 1PPS locking restart. See section 5.5.1.7.
Trap Description
testTrap Test trap. Set OID sendTestTrap to the value 1 to
send.
keepaliveTrap keepalive trap sent automatically after a user-
configurable timeout. See section 5.5.1.4.
SNMP conformance.

objectGroups
of the MIB
objectGroups groupObsoleted Obsoleted OIDs
objectGroups groupFSevents Traps group
groupCompilance
page 165 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5 Menu structure

• System.
– General.
– WEB interface.
– SNMP.
∗ Alarms.
∗ Events.
∗ I/O interface.
– Device info.
– Service.
∗ Reset.
∗ SW Upgrade.
∗ Forward Power.
∗ Linear precorrection(a) .
∗ Efficiency.
∗ Power supply.
∗ Cooling.
· Exciter.
· Rack 1 (e) .
· Rack 2 (e) .
· Rack 3 (e) .
· Rack 4 (e) .
∗ Service report.
• Setup.
– Input(a) .
∗ IP socket 1.
∗ IP socket 2.
∗ ASI 1.
∗ ASI 2.
∗ DVB-T/T2 Receiver 1(d) .
∗ Input switching.
– Exciter.
∗ Modulator(a) .
· General.
· System(a4) .
page 166 Ed 02
Menu structure
·Network(a4) .
·T2 frame(a1) .
·PLP(a1) .
·Modulation(a2) .
·Program Specific Information(a3) .
·Precorrector.
∗ RF output.
· Mutes.
– Reference.
∗ Synchronization module(b) .
– Amplifier.
– Redundancy(c) .
• Status.
• EventLog.
(a)
(a1)
Only available with Transmitter in DVB-T2 standard.
(a2)
Only available with Transmitter in DVB-T or ISDB-T standard.
(a3)
Only available with Transmitter in ISDB-T standard.
(b)
(c)
Only available with redundancy software option.
(d)
Only available with DVB-T/T2 receiver hardware option.
(e)
Only available if the corresponding rack coolong control module is installed.
page 167 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.1 System Menu

Language
Name
Location

Operation mode
In case of device in local mode, after this configurable time (2 minutes, 30 minutes or
12 hours) without any operation, the device changes into remote mode automatically in
order to avoid an accidentally blocking of remote access. It is possible to select the option
disabled to avoid the automatically return.
Date / time
Current
Current data and time of the system, current source (Manual, GNSS, NTP or TDT) and
current status (Sync or Not Sync).
Main source
To set the main date and time source. Possible values are Manual, GNSS, NTP or TDT.
Secondary source
values are - (disabled), GNSS, NTP or TDT.
page 168 Ed 02
Menu structure
Manual
Time zone
UTC offset
NTP Server
To set the IP address of NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. Only with NTP.
Alternative NTP Server

To set, optionally, the IP address of a sencodary NTP (Network Time Protocol) server.
Only with NTP.
Update period
NTP Status
Local NTP Server
page 169 Ed 02
Menu structure

Remote interface
DHCP
DHCP client. If this parameter is enabled the configuration of the Ethernet remote inter-
Remote IP address
IP address of Ethernet interface for remote operation. Factory default 192.168.0.100.
Netmask
Network mask of Ethernet interface for remote operation.
Gateway
Gateway address of Ethernet interface for remote operation. For access from an external
DNS Server
MAC address
MAC address of Ethernet interface.
Local interface
Local IP address
IP address of Ethernet interface for local operation. Factory default 192.168.1.1.
NOTE:
GbE1..GbE4
Indicates the functionality for each Ethernet port (GbE1: Local, GbE2: Remote, GbE3:
IP socket 1, GbE4: IP socket 2). See section 2.2.2.3 for more detailed information.
Links status
GbE1..GbE4
Status of the link for each Ethernet connection. Possible values are: Disabled, DOWN
page 170 Ed 02
Menu structure

Web autorefresh
Autorefresh
Timeout
User control
This menu allows you to change the passwords for the available Web user accounts.
User accounts:
User
Actual password
New password

This menu allows you to set the passwords to its default values for the available Web user
accounts.
admin
public
5.5.1.4 System > SNMP > Agent

page 171 Ed 02
Menu structure
MIBs IRT files
MIB
MIB version
Send a trap test
Agent configuration
Read community 1
Read community 2
Write community 1
Write community 2
Authentication trap

page 172 Ed 02
Menu structure
Keepalive trap
Traps in local mode
Send initial traps
For enabling or disabling the sending of all traps at the system init. By default: Disabled.

Sink status
Traps versions
Destination IP
Destination port
Inform timeout
Informs retries
Trap community
5.5.1.5 System > SNMP > IRT

This menu allows you to check the status of the OID values of the IRT MIB managed
by then agent. Beside, for each OID, this menu allows you to enable the sending of the
corresponding trap and to enable the priority. The modules from the IRT MIB that are
shown in this menu depends on the device configuration (single drive, dual drive or N+1).
This menu contains also a link for downloading a ZIP file with the IRT MIB files needed
for the SNMP manager.
page 173 Ed 02
Menu structure

This menu allows you to set up the settings for the specific alarms available in the device
For each alarm following settings are available:
Setting Description
1+1 To enable or disable the alarm as a switching criterion for 1+1
redundancy.
N+1 To enable or disable the alarm as a switching criterion for N+1
redundancy.

For each event following settings are available:
Setting Description
The list of events available are:
RF output.
5. Forced MFN. The device change into the MFN forced by a reference lost.
page 174 Ed 02
Menu structure
to 30 minutes without any user operation.
12. Redundancy. Any change in the 1+1 redundancy status.
14. Standard auto-configuration. Auto-configuration of modulation standard from

DVB-T to DVB-T2 (or viceversa).

port.
Input #
Current status
closed.
Description
Stand-by status
Mode
details).
Pulse duration
seconds.
Output relay #
Current status
or closed.
page 175 Ed 02
Menu structure
Description
Stand-by status
Mode
Pulse duration
seconds.

Part Number
Serial Number
Software version
Software ID
Identifier of the Software release.
Hardware basis
Hardware options
NOTE:
Hardware options detailed in section 2.2.13 can be installed by the user.
Software options
NOTE:
Software options detailed in section 2.2.13 can be installed by the user.
page 176 Ed 02
Menu structure


• RF reset. To perform a RF output restart in order to restore the device from an

automatic self-protection. See section 7.4.2 for more details.


Needed steps are:

the same.
It is possible to check the result of the forward power calibration process.
5.5.1.13 System > Service > Linear Precorrection

This menu allows you to perform a manual and one-shot calibration of the linear precor-
rection for the two available types of digital linear precorrection: after band-pass filter
to correct the group delay and compensate the frequency response of the output channel
band-pass filter or before band-pass filter to equalize the response of amplitude at the
output of the amplifier.
For calibration before band-pass filter, needed steps are:
1. Press Calibrate button at Before BPF title to perform the calibration. Process takes
less that a minute. The device must be turn on during the process.
2. Once the calibration is finished it is posible to check the result of the precorrection
process at the status parameter. Possible values for status parameter are:
• Not calibrated. If the calibration process was not performed never or in case
of a change of the output frequency.
• Calibrated before BPF. If the calibration process was successfully.
For calibration after band-pass filter, needed steps are:
page 177 Ed 02
Menu structure
1. Connect a sample of the output of the band-pass filter to the feedback input
port (labelled as DAP L) at rear side of the device. The level must be within the
limits in the specifications of this port.
2. Press Calibrate button at After BPF to perform the calibration. Process takes about
3 minutes. The device must be turn on during the process.
3. Once the calibration is finished the message Linear precorrection calibrated suc-
cessfully. Disconnect the signal at the ’DAP L’ input port is shown. Disconnect the
signal at the feedback input port to complete the process.
It is possible to check the result of the precorrection process at the status parameter.
Possible values for status parameter are:
• Not calibrated. If the calibration process was not performed never or in case of a
change of the output frequency.
• Calibrated after BPF. If the calibration process was successfully.
NOTE:
The values of the linear precorrection are deleted once an output frequency
change is performed. So this process must be repeated in case of change
of output frequency.

precorrection.
It is possible to check the result of the precorrection process at the status parameter and
also to remove the optimization by pressing the Remove optimization button.

(average between upper and lower) or MER rms.
It is possible to check the result of the process and also to remove the improvement by
pressing the Remove improvement button.
In case of 3HU UWBD devices it is possible to check the current measure of AC Appar-
ent power (VA) and AC Efficiency (%) of the device.
page 178 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.1.16 System > Service > Power supply

This menu allows you to check up to 4 internal DC voltages of the table 5.4.
DC line Nominal voltage Lower limit Upper limit

DC line 1 1.1V 1.0V 1.2V
DC line 2 5V 4.5V 5.5V
DC line 3 27V 26V 28V
DC line 4 50V(∗) (3U UWBD) 42.5V 51.5V
41.5V (rest of devices) 40V 43V
Table 5.4: Internal DC lines.
(∗)
When the Efficiency Improvement is running, the nominal voltage of this line
can vary into the range from 44V to 50V.
In case of 3HU UWBD devices it is possible to check the status of the AC power supply
units. For each unit, PSU A (or 1 - basic, see figure 2.7) or PSU B (or 2 - redundant, see
figure 2.7), the available measurements are:
• Status. To check the general status of the PSU. Ok in case of a correct perfor-
mance or an error message (one of the table 5.5) in case of a malfunction detected.
• AC input voltage. Measured value of the input AC voltage.
• DC output voltage. Measured value of the output DC voltage of the PSU that is
used for supplying the device.
• Temperature. Internal temperature of the PSU.
Error message
Comm error
Another
CML
Temperature
Vin UV
Iout OC
Vout OV
Off
Busy
Unknown
Other
Fan
Power
Input
Iout/Pout
Vout
Table 5.5: Error messages from AC power supply of 3U UWBD devices.
page 179 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.1.17 System > Service > Cooling > Exciter

This menu allows you to perform service tasks related with fans:
• Fan X status. To check the fan X (X =1, 2 or 3) status: running, stand by or failed.
• Speed. To check the fans speed (% maximum speed).
• Fan X operating time. To check the fan X (X =1, 2 or 3) operating time in hours.
• Fan X reset button . To perform a reinitialization of the operating time counter of
fan X (X =1, 2 or 3) in case of a fan replacement. See section 8.9 for more details.
5.5.1.18 System > Service > Cooling > Rack X

This menu allows you to perform service tasks related with rack cooling control module
X (X = 1..4):
Tag
Allows you to define an user description for the module.
Control status
Indicates the status of the control bus (CAN) between the module and the exciter. Possi-
ble statuses are:

• Communication error. Communication error between the module and the exciter.
Check the CTRL bus connection and addressing.
• Error (SW version). Module microcontroller software version error. Upgrade or

reinstall the software of the device at System > Service > SW upgrade.
• Error (no SW version). Module microcontroller without software version. Upgrade

• Error (No address). Module without control addressing. Set the correct address
(see section ??).
• Error (Collision). Module addressing problem. Set the correct address (see section
??).
HW status
Indicates the general status of the module. Possible statuses are:

• EEPROM. Internal communication error with the EEPROM memmory.
• TEMP. Internal communication error with the temperature sensor.
• PRESION. Internal communication error with the pressure sensor.
• FAN1, FAN2. FAN 1/2 is not detected.
• Comm. Communication error between the module and the exciter. Check the
page 180 Ed 02
Menu structure
Cooling mode
For selecting the cooling mode. Possible values are:
• Pressure. Automatic control of turbines speed for air pressure difference.
• Temperature. Automatic control of turbines speed for temperature.
• Manual. Manual regulation of the turbines speed.
Fan 1
For enabling the control of the turbine 1.
Fan 2
For enabling the control of the turbine 2 (if exist).
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature in o C measured at the module board.
The design of the module chassis, with large slots that allow the free circulation of air into
the module, allows to consider the temperature measured on the module board as the
measurement of ambient temperature inside the rack where it is installed.
Target
In case of temperature cooling mode, this parameter allows you to set the target for the
temperature of the rack that turbines must keep.
Manual mode
Fan 1 speed
Fan 2 speed
Fan 1
Speed
the turbine 1.
Tachometer
the turbine 1.
page 181 Ed 02
Menu structure
Operating time
Fan rest
turbine 1.
Fan 2
Speed
the turbine 2.
Tachometer
the turbine 2.
Operating time
Fan rest
turbine 2.
Identify
Board index
This parameter allows you to check the control address of the module.
Identify
This button allows you to identify visually the current module. When Identify button is
pressed, the LED indicators are blinking during a few seconds in order to get a visual
indentification of the module.

This menu allows you to manage the configuration files (with .trc extension).
configuration (partially or completely) to the same device or to another device.

page 182 Ed 02
Menu structure
• Redundant power supply. Allows you to install or uninstall the Redundant power
supply option for 3HU devices. Follow the instructions detailed at section 8.2.5 or
• Type of redundancy. Allows you to select the type of redundancy from the avail-
ables: SD (Single Drive), 1+1 [Device A], 1+1 [Device B], N+1 [B], N+1 [An]
(n=1,2,...,N). Follow the instructions detailed at section 4.1.
• Rack cooling. Allows you to install the rack cooling control modules (detailed at
section 2.3) up to 4. The parameter Detected boards allows you to detect if a
new module has been connected into the control bus. Once detected, it is possible
to assign one of the free control addresses (at parameter Assign address) or re-
move the address previously assigned (at parameter Delete address). To install (or
desinstall) one of the detected modules check (or uncheck) the corresponding box
at Installl rack cooling x (x=1..4). To complete the installation (or desinstallation)
of a cooling rack module follow the instructions of the section ?? (or ??).

the device.
contact.

page 183 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.2 Setup Menu

This menu allows you to configure the IP socket 1 for inputs with transport streams over
IP.
Enable
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the socket.
Transmission mode
This parameter allows you to select the transmission mode: Unicast or multicast.
Unicast IP
This parameter allows you to set the Unicast IP address for the socket.
Multicast IP
This parameter allows you to set the Multicast IP address for the socket.
Source IP (multicast)
This parameter allows you to set the IP address as source for multicast services.
IGMP version 3 adds support for source filtering; that is, the ability for a system to report
interest in receiving packets only from specific source addresses sent to a particular mul-
ticast address. This facility eases the allocation of IPv4 multicast addresses.
Use value 0.0.0.0 to avoid source filtering, it means to accept packets from all addresses.
Enable VLAN
Allows enabling or disable the VLAN.
VLAN Identifier
Allows setting the VLAN identifier from 1 to 4094.
Port
This parameter allows you to set the port for the socket.
NOTE:
RFC 3550 indicates that RTP should use an even UDP port number, with the
corresponding RTCP stream using the next higher (odd) port number.
page 184 Ed 02
Menu structure
Protocol
This parameter allows selecting the protocol for the encapsulation of the incoming trans-
port stream. The possible values are: RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) or UDP (User
Datagram Protocol).
Buffer duration
This parameter allows setting the buffer duration in ms in order to absorb the network
jitter and the FEC process. Check section 2.2.3.3 for a more detailed information about
the configuration of this parameter.
FEC (RTP)
Indicates the rows and columns in case of RTP with FEC (Forward Error Correction).
Input bitrate
Indicates the data rate (in Mbps) for the IP Socket input stream.
Latency
Indicates the latency (in ms) for the IP Socket.
This is the latency that will be incurred by the FEC process and jitter buffer (both are
determined by the buffer duration parameter). This parameter does not include additional
latencies caused by the seamless process and the modulator processing.

This menu allows you to configure the IP socket 2 for inputs with transport streams over IP.
The available parameters of this menu are the same as for the IP socket 1.


5.5.2.5 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T)

Enable
Standard
T2.
page 185 Ed 02
Menu structure
Bandwidth
availables.
Input frequency
Channel Mode
Channel
Channel offset
sible values are: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Channel resolution

Central frequency
Status
Status
Modulation
Indicates the DVB-T modulation parameters detected in the incoming signal.
page 186 Ed 02
Menu structure
Constellation
Indicates the COFDM modulation constellation detected in the incoming signal.
FEC
Indicates the COFDM modulation encoding rate detected in the incoming signal.
Guard Interval
Indicates the COFDM modulation guard interval detected in the incoming signal.
FFT
Indicates the COFDM modulation FFT detected in the incoming signal.
Measures
Indicates the current measures of the incoming signal. The number and the type of the
measurements depends on the standard.
CBER
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) before Viterbi of the incoming
DVB-T signal.
VBER
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) after Viterbi of the incoming
DVB-T signal.
5.5.2.6 Setup > Input > DTT receiver 1 (DVB-T2)

Enable
Standard
T2.
Bandwidth
availables.
page 187 Ed 02
Menu structure
Input frequency
PLP ID
This parameter allows you to set the identifier of the PLP into the incoming signal to be
demodulated.
Channel Mode
Channel
Channel offset
sible values are: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Channel resolution

Central frequency
Status
Status
System
Indicates general parameters of DVB-T2 modulation detected in the incoming signal.
T2 profile
Indicates the T2 profile detected in the incoming signal.
T2 version
Indicates the T2 version detected in the incoming signal.
page 188 Ed 02
Menu structure
Cell ID
Indicates the Cell ID detected in the incoming signal.
Network ID
Indicates the Network ID detected in the incoming signal.
System ID
Indicates the System ID detected in the incoming signal.
T2 frame
Indicates T2 frame parameters of DVB-T2 modulation detected in the incoming signal.
Indicates the L1-post signalling constellation detected in the incoming signal.
L1-post scrambling
Indicates the L1-postscrambling detected in the incoming signal.
Preamble format
Indicates the preamble format detected in the incoming signal.
Indicates the extended carrier mode detected in the incoming signal.
FFT size
Indicates the FFT size detected in the incoming signal.
Guard interval
Indicates the guard interval detected in the incoming signal.
PAPR reduction
Indicates the PAPR reduction method detected in the incoming signal.
Pilot pattern
Indicates the pilot pattern detected in the incoming signal.
Indicates the number of T2 frames per superframe detected in the incoming signal.
Indicates the number of OFDM symbols per T2 frame detected in the incoming signal.
page 189 Ed 02
Menu structure
PLP
Indicates parameters of the PLP selected for the DVB-T2 modulation detected in the
incoming signal.
Total number of PLPs
Indicates the number of PLPs detected in the incoming signal.
Selected PLP ID
Indicates the identifier of the selected PLP from the PLPs detected in the incoming signal.
PLP type
Indicates the PLP type of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
PLP mode
Indicates the PLP mode of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
PLP group ID
Indicates the PLP group ID of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
PLP constellation
Indicates the PLP constellation of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Rotated constellation
Indicates the rotated constellation status of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
FEC type
Indicates the FEC type of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Code rate
Indicates the code rate of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Indicates the number of FEC blocks of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Indicates the type of time-interleaving of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
Indicates the length of time-interleaving of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
In-band signalling
Indicates the in-band signalling of the selected PLP in the incoming signal.
page 190 Ed 02
Menu structure
Measures
Indicates the current measures of PLP selected for the DVB-T2 modulation detected the
incoming signal.
BER before LDPC
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) before LDPC of the incoming
signal.
BER before BCH
Indicates the current measure of the BER (bit error ratio) before BCH of the incoming
signal.
BBFRAME error ratio
Indicates the current measure of the BBFRAME error ratio of the incoming signal.
5.5.2.7 Setup > Input > Input switching

ASI equalizers bypass
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the bypass function for the cable equal-
izers of ASI inputs (ASI 1 and ASI 2). This option is only available with a compatible
hardware.
ASI equalizers are integrated circuits designed to equalize and restore signals (frequency
selective) received over 75Ω coaxial cable. The activation of the ASI equalizers (disabling
the bypass) is only advisable when the coaxial cable is too long. In the rest of cases it is
advisable to disable the ASI equalizers (enabling the bypass).
Source selected
This parameter allows you to check the selected input from the available sources.
Switching mode
This parameter allows you to select the input switching mode. Possible values are:
• -: None input selected.
• Automatic: Source is automatic selected from the available sources.
• Source x (x=1..4): Source x (x=1..4) is manually selected.
Automatic switching hysteresis

Error (Non-seamless)
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time (in seconds) to switch to another
input after a failure detected in the selected input.
Higher priority
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time (in seconds) to switch to a higher
priority input without failure in the selected input.
page 191 Ed 02
Menu structure
Priorities for automatic switching

Source x (x=1..4)
This parameter allows you to set the priority level for the automatic switching. Possibles
values are: Disabled (no switching) and 1 (highest priority) to 4 (lowest priority).
Assignments / Status / Bitrate / Latency

Source x (x=1..4)
For each source x (x=1..4), each line allows you to check:
• Assignments. The input assigned (IP socket 1, IP socket 2, ASI 1 or ASI 2) for the
source x (x=1..4). This assignment cannot be changed by the user.
• Status. The current status of the source x (x=1..4) that are taken into account for
the switching. Possible statuses are Disabled, Ok or Error.
• Bitrate. Data rate (in Mbps) of the source x (x=1..4). This the data rate of the
stream that feeds the modulator.
• Latency. Latency (in ms) for the source x (x=1..4). This is the latency that will be in-
curred by the seamless process including latency due to the process for absorbing
abrupt variations in the input bitrate.
5.5.2.8 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > General

Modulator board temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the signal board, where the modulator is placed.
2.2.6) and for the trigger of Modulator > Temperature alarm.
Modulator standard
Select the modulation standard of the modulator between DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T/Tb
and ATSC 1.0.
The modulation parameters that are explained below are related to the standard selected
here. Some of them make sense on all standards, others will be exclusive.
NOTE:
For each standard, the corresponding software option must be activated to
allow selects it.
Standard auto-configuration
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the automatic configuration of modulation
standard from DVB-T to DVB-T2 (or viceversa) detected into the input stream.
page 192 Ed 02
Menu structure
Test mode
The modulator is able to generate a test signal introducing a PRBS sequence in order to
generate a RF output signal without input signal.
NOTE:
With the test mode disabled, in case of MFN and without input, the modulator
introduces null packets in order to generate a RF output.
PRBS type
This parameter allows selecting the PRBS type:
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 223 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 220 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 217 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.151 / ITU-T 0.150 / 215 -1.
• CCITT / ITU-T V.29.
• CCITT / ITU-T 0.153 / ITU-T 0.150 / 220 -1.
PRBS PID
This parameter allows setting the PRBS PID from 0 to 8191.
PRBS invert
This parameter allows enabling or disabling the PRBS invert.
5.5.2.9 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T)

Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz. This parameter is
readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
page 193 Ed 02
Menu structure
Enable Cell ID
This parameter allow you to enable or disable the cell identifier parameter (Cell ID).
Cell ID
It allows the user to set the cell identifier where the transmitter is located.
5.5.2.10 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T)

Network type
output signal.
Autoconfiguration from MIP
This parameter allows you to enable the autoconfiguration of the modulation parameters
(constellation, FEC, guard interval, FFT and bandwidth) from the MIP detected into the
input transport stream. This parameter is available both in SFN mode and MFN mode.
Local delay
Local delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) set by the user from -2000µs to 2000µs . Only
available in SFN.
MIP
Value extracted from the MIP. Maximum network delay in µs with a resolution of 100
nanoseconds. Only available in SFN.
Time offset
Delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) configured remotely by the network operator through
the MIP. Only available in SFN.
page 194 Ed 02
Menu structure
Transmitter ID
Uniquely identifies the transmitter. With this identifier, the network operator is able to
configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission, or
different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network. User configurable from 0 to
65535.
Timing information
available in SFN.
Input buffer delay
Processing delay
Modulator delay

5.5.2.11 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (DVB-T)

This menu is only available for DVB-T standard.
Autocofiguration from DTT receiver
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the automatic configuration of the modu-
lation parameters (constellation, FEC, guard interval, FFT) using the information from the
transport stream from the built-in DTT receiver (if available).
Constellation
This parameter allows you to select the COFDM modulation constellation: QPSK, 16QAM
or 64QAM. This parameter is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
FEC
This parameter allows you to select the COFDM modulation encoding rate:1/2, 2/3, 3/4,
5/6 or 7/8. This parameter is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
page 195 Ed 02
Menu structure
Guard Interval
or 1/32. This parameter is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
FFT
This parameter allows you to select COFDM modulation FFT: 8K or 2K. This parameter
is readonly when the autoconfiguration from MIP is enabled.
5.5.2.12 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (DVB-T2)

DVB-T2 profile
The DVB-T2 modulator can work with the two T2 profiles: Base or Lite. Readonly in B
Mode.
Input mode
This parameter allows you to select the input mode depending on the DVB-T2 input type:
A Mode for TS input and B Mode for T2MI input. See section 2.2.3.5.
T2MI PID
T2MI information is inserted into the payload of MPEG-2 TS packets (and transmitted
over ASI as explained before). This parameter defines the PID used to identify the T2MI
data. The parameter PID is configurable from 0 to 8191.
Bandwidth
When working with a TS input type, it sets the bandwidth of the OFDM signal. In case of
T2MI input type, it reads the timestamp field sent in the T2MI flow.
The possible values are: 1.7 MHz (T2MI), 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz and 8 MHz. 10MHz can
be read from the T2MI flow but the modulator does not support this bandwidth.
Readonly in B Mode.
T2 version
DVB-T2 standard version according with ETSI EN 305 755 (v1.1.1, v1.2.1 or v1.3.1).
Readonly in B Mode.
Cell ID
T2MI value
Cell identifier read from T2MI flow where the transmitter is located. Only available in B
Mode.
page 196 Ed 02
Menu structure
Overwrite
User value
Allows the user to set the cell identifier from 0 to 65535.
Network ID
T2MI value
Uniquely identifies the DVB network. Value read from T2MI flow. Only available in B
Mode.
Overwrite
User value
Allows the user to set the network Id value from 0 to 65535.
T2 system ID
T2MI value
DVB-T2 System identifier that uniquely identifies a T2 system within the DVB network.
Value read from T2MI flow. Only available in B Mode.
Overwrite
User value
Allows the user to set the value from 0 to 65535.
T2 frequency
T2MI value
With T2MI input type, it indicates the output frequency registered in the T2MI flow. Only
available in B Mode.
Overwrite
Allows to overwrite the value of T2 frequency from T2MI with the RF central output fre-
quency of the device. Only available in B Mode.
5.5.2.13 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (DVB-T2)

page 197 Ed 02
Menu structure
Network type
In T2MI case, in order to enable SFN, a valid time 1PPS and frequency 10MHz refer-
ence signals must be connected to the modulator. The emission information is received
through the T2MI and may use relative or absolute timing. In case of SFN reference
alarm, the modulator automatically switch into MFN mode. This is indicated with MFN*.
In TS case, the modulator cannot operate in SFN without the timing information that it’s
only delivered by T2MI. In MFN mode and without a valid input transport stream detected,
the modulator introduces null packets (and makes a timely PCR restamping) and allows
to generate RF output signal.
SFN reference (relative)
This parameter indicates the status (Ok or Nok) of the reference for relative T2MI Times-
tamp needed for SFN tasks. The status of this parameter is linked with the status of SFN
reference alarm detailed in section 5.5.3.
SFN reference (absolute)
This parameter indicates the status (Ok or Nok) of the reference for absolute T2MI
Timestamp needed for SFN tasks.
For a SFN performance with absolute T2MI Timestamp, the device must be synchronized
with a date and precise time as detailed in section 2.2.2.2 and also SFN reference
(relative) must be OK. Otherwise SFN reference (absolute) is Nok.
T2MI Timestamp
The T2MI Timestamp is a T2MI packet type which is always present in T2MI flow: It in-
dicates the OFDM signal bandwidth and provides a time reference needed for the trans-
mission of the signal in SFN mode. The possible values for this parameter are:
• Null: Null Timestamp (no time reference included).
• Relative: Relative Timestamp (includes a time reference relating to the 1PPS sig-
nal).
• Absolute: Absolute Timestamp (includes an absolute time reference). As absolute

time reference is used the date and time synchronized source of the device (at
System > General menu). It is possible to selected a main source and even a
secondary (redundant) source for time reference. Possible sources are satellite
position system (ie GPS) and a NTP server.
T2 Super Frame duration
The duration in µs of a T2 Super Frame. The resolution is 100 nanoseconds.
Local delay
page 198 Ed 02
Menu structure
Individual Addressing
Time offset
Individual Addressing Delay is configured remotely by the network operator through the
T2MI input. This parameter is displayed in µs with a 100ns resolution. Only available in
SFN.
Transmitter ID
ity to configure optional parameters such as frequency offset, delay, power transmission,
or different cell ID for each of the transmitters of the network.
Each modulator needs an unique ID in order to receive exclusive modulation parameters

from the T2MI source through IA (Individual Addressing) packets which are also sent
through the input signal.
Timing information
Input buffer delay
Processing delay
Modulator delay

5.5.2.14 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > T2 Frame (DVB-T2)

L1-post signaling constellation
Defines the L1 constellation. Increasing the constellation depth reduces the number of
symbols needed to define the L1 signaling but also loses robustness at reception when
decoding that information. The possible values are: BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM and 64QAM.
page 199 Ed 02
Menu structure
L1-post scrambling
Indicates if the L1-post signaling is scrambled (enabled) or not (disabled). This feature is
T2-Lite compatible
Indicates if the current T2 profile is compatible with T2-Lite profile or not. This feature is
Preamble format
Determines the preamble format: SISO or MISO.

MISO processing allows the initial frequency domain coefficients to be processed by a
modified Alamouti encoding, which allows the T2 signal to be split between two groups
of transmitters on the same frequency in such a way that the two groups will not interfere
with each other.
MISO group
When working with a TS input type, this parameter allows user to set the MISO group.
When working with a T2MI input type, it reads the MISO group field sent in the T2MI flow.
In case of no MISO group detected in input flow, user must set the MISO group.
The possible values are: 1 or 2.
Allows you to enable or disable the extended carrier mode.
The extended-carrier option has the benefit of increasing the data capacity.
FFT size
Defines the OFDM output signal carrier number (1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K or 2K). Increasing
the FFT size will give a greater delay tolerance for the same fractional guard interval,
allowing larger Single Frequency Networks (SFNs) to be constructed.
Alternatively, larger FFTs allow the same delay tolerance to be achieved with a smaller
overhead due to the guard interval. On the other hand, the larger FFT sizes have a
greater vulnerability to fast time-varying channels, i.e. have lower Doppler performance.
Guard Interval
Selects the guard interval: 1/4, 19/256, 1/8, 19/128, 1/16, 1/32 1/128. The simplest view
is to treat the guard interval as a hard limit to the channel extent that can be tolerated by
the system.
The greatest capacity is given by selecting the minimum value but there are other con-
straints like the choice of FFT, concerning the degree of Doppler effects to be expected
in the scenario of interest.
page 200 Ed 02
Menu structure
PAPR reduction
Peak Average Power Ratio. Selects among the reduction techniques. The reduction in
crest factor results in a system that can either transmit more bits per second with the
same hardware, or transmit the same bits per second with lower output power.
The meaning of PAPR reduction options depends on the DVB-T2 version.
In version 1.1.1:
• -: No PAPR used.
• ACE: Only ACE-PAPR used.
• TR: Only TR-PAPR used.
• ACE-TR: Both ACE and TR used.
In version 1.2.1 and 1.3.1:
• TR-P2: L1-ACE used and TR only in P2 symbols.
• ACE: Only L1-ACE and ACE used.
• TR: Only L1-ACE and TR used.
• ACE-TR: L1-ACE, ACE and TR used.
Pilot pattern
Defines the pattern of the pilot carriers. Several pilot patterns are available, named PP1 to
PP8, with the intention of providing efficient options for different channel scenarios. Each
pattern can support time and frequency variations up to corresponding Nyquist limits.
Defines the number of T2 frames per superframe.
Defines the number of OFDM symbols per T2 frame.
5.5.2.15 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > PLP (DVB-T2)

PLP index
Selects the PLP index whose data will be displayed at the rest of the parameters of this
menu.
The possible selected values are from 1 to 8. The symbol - indicates that any PLP is
selected.
page 201 Ed 02
Menu structure
Number of PLPs
The number of the PLPs detected (up to 8) at the T2MI input.
PLP ID
A unique PLP identifier in the DVB-T2 system.
PLP type
PLP type: Common, Data 1 or Data 2. Type of the associated PLP. In TS mode, this
parameter is always set to Data 1.
PLP mode
Indicates whether Normal Mode (NM) or High Efficiency Mode (HEM) is used for the
current PLP.
PLP Group ID
Identifies with which PLP group within the T2 system the current PLP is associated.
PLP Constellation
Indicates the modulation used by the associated PLP: 256QAM, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK
or BPSK.
Rotated Constellation
Indicates whether constellation rotation is in use or not by the associated PLP.
FEC type
Indicates the FEC type used by the associated PLP: 64K or 16K.
Code Rate
Indicates the code rate used by the associated PLP: 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5 or 5/6.
Indicates the number of FEC blocks contained in the current Interleaving Frame for the
current PLP.
When a TS entry type is used, the value of the parameter number of FEC blocks (per in-
terleave frame for a particular PLP) is calculated based on: the OFDM signal bandwidth ,
the FFT size, the guard interval, the pilot carriers pattern and the constellation, according
to [ETSI TS 102 831 V1.1.1, page 55]. The table below shows some configurations of
this parameter as an example:
• BW = 8MHz
• Data symbol = 40
• Type of time-interleaving = 0
• Lenght of time-interleaving = 2
page 202 Ed 02
Menu structure
• PLP mode = Normal

Guard Pilot FFT Const. N. blocks
Interval pattern
1/128 PP7 32K 16QAM 67
64QAM 100
256QAM 134
16K 16QAM 33
64QAM 49
256QAM 66
8K 16QAM 16
64QAM 24
256QAM 32
1/32 PP4 32K 16QAM 65
64QAM 97
256QAM 130
16K 16QAM 32
64QAM 48
256QAM 64
8K 16QAM 15
64QAM 23
256QAM 31
Indicates the type of time-interleaving.
Lenght of time-interleaving
Indicates the number of T2-frames to which every Interleaving Frame is mapped or the
number of TI-blocks per Interleaving Frame depending on the time-interleaving type.
In-band signaling
Indicates whether the current PLP carries in-band signaling A and/or B (A -, A B, - B, - -).
In TS mode this parameter is always set to - - (Non in-band signaling).ling).
5.5.2.16 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > System (ISDB-T)

Bandwidth
Selects the COFDM modulation bandwidth: 5MHz, 6MHz, 7MHz or 8MHz.
Input mode
This parameter allows you to select the input mode: (TS or BTS).
NOTE:
TS input is only available to select when the ISDB-T Remux software option
is activated.
page 203 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.2.17 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (ISDB-T)

Network type
output signal.
Local delay
RF delay
This parameter allows to added another time delay to the local delay in µs (with a 100ns
resolution) set by the user from -2000 µs to 2000 µs. Can be used to add a specific delay
keeping the same value for local delay for different transmitters at the same location. Only
available in SFN.
IIP Network Synchronization Information (Only in SFN)

Maximum network delay in µs with a resolution of 100 nanoseconds. Only available in

SFN.
Time offset
Delay in µs (with a 100ns resolution) configured remotely by the network operator. Only
available in SFN.
Static delay
Static delay measure displayed in µs with a 100ns resolution. Only available in SFN.
Equipment ID
ity to configure optional parameters for each of the transmitters of the network. User
configurable from 0 to 65535.
page 204 Ed 02
Menu structure
This parameter is only available in SFN.
Timing information
available in SFN.
Input buffer delay
Processing delay
Modulator delay

5.5.2.18 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Modulation (ISDB-T)

FFT Mode
This parameter allows you to select COFDM modulation FFT: 2K, 4K or 8K. Readonly in
BTS.
Guard Interval
or 1/32. Readonly in BTS.
Partial reception
This parameter allows enabling or disabling partial reception. Readonly in BTS.
page 205 Ed 02
Menu structure
Filtering type
Allows you to enable the filtering capabilities (see section 2.2.12 for more details). Possi-
ble values are:
• Disabled. No filtering.
• PIDs. Filtering by PID.
• Programs. Filtering by program.
• Advanced. Filtering by PID with possibility of renaming PIDs and programs.
NOTE:
Filtering parameters are only available with the ISDB-T Remux software op-
tion activated.
Layer A, B or C
In case of BTS mode all the parameters at this menu are readonly and set from the re-
ceived flow. For each layer following parameters are shown:
Filter items
It is possible to select from the input transport stream which items will be transmitted into
the layer. Only available when a filtering type is selected. See section 2.2.12 for more
details.
Services names
This parameter allows you to rename a program into the layer. Only available when a
advanced filtering type is selected. See section 2.2.12 for more details.
Constellation
The modulation used by the associated PLP: DQPSK, QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM.
Code Rate
The code rate used by the associated layer: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 or 7/8.
Time interleaving length
The Time interleaving length used by the associated layer: 0, 1, 2, 4, 8 or 16.
Number of segments
The number of segments from 1 to 13 for the selected layer.
page 206 Ed 02
Menu structure
Bitrate (In / Out)
This parameter indicates the measurement of the bitrate in Mbps for the input and for the
output of the selected layer.
5.5.2.19 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Program Specific Information
(ISDB-T)
The equipment displays some critical information contained in the incoming BIT (Broad-
cast Information Table) as well as the incoming NIT (Network Information Table).
User can modify several parameters as Network ID, Transport Stream ID, Affiliation ID,
Virtual channel / Remote Control ID, Area code, Frequency, Transport Stream name and
Network name depending on the operating mode (BTS/TS) in order to complete the min-
imum TS remultiplexing requirements.
These NIT/BIT tables are created from scratch when operating in TS input (as they may
not be present at the input stream).
All of the remaining PSI tables (PAT, PMT, SDT, EIT,...) are also updated with the over-
written information and their CRC are recalculated in order to maintain the overall TS
coherence.
Program Association Table

Available programs
This parameter allows you to check the progrma numbers of the available services de-
tected at the incoming stream.
Broadcast Information Table

Affiliation ID
This parameter allows you to set the affiliation ID. Readonly in BTS.
Network Information Table

Network ID
This parameter allows you to set the Network ID. Readonly in BTS.
Network name
This parameter allows you to set the Network name. Readonly in BTS.
Transport Stream ID
This parameter allows you to check the Transport Stream ID.
Original Network ID
This parameter allows you to check the Original Network ID. Only in BTS.
page 207 Ed 02
Menu structure
Area code
This parameter allows you to set the Area code. Readonly in BTS.
Overwrite Area code
This parameter allows you to overwrite the incoming Area code in BTS mode.
Frequency
This parameter allows you to set the Frequency. Readonly in BTS.
Overwrite Frequency
This parameter allows you to overwrite the incoming Frequency in BTS mode.
Remote Control Key ID
This parameter allows you to set the Remote Control Key ID. Readonly in BTS.
Bypass Remote Control Key ID
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the bypass of the remote incoming Control
Key ID in BTS mode.
Overwrite Control Key ID
This parameter allows you to overwrite the incoming Control Key ID in BTS mode.
TS Name
This parameter allows you to set the TS Name. Readonly in BTS.
Time Offset Table

Country code
This parameter allows you to set Country code. Only in TS.
Region ID
This parameter allows you to set Region ID. Only in TS.
5.5.2.20 Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector

Linear precorrection
Enable
Allows you to apply or not apply the saved values for the linear precorrection at this
output frequency. This menu is only available after a calibration process was successful
(see 5.5.1.13).
page 208 Ed 02
Menu structure
Non linear precorrection

Enable
Precorrector levels
Input
Status
Feedback
Output
Spectrum measures
Shoulder alarm
der alarm.
Lower shoulder
Upper shoulder
icon.
MER alarm
Allows you to set a threshold of the Modulation Error Ratio (MER) rms measurement in
dB that triggers the MER alarm.
MER
Value (in dB) of the Modulation Error Ratio (MER) rms of the signal of the precorrector
feedback signal.
page 209 Ed 02
Menu structure
BER
Value of the Bit Error Ratio (BER) estimated from the signal of the precorrector feedback
signal.

Output frequency
Channel Mode
Channel
The output frequency is set as a function of the channel and the bandwidth.
Channel offset
Channel resolution

Central frequency

at section 2.2.3.9 for more details.
page 210 Ed 02
Menu structure
Status
are:
2.2.5).
Mute causes
at section 2.2.3.9 ):
• TS error: TS error mute.

• Input overflow: Input Overflow mute.
• MIP error: MIP error mute.
• T2MI error: T2MI error mute.
• SFN Reference: SFN Reference mute.
• SFN margin: SFN margin mute.
• BTS error: BTS error mute.
• Redundancy (Antenna): Device towards antenna muted due to the redundancy
premises.
• Redundancy (Load): Device towards load muted due to the redundancy premises.
• Redundancy (Switching): Device muted due to the redundancy premises (during
switching process).
• Redundancy (Initialization): Device muted due to the redundancy premises (dur-

ing initialization process).
• HW error PD: General hardware error self-protection. See section 2.2.5.3.

• Interlock: In case of external INTERLOCK loop is opened. Check the INTERLOCK
connections detailed in 3.2.5 section.

Following mutes are only available with the Transmitter hardware basis:
page 211 Ed 02
Menu structure
TS error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of errors at the selected
input transport stream.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the TS alarm.
For this mute is possible to set a configurable hysteresis time (TS error mute hysteresis).
The mute will be applied after this time.
T2MI error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of T2MI errors at the
selected input.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the T2MI alarm.
This mute is only available in DVB-T2.
BTS error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of BTS errors at the
selected input.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the BTS alarm.
This mute is only available in ISDB-T.
Input Overflow mute
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the alarm Input overflow:
• Mute enabled: The modulator will switch off the transmission if the transmission
buffer is filled due to a high rate of entry thus activating the alarm Input overflow.
• Mute disabled: Whenever the maximum storage capacity of the buffer is exceeded
(alarm Input overflow triggered) the modulator clears the buffer to start again.
MIP error mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the transmitter in case of MIP is not de-
tected on the transport stream on the active input.
page 212 Ed 02
Menu structure
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the alarm MIP error.
If this mute option is disabled, the modulator will change to MFN network mode (displayed
as MFN* in Network type at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network ) and the
transmission signal will keep on without interruption.
SFN reference mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of a synchronized
reference is not available for SFN operation.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the SFN reference alarm.
When this mute is enabled, the output is switched off immediately when SFN reference
alarm is triggered.
SFN margin mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output when the device detects that the SFN oper-
ation is not possible.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the SFN margin alarm.
When this mute is enabled, the output is switched off immediately when SFN margin
alarm is triggered.

Reference
ence of the device.
Switching mode

page 213 Ed 02
Menu structure
Selected 10MHz
Selected 1PPS
NOTE:
installed.
Mode
rectly.

placed inside.

inside.
Receiver type
page 214 Ed 02
Menu structure
Serial Number
Status

Satellites antenna
1PPS input
detected.
Holdover time
mode.
Endless holdover
When this parameter is enabled, the holdover mode is keeping forever, so the following
parameter holdover limit has no effect.
Holdover limit
Latitude
page 215 Ed 02
Menu structure
Longitude
Altitude
Synchronization module date
Constellation
5.5.2.25 Setup > Amplifier

Power offset
example to display the power after the band-pass filter.for example to display the power
after the band-pass filter.
Configured power
This parameter allows to regulate the output power of the device. The output power
band pass filter at the RF output connector at the rear side as detailed in table 5.6 and
table 5.7.
Device Minimum Maximum

1HU (10W) 1W 15W
1HU (40W) 4W 45W
1HU (75W) 7.5W 80W
2HU 15W 165W
3HU 30W 325W
3HU UWBD 35W 450W
Table 5.6: Output power for DVB-T/T2 and ISDBT-T/Tb (at RF output connector) reg-
ulation limits.
page 216 Ed 02
Menu structure

1HU (15W) 1.5W 17W
1HU (50W) 5W 55W
1HU (100W) 10W 110W
2HU 20W 215W
3HU 35W 375W
3HU UWBD 50W 550W
Table 5.7: Output power for ATSC 1.0 (at RF output connector) regulation limits.
If the output power is configured outside these margins, the quality parameters of the
transmitter output signal (distance to shoulder, MER ,...) may not correspond to its tech-
nical specifications.
NOTE:
In case of a small deviation between the displayed power and the output
power measured in the power meter, a power calibration can be done in the
System > Service > Forward Power menu (see section 5.5.1.12). It must be
taken into account maximum output power levels that the device is able to
reach maintaining specifications.
Forward power
Indicates the current forward power (in watts) that is transmitting the power amplifier. For
the amplifier output with a resolution of 100mW and also the offset configured previously.
The range is the same as previously configured power parameter.
This measure is taken into account (together with the corresponding power thresholds)
for the trigger of exceeded output power alarm and decreased output power alarm.
This measurement (together with the exceeded power threshold) is also taken into
account for exceeded power self-protection (as detailed in section 2.2.5.2).
Reverse power
plifier output with a resolution of 100mW.
This measurement (together with the forward power measurement) is taken into account
for excessive reflected power self-protection (as detailed in section 2.2.5.1) and for the
trigger of Reflected power alarm.
page 217 Ed 02
Menu structure
gers the Exceeded power alarm.
This measurement (together with the forward power measurement) is also taken into
gers the Decreased power alarm.
the Reflected power alarm.
Temperature (in o C) measured at the amplifier output stage.
Indicates the consumption currents of the LDMOS transistors (up to 4) at output stage of
power amplifier stage in amperes with a resolution of 10mA.
These measurements (together with the ranges of table 2.1) are taken into account for
LDMOS currents self-protection (as detailed in section 2.2.5.4) and for the trigger of LD-
MOS transistors alarm.
5.5.2.26 Setup > Redundancy > Configuration (1+1)

Device identifier
bus (sub-D, 9-pins). One of the devices must be identified as A and the other as B in
order make possible the communication and the 1+1 control. Otherwise, 1+1 redundancy
is not possible.
Control status
the control bus (CTRL bus interface) in both devices is correctly connected.
page 218 Ed 02
Menu structure
This system IP is only reachable in device identified as Device A to avoid IP conflicts (by
default, switching to Device B in case of a supply failure in device A).
about both devices. It is also possible to enter to the web GUI of both devices using this
unique IP.
1+1 Redundancy
Switch to antenna
towards antenna: Device A or Device B.
Redundancy mode
Priority
This parameter allows you to set the priority level of the devices involved in the 1+1 re-
dundancy:
Auto-return
Input validation
page 219 Ed 02
Menu structure
Power validation
This parameter allows you to set the timing in seconds for the validation of power alarms.
Device A / B
Status
• Disabled. The 1+1 redundancy performance is disabled.

triggered.
cause triggered.
needed.
was not successful.
reached.
page 220 Ed 02
Menu structure
Switching causes
For the corresponding device A / B, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered
RF status
When antenna
When load
Enable
Duration
the load.

cess.

Enable
page 221 Ed 02
Menu structure
Period
Cadence

Enable
Time

Enable
Period (days)
Time
Reset
formed switchings (today) and Performed verifications.
page 222 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.2.27 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (1+1)

This menu allows checking the current synchronization status of the configuration param-
eters at the redundant devices (A/B) and, in case of the configuration is not synchronized
, sending the configuration from this device to the other device. See section 2.2.10 for
more details.
• WEB interface.
• SNMP.
• Modulator.
• RF output.
• Amplifier.
• Reference.
device.
5.5.2.28 Setup > Redundancy > Configuration (N+1 [B])

Device identifier
bus (sub-D, 9-pins). One of the devices must be identified as B, A1, A2,..., An in order
make possible the communication and the N+1 control. Otherwise, N+1 redundancy is
not possible.
Control status
the control bus (CTRL bus interface) in all devices is correctly connected.
page 223 Ed 02
Menu structure
This system IP is only reachable in device identified as Device B to avoid IP conflicts (by
default, switching to Device A1 in case of a supply failure in device B).
about all devices. It is also possible to enter to the web GUI of all devices using this
unique IP.
N value
This parameter allows to configure the number of main transmitters of the N+1 system.
N+1 Redundancy
Manual switching
Redundancy mode
Auto-return
This parameter allows you to enable the auto-return when the failure device is recov-
ered. This automatic restoration will only be performed after the verification that the fault
that caused the switching is not present and only when a second transmitter (with the
automatic switchings activated) presents a fault so it needs to make use of the reserve
transmitter.
Maximum restorations / window
This parameter allows you to set the maximum number of switchings allowed into the
predefined temporal window.
Window (days)
Indicates the duration in days of the temporal window to the counter of switchings.
page 224 Ed 02
Menu structure
Input error test
This parameter allows you to set the timing in seconds for the validation of input alarms
as switching criterion. Set 0 second for disabling the input validation.
This parameter allows you to set the hysteresis time in seconds before switching once a
criterion for switchover is validated. Set 0 second for disabling this timing.
Device B
Applied configuration
This parameter allows to check wich configuration is applying the device B. Possible
configuration sets (From Device A1 to Device An) must be previously stored at device B
memory.
Status
Indicates the current status of the device B for the N+1 redundancy:
• Disabled. The N+1 redundancy performance is disabled.
• COMM error. Communication error through the control bus (CTRL bus interface).
• SW version error. Device B has different SW version.
triggered.
cause triggered.
needed.
was not successful.
page 225 Ed 02
Menu structure
reached.
Switching causes
For the device B, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered (from System >
Device An
Status
Indicates the current status of the device An for the N+1 redundancy. The possible values
Switching causes
For the device A, indicates a list with the switching causes triggered (from System >
Performed restorations (window)
Indicates the number of switchings performed into the predefined temporal window.
RF status and priority

Device to load
Priority management
This parameter allows to enable or disable the priority management for the automatic
switching.
Antenna n
Priority
This parameter allows to set the priority level for the automatic switching. Possibles
values are: Disabled (no switching) and 1 (highest priority) to n (lowest priority).
RF status
antenna n: transmitting power (RF ON) or not (RF OFF).
page 226 Ed 02
Menu structure
Enable
Duration
the load.

cess.

Enable
Period
Cadence
page 227 Ed 02
Menu structure

Enable
Time
Automatic verifications: Alarm

Enable
This parameter allows to enable or disable the automatic verification in case of a fault in
other transmitter with enabled switchings and independently of the priority.
Reset
formed switchings and verifications.
5.5.2.29 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [B])

This menu allows checking the current synchronization status (Synchronized or Not syn-
chronized) of the configuration of the main transmitters stored at the reserve transmitter
memory and, in case of a configuration is not synchronized, saving the configuration from
the main transmitter to the reserve transmitter memory by pressing Synchronize button.
See section 2.2.11 for more details.
5.5.2.30 Setup > Redundancy > Status (N+1 [A])

Control status
munication is only correct when the device is correctly identified and cabling between the
control bus (CTRL bus interface) in all devices is correctly connected.
Status
Indicates the current status of the device for the N+1 redundancy. The possible values
page 228 Ed 02
Menu structure
Switching causes
Indicates a list with the switching causes triggered (from System > Events configuration
> Alarms menu ) that causing a not ready status.
Manual switching
5.5.2.31 Setup > Redundancy > Synchronization (N+1 [A])

This menu allows configuring the device with the configuration parameters stored at the
device B.
• WEB interface.
• SNMP.

• Modulator.
• RF output.
• Reference.
page 229 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.3 Status

Amplifier 3
[Non critical]
(a)
ASI input 8
ASI 1 error 9 (a)
Section 5.5.3.8.
ASI 2 error 10 (a)
Section 5.5.3.9.
(a)
IP input 11
Section 5.5.3.10.
Section 5.5.3.11.
(d)
DTT receiver 1 24
Unlock 25 (d)
Section 5.5.3.12.
RF signal quality 26 (d)
Section 5.5.3.13.
Temperature 27 (d)
Section 5.5.3.14.
(a)
Modulator 32
TS error 33 (a)
Section 5.5.3.15.
MIP error 34 (a)
Section 5.5.3.16.
Input overflow 35 (a)
Section 5.5.3.17.
T2MI error 36 (a)
Section 5.5.3.18.
BTS error 81 (a)
Section 5.5.3.19.
SFN reference 37 (a)
Section 5.5.3.20.
SFN margin 38 (a)
Section 5.5.3.21.
Temperature 39 (a)
Section 5.5.3.22.
Output level 40 (a)
Section 5.5.3.23.
Shoulders 83 (a)
Section 5.5.3.24.
MER 110 (a)
Section 5.5.3.25.
BER 84s (a)
Section 5.5.3.26.
page 230 Ed 02
Menu structure
Alarm ID Diagnosis
Satellites antenna 46 (b)
Section 5.5.3.28.
UnLock 47 (b)
Section 5.5.3.29.
Holdover not available 48 (b)
Section 5.5.3.30.
1PPS input 44 (b)
Section 5.5.3.34.
(e)
Rack cooling
Temperature (e)
Section ??.
Pressure difference (e)
Section 5.5.3.35.
HW error (e)
Section 5.5.3.36.
HW error 57
LDMOS transistors 58 Section 5.5.3.38.
Non-linear sense feedback 82 (a)
Section 5.5.3.42.
Fan 62
Fan 1 63 Section 5.5.3.43.
Fan 2 64 Section 5.5.3.44.
Fan 3 65 Section 5.5.3.45.
(c)
AC power supply 53
PSU A 54 (c)
Section 5.5.3.46.
PSU B 55 (c)
Section 5.5.3.47.
External alarm 66
(f )
Redundancy
Communication error (f )
Section 5.5.3.50.
RF switch error (f )
Section 5.5.3.51.
Reserve not ready (f )
Section 5.5.3.52.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Only available for 3HU devices.
(d)
Only available with receiver 1 hardware (Re-transmitter).
(e)
Only available with rack cooling control module.
(f )
Only available with redundancy option enabled.
page 231 Ed 02
Menu structure


tion).

It is triggered when the measure of forward power (detected at the output stage of the
amplifier) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Exceeded power threshold at Setup
> Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.25.

amplifier) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Decreased power threshold
at Setup > Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.25.

threshold [Non critical] at Setup > Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.25.

It is triggered when the measure of reverse power (detected at the output stage of the
amplifier) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Reverse power threshold at Setup >
Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.25.
5.5.3.7 Amplifier :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of amplifier stage temperature (Setup > Amplifier
menu) exceeds 75o C (in 1HU/2HU devices) or 80o C (in 3HU devices). These thresholds
are not user-configurable. See section 5.5.2.25.

page 232 Ed 02
Menu structure




5.5.3.12 DTT receiver 1 :: Unlock

It is triggered when the DTT receiver is not able to lock with the incoming RF signal. See
section 5.5.2.5.
5.5.3.13 DTT receiver 1 :: RF signal quality

It is triggered when the quality measures of the receiver from the incoming signal are un-
der the defined thresholds (not user-configurable) to ensure the adequate performance
of the receiver. See section 5.5.2.5:
Measurement Threshold
BER before Viterbi (DVB-T) 4.0e−4
BER before BCH (DVB-T2) 4.0e−4
5.5.3.14 DTT receiver 1 :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of DTT receiver 1 temperature (Setup > Input > DTT
receiver 1 menu) exceeds 80o C. This threshold is not user-configurable.
5.5.3.15 Modulator :: TS error

It is triggered when a problem is detected on the transport stream on the active input
(indicated in Source selected parameter at menu Setup > Input > Input switching, see
section 5.5.2.7). This alarm may be caused by the following events:
• Synchronization errors on the transport stream.
page 233 Ed 02
Menu structure
• Restamping errors caused by a transport stream input bitrate higher than expected.
TS error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.16 Modulator :: MIP error

It is triggered when MIP (Mega-frame Initialization Packet) is not detected correctly on
the transport stream on the active input (indicated in Source selected parameter at
menu Setup > Input > Input switching, see section 5.5.2.7).
The parameter Autoconfiguration from MIP at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Net-
work must be enabled. This alarm is available in SFN and in MFN.
MIP error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.17 Modulator :: Input Overflow

Indicates an overflow in the buffer of the modulator caused by a high data rate on the
transport stream on the active input in relation with the modulation parameters config-
uration.
Input Overflow mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.18 Modulator :: T2MI error

It is triggered when a problem is detected on the The DVB-T2 Modulator Interface
(T2MI) from the active input (indicated in Source selected parameter at menu Setup
> Input > Input switching, see section 5.5.2.7).
This alarm only appears when choosing Mode B as Input mode at menu Setup > Exciter
> Modulator > at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network and may be triggered by
the following events:
• Synchronization and/or continuity errors on the TS stream that encapsulates the

T2MI.
• T2MI timeout error if a T2MI packet with the expected T2MI PID is not received for
5 seconds.
• Synchronization and/or continuity errors and/or CRC errors on the T2MI stream.
• T2MI timestamp has not been received yet.
• The number of received PLPs exceed the maximum allowed.
T2MI error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.19 Modulator :: BTS error

It is triggered when a problem is detected on the BTS (broadcast transport streams)
BTS error mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
page 234 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.3.20 Modulator :: SFN reference

It is triggered when the time and/or frequency reference to the modulator is not valid for
SFN.
At the start-up of the modulator, if the 10MHz or 1PPS signals are not present, this
alarm is triggered and SFN operation is not possible.
signal keeps from a synchronized source and this alarm will not be triggered.
See section 2.2.3.4 for more details about the possible sources for the time and frequency
reference. Active source and switching options can be configured at menu Setup > Ref-
erence > Reference source, see section 5.5.2.23).
Besides the above, in case of working in DVB-T2 with absolute T2MI Timestamp, the
device must be synchronized with a date and precise time as detailed in section 2.2.2.2.
Parameter SFN reference (absolute) at menu Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Network (see
section 5.5.2.13) must be Ok.
SFN reference mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.21 Modulator :: SFN margin

It is triggered when the modulator, working on SFN network mode, detects that the trans-
mission is not carried out into the temporal window of the corresponding PPS
edge.
At certain cases, due to the inner limitations of the relative reference, the modulator could
not be able to detect this situations. In case of working in DVB-T2 with absolute T2MI
Timestamp the modulator is able to detect this situation always.
SFN margin mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.22 section.
5.5.3.22 Modulator :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of Modulator board temperature (Setup > Exciter >
Modulator > General menu) exceeds 70o C. This threshold is not user-configurable.
5.5.3.23 Modulator :: Output level

It is triggered when the modulator does not provide signal at intermediate frequency.
5.5.3.24 Modulator :: Shoulders

ple (Lower shoulder or Upper shoulder at Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector
menu) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Shoulder alarm at Setup > Ex-
citer > Modulator > Precorrector menu).
page 235 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.3.25 Modulator :: MER

It is triggered when the measure of the MERrms of the transmitter output sample (MER at
Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector menu) decreases under a user-configurable
threshold (MER alarm at Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector menu).
5.5.3.26 Modulator :: BER

It is triggered when the measure of the BER of the transmitter output sample (BER at
Setup > Exciter > Modulator > Precorrector menu) decreases under 1.0E-4.
5.5.3.27 RF output
is not enough to excite the amplifier stage.




page 236 Ed 02
Menu structure

module.

configurable.


5.5.3.35 Rack cooling :: Pressure difference

It is triggered when the rack cooling control module is not able to compensate the differ-
ence of the air pressure between inside and outside the rack.
5.5.3.36 Rack cooling :: HW error

It is triggered when an internal hardware failure in the rack cooling control module is
detected.

5.5.3.38 HW error :: LDMOS transistors

It is triggered when the measure of the current consumption of any of the LDMOS tran-
sistors at the output stage of the amplifier is out of the limits of the table 2.1.
Together with this alarm, a self-protection due to LDMOS currents out-of-range is trig-
page 237 Ed 02
Menu structure



It is triggered when any of the voltages of the internal DC lines measured in the device
(menu System > Service > power supply, see section 5.5.1.16) and that are generated
from the DC output voltage from AC power supply is out of its usual range detailed in
the table 5.4.
5.5.3.42 HW error :: Non-linear sense feedback

It is triggered when the level of the RF signal detected from the feedback signal is not
enough to a correct performance of the linear precorrector of the transmitter.
5.5.3.43 Fan :: Fan 1

5.5.3.44 Fan :: Fan 2

fan placed in second position from the left looking from rear to front.
5.5.3.45 Fan :: Fan 3

It is triggered when a failure is detected in the fan 3 at the rear side of the device. This
fan is only available in 1U devices and is placed in third position from the left looking
from rear to front.
5.5.3.46 AC power supply :: PSU A

It is triggered when the AC power supply A (1 - basic, see figure 2.7) returns an error
message of the table 5.5.
This alarm is only available in the 3U devices with the AC power supply units with
status indication. 3HU devices can be optionally provided with two redundant
power supply units connected in parallel operation.
page 238 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.3.47 AC power supply :: PSU B

It is triggered when the AC power supply B (2 - redundant, see figure 2.7) returns an
error message of the table 5.5.


5.5.3.50 Redundancy :: Communication error

It is triggered when the a communication problem is detected into the control bus with
some of the devices needed for the N+1 redundancy system.
5.5.3.51 Redundancy :: RF switch error

It is triggered when is not possible to managed any RF switch in a N+1 system.
5.5.3.52 Redundancy :: Reserve not ready

It is triggered when the reserve transmitter (transmitter B) is not ready for a switchover in
a N+1 system.
page 239 Ed 02
Menu structure
5.5.4 EventLog


page 240 Ed 02
6 Maintenance

6.1.1 and 6.1.2 details the step by step procedures for a single drive configuration, but
the section 6.1.3 adds some notes to take into account about the upgrade of devices in a
redundancy (1+1) configuration.
CAUTION:
page 241 Ed 02
Software upgrade

NOTE:
page 242 Ed 02
Software upgrade
page 243 Ed 02
Software upgrade
Error control
for the file size.
retry.
page 244 Ed 02
Software upgrade
error:
page 245 Ed 02
Software upgrade

server.
the new version.

page 246 Ed 02
Software upgrade

download type.
available .
page 247 Ed 02
Software upgrade
page 248 Ed 02
Software upgrade
Error control
page 249 Ed 02
Software upgrade
Check the URL.
manifest.list.
sion. Try again.
error:
page 250 Ed 02
Software upgrade
page 251 Ed 02
Software upgrade
6.1.3 Notes for redundancy configurations

1+1 redundancy
To upgrade a complete 1+1 transmitter, the transmistter A and transmistter B must be
upgraded following the steps of the previous sections.
done when the transmitter to upgrade is towards the load. By this way, the time that
the service is affected (power switch off) is reduced only to the time needed for switching
the transmitter.

Chrome for Desktop

Firefox for Desktop

erything".
Opera for Desktop


the entire cache.
page 252 Ed 02
Microsoft Edge
Safari for macOS

Safari for Windows

Safari for iOS

Chrome for Android


ical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or diluent for cellulose lacquers. To clean
page 253 Ed 02
7 Troubleshooting

flowchart.
INPUT
inputs.
section 5.2).
ALARMS
7.2).
7.2).
page 254 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via alarms
status

Alarm ID Diagnosis
[Non critical]
7.3).
Temperature 7 Overtemperature at amplifier stage.
ASI input 8 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
IP input 11 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
bling.
bling.
DTT receiver 1 24
Unlock 25 Check receiver 1 configuration and input RF ca-
bling.
RF signal quality 26 Check input RF cabling.
Temperature 27 Overtemperature at DTT receiver 1 board.
Modulator 32 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
TS error 33 Check configuration of input switching and input
transport stream coding.
MIP error 34 Check input transport stream coding.
Input overflow 35 Check if modulation settings are in accordance
with input transport stream coding.
T2MI error 36 Check input T2-MI from T2 gateway.
BTS error 81 Check input BTS.
SFN reference 37 Go to "SFN Reference" flowchart (section 7.3).
SFN margin 38 Go to "SFN problems" flowchart (section 7.3).
Temperature 39 Overtemperature at transmitter signal board.
Output level 40 Go to "No output power" flowchart for transmitters
(section 7.3).
Shoulders 83 Reduce output power. Digital precorrector, signal
board or amplifier damaged.
MER 110 Reduce output power. Digital precorrector, signal
board or amplifier damaged.
page 255 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via alarms
status
Alarm ID Diagnosis
7.3).
7.3).
See section 8.4.
ule.
LDMOS transistors 58 The device is damaged.
Non-linear sense feedback 82 The device is damaged.
AC power supply 53 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
PSU A 54 Replace the power supply unit A. See sec-
tion 8.8.3.
PSU B 55 Replace the power supply unit B. See sec-
tion 8.8.3.
page 256 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart

RF service failure

Green? flowchart.
NO

The POWER LED is

Green?
NO

spare one.

Green? damaged.
NO
page 257 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
No output power [TRANSMIT-

TER]. Output power alarm is set.
RF OUTPUT LED: Red.
No Mute causes (section

5.5.2.22).
YES
NO
Modulator: Output level NO

alarm?
YES
YES Check input signal cabling

ASI/IP Input alarm?
and configuration.
NO
MIP / TS / T2MI / BTS YES Check input coding and

error alarm? modulator configuration.
NO
page 258 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart

Reflected power YES

alarm?
NO

Reflected power NO
alarm?
YES

justed.
page 259 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
SFN problems
Check SFN cases detailed at figure 7.1.
NO Set to SFN at menu Setup

Network mode = SFN? > Exciter > Modulator >
Network.
YES
YES Go to "SFN Reference"

SFN reference alarm?
flowchart.
NO
Check Input buffer delay
NO parameter at menu Setup >
SFN margin alarm?
Exciter > Modulator > Net-
work. See section 2.2.3.3.
YES
Check if the time reference is the same in

the transmitter and in the source of trans-
port stream.
page 260 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
page 261 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
SFN Reference

NO

NO

flowchart.
ceiver ?
NO

Sync. module
Check
YES YES 10MHz
and 1PPS
mode = OCXO? alarm?
external
cabling.
NO NO

YES

page 262 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart
SNMP communication
problems

interface correctly
connected?
.
YES

SNMP SW option li-
censed?
SNMP SW option.
YES
Correct Community
(case-sensitive)?
YES

ing SNMP packets?
YES

YES
page 263 Ed 02
Fault Diagnosis via
flowchart

upgrading?
the upgrade.
AFTER

the upgrade.
YES
page 264 Ed 02
Reset
7.4 Reset
7.4.1 System Reset

7.4.2 RF Reset
This procedure performs a RF output restart in order to restore the device from an auto-
matic self-protection. For example for overtemperature or for reflection protection.
page 265 Ed 02
8 Service

coupling device.

For the linear precorrection, a service task is available in order to try an opti-
mization of the amplitude response only for this channel, before or after band-pass
filter as needed (see section 5.5.1.13).
page 266 Ed 02
option

8.2.1 Install the Synchronization board (GNSS)

tion 8.6.1.

section 8.4.2.
8.2.2 Uninstall the Synchronization board (GNSS)

1. Remove the Synchronization board (GNSS) following the instructions detailed at
section 8.4.1.
8.6.2.

tion 8.6.1.

section 8.4.2.
page 267 Ed 02
option

section 8.4.1.
8.6.2.
8.2.5 Install the redundant 3HU AC power supply

1. Insert the new AC power supply in the second (upper) slot following the instruc-
tions detailed at section 8.8.3.2.
4. At Redundant PSU select the Redundant PSU enabled option.
6. Go to System > Device info menu and at Hardware options check that the re-
dundant PSU option is installed.
8.2.6 Uninstall the redundant 3HU AC power supply

1. Remove the new AC power supply in the second (upper) slot following the instruc-
4. At Redundant PSU select the Redundant PSU disabled option.
dundant PSU option is not available.
page 268 Ed 02
Install a SW option

page 269 Ed 02
GNSS receiver
replacement
8.4 GNSS receiver replacement

the optional GNSS receiver module.
The design of the device allows a plug and play installation of the GNSS module. So, it
CAUTION:
8.4.1 Removing GNSS receiver

2. Remove the screws (4x) on the four corners of the GNSS Receiver cover using a
PH2 screwdriver.
3. Remove the GNSS Receiver Module from the slot pulling by the two handles at the
same time.
that the GNSS receiver is not detected.
NOTE: GNSS slot must not be empty. In case that the GNSS is not replaced for a spare
one, External Reference module (or OCXO module) must be inserted instead.
Go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at Synchronization board
select the External reference (or OCXO ) option and click in Apply button. Follow
the steps of procedure 8.6.2 (or 8.5.2) for completing the removal.
8.4.2 Installing GNSS receiver

PH2 screwdriver.
3. Connect the cables of the GNSS Receiver Module that are needed (ANTENNA,
page 270 Ed 02
OCXO module
replacement

CAUTION:

PH2 screwdriver.
time.
removal.

PH2 screwdriver.
page 271 Ed 02
External reference module
replacement

driver.
tion.

PH2 screwdriver.
page 272 Ed 02
module replacement
8.7 Rack cooling control module replacement

a rack cooling control module.
8.7.1 Removing a rack cooling control module
NOTE: Previously to remove the module, delete the current addressing to convert the
module into a spare one for a new configuration. Go to Setup > Service > Install
HW/SW menu and at Cooling rack: Remove address select the option rack
cooling x and press the Apply button or simply pressing for 3 seconds the RESET
button at front panel until LED indicators blinking in red.
1. Disconnect the control bus connector labelled as CTRL bus (Sub-D, 9 pins).
2. Disconnect all the cabling of turbines control and sensor inputs (if exist).
3. Remove the screws that fasten the module to the rack.
4. Remove the module from the rack.
NOTE: In case that the module is not replaced for a spare one, through the desired GUI,
go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu and, at Cooling rack, uncheck the
corresponding box of Install cooling rack x .
8.7.2 Installing a rack cooling control module

1. Insert the module into the rack.
2. Fasten the screws that fasten the module to the rack.
3. Connect all the cabling of turbines control and sensor inputs (if exist).
4. Connect the control bus connector labelled as CTRL bus (Sub-D, 9 pins).
NOTE: When the control bus (connector labelled as CTRL bus Sub-D, 9 pins) is connected,
the module is powered from the bus. Check visually that the new module has
not any control address pre-configured (LED indicators blinking in red). If not,
remove the control address by pressing the RESET button for 3 seconds until LED
indicators blinking in red.
5. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu and, at
Cooling rack, check that the parameter detected boards has a new value. If
not, maybe the module is not correctly connected to the control bus or the control
address was not correctly removed and could be needed repeat the previous step.
6. At the same Setup > Service > Install HW/SW menu, at Cooling rack, select in
the parameter assign address the desired cooling rack x option and check the
corresponding box at Installl cooling rack x. Press Apply button to confirm the
changes.
7. Through the desired GUI, go to Setup > Service > Cooling > Rack x menu (at web
GUI, could be needed refresh the web browser) and check that the value of the
parameter control status is Ok.
page 273 Ed 02
module replacement
8. At the same Setup > Service > Cooling > Rack x menu, select in the parameter
cooling mode the desired option and check the box of Fan 1 (and Fan 2 in case of
two turbine). Press Apply button to confirm the changes and after that check that
the value of the parameter HW status is Ok. Check section 2.3 for more details
about the cooling rack control module.
page 274 Ed 02
AC power supply
replacement
8.8 AC power supply replacement

8.8.1 1HU devices
The scope of this procedure is the replacement of the AC power supply unit for 1HU de-
vices.
CAUTION:
Risk of electric shock!
Before removal and installation of the module, always de-energize the entire power
supply unit (turn off the AC switch and disconnect the power plug).
RF service will be affected.
page 275 Ed 02
AC power supply
replacement
1. Disconnect the AC cabling from the AC connector and the earth cabling at the rear
side of the device.
2. Remove the 6 screws (1) at bottom and lateral side close to the PSU using a PH2
screwdriver.
3. Remove the 7 screws (2)(2a) at top side close to the PSU using a PH2 screw-
driver.
4. Remove the 4 screws (3) of the adjacent module to the PSU at rear side using a
PH2 screwdriver.
5. Pull the adjacent module out.
6. Pull the PSU unit out.
7. Push the new PSU unit inside the slot.

8. Push back the adjacent module.
9. Fasten the 4 screws (3) of the adjacent module to the PSU at rear side using a PH2
screwdriver.
10. Fasten the 7 screws (2)(2a) at top side close to the PSU using a PH2 screwdriver.
11. Fasten the 6 screws (1) at bottom and lateral side close to the PSU using a PH2
screwdriver.
12. Connect the AC cabling from the corresponding AC connector and the earth cabling
at the rear side of the device.
13. Turn on the AC switch and check that POWER LED at the front of the device keeps
green.
page 276 Ed 02
AC power supply
replacement
8.8.2 2HU devices

vices.
CAUTION:
side of the device.
2. Remove the two screws (1) at the side close to the PSU using a PH2 screwdriver.
page 277 Ed 02
AC power supply
replacement
3. Pull the unit out with the handle (2).
4. Push the new unit inside the slot through the rail.
5. Fasten the two screws (1) at the side close to the PSU using a PH2 screwdriver.
green.
page 278 Ed 02
AC power supply
replacement
8.8.3 3HU devices

the AC power supply unit for 3HU devices.
The design of the device allows, due to a built-in Oring MOSFET in each power supply
unit, a hot-swap installation of up to 2 AC power supply units. So, it is possible to perform
this procedure without turning off the AC source providing to the device.
CAUTION:
supply unit (disconnect the power plug).

page 279 Ed 02
AC power supply
replacement
8.8.3.1 Removing AC power supply (3HU)
the device.
2. Remove the screws (4x) on the power supply slot cover at frontal side using a PH2
screwdriver to get access to the power supply unit.
3. Press the clip (1) and pull the unit out with the handle (2).
4. Fasten the slot cover with the screws (4x) on the four corners using a PH2 screw-
driver.
NOTE: In case of removing the redundant power supply placed at the upper slot, if this
slot will be empty, please go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at
Redundant PSU select the Redundant PSU disabled option and click in Apply
button in order to avoid monitoring the alarms from the redundant power supply
slot.
8.8.3.2 Installing AC power supply (3HU)

2. Grasp the handle (2) and push inside the slot through the rail.
the device.
4. Check that LED at the front of the power supply keeps green.
driver.
page 280 Ed 02
Fans replacement

the devices.

ment
1HU 3 Every 27000 operating hours at 60o C
page 281 Ed 02
Fans replacement
6. Through the desired GUI, go to System > Service > Cooling and at the reset of
operating time counter of each fan press the corresponding button.
page 282 Ed 02
Change of fuse
8.10 Change of fuse

8.10.1 1HU/2HU devices
CAUTION:
1HU Devices 2HU Devices

Fuse: 6.3A / 250V 10A / 250V
page 283 Ed 02
Change of fuse
8.10.2 3HU devices
CAUTION:
3HU Devices
Fuse: 20A / 250V
2. Retire the power supply unit (see section 8.8.3.1).
4. Insert the power supply unit (see section 8.8.3.2).
page 284 Ed 02
configuration

menu.
page 285 Ed 02
configuration
user.




Date and time
Events
I/O interface
page 286 Ed 02
configuration
Input (Transmitter) IP sockets
ASIs
Input switching
RF input (Gap Filler) RF configuration
IF processor (Gap Filler) General
System
Echo canceller
Precorrector
Modulator (Transmitter) General
System
Network
Modulation
T2 Frame(DVB-T2)
PLP(DVB-T2)
Precorrector
Amplifier (low power) Amplifier
Amplifier [Configuration] (medium power) Amplifier > Configuration
page 287 Ed 02
UNE-EN ISO 9001
ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
TRedess 2010, S.L.
.
S PA I N
GPS N: 42° 51’ 52.93”, W: 8° 34’ 5.19”

T +34 981 534 203
F +34 981 522 052

www.tredess.com
Air-cooled
low power
Transposers and Gap Fillers
8542xxxx
for digital TV
networks
Technical Manual
.
UNE-EN ISO 9001

ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
as follows:
Hereby, TRedess 2010, S.L. declares that the radio equipment type 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.

Por la presente, TRedess 2010, S.L. declara que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico 85421111
85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 es conforme con la Di-
rectiva 2014/53/UE.

de rádio 85421111 85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 está
em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE.

comme suit:
85421111 85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 est conforme
à la directive 2014/53/UE.

Il fabbricante, TRedess 2010, S.L., dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio 85421111
85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 è conforme alla direttiva
2014/53/UE.
Wortlaut:
Hiermit erklärt TRedess 2010, S.L., dass der Funkanlagentyp 85421111 85421121 85421131
85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.

Tímto TRedess 2010, S.L. prohlašuje, že typ rádiového zarízení 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 je v souladu se smernicí 2014/53/EU.
formes som følger:
Hermed erklærer TRedess 2010, S.L., at radioudstyrstypen 85421111 85421121 85421131
85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 er i overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU.

Käesolevaga deklareerib TRedess 2010, S.L., et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp 85421111
85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL
nõuetele.

TRedess 2010, S.L. ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU.
Ar šo TRedess 2010, S.L. deklare, ka radioiekarta 85421111 85421121 85421131 85421311
85422111 85422311 85423111 atbilst Direktivai 2014/53/ES.

taip:
Aš, TRedess 2010, S.L., patvirtinu, kad radijo irenginiu tipas 85421111 85421121 85421131
85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 atitinka Direktyva 2014/53/ES.

következo:
TRedess 2010, S.L. igazolja, hogy a 85421111 85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111
85422311 85423111 típusú rádióberendezés megfelel a 2014/53/EU irányelvnek.

prevista kif gej:
B’dan, TRedess 2010, S.L., niddikjara li dan it-tip ta’ taghmir tar-radju 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 huwa konformi mad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE.
volgt geformuleerd:
Hierbij verklaar ik, TRedess 2010, S.L., dat het type radioapparatuur 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 conform is met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU.

TRedess 2010, S.L. niniejszym oswiadcza, ze typ urzadzenia radiowego 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 jest zgodny z dyrektywa 2014/53/UE.
Pelny tekst deklaracji zgodnosci UE jest dostepny pod nastepujacym adresem interne-
towym: http://doc.tredess.com.

Prin prezenta, TRedess 2010, S.L. declara ca tipul de echipamente radio 85421111
85421121 85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 este în conformitate cu
Directiva 2014/53/UE.

TRedess 2010, S.L. týmto vyhlasuje, že rádiové zariadenie typu 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 je v súlade so smernicou 2014/53/EÚ.

TRedess 2010, S.L. potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme 85421111 85421121 85421131
85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.
TRedess 2010, S.L. vakuuttaa, että radiolaitetyyppi 85421111 85421121 85421131 85421311
85422111 85422311 85423111 on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.

Härmed försäkrar TRedess 2010, S.L. att denna typ av radioutrustning 85421111 85421121
85421131 85421311 85422111 85422311 85423111 överensstämmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Air-cooled low power Transposers and Gap Fillers 8542xxxx
CONTENTS
Contents

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1 AC Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1.1 1HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1.2 2HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.1.3 3HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.2 Control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.2.1 Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.2.2 Multiport ethernet switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2.3 I/O contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.3 Signal board (Transposers and Gap Fillers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.3.1 Frequency reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.3.2 Downconverter / IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.3.3 Echo canceller (SW option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.3.5 Amplitude equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3.6 IF / Upconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.4 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.5 Self-Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.6 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.8 Synchronization module (GPS/GNSS) (HW option) . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.10 Hardware and software options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.3 Interface description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.4.1 Transposer and Gap Filler specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3 Installation 36
3.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.1.3 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
page 1 Ed 03
CONTENTS

3.2.1.1 RF Input of Gap Filler and Transposer . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.3 GPS/GNSS antenna installation (HW accessory) . . . . . . . . . . 38
4 Commissioning 42
4.1.2 Single configuration for Transposers and Gap Fillers . . . . . . . . 43
5 Operation 44
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.2.1.1 Gap Filler / Transposer overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.2.2 Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.3.4 Log out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.4.3 MIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.4.3.1 TREDESS-FS-MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.4.3.1.2 MIB module: setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.5 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.5.1 System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.5.1.1 System > General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.5.1.4 System > SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.5.1.9 System > Service > Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.5.1.10 System > Service > SW Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.5.1.11 System > Service > RF Input Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.5.1.12 System > Service > Forward power . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.5.1.13 System > Service > Non-linear Precorrection . . . . . . . 128
5.5.1.14 System > Service > Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.5.1.15 System > Service > power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.5.1.16 System > Service > Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.5.1.17 System > Service > Configuration backups . . . . . . . . 130
5.5.1.18 System > Service > Install HW / SW . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
page 2 Ed 03
CONTENTS
5.5.1.18.1 Install HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

5.5.1.18.2 Install SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.5.2 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.5.2.1 Setup > Exciter > RF Input > RF Configuration . . . . . . 131
5.5.2.2 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > General . . . . . . . . . 132
5.5.2.3 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > System . . . . . . . . . 132
5.5.2.4 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Echo canceller . . . . . 133
5.5.2.5 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Precorrector . . . . . . . 134
5.5.2.10 Setup > Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.5.3 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.5.3.1 IF processor :: Gain margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.5.3.2 Fault summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.5.3.8 Amplifier :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.5.3.9 RF input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.10 IF processor :: Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.11 IF processor :: 10MHz reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.12 IF processor :: Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.13 IF processor :: Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.14 IF processor :: Shoulders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.15 IF processor :: Gain margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.16 RF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5.3.24 HW error :: LDMOS transistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.5.3.28 HW error :: Amplifier output sample . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.5.3.29 Fan :: Fan 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.5.3.30 Fan :: Fan 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.5.3.31 Fan :: Fan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.5.3.32 AC power supply :: PSU A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.5.3.33 AC power supply :: PSU B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.5.4 EventLog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
page 3 Ed 03
CONTENTS
6 Maintenance 151
7.4 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4.1 System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4.2 RF Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8 Service 176
8.2 Change of the input frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.3.1 Install the Synchronization board (GPS/GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.3.2 Uninstall the Synchronization board (GPS/GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.3.5 Install the redundant 3HU AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.3.6 Uninstall the redundant 3HU AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.5 GPS/GNSS receiver replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.5.1 Removing GPS/GNSS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.5.2 Installing GPS/GNSS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.8 AC power supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.8.1 1HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.8.2 2HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.8.3 3HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.8.3.1 Removing AC power supply (3HU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.8.3.2 Installing AC power supply (3HU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.10 Change of fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.10.1 1HU/2HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.10.2 3HU devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
page 4 Ed 03
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
network.

protection.


page 5 Ed 03
page 6 Ed 03
2.1 Overview
The Fourth Series low power gap fillers and transposers is a family of standalone de-
vices for digital television networks of outstanding compactness including AC power sup-
ply, digital signal processor and power amplifier in the same 19" rackmount chasis.
Key features:

• Output power before band-pass filter up to 75W in a 1HU unit, up to 150W in a 2HU
unit and up to 275W in a 3HU unit.
• Digital Adaptive non-linear pre-correction.
• Air cooled system based on fans.
• Self-routing capability for multichannel configuration: Without external switching or

routing devices.
• Buil-in echo canceller for Gap-Filler operation.
page 7 Ed 03
Overview
Figure 2.1: Fourth Series 1HU Gap Filler / Transposer.
page 8 Ed 03
Device description
2.2 Device description

AC Power Supply Unit provides an unique DC voltage to operate the device. All neces-
sary internal voltages are generated through DC/DC converters inside each of the main
Monitoring status of the power supply unit is performed into control board of the device
(see section 5.5.1.15).
Different power supply units are provided depending on the power amplifier and chassis.
2.2.1.1 1HU devices


• High efficiency up to 89.5
• Withstand 300VAC surge input for 5 seconds.
• Built-in constant current limiting circuit.
• Built-in cooling Fan ON-OFF control.
• Built-in DC OK signal.
removed.
to recover.
page 9 Ed 03
Device description
2.2.1.2 2HU devices

• Forced air cooling by built-in DC with fan speed control function.
• DC OK Signal.
removed.
• Overvoltage self-protection: 56.6V - 66.2V. Shut down output voltage, re-power on

to recover.

page 10 Ed 03
Device description
2.2.1.3 3HU devices


• Nominal DC output voltage 41.5VDC (AB class amplifiers).
• Withstand 300VAC surge input for 5s.
• Forced air cooling by built-in DC with fans (2x) speed control function.
• Buil-in remote sense function.
• PMBus serial communication.
• Alarm control (see table 5.3).
a constant current limiting. The unit will shut down output voltage after 5 seconds
and it will be necessary re-power on to recover.

to recover.

page 11 Ed 03
Device description
The unit is provided with a DC OK LED indicator at frontal side. When DC output voltage
≥80±5% of the rated value, the green LED on the front panel will light up. When DC
output voltage <80±5% of the rated value, the red LED on the front panel will be turned
on.
3HU devices can be optionally provided with two redundant power supply units con-
nected in parallel operation (see section 8.8.3 for installing or removing the redundant
unit).
POWER SUPPLY 2 (Redundant)
POWER SUPPLY 1 (Basic)
Figure 2.7: Two redundant power supply units for 3HU devices (frontal view).
Built-in Oring MOSFET in each power supply unit that the single unit can be hot-swapped
without turning off the AC source providing to the device.
page 12 Ed 03
Device description
2.2.2 Control board

• Device kernel.
• Monitoring and control of all the device components and modules.

The date and precise time are required to make correct Eventlog entries.
from the NTP server, as long as the NTP server is ready. In case of a problem with
the NTP server, the device automatically retries each minute.
It is possible to set the country/zone with the corresponding local time (UTC time offset
and daylight-saving rule) froma a list of zones availables that is based on database from
IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) that represent the local time for many rep-
resentative locations around the globe.
source in case of lost of synchronizaton with the main source.
page 13 Ed 03
Device description
2.2.2.2 Multiport ethernet switching

The ethernet interface of the device has an unique MAC address and is composed by 4
Gigabit ports switch with multiple configuration and routing capabilities.
Each port can be used for:
• Transport stream input over IP network for the modulator (up to two IP sockets).
Not used for Gap Filler or Transposer operation.
• Network access for remote control (SNMP or WEB GUI).

• Local control through the WEB GUI.
• Switching functions for interconnecting several devices into the same local subnet.


192.168.1.1.
NOTE:
The device allows configure the 4 ports (GbE1, GbE2, GbE3, GbE4) into isolating net-
works (up to 4: A network, B networ, C network and D network) in order to wean the
traffic from the different networks. It is also possible to disabling the port to avoid traffic
through it. Figures 2.8 and 2.9 shows two examples of ports configuration for isolating
networks:
NOTE:
In order to keep switch functionality when power supply is off, please use the
connectors at the same vertical direction, this is GbE1 and GBE2 or GbE3 and
GBE4.
page 14 Ed 03
Device description
Figure 2.8: Network A: GbE1 and GbE2. Network B: GbE3 and GbE4. This is the default
factory configuration.
Figure 2.9: Network A: GbE1 and GbE2. Network B: GbE3. Network C: GbE4.

electrical relay outputs distributed in the 8-pin I/O connector at the rear panel.
Regarding the outputs, it is possible to define the stand-by status (open or closed)
and also the actuation mode (by level or by pulse). In case of actuation by pulse, it is
possible to define the time duration (seconds) of the pulse generated. See section 5.5.1.7
page 15 Ed 03
Device description
details.
2.2.3 Signal board (Transposers and Gap Fillers)

Main stages at this board:
2.2.3.1 Frequency reference

Frequency (10MHz) reference is used as a reference for generating the upconverter and
downconverter local oscillator.
The 10MHz reference can be selected from following sources:
• Internal. This internal reference is a 10 MHz VTCXO, whose stability is 1ppm.
• Internal [OCXO]. Reference is obtained from a 10 MHz OCXO placed inside the
synchronization module (available as a HW option) but without external 1PPS
synchronization.
• External [OCXO]. An external 1PPS signal is used to synchronise a 10 MHz OCXO

placed inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option). In case of
loss of external 1PPS signal, taking into account the stability of OCXO, the device
allows to set a configurable limit for the holdover time keeping the 10MHz reference
for a longer time.
• External. 10MHz reference from an external source are passing directly to the
signal board (without passing through the OCXO).
• Buil-in GNSS. GNSS satellite receiver is used to synchronise a OCXO placed

inside the synchronization module (available as a HW option). 10MHz output
signals from the synchronization module (OCXO) is passing to the signal board. In
case of loss of satellite information, taking into account the stability of OCXO, the
device allows to set a configurable limit for the holdover time keeping the 10MHz
reference for a longer time.
The device allows selecting the reference in an automatic mode between the GNSS
signals (high priority) and the external signals. In case of a GNSS, can be considered
valid the sinchronized signal only when the GNSS is locked or when the GNSS is locked
or in holdover mode.
In case of Internal reference, frequency accuracy depends on the gap filler operation
mode (isofrequency or frequency transposer). In case of isofrequency operation, output
frequency is exactly the same as input one, since the gap filler uses the same local oscil-
lator for the downconversion and the upconversion internal process. In case of frequency
transposer operation, the maximum frequency shifting (along one year) would occur for
the case of maximum frequency difference between input and output channels.
2.2.3.2 Downconverter / IF
The RF signal from the receiving antenna enters the module and then passes through a
tracking filter. The tracking filter frequency shift is governed by pre-recorded voltages pro-
vided by the internal control system, so you do not need any adjustment for a frequency
change. In the output stages of the tracking filter a variable gain amplifier is used. This is
page 16 Ed 03
Device description
controlled by the first automatic gain control circuit.
Then the signal is converted to intermediate frequency in a mixer with a local oscillator. In
case Gap filler works on a single frequency network (SFN) configuration (same input
and output channel), the oscillator input is disabled through a microcontroller port. Thus,
IF conversion in the downconverter and the subsequent conversion to the output channel
in the upconverter are conducted with the same oscillator, so that there is no deviation
in frequency between input and output of the gap filler. In addition, there is a phase noise
cancellation between the two conversions, so the gap filler is transparent regarding this
parameter.
2.2.3.3 Echo canceller (SW option)

The echo canceller bases its operation in LMS (Least Mean Square) error adaptive fil-
tering. Using that algorithm, the gap filler is able to recreate the transmission channel,
detect the position and amplitude of the feedback and/or SFN echoes in a particular sce-
nario and partially/totally remove them at the output.
Figure 2.10: Details of the channel estimation algorithm. (1) External reference. (2)
Internal reference.
This adaptive filtering stage is calculated using correlation methods between the input
signal and a reference signal. This reference signal can be either external (1) or internal
(2).
The external reference signal is taken from the HPA’s output and provides better cancella-
tion performance as well as higher stability margin as it includes extra channel information
that can be separated from the real feedback signal.
The adaptive filter that shapes the transmission channel covers a finite temporal range.
All feedback and/or SFN echoes with a relative delay to the main signal inside those limits
will be detected and equalized. This time interval is commonly known as cancellation
window.
The cancellation window time duration is 31.2 µs approximately (this period corresponds
to a 8MHz DVB-T signal and directly depends on the selected bandwidth). This can-
cellation window is split into 16 independent sections that can be enabled or disabled
depending on the actual scenario requirements. The cancellation performance for any
of these sub windows can be defined according to the echoes characteristics. This tun-
page 17 Ed 03
Device description
Figure 2.11: Gap Filler operation simplified diagram.
Main signal Cancellation

echoes
Not
cancelled
echoes
Temporal delay
Cancellation
window
Figure 2.12: Cancellation window.
ing directly affects the equalization speed of the adaptive filtering stages making the
echo canceller able to cope up with dynamic scenarios where echoes may have mag-
nitude and/or frequency shifts (Doppler frequency shifts, Rice channels, etc.). However,
increasing the algorithm’s speed may also affect the maximum MER the equipment can
provide at its output.

distorter (DAP).
Default performance mode of the DAP features an automatic (adaptive) way of getting
the best shoulders attenuation by means of an internal algorithm, ensuring MER > 35dB
at any frequency.
page 18 Ed 03
Device description

mode, a threshold for the shoulders attenuation (shoulders target) must be defined by
the user. Once reached that target, the device reduces the consumption of the LDMOS
to the minimum level to guarantee a shoulders attenuation over the target. See section
5.5.1.14 to perform this improvement.
2.2.3.5 Amplitude equalizer

A linear correction of the amplitude response to equalize the output spectrum before
the band-pass filter is available in the device. It is always enabled and running.

• In case of input RF signal level is under the input level threshold. This input level
threshold is user-configurable. The device returns automatically to normal opera-
tion when input level is above input level threshold.
• In case of loss of 10MHz synchronization signal. This mute function is configurable.

ered.
• In case of high level of feedback echo (gain margin). This mute function is config-
urable. The device returns to normal operation only when a RF reset (See section
7.4.2) or a System reset (See section 7.4.1) is performing.

page 19 Ed 03
Device description

Main function of the the power amplifier is to amplify the RF output of the signal board in
the entire UHF frequency band.
For output power up to 275W (1HU, 2HU or 3HU) the output stage of the amplifier is
designed with LDMOS power transistors in AB class.
The output signal quality is improved by the digital precorrector at signal board.
Power control of the amplifier is performed by the signal board.
monitoring.
Differents power amplifier modules are provided depending on the output power:
• Up to 10W devices. 2 LDMOS transistors in AB class.
Power amplifier allows to regulate the output power slightly over these limits at the ex-
pense of not meeting the requirements.
page 20 Ed 03
Device description
amplifier output.
(at Setup > Amplififier menu) reverse power threshold from 8dB to 12dB, the output
power is reduced in 8dB for 5 seconds. After 10 seconds more, the output power will
be totally switched off until performing a RF reset (See section 7.4.2) or a System reset
(See section 7.4.1). If the reverse power returns to normal level into these 10 seconds
more, the output power will return to the normal level.

section 7.4.1).


tions are performed according to the LDMOS currents measured at amplifier stage.
When any of the LDMOS currents are out-of-range (see table 2.1), the output power
is proportionally reduced to the number of damaged transistors following the formula
o
Presult = Pinitial NNo _T_Transistors
ransistors_ok
_total
.
Device Lower limit Upper limit

1HU 150mA 3A
2HU 300mA 10A
3HU 300mA 10A
Table 2.1: LDMOS currents thresholds.
page 21 Ed 03
Device description

formed according to the temperature measured at amplifier stage.
The output power will be totally switched off when the Amplifier board temperature
("Amp Ta ") (and/or the signal board temperature ("Signal Ta ")) is above 85o C (in
1HU/2HU devices) or above 90o C (in 3HU devices) until performing a RF reset (See sec-
tion 7.4.2) or a System reset (See section 7.4.1).
Previous to reach the temperature limit, when the "Amp Ta " > 80o C (in 1HU/2HU devices)
or "Amp Ta " > 85o C (in 3HU devices), fans start to work to the maximum speed.

board, the amplifier heat sink fins, and then leaves the unit via the fans on the rear panel.
The device is provided with fans at the rear side (three in 1HU devices and two in
2HU/3HU devices) which draw in cool air via the ventilation openings at the front panel
and blow the warm air out via the rear panel. This fans are mounted on the outside of the
rear panel and can therefore be changed without needing to open the device cover.
Working cycle of the fans is 100% being their speed controlled by the temperatures of the
device, signal board temperature ("Signal Ta ") and/or Amplifier board temperature
("Amp Ta ").
When the "Amp Ta " > 80o C (in 1HU/2HU devices) or "Amp Ta " > 85o C (in 3HU devices),
fans start to work to the maximum speed.
Different types of fans are provided depending on the output power amplifier.
The AC power supply module is provided with fans (one in 450W and two in 750W /
2000W). Cooling air passes through the power supply and leaves the unit via the ventila-
tion openings at the rear panel. These fans are placed into the power supply chassis, so
its replacement must be done together with the power supply module.
page 22 Ed 03
Device description

menu.
Key Description
LED Description
LOCAL Local operation (orange) or remote operation (off ).
page 23 Ed 03
Device description
2.2.8 Synchronization module (GPS/GNSS) (HW option)

The optional built-in synchronization module provides the device with a frequency
(10MHz) and time (1PPS) reference, e.g. for SFN operation.
Figure 2.14: Synchronization module.
Two different hardware receiver models are avaliables: GNSS receiver for GPS or GLONASS
satellite constellations or GPS receiver for GPS satellite constellations only.
Each model of receiver is provided with two modes of performance are available in the
synchronization module: GPS/GNSS Receiver mode and OCXO mode.
GPS/GNSS receiver mode

Depends on the model, a GPS satellite receiver or a GNSS satellite receiver (GPS and/or
GLONASS in a concurrent performance) is used to synchronise a 10MHz OCXO placed
inside the synchronization module. 1PPS and 10MHz output signals from the synchro-
nization module are used as SFN reference for the modulator.
a longer time.
UTC date and time from the GPS/GNSS receiver can be used to synchronize the date
and time of the device (see section 2.2.2.1).
OCXO mode
The 10 MHz OCXO placed inside the synchronization module is synchronised with an
page 24 Ed 03
Device description
for a longer time.

for a longer time.
page 25 Ed 03
Device description
2.2.10 Hardware and software options.

Hardware options
• Synchronization module. The optional built-in synchronization module provides
eration. The OCXO placed inside the synchronization module can be synchronised
receiver.
Figure 2.16: Synchronization module.

• 3HU redundant power supply. 3HU devices can be optionally provided with a
redundant power supply unit. Built-in Oring MOSFET in each power supply unit
that the single unit can be hot-swapped without turning off the AC source providing
to the device.
Figure 2.18: 3HU redundant power supply.
page 26 Ed 03
Device description
Software options
• SNMP. Provides the device with SNMP agent.
• DEEC. Provides the Gap Filler or Transposer with echo cancellation.
page 27 Ed 03
2.3 Interface description

Rear connectors
AC POWER IEC 60320-C14 AC power supply (1HU / 2HU)
IEC 60320-C20(1) AC power supply (3HU)
RF OUT N female, 50Ω RF power output (1HU / 2HU)
7/16" female, 50Ω RF power output (3HU)
GbE 1 RJ45 female, 8-pin Multiple function:
GbE 2 - TS (up to 2) over IP input
GbE 3 - Network Switch
GbE 4 - Network for remote operation (SNMP or
WEB GUI)
- Web GUI for local operation
ANTENNA SMA female, 50Ω (2)
GPS/GNSS antenna input
10MHz OUT BNC female, 50Ω 10MHz frequency reference output (loop-
through from External 10MHz or from
GNSS)
1PPS OUT BNC female, 50Ω 1PPS time reference output (loop-through
from External 1PPS or from GNSS)
I/O D-Sub male, 9-pin(3) External inputs and contact outputs (Pas-
sive reserve control in case of 1+1)
Front connectors
RF IN N female, 50Ω RF input
(1)
2 connectors for PSU A and PSU B. Layout detailed at figure 2.19.
(2)
Only available with GPS/GNSS HW option.
(3)
page 28 Ed 03
Figure 2.19: AC connectors for 3HU devices: PSU A and PSU B.
Figure 2.20: I/O port pinout: General purpose (a) and 1+1 redundancy control (b).
page 29 Ed 03
Specifications
2.4 Specifications
2.4.1 Transposer and Gap Filler specifications
Transposers/Gap Fillers 1HU 2HU 3HU
Maximum output power 75W 150W 275W
AC supply voltage 85-264V 90-264V 108-264V
AC supply frequency 47Hz-63Hz
Power factor >0.95
Maximum AC power 350VA 665VA 1500VA
consumption(1)
RF output connector N female N female 7/16" female
Dimensions (WxHxD) 19"x1HUx465mm 19"x2HUx480mm 19"x3HUx480mm
Weight (1) 6.4Kg 11.4Kg 15.4Kg
(1)
Including all hardware and software options.
Main:
Frequency range UHF band IV/V, 470 to 862 MHz
Standards supported DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T, ISDB-Tb
Network types MFN (Transposer mode) &
SFN (On-channel repeater mode)
Latency < 4.3 µs (8MHz DVB-T)
(Including echo canceller)
Channel bandwith 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz or 8 MHz
(depends on the HW model)
RF Input:
Input signal range -67 to -20 dBm
Noise figure < 8 dB
Adjacent channel supression > 50 dB
Impedance 50Ω
Echo Canceller (SW option):

Gain Margin (signal - echo) -24dB
Echo suppression > 35 dB
Temporal cancellation: 31.2 µs (8MHz DVB-T)
Doppler cancellation Yes
page 30 Ed 03
Specifications
RF output:
MER rms without echo >33 dB (input signal MER > 38dB)
MER rms with echo magin 20dB > 27dB
MER rms with echo magin 24dB > 24dB
Non-linear precorrection Digital adaptive
Linear correction Digital (amplitude before band-pass fil-
ter)
Impedance 50Ω
(2)
(3)
Measured in 10MHz bandwidth before band-pass filter.
Coupling 50dB±4dB
Impedance 50Ω
Local oscillator:
≤5x10−9 (-10o C to +60o C) (OCXO HW op-
tion)

1PPS level TTL
page 31 Ed 03
Specifications

1PPS level TTL
OCXO (HW option):

10MHz signal:

temperature
@10 Hz: -125 dBc / Hz
@100 Hz: -145 dBc / Hz
@1 KHz: -150 dBc / Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc / Hz
1PPS signal:

page 32 Ed 03
Specifications
GPS receiver (HW option):

Receiver:
Satellites supported GPS

data connector
10MHz signal:
Frequency (F0 ) 10Mhz

Accuracy with GPS < ±1 x 10 exp-12 Hz (average over 24
hours when GPS locked)
Frequency stability with temperature ≤ 1x10−8 (-10o C to +70o C)
Phase noise (typical, static conditions) @1 Hz: -90 dBc/Hz
@10 Hz: -120 dBc/Hz
@100 Hz: -140 dBc/Hz
@1 KHz: -150 dBc/Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc/Hz
Harmonics ≤-30 dBc
1PPS signal:

Holdover Mode after 4 hours < 0.8 µs
Holdover Mode after 1 day < 12 µs
page 33 Ed 03
Specifications

Receiver:

data connector
10MHz signal:

when GPS locked)
temperature
@10s & 100s: 3x10−11
@100 Hz: -135 dBc / Hz
@1 KHz: -145 dBc / Hz
@10 KHz: -155 dBc / Hz
1PPS signal:

page 34 Ed 03
Specifications
Operation:
SNMP (SW option).
I/O contacts (not available in 1+1 perfor-
mance).
Environmental:
Cooling Forced air
Compliance:
Safety EN 60950-1:2006+A1:2010+A11:2009+A12:2011
EN 60215:1989+A1:92+A2:94
EMC ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09)
ETSI EN 301 489-14 V1.2.1 (2003-05)
<1kV input signal)
Standards EN 300744, EN 302755, TS 101191, EN 50083-9, TR
101290, TS 102773, TS 102831, TS 102034, ARIB
STD-B31, ABNT NBR 15601, ISO/IEC 13818, RFC
1122, RFC 791, RFC 768, RFC 3550, RFC 2250, RFC
2733, SMTPE 2022-1/-2, EN 300421, EN 302307
page 35 Ed 03
3 Installation

• 19" rackmount transmitter (including HW options in same chassis).
• AC power cable.
• Ground wire.
NOTE:
and cabling.
3.1.2 Unpacking
ment is complete.
page 36 Ed 03
Unpacking and Setting Up
3.1.3 Setting Up

1HU devices 275 W

2HU devices 515 W
3HU devices 1225 W
page 37 Ed 03
Connecting Cables

3.2.1.1 RF Input of Gap Filler and Transposer

NOTE:
The optional GPS/GNSS receiver can be used as a frequency and timing reference,
by connecting the antenna to ANTENNA connector at rear side of the device.
CAUTION:
Risk of RF burns
RF at the output.
1. Connect the antenna system (bandpass filter) to the RF OUT connector (RF power
output) at rear side of the device. In case of 1+1, connect the antenna system
(bandpass filter) to the antenna output connector at coaxial switch.
3.2.3 GPS/GNSS antenna installation (HW accessory)

GPS/GNSS antenna post mount kit
an accessory.
The post mounting kit allows you to mount the GPS/GNSS antenna onto a vertical or
horizontal post. Follow these steps to correctly assemble the kit:
page 38 Ed 03
Connecting Cables
GPS/GNSS Timing Receiver?

antenna is unknown and the GPS/GNSS Timing Receiver will determinate this location
automatically. In that nominal case a proper sky visibility is required: a vertical observa-
tion cone in sky open view of a semi-angle higher or equal to 65◦ - optimum at 85◦ - is
recommended. See figure below.
page 39 Ed 03
Connecting Cables
Cables are required to connect antenna to GPS/GNSS Timing Receiver. Two types of ca-
bles are mostly used. The cable attenuation is proportional to length. Typical attenuations
at 1575 MHz are:
Once the cable path is defined between antenna and GPS/GNSS Timing Receiver, es-
timate the attenuation based on cable lengths. Typical attenuation based on standard
cable lengths (including 0.5 dB for connectors):

10m 9.5dB 4dB
25m 23dB 9.5dB
50m No cable 18 dB
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended protecting the GPS/GNSS Timing Receiver with

lightning protection. This protection must be installed at the cable entrance into the build-
ing with a proper earth/ground connection The Lightning Protection attenuation is typically
1 dB.
15 dB <=G1 + G2 + G3 + G4 + G5 <=30 dB
page 40 Ed 03
Connecting Cables

Prior to connect the AC power cable, please make sure that the AC source is OFF and
AC power switch is in position OFF. You should therefore make sure that the connector
is within reach and easily accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
The AC power connector and the AC power switch are located on the rear panel of the
device.
Figure 3.1: AC switch and AC power connector with fuses slot.
NOTE: 3HU devices are not provided with AC switch. Make sure AC source is OFF.
3HU devices can incorporate a redundant power supply with its AC connector at
rear panel (see figure 2.19).
Please heed the connection data found in the following table:
1HU 2HU 3HU

AC supply : 85-264V 90-264V 108-264V
47-63Hz 47-63Hz 47-63Hz
Fuse: 6.3A / 250V 10A / 250V 20A / 250V
page 41 Ed 03
4 Commissioning

The AC power connector and the AC power switch (not provided in 3HU devices) are
located on the rear panel of the device.
NOTE: Connect the equipment to the AC power supply, using the power cable supplied
with the equipment. In 3HU devices with redundant power supply 2 power cables
must be used.
CAUTION:
Risk of injuries
are met:
1. Press the AC power switch on the rear panel (turn on the AC source providing to
the device in case of 3HU devices) into position ON.
page 42 Ed 03
4.1.2 Single configuration for Transposers and Gap Fillers

2. Check the input central frequency at main screen (or at Setup > Exciter > RF
input > RF configuration menu).
3. Check the input level at main screen (or at Setup > Exciter > RF input > RF
configuration menu).
4. Select (at Setup > Exciter > Echo canceller > System menu) the appropri-
ate Bandwidth adaptation to refine the bandwidth taking into account the differ-
ent digital television standard bandwidths:
• DVB-T/T2: DVB-T or DVB-T2 without extended carriers.

• DVB-T2 ext: DVB-T2 with extended carriers.
• ISDB-T: ISDB-T/Tb.
NOTE: • In case of needing remove echoes with a bigger delay than the own feedback
echo or Doppler frequency shifts, Rice channels, etc., please refer to section
5.5.2.4 at operation chapter.
RF signal is not mute now, so the device is ready for transmitting power.
7. Check the output power at main screen (or at Setup > Exciter > Amplifier
menu).
8. Check that frontal LED indicators INPUT and RF OUTPUT keep green and LED
indicator ALARMS keeps off.
pannel to check signal quality.
page 43 Ed 03
5 Operation
5.1 Introduction

page 44 Ed 03
Operation via front display and keys

menu.

5.2.1.1 Gap Filler / Transposer overview
Figure 5.2: Gap Filler / Transposer overview.
• 1) RF input:
– Input RF frequency. + indicates an offset at the input frequency.

– Low Lvl is shown when the input level is under the input threshold.
– High is shown when the input level is over -15dBm.
• 2) Echo canceller. DEEC is shown when echo canceller SW option is installed.

• 3) Bandwidth. Indicates the operation bandwidth.
In case of a mute is working, instead of the echo canceller and the bandwidth,
MUTED is shown.
In case of RF OFF, instead of the echo canceller and the bandwidth, RF OFF is
shown.
In case of a mute is working and also RF OFF, instead of the echo canceller and
the bandwidth, RF OFF / M is shown.
page 45 Ed 03
and graphically.
• 8) Ethernet link status indicating for each of the 4 ethernet ports (viewing the device
• 9) Synchronization module status:


not synchronized).

5.2.2 Menu keys

From overview screen is possible to acces to menus navigation by pressing any cursor
or OK key.
page 46 Ed 03
Key Description
Menu tree view
• 1) Menu path.
• 4) Scroll bar.
Parameter menu view

• 1) Title.
page 47 Ed 03

sor key .
for applying.
page 48 Ed 03
Menu Status view

tion.
Menu EvenLog view

information.

fields:
page 49 Ed 03

page 50 Ed 03


a PC/laptop can be connected via the ethernet interface.
specification.
Section 2.2.2.2 detailed the ethernet multiswitch configuration.
In any case it is possible to acces to the address data needed for communication via the
NOTE:
4. Connect the network interface of the PC to ethernet port (GbE x with x=1,2,3,4) on
page 51 Ed 03

dialog box appears.
GUI, a warning message is shown at the botton rigth corner of the screen.
User accounts:

NOTE:
page 52 Ed 03
• 1) Device name.
Not synchronized
Symbol is prepend to the date when a SD card is detected.

• 4) Logout link.

page 53 Ed 03
uration. For example, Transmitter diagram is different from the Gap Filler or Trans-
poser diagram, but as a general rule, the colors code for the blocks and arrows
statuses is:


• 8) Forward / Reverse power (current value and dinamic graphical bars).
page 54 Ed 03
Menu window

rigth side of the parameter until a orange bubble appears with the detailed informa-
Menu Status view

the icon .
page 55 Ed 03
Menu EvenLog view

information.

page 56 Ed 03
adding a new rule.
5.3.4 Log out

screen.
page 57 Ed 03
Monitoring and Control via SNMP

5.4.1 Introduction
fault.

modified via SNMP.
5.4.2 Configuration
or via SNMP.
NOTE:
page 58 Ed 03
section 5.5.1.4):
also the definitions for all type of devices (transmitters, gap fillers, transposer,...) includ-
ing all hardware and software options. A detailed description of this MIB is given below.
SNMP Manager:


page 59 Ed 03

page 60 Ed 03

type of devices (transmitters, gap fillers, transposer,...) including all hardware and soft-
ware options.
• setup. Contains definitions for the configuration of the transmitter, gap filler, trans-
poser,... according to the parameters of the setup menu.
status menu.

page 61 Ed 03
Technical Manual
general
general.dateTime
page 62
section 5.5.1.1.

5.5.1.1.
general.dateTime gmt read-write Parameter Date/time > Time zone (GMT offset). See section 5.5.1.1.
5.5.1.1.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
networkInterfaces
5.5.1.2.
networkInterfaces.localInterfaz localIp read-write Parameter Local interface > Local IP address. See section 5.5.1.2.
page 63
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration ethernetMode read-write (1)
Parameter Ports configurations > GbE mode. See section 5.5.1.2.

networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration. networkGbe1 read-write (1)
Parameter Ports configurations > GbE1. See section 5.5.1.2.
Operation
Ed 03
(1)
Only applicable in case of network mode configuration for the Ethernet multiport.
Technical Manual
networkInterfaces.portsConfiguration. ifaceGbe1 read-write (1)
webInterface
page 64
5.5.1.3.

Operation
Ed 03
(1)
Only read-write access in case of network mode configuration for the Ethernet multiport.


section 5.5.3.
amplifierStage1Table (1)
Amplifier: Stage 1. See section 5.5.3.
asiTable (2)
ASI input. See section 5.5.3.
ipInputTable (2)
IP input. See section 5.5.3.
rxSat1Table Not applicable.
rxSat2Table Not applicable.
rxDtt1Table Not applicable.
rxDtt2Table Not applicable.
rfInTable (3)
RF input. See section 5.5.3.
cancellerTable (3)
IF processor. See section 5.5.3.
powerSupplyTable (4)
AC power supply. See section 5.5.3.
(1)
Only applicable for corresponding amplifier stage of Medium Power devices.
(2)
Only applicable for Low Power 1/2/3HU transmitter devices.
(3)
Only applicable for Low Power 1/2/3HU gap-filler devices.
(4)
Only applicable for Low Power 3HU devices.
Following screen shot shows amplifierTable as example:
page 65 Ed 03

tailed below.

section 5.5.1.6.

page 66 Ed 03
Technical Manual
ioInterface
ioInterface.input01
ioInterface.input02
page 67

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
snmp
snmp readCommunity read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Read community. See section
5.5.1.4.
snmp writeCommunity read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Write community. See section
5.5.1.4.
snmp trapCommunity read-write Parameter Agent configuration > Traps community. See section
5.5.1.4.
section 5.5.1.4.
page 68

snmp trapKeepaliveEnable read-write Set this OID to value = 1 to enable keep alive trap. Parameter Agent
configuration > Enable keep alive trap. See section 5.5.1.4.
snmp trapKeepalive read-write Timeout in seconds for keep alive trap. Parameter Agent configuration

section 5.5.1.4.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
deviceInfo
page 69
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis extraDigitalDacModulator read-only Not applicable
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis satelliteBoard read-only Not applicable
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis terrestialReceiver1Board read-only Not applicable
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis terrestialReceiver2Board read-only Not applicable
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis satelliteReceiver1Board read-only Not applicable

deviceInfo.hardwareBasis satelliteReceiver2Board read-only Not applicable
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis nPlusOneRedundancy read-only Not applicable.
deviceInfo.hardwareBasis dualDriveRedundancy read-only Not applicable.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
page 70

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
service
5.5.1.9.
service.serviceReset rfReset read-write To perform the RF Reset. See section 5.5.1.9.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration inputStatusCalibration read-only (1)
RF Input calibration status.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.inputCalibration inputLevelMeasureCalibration read-write (1)
Set measure to calibrate RF input.
page 71
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration powerStatusCalibration read-only Forward power calibration status.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.powerCalibration powerLevelMeasureCalibration read-write Set measure to calibrate Forward power.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection linearStatusPrecorrection read-only Linear optimization status. See section ??.
(2)
service.serviceSystemCalibration.linearPrecorrection startLinearPrecorrection read-write Set to 1 to launch linear optimization. See

(2)
section ??.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.nonLinearCalibration

service.serviceSystemCalibration.nonLinearCalibration nonLinearStatusCalibration read-only Non-linear optimization status. See section
5.5.1.13.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.nonLinearCalibration cancelNonLinearPowerCalibration read-write Set to 1 to remove non-linear optimization.
service.serviceSystemCalibration.nonLinearCalibration startNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Set to 1 to launch non-linear optimization. See
section 5.5.1.13.
(1)
Operation
(2)
Only applicable for devices with linear precorrection performance.
Ed 03
Technical Manual
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. acApparentPower read-only Parameter AC Apparent power. See section
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. acEfficiency read-only Parameter AC Efficiency. See section
service.serviceSystemCalibration.efficiencyCalibration. efficiencyStatusCalibration read-only Efficiency improvement status. See section
page 72

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
service.serviceColling
service.serviceColling.fan01
service.serviceColling.fan01 fan01Status read-only Parameter Fan 1 status. See section 5.5.1.16.
section 5.5.1.16.
page 73
service.serviceColling.fan02 fan02Status read-only (1)
Parameter Fan 2 status. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceColling.fan02 fan02OperatingTime read-only (1)
Parameter Fan 2 operating time. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceColling.fan02 fan02Reset read-write (1)
Set to 1 to reset operating time for fan 2. Parameter Fan 2 reset.
service.serviceColling.fan03 fan03Status read-only (2)
Parameter Fan 3 status. See section 5.5.1.16.
service.serviceColling.fan03 fan03OperatingTime read-only (2)
Parameter Fan 3 operating time. See section 5.5.1.16.

service.serviceColling.fan03 fan03Reset read-write (2)
Set to 1 to reset operating time for fan 3. Parameter Fan 3 reset.
service.serviceColling fanSpeed read-only Parameter Speed. See section 5.5.1.16.
(1)
Only applicable for Low Power 2/3HU devices.
(2)
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
service.service.servicePowerSupply
service.service.servicePowerSupply dcLine1Voltage read-only Parameter DC line 1. See section 5.5.1.15.
service.service.servicePowerSupply dcLine4Voltage read-only (1)
Parameter DC line 4. See section 5.5.1.15.
service.service.servicePowerSupply.
psuA
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAstatus read-only (2)
Parameter PSU A: Status. See section 5.5.1.15.
psuA
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAacInputVoltage read-only (2)
Parameter PSU A: AC input voltage. See section 5.5.1.15.
page 74
psuA
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAdcOutputVoltage read-only (2)
Parameter PSU A: DC output voltage. See section 5.5.1.15.
psuA
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAtemperature read-only (2)
Parameter PSU A: Temperature. See section 5.5.1.15.
psuA
service.service.servicePowerSupply.
psuB
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAstatus read-only (2)
Parameter PSU B: Status. See section 5.5.1.15.

psuB
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAacInputVoltage read-only (2)
Parameter PSU B: AC input voltage. See section 5.5.1.15.
psuB
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAdcOutputVoltage read-only (2)
Parameter PSU B: DC output voltage. See section 5.5.1.15.
psuB
service.service.servicePowerSupply. psuAtemperature read-only (2)
Parameter PSU B: Temperature. See section 5.5.1.15.
psuB
Operation
(1)
Only applicable for Low Power 1/2/3HU devices.
(2)
Ed 03
Technical Manual
input
input.socket1
input.socket1 socket1Enable read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Enable. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1TransmissionMode read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Transmission mode. See section ??.
page 75
input.socket1 socket1UnicastIp read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Unicast IP. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1MulticastIp read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Multicast IP. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1SourceIp read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Source IP (multicast). See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1VlanEnable read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Enable VLAN. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1VlanId read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > VLAN Identifier. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1Port read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Port. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1Protocol read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Protocol. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1MaximumBuffer read-only Not available.

input.socket1 socket1BufferDuration read-write Parameter IP socket 1 > Buffer duration. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1Fec read-only Parameter IP socket 1 > FEC (RTP). See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1InputBitrate read-only Parameter IP socket 1 > Input bitrate. See section ??.
input.socket1 socket1Latency read-only Parameter IP socket 1 > Latency. See section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
input.socket2
input.socket2 socket2Enable read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Enable. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2TransmissionMode read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Transmission mode. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2UnicastIp read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Unicast IP. See section ??.
page 76
input.socket2 socket2MulticastIp read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Multicast IP. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2SourceIp read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Source IP (multicast). See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2VlanEnable read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Enable VLAN. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2VlanId read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > VLAN Identifier. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2Port read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Port. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2Protocol read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Protocol. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2MaximumBuffer read-only Not available.
input.socket2 socket2BufferDuration read-write Parameter IP socket 2 > Buffer duration. See section ??.

input.socket2 socket2Fec read-only Parameter IP socket 2 > FEC (RTP). See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2InputBitrate read-only Parameter IP socket 2 > Input bitrate. See section ??.
input.socket2 socket2Latency read-only Parameter IP socket 2 > Latency. See section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
tion ??.
tion ??.
teresis > Error (Non-seamless). See section ??.
teresis > Higher priority. See section ??.
page 77
switching > Source 1. See section ??.
trate / Latency > Source 1. See section ??.

Operation
Ed 03

Technical Manual
exciter (1)
exciter.rfInput
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputFrequencyMode read-write Parameter Input frequency mode. See section 5.5.2.1.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputFrequency read-only Parameter Input frequency. See section 5.5.2.1.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputLevel read-only Parameter Input level. See section 5.5.2.1.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputLevelThreshold read-write Parameter Input level threshold. See section 5.5.2.1.
page 78
inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration inputChannel read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel. See section 5.5.2.1.
.inputChannelMode
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputChannelOffset read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel offset. See section
inputChannelMode 5.5.2.1.
exciter.rfInput.rfInputConfiguration. inputChannelResolution read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel resolution. See section
inputChannelMode 5.5.2.1.

inputCentralFrequencyMode section 5.5.2.1.
(1)
All OIDs from this table are only applicable for Low Power gap-filler devices.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecGeneral ecTemperature read-write Parameter IF board temperature. See section 5.5.2.2.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecBandwidth read-only Parameter Bandwidth. See section 5.5.2.3.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecBandwidthAdaptation read-write Parameter Bandwidth adaptation. See section 5.5.2.3.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecAdditionDelay read-write Parameter Additional delay. See section 5.5.2.3.
page 79
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem ecCurrentDelay read-only Parameter Current delay. See section 5.5.2.3.

ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecInputLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Input. See section 5.5.2.3.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecReferenceLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Reference. See section
ecLevels 5.5.2.3.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecCancellationLevel read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Cancellation. See section

ecLevels 5.5.2.3.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecSystem. ecOutputCancellation read-only Parameter IF processor levels > Output. See section 5.5.2.3.
ecLevels
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows ecEnable read-write Parameter Echo cancellation. See section 5.5.2.4.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows ecGainMargin read-only Parameter Gain margin. See section 5.5.2.4.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecWindows. ecWindowSpeed ecWindow01 read-write Parameter Window speed > Window 1. See section 5.5.2.4.
page 80

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector ecLinearPrecorrection read-write Parameter Amplitude equalization > Enable. See section
5.5.2.5.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector ecNonLinearPrecorrection read-write Parameter Non-linear precorrection > Enable. See section
5.5.2.5.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorInput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Input. See section 5.5.2.5.
page 81
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorStatus read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Status. See section 5.5.2.5.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorFeedback read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Feedback. See section 5.5.2.5.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecPrecorrectorOutput read-only Parameter Precorrector levels > Output. See section 5.5.2.5.
ecSpectrumMeasures

ecSpectrumMeasures 5.5.2.5.
exciter.echoCanceller.ecPrecorrector. ecIn-bandLevelVariation read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > In-band level variation. See
ecSpectrumMeasures section 5.5.2.5.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorTemperature read-only Parameter Modulator board temperature. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorStandard read-write Parameter Modulator standard. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneral modulatorTestMode read-write Parameter Test mode. See section ??.
page 82
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsType read-write Parameter PRBS type. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsPid read-write Parameter PRBS PID. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorGeneralPrbs modulatorPrbsIn read-write Parameter PRBS invert. See section ??.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtBandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section ??.

dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtCellIdEnable read-write Parameter Enable Cell ID. See section ??.
dvbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtCellId read-write Parameter Cell ID. See section ??.
dvbtSystem
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtNetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section ??.
??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork dvbtLocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section ??.
dvbtMip
dvbtMip ??.
page 83
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtTimeOffset read-only Parameter MIP > Time offset. See section ??.
dvbtMip
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtTransmitterId read-write Parameter MIP > Transmitter ID. See section ??.
dvbtMip
dvbtTimingInformation lay. See section ??.

dvbtTimingInformation See section ??.
dvbtTimingInformation See section ??.
dvbtTimingInformation gin. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT.dvbtNetwork. dvbtLatency read-only Parameter Timing information > Modulator delay. See
dvbtTimingInformation section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
page 84
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtConstellation read-write Parameter Constellation. See section ??.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtFec read-write Parameter FEC. See section ??.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtGuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section ??.
dvbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT. dvbtFft read-write Parameter FFT. See section ??.

dvbtModulation
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Profile read-write Parameter DVB-T2 profile. See section ??.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2InputMode read-write Parameter Input mode. See section ??.
dvbt2System
page 85
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2T2miPid read-write Parameter T2MI PID. See section ??.

dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Bandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section ??.
dvbt2System
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Version read-write Parameter T2 version. See section ??.
dvbt2System

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdT2mi read-only Parameter Cell ID > T2MI value. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdOverwrite read-write Parameter Cell ID > Overwrite. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2CellIdUser read-write Parameter Cell ID > User value. See section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdT2mi read-only Parameter Network ID > T2MI value. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdOverwrite read-write Parameter Network ID > Overwrite. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2NetworkIdUser read-write Parameter Network ID > User value. See section ??.
page 86
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdT2mi read-only Parameter T2 system ID > T2MI value. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdOverwrite read-write Parameter T2 system ID > Overwrite. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2SystemIdUser read-write Parameter T2 system ID > User value. See section ??.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FrequencyT2mi read-only Parameter T2 frequency > T2MI value. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FrequencyOverwrite read-write Parameter T2 frequency > Overwrite. See section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2NetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2SfnRelativeReference read-only Parameter SFN reference (relative). See section ??.
??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2TimeStamp read-only Parameter T2MI Timestamp. See section ??.
??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Network dvbt2LocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section ??.
page 87
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2TimeOffset read-write Parameter Individual Addressing > Time offset.
dvbt2Network.dvbt2IndividualAddresssing See section ??.
dvbt2Network.dvbt2IndividualAddresssing See section ??.

dvbt2Network.dvbt2TimingInformation See section ??.
dvbt2Network.dvbt2TimingInformation margin. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2Latency read-only Parameter Timing information > Modulator delay.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2L1SignallingModulation read-write Parameter L1-post signalling constellation. See
dvbt2Frame section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2L1PostScrambling read-write Parameter L1-post scrambling. See section ??.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2LiteCompatible read-only Parameter T2-Lite compatible. See section ??.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PreambleFormat read-write Parameter Preamble format. See section ??.
page 88
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2MisoGroup read-write Parameter MISO group. See section ??.
dvbt2Frame
dvbt2Frame ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2FftSize read-write Parameter FFT size. See section ??.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2GuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section ??.

dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PaprReduction read-write Parameter PAPR reduction. See section ??.
dvbt2Frame
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2. dvbt2PilotPattern read-write Parameter Pilot pattern. See section ??.
dvbt2Frame
dvbt2Frame See section ??.
Operation
dvbt2Frame frame. See section ??.
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp numberOfPlps read-only Parameter Number of PLPs. See section ??.
dvbt2PlpTable
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpId read-write Parameter PLP ID. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpType read-write Parameter PLP type. See section ??.
page 89
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpMode read-write Parameter PLP mode. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpGroupId read-write Parameter PLP Group ID. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. plpConstellation read-write Parameter PLP Constellation. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. rotatedConstellation read-write Parameter Rotated Constellation. See section ??.

exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. fecType read-write Parameter FEC type. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. codeRate read-write Parameter Code Rate. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. numberOfFecBlocks read-write Parameter Number of FEC blocks. See section ??.
Operation
dvbt2PlpTable.dvbt2PlpEntry ??.
Ed 03
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. lengthOfTimeInvervaling read-write Parameter Length of time-interleaving. See sec-

dvbt2PlpTable.dvbt2PlpEntry tion ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorDVBT2.dvbt2Plp. in-bandSignalling read-write Parameter In-band signalling. See section ??.
Technical Manual
isdbtSystem
page 90
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtBandwidth read-write Parameter Bandwidth. See section ??.

isdbtSystem
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtInputMode read-write Parameter Input mode. See section ??.
isdbtSystem
isdbtNetwork
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtNetworkType read-write Parameter Network type. See section ??.
isdbtNetwork

exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtLocalDelay read-write Parameter Local delay. See section ??.
isdbtNetwork
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
iip
iip tion > Maximum network delay. See section ??.
iip tion > Time offset. See section ??.
page 91
iip tion > Static delay. See section ??.

iip tion > Equipment ID. See section ??.
isdbtTimingInformation delay. See section ??.

isdbtTimingInformation lay. See section ??.
isdbtTimingInformation lay. See section ??.
isdbtTimingInformation margin. See section ??.
isdbtTimingInformation margin. See section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
page 92
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtFft read-write Parameter FFT Mode. See section ??.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtGuardInterval read-write Parameter Guard Interval. See section ??.
isdbtModulation
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPartialReception read-write Parameter Partial reception. See section ??.
isdbtModulation

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLA read-write Parameter Layer A > PID filtering. See section ??.
page 93
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLA read-write Parameter Layer A > PIDs. See section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLA read-write Parameter Layer A > Code Rate. See section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA See section ??.

isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerA ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLB read-write Parameter Layer B > PID filtering. See section ??.
page 94
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLB read-write Parameter Layer B > PIDs. See section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLB read-write Parameter Layer B > Code Rate. See section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB See section ??.

isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerB ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidFilteringLC read-write Parameter Layer C > PID filtering. See section ??.
page 95
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtPidsLC read-write Parameter Layer C > PIDs. See section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC ??.
exciter.modulator.modulatorISDBT. isdbtCodeRateLC read-write Parameter Layer C > Code Rate. See section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC See section ??.

isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC section ??.
isdbtModulation.isdbtLayerC ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. (1)
modLinearPrecorrection section ??.
page 96

modNonLinearPrecorrection See section ??.
modPrecorrectorLevels section ??.

modPrecorrectorLevels See section ??.
(1)
The OIDs from this table are only applicable with linear precorrection performance.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
modSpectrumMeasures
modSpectrumMeasures alarm. See section ??.
page 97
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modLowerShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Lower shoul-

modSpectrumMeasures der. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modUpperShoulder read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > Upper shoul-
modSpectrumMeasures der. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modInBandLevelVariation read-only Parameter Spectrum measures > In-band level
modSpectrumMeasures variation. See section ??.
exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modThresholdMer read-write (1)
Parameter Spectrum measures > MER alarm.
modSpectrumMeasures See section ??.

exciter.modulator.modPrecorrector. modMer read-only (1)
Parameter Spectrum measures > MER. See
modSpectrumMeasures section ??.
(1)
Only applicable for transmitter devices.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
exciter.modulator.rfOutput
exciter.modulator.rfOutput outputFrequencyMode read-write Parameter Output Frequency mode. See sec-
tion 5.5.2.6.
exciter.modulator.rfOutput outputFrequency read-only Parameter Output frequency. See section
5.5.2.6.
page 98
exciter.modulator.rfOutput. out-
putChannelMode
exciter.modulator.rfOutput. out- outputChannel read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel. See sec-
putChannelMode tion 5.5.2.6.
exciter.modulator.rfOutput. out- outputChannelOffset read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel offset.
putChannelMode See section 5.5.2.6.
exciter.modulator.rfOutput. out- ouputChannelResolution read-write Parameter Channel Mode > Channel resolu-
putChannelMode tion. See section 5.5.2.6.

exciter.modulator.rfOutput. output-
CentralFrequencyMode
exciter.modulator.rfOutput. output- outputCentralFrequency read-write Parameter Central Frequency Mode > Central
CentralFrequencyMode frequency. See section 5.5.2.6.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
page 99

exciter.rfOutput.mutes mute10MHz read-write (1)
Parameter 10MHz mute. See section 5.5.2.7.

exciter.rfOutput.mutes muteGainMargin read-write (1)
Parameter Gain margin mute. See section 5.5.2.7.
(1)
Only applicable for gap-fillers devices.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
reference
page 100
section 5.5.2.8.
tion 5.5.2.8.

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
reference.synchronization satellitesAntenna read-only Parameter Satellites antenna. See section 5.5.2.9.
page 101

section 5.5.2.9.

Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
amplifier
amplifier configuredPower read-write Parameter Configured power. See section ??.
amplifier powerDisplayOffset read-write Parameter Power offset. See section ??.
page 102
amplifier forwardPower read-only Parameter Forward power. See section ??.

amplifier reversePower read-only Parameter Reverse power. See section ??.
amplifier exceededPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Exceeded power threshold. See section ??.
amplifier decreasedPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Decreased power threshold. See section ??.
amplifier reverserPowerThreshold read-write Parameter Reverse power threshold. See section ??.
amplifier amplifierStageTemperature read-only (1)
Parameter Amplifier stage temperature. See section ??.
amplifier ldmosTransistor1Current read-only (1)
Parameter LDMOS transistor 1 current. See section ??.

(1)
Only applicable for Low power 1/2/3HU devices.
Operation
Ed 03
The MIB module amplifierStagesTable contains the OIDs about the amplifier stages con-
figuration (only applicable for medium power devices with multi amplifier configuration).
Each row at this table corresponds with a amplifier stage (up to 4). For each row following
columns are available:
Name Access Description

amStControlStatus read-only Parameter Control status. See section ??.
amStHwStatus read-only Parameter HW status. See section ??.
amStMuteSelfProtection read-only Parameter Mute (Self-protection). See section ??.
amStForwardPower read-only Parameter Forward power. See section ??.
amStReversePower read-only Parameter Reverse power. See section ??.
amStFanSpeed read-only Parameter Fans speed. See section ??.
amStTemperature read-only Parameter Amplifier stage temperature. See sec-
tion ??.
amStCurrent1 read-only Parameter LDMOS transistor 1 current. See sec-
tion ??.
tion ??.
tion ??.
tion ??.
tion ??.
tion ??.
amStDcLineVoltage1 read-only Parameter DC line 1 voltage. See section ??.
amStDcLineVoltage2 read-only Parameter DC line 2 voltage. See section ??.
amStPsuAStatus read-only Parameter PSU-A status. See section ??.
amStPsuBStatus read-only Parameter PSU-B status. See section ??.
amStPsuCStatus read-only Parameter PSU-C status. See section ??.
page 103 Ed 03
Technical Manual
redundancy
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1DeviceIdentifier read-write Parameter Device identifier. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1ControlBusStatus read-only Parameter Control status. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SystemIp read-write Parameter 1+1 system IP address. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Enable read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Enable. See section ??.
page 104
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1SwitchToAntenna read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Switch to antenna. See sec-
tion ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Mode read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Redundancy mode. See
section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1PriorityAB read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Priority. See section ??.

redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1AutoReturn read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Auto-return. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1Switchings read-only Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Performed switchings (to-
day). See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1MaximumSwitchings read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Maximum switchings / day.
See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1 r1p1InputTest read-write Parameter 1+1 Redundancy > Input test. See section ??.
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
r1p1DeviceA
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusA read-only Parameter Device A > Status. See section ??.
r1p1DeviceA
redundancy.redundancy1p1. switchingCausesA read-only Parameter Device A > Switching causes. See section ??.
page 105
r1p1DeviceA
r1p1DeviceB
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusB read-only Parameter Device B > Status. See section ??.
r1p1DeviceB
redundancy.redundancy1p1. switchingCausesB read-only Parameter Device B > Switching causes. See section ??.
r1p1DeviceB

r1p1RfStatus
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusWhenAntenna read-write Parameter RF status > When antenna. See section ??.
r1p1RfStatus
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1StatusWhenLoad read-write Parameter RF status > When load. See section ??.
r1p1RfStatus
Operation
Ed 03
Technical Manual
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDuration read-write Parameter Automatic verifications > Duration. See section
r1p1AutoVerifications ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVPerformedVerifications read-only Parameter Automatic verifications > Performed verifica-
r1p1AutoVerifications tions. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVMaxVerifications read-write Parameter Automatic verifications > Maximum verifica-
r1p1AutoVerifications tions. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVNexVerification read-only Parameter Automatic verifications > Next verification in.
page 106
r1p1AutoVerifications See section ??.

r1p1AutoVReiterated
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedEnable read-write Parameter Automatic verifications: Reiterated with ca-
r1p1AutoVReiterated dence > Enable. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedPeriod read-write Parameter Automatic verifications: Reiterated with ca-
r1p1AutoVReiterated dence > Period. See section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVReiteratedCadence read-write Parameter Automatic verifications: Reiterated with ca-

r1p1AutoVReiterated dence > Cadence. See section ??.
r1p1AutoVDaily
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDailyEnable read-write Parameter Automatic verifications: Daily > Enable. See
r1p1AutoVDaily section ??.
redundancy.redundancy1p1. r1p1AutoVDailyTime read-write Parameter Automatic verifications: Daily > Time. See sec-
r1p1AutoVDaily tion ??.
Operation
dancy parameters. Parameter Reset. See section ??.
Ed 03
following values:
(NOT APPLY).

faultSummationStatus Alarm Fault summation. See section
5.5.3.2.
warningSummationStatus Alarm Warning summation. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.3.
statusAmplifier
statusAmplifier amplifierStatus Group alarm Amplifier. See section
5.5.3.
statusAmplifier exceededOutputPower Alarm Exceeded power. See section
5.5.3.4.
statusAmplifier decreasedOutputPower Alarm Decreased power. See section
5.5.3.5.
statusAmplifier reflectPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power. See section
5.5.3.7.
statusAmplifier temperatureAmplifierStatus (1)
Alarm Temperature.
statusAsiInput
statusAsiInput asiInputStatus (2)
Group alarm ASI input. See section
5.5.3.
statusAsiInput asi1ErrorStatus (2)
Alarm ASI 1 error. See section ??.
statusAsiInput asi2ErrorStatus (2)
Alarm ASI 2 error. See section ??.
statusIpInput
statusIpInput ipInputStatus (2)
Group alarm IP input. See section
5.5.3.
statusIpInput ipSocket1ErrorStatus (2)
Alarm Socket 1 error. See section
??.
statusIpInput ipSocket2ErrorStatus (2)
Alarm Socket 2 error. See section
??.
(1)
(2)
Only applicable for Low Power 1/2/3HU transmitter devices.
Modules statusSatelliteReceiver1, statusSatelliteReceiver2, statusTerrestialReceiver1 and

statusTerrestialReceiver1 are not applicable.
page 107 Ed 03

statusModulator
statusModulator modulatorStatus Group alarm Modulator. See
section 5.5.3.
statusModulator tsErrorStatus Alarm TS error. See section ??.
statusModulator mipErrorStatus Alarm MIP error. See section ??.
statusModulator mpegOverflowStatus Alarm Input Overflow. See sec-
tion ??.
??.
statusModulator btsErrorStatus Alarm BTS error. See section ??.
statusModulator sfnErrorStatus Alarm SFN reference. See sec-
tion ??.
statusModulator sfnMargin Alarm SFN margin. See section
??.
statusModulator temperatureModulatorStatus Alarm Temperature. See section
??.
statusModulator modulatorOutputStatus Alarm Output level. See section
??.
??.
statusRfInput (1)

5.5.3.9.
statusEchoCanceller (1)
statusEchoCanceller echoCancellerStatus Group alarm IF processor. See

section 5.5.3.
5.5.3.10.
section 5.5.3.11.
statusEchoCanceller temperatureECStatus Alarm Temperature. See section
5.5.3.12.
statusEchoCanceller outputLevelStatus Alarm Output level. See section
5.5.3.13.
5.5.3.14.
statusEchoCanceller gainMarginStatus Alarm Gain margin. See section
5.5.3.14.
statusEchoCanceller cancExternalFeedbackStatus Not applicable.
statusRfOutput
5.5.3.16.
section 5.5.3.17.
5.5.3.18.
(1)
page 108 Ed 03

5.5.3.20.
section 5.5.3.21.
section 5.5.3.22.
tion 5.5.3.23.
statusHwError
section 5.5.3.
statusHwError ldmosTransistorsStatus (1)
Alarm LDMOS transis-
tors.
section 5.5.3.25.
section 5.5.3.26.
5.5.3.27.
statusHwError nonLinearSenseFeedback (1)
Alarm Non-linear sense
feedback.
statusHwError amplifierOutputSample (1)
Alarm Amplifier output
sample.
statusFan
tion 5.5.3.
statusFan fan1Status Alarm Fan 1.
statusFan fan2Status (2)
Alarm Fan 2.
statusFan fan3Status (3)
Alarm Fan 3.
statusExternal
See section 5.5.3.
5.5.3.34.
5.5.3.35.
statusPowerSupply (4)
statusPowerSupply acPowerSupplyStatus (4)

Group alarm AC power
supply. See section 5.5.3.
statusPowerSupply psuAStatus (4)
Alarm PSU A. See section
5.5.3.32.
statusPowerSupply psuBStatus (4)
Alarm PSU B. See section
5.5.3.33.
(1)
(2)
Not applicable for Low Power 2/3HU devices.
(3)
(4)
page 109 Ed 03

statusAmplifierStage1 (1)

statusAmplifierStage1 aS1InputLevelStatus Alarm Input level. See sec-
tion ??.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1ExceededPowerStatus Alarm Exceeded power .
See section ??.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1DecreasedPowerStatus Alarm Decreased power.
See section ??.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1ReflectedPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power. See
section ??.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1TemperatureStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section ??.
statusAmplifierStage1 aS1HwErrorStatus Alarm HW error. See section
??.

statusAmplifierStage2 aS2InputLevelStatus Alarm Input level.
statusAmplifierStage2 aS2ReflectedPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power.
statusAmplifierStage2 aS2TemperatureStatus Alarm Temperature.
statusAmplifierStage2 aS2HwErrorStatus Alarm HW error.


(1)
Only applicable for amplifier stage 1 of Medium Power devices.
(2)
(3)
(4)
page 110 Ed 03
available traps.
• eventTrapLogIndex. Unique identifier of the alarm.
information.
• eventTrapLogIndex. Unique identifier of the event.

information.
page 111 Ed 03

See section 5.5.3.
temperatureAmplifierTrap temperatureAmplifierStatus Alarm Temperature.
See section 5.5.3.
section ??.
section ??.
section 5.5.3.
section ??.
section ??.
satReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
unlockSatReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
rfSignalSatReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
lnbOverloadSatReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
temperatureSatReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
satReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
unlockSatReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
rfSignalSatReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
lnbOverloadSatReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
temperatureSatReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
dttReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
unlockDttReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
rfSignalDttReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
temperatureDttReceiver1Trap Not applicable.
dttReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
unlockDttReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
rfSignalDttReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
temperatureDttReceiver2Trap Not applicable.
(1)
page 112 Ed 03

section ??.
section ??.
See section ??.
section ??.
See section ??.
section ??.
See section ??.
See section ??.
section 5.5.3.16.
cancellerShouldersTrap cancellerShouldersStatus Alarm Shoulders.
section 5.5.3.23.
section 5.5.3.
tenna. See section
5.5.3.17.
section 5.5.3.18.
5.5.3.19.
section 5.5.3.20.
ence.
acPowerSupplyTrap acPowerSupplyStatus Group alarm AC power
supply. See section
5.5.3.
page 113 Ed 03

section 5.5.3.
ldmosTransistorsTrap ldmosTransistorsStatus (1)
Alarm LDMOS transis-
tors.
section 5.5.3.25.
section 5.5.3.26.
5.5.3.27.
tion 5.5.3.
5.5.3.29.
fan2Trap fan2Status (2)
Alarm Fan 2.
fan3Trap fan3Status (3)
Alarm Fan 3.
See section 5.5.3.
5.5.3.34.
5.5.3.35.
tion ??.
feedback.
tion ??.
rfInputTrap rfInputStatus (4)
Alarm RF input. See sec-
tion 5.5.3.9.
echoCancellerTrap echoCancellerStatus (4)
Group alarm IF proces-
sor. See section 5.5.3.
inputLevelTrap inputLevelStatus (4)
Alarm Input level. See
section 5.5.3.10.
temperatureECTrap temperatureECStatus (4)
Alarm Temperature. See
section 5.5.3.12.
outputLevelTrap outputLevelStatus (4)
Alarm Output level. See
section 5.5.3.13.
gainMarginStatusTrap gainMarginStatus (4)
Alarm Gain margin.
cancExternalFeedbackStatus- cancExternalFeedbackStatus (4)
Alarm Gain margin.
Trap
modulatorMerStatusTrap modulatorMerStatus Alarm MER. See section ??.
modExternalFeedbackStatus- modulatorExternalFeedback- Alarm External feedback.
Trap Status See section ??.
(1)
(2)
Not applicable for Low Power 2/3HU devices.
(3)
(4)
Only applicable for Low Power gap-fillers devices.
page 114 Ed 03
All OIDs from following table are only applicable for the corresponding amplifier stage of
Medium Power devices.

aS1InputLevelTrap aS1InputLevelStatus Alarm Input level. See sec-
tion ??.
aS1ExceededPowerTrap aS1ExceededPowerStatus Alarm Exceeded power .
See section ??.
aS1DecreasedPowerTrap aS1DecreasedPowerStatus Alarm Decreased power.
See section ??.
aS1ReflectedPowerTrap aS1ReflectedPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power. See
section ??.
aS1TemperatureTrap aS1TemperatureStatus Alarm Temperature. See
section ??.
aS1HwErrorTrap aS1HwErrorStatus Alarm HW error. See section
??.
aS2InputLevelTrap aS2InputLevelStatus Alarm Input level.
aS2ReflectedPowerTrap aS2ReflectedPowerStatus Alarm Reflected power.
aS2TemperatureTrap aS2TemperatureStatus Alarm Temperature.
aS2HwErrorTrap aS2HwErrorStatus Alarm HW error.
page 115 Ed 03
Trap Description
dateAndTimeReferenceTrap Event Date and time source. See section 5.5.1.6.
systemInitTrap Event System init. See section 5.5.1.6.
guiOperationTrap Event GUI operation. See section 5.5.1.6.
muteTrap Event Mute. See section 5.5.1.6.
inputSourceSelectedTrap Event Input source selected. See section 5.5.1.6.
selectedReferenceTrap Event Selected reference. See section 5.5.1.6.
forcedMfnTrap Event Forced MFN (reference error). See section
5.5.1.6.
localModeTimeoutTrap Event Local mode timeout. See section 5.5.1.6.
redundancyTrap Event Redundancy. See section 5.5.1.6.
configurationFromBackupTrap Event Configuration backups. See section 5.5.1.6.
systemShutdownTrap Event System shutdown. See section 5.5.1.6.
Trap Description
testTrap Test trap. Set OID sendTestTrap to the value 1 to send.
keep aliveTrap keep alive trap sent automatically after a user-configurable
timeout. See section 5.5.1.4.
page 116 Ed 03
SNMP conformance.

objectGroups
of the MIB
objectGroups groupFSevents
objectGroups groupTest
groupCompilance
page 117 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5 Menu structure

• System.
– General.
– WEB interface.
– SNMP.
∗ Alarms.
∗ Events.
∗ I/O interface.
– Device info.
– Service.
∗ Reset.
∗ SW Upgrade.
∗ RF Input level.
∗ Forward Power.
∗ Efficiency.
∗ Power supply.
∗ Cooling.
∗ Service report.
• Setup.
– Exciter.
∗ RF input.
∗ IF processor.
· General.
· System.
· Echo Canceller.
· Precorrector.
∗ RF output.
· Mutes.
– Reference.
∗ Synchronization module(a) .
– Amplifier.
• Status.
• EventLog.
(a)
page 118 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.1 System Menu

Language
Name
Location

Operation mode
In case of device in local mode, after this configurable time without any operation, the
device changes into remote mode automatically in order to avoid an accidentally blocking
of remote access. It is possible to select the option disabled to avoid the automatically
return.
Date / time
Current
Current data and time of the system, current source (Manual, GNSS, NTP) and current
status (Sync or Not Sync).
Main source
To set the main date and time source. Possible values are Manual, GNSS, NTP.
Secondary source
values are - (disabled), GNSS, NTP.
page 119 Ed 03
Menu structure
Manual
Time zone
UTC offset
NTP Server
To set the IP address of NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. Only with NTP.
Update period
NTP Status
Local NTP Server

Remote interface
DHCP
DHCP client. If this parameter is enabled the configuration of the ethernet remote inter-
Remote IP address
IP address of ethernet interface for remote operation. Factory default 192.168.0.100.
page 120 Ed 03
Menu structure
Netmask
Network mask of ethernet interface for remote operation.
Gateway
Gateway address of ethernet interface for remote operation. For access from an external
DNS Server
MAC address
MAC address of ethernet interface.
Local interface
Local IP address
IP address of ethernet interface for local operation. Factory default 192.168.1.1.
NOTE:
GbE1..GbE4
The device allows configure each of the 4 ports (GbE1, GbE2, GbE3, GbE4) into isolating
networks (up to 4: A network, B networ, C network and D network). It is possible to
disabling the port. See section 2.2.2.2 for more detailed information.
Links status
GbE1..GbE4
Status of the link for each ethernet connection. Possible values are: Disabled, DOWN

Web autorefresh
Autorefresh
Timeout
page 121 Ed 03
Menu structure
User control
This menu allows you to change the passwords for the availables Web user accounts.
User accounts:
User
Actual password
New password

This menu allows you to set the passwords to its default values for the availables Web
user accounts.
admin
public
5.5.1.4 System > SNMP

MIBs IRT files
MIB
MIB version
page 122 Ed 03
Menu structure
Send a trap test
Agent configuration
Read community 1
For defining the read community 1 for SET queries. By default: public.
Read community 2
For defining the read community 2 for SET queries. By default: public.
Write community 1
For defining the write community 1 for GET queries. By default: private.
Write community 2
For defining the write community 2 for GET queries. By default: private.
Authentication trap

Keepalive trap
Traps in local mode

Sink status
page 123 Ed 03
Menu structure
Traps versions
Destination IP
Destination port
Inform timeout
Informs retries
Trap community

This menu allows you to set up the settings for the specific alarms availables in the device
For each alarm following settings are availables:
Setting Description
1+1 To enable or disable the alarm as a switching cause for 1+1 re-
dundancy.
page 124 Ed 03
Menu structure

For each event following settings are availables:
Setting Description
The list of events availables are:
RF output.
5. Forced MFN (reference error). The device change into the MFN forced by a
reference lost.
to 30 minutes without any user operaton.
12. Redundancy. Any change in the 1+1 redundancy status.

port.
Input #
Current status
closed.
page 125 Ed 03
Menu structure
Description
Stand-by status
Mode
details).
Pulse duration
seconds.
Output relay #
Current status
or closed.
Description
Stand-by status
Mode
Pulse duration
seconds.

Part Number
Serial Number
Software version
page 126 Ed 03
Menu structure
Software ID
Indentifier of the Software release.
Hardware basis
Hardware options
NOTE:
Hardware options detailed in section 2.2.10 can be installed by the user.
Software options
NOTE:
Software options detailed in section 2.2.10 can be installed by the user.


• RF reset. To perfom a RF output restart in order to restore the device from an

automatic self-protection. See section 7.4.2 for more details.

5.5.1.11 System > Service > RF Input Level

This menu allows you to perform a calibration of the input level display.
Needed steps are:
• Connect the level meter to the input signal that feeds the device through the RF
input port.
• Set the level displayed at level meter in watts into the corresponding field.
• Press Calibrate button to perform the calibration.
page 127 Ed 03
Menu structure
• Check that the current input level displayed in the level meter and in the device are
the same.
It is posible to check the result of the input calibration process.

Needed steps are:

the same.
It is posible to check the result of the forward power calibration process.

precorrection.
It is posible to check the result of the precorrection process at the status parameter and
also to remove the optimización by pressing the Remove optimization button.

(average between upper and lower).
It is possible to check the result of the process and also to remove the efficiency improve-
ment by pressing the Optimize performance button.
5.5.1.15 System > Service > power supply

This menu allows you to check up to 4 internal DC voltages of the table 5.2.
(∗)
When the Efficiency Improvement is running, the nominal voltage of this line
can vary into the range from 44V to 50V.
page 128 Ed 03
Menu structure
DC line Nominal voltage Lower limit Upper limit

DC line 1 1.1V 1.0V 1.2V
DC line 2 5V 4.5V 5.5V
DC line 3 27V 26V 28V
DC line 4 41.5V 40V 43V
Table 5.2: Internal DC lines.
In case of 3HU devices it is possible to check the status of the AC power supply units.
For each unit, PSU A (or 1 - basic, see figure 2.7) or PSU B (or 2 - redundant, see figure
2.7), the available measurements are:
• Status. To check the general status of the PSU. Ok in case of a correct perfor-
mance or an error message (one of the table 5.3) in case of a malfunction detected.
• AC input voltage. Measured value of the input AC voltage.
• DC output voltage. Measured value of the output DC voltage of the PSU that is
used for supplying the device.
• Temperature. Internal temperature of the PSU.
Error message
Comm error
Another
CML
Temperature
Vin UV
Iout OC
Vout OV
Off
Busy
Unknown
Other
Fan
Power
Input
Iout/Pout
Vout
Table 5.3: Error messages from AC power supply of 3U devices.
5.5.1.16 System > Service > Cooling

This menu allows you to perform service tasks related with fans:
• Fan X status. To check the fan X (X =1, 2 or 3) status: running, stand by or failed.
• Speed. To check the fans speed (% maximum speed).
• Fan X operating time. To check the fan X (X =1, 2 or 3) operating time in hours.
• Fan X reset button . To perform a reinitialization of the operating time counter of
fan X (X =1, 2 or 3) in case of a fan replacement. See section 8.9 for more details.
page 129 Ed 03
Menu structure

This menu allows you to manage the congiguration files (with .trc extension).
configuration (partialy or completely) to the same device or to another device.

• Redundant power supply. Allows you to install or uninstall the Redundant power
supply option for 3HU devices. Follow the instructions detailed at section 8.3.5 or

the device.
contact.

page 130 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.2 Setup Menu

5.5.2.1 Setup > Exciter > RF Input > RF Configuration
The central input frequency of the device can be set in two different modes:
Selects the input frequency configuration mode.
Input frequency
Input level
Indicates the current input RF level of the device in dBm. The resolution is 1dBm.
When the input level is under the input threshold (detailed below), Low level is indicated
instead. When the input level is over over -15dBm, High level is indicated instead.
Input level threshold
This parameter allows you to set a threshold in dBm for the triggered of the RF input
alarm. When the input level is under the input threshold RF input alarm is triggered and
the RF output is muted.
Channel Mode
Channel
The input frequency is set as a function of the channel and the bandwith.
Channel offset
sible values are: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Channel resolution
frecuency. There are three possible steps: 1/6 MHz, 1/7MHz or 1/8MHz.

Central frequency
page 131 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.2.2 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > General

IF board temperature
Temperature (in o C) measured at the signal board.
2.2.6) and for the trigger of Temperature [IF processor] alarm.
Echo canceller
Indicates the type of echo canceller that it is enabled. Only available with echo canceller
SW option.
5.5.2.3 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > System

Bandwidth
This parameter indicates the signal bandwidth for the device.
This parameter is not possible to be changed by the user, since requires a different hard-
ware configuration.
Bandwidth adaptation
Refines the first bandwidth selection taking into account the different digital television
standard bandwidths. Possible values are:
• DVB-T/T2: DVB-T or DVB-T2 without extended carriers.
• DVB-T2 8K ext: DVB-T2 8K with extended carriers.
• DVB-T2 16/32K ext: DVB-T2 16K or 32K with extended carriers.
• ISDB-T: ISDB-T/Tb.
Additional delay
Sets an additional delay in µs which could be useful in certain situations under the pres-
ence of strong pre-echoes in order to pass them unaltered.
Current delay
Indicates in µs an approximate measurement of the device latency in microseconds.
IF processor levels
Input
The level (in dB full scale) at the input of IF processor.
page 132 Ed 03
Menu structure
Reference
The level (in dB full scale) at the feedback input of IF processor (for the reference of echo
canceller).
Cancellation
The cancellation (in dB full scale) performed by the echo canceller.
Output
The level (in dB full scale) at the output of the IF processor.
5.5.2.4 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Echo canceller

The whole cancellation window is split into 16 independent sections. The cancellation
performance for any of these sub windows can be defined according to the echoes char-
acteristics. This tuning directly affects the equalization speed of the adaptive filtering
stages making the echo canceller able to cope up with dynamic scenarios where echoes
may have magnitude and/or frequency shifts (Doppler frequency shifts, Rice channels,
etc.). However, increasing the algorithm’s speed may also affect the maximum MER the
equipment can provide at its output.
Echo cancellation
Allows you to enable or disable the echo cancellation performance.
Gain margin
Provides a measurement (in dB) of the relation between the feedback echo level from the
output of the device and the input signal of the device. In case of positive values over
15dB the indication is >15 dB.
Gain margin threshold
Allows you to set a threshold (in dB) for the gain margin mute (see menu Setup > Exciter
> RF Output > Mutes) and for the gain margin alarm . Possible values are from -20 dB
(echo 20dB over the main signal) to 10 dB (echo 10dB under the main signal).
Window speed
Window #
Sets the window # cancellation speed from 1 (low) to 7 (high). If the speed is set to zero
the window section is disabled.
Windows 1 and 2 are always enabled.
Through the WEB GUI, the Impulse response trace of the whole cancellation temporal
window is automatically displayed by selecting this menu (or by clicking at the icon
at Echo canceller block of the system overview) and provides a better comprehension of
the incoming/outgoing echoes making the manual configuration easier.
page 133 Ed 03
Menu structure
Figure 5.13: Cancellation window setup and impulse response.
In case of a feedback echo with a higher level than the main signal (Gain margin < 0),
the input graph shows a trace with the feedback echo with its peak at the top of the scale
and with a red dot in the peak. In this case, the relative difference between feedback
echo and main signal is indicated in the measurement of the gain margin.
5.5.2.5 Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Precorrector

Amplitude equalization
Enable
Allows you to enabling a linear correction of the amplitude spectrum in order to equalize
the output spectrum response (before band-pass filter) to absorb the variations from the
incoming signal.
Non-linear precorrection
Enable
Precorrector levels
Input
Status
Feedback
Output
page 134 Ed 03
Menu structure
Spectrum measures
Shoulder alarm
der alarm.
Lower shoulder
Upper shoulder
icon.

Output frequency
Channel Mode
Channel
The output frequency is set as a function of the channel and the bandwith.
Channel offset
page 135 Ed 03
Menu structure
Channel resolution
frecuency. There are three possible steps: 1/6 MHz, 1/7MHz or 1/8MHz.

Central frequency

at section 2.2.3.7 for more details.
Status
are:
2.2.5).
Mute causes
at section 2.2.3.7):
• Gain margin: Gain margin mute.
• 10MHz: 10MHz mute.
• HW error PD: General hardware error self-protection. See section 2.2.5.3.
Following mutes are only available with the Gap Filler/Transposer hardware basis:
page 136 Ed 03
Menu structure
10MHz mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of loss of 10MHz syn-
chronization signal.
Gain margin mute
This mute allows you to switch off the output of the device in case of echo canceller gain
margin (measured at Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Echo canceller menu ) reaches
the Gain margin threshold configured at Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Echo can-
celler menu .
The device returns to normal operation only when a RF reset (See section 7.4.2) or a
System reset (See section 7.4.1) is performing.
The performance of this mute is in relation with the status of the Gain margin alarm.

Reference
ence of the device.
Switching mode
page 137 Ed 03
Menu structure
Selected 10MHz
Selected 1PPS
NOTE:
installed.
Mode
rectly.

placed inside.

inside.
Receiver type
Serial Number
page 138 Ed 03
Menu structure
Status
Satellites antenna
1PPS input
detected.
Holdover time
mode.
Endless holdover
If this parameter is enabled, holdover mode is maintaining forever (or until a restart of the
device).
Holdover limit
Latitude
Longitude
page 139 Ed 03
Menu structure
Altitude
synchronization module date
Constellation
5.5.2.10 Setup > Amplifier

Power offset
example to display the power after the band-pass filter.for example to display the power
after the band-pass filter.
Configured power
This parameter allows to regulate the output power of the device. The output power
band pass filter at the RF output connector at the rear side as detailed in table 5.4.

1HU (10W) 1W 15W
1HU (40W) 4W 45W
1HU (75W) 7.5W 80W
2HU 15W 165W
3HU 30W 325W
Table 5.4: Output power (at RF output connector) regulation limits.
If the output power is configured outside these margins, the quality parameters of the
transmitter output signal (distance to shoulder, MER ,...) may not correspond to its tech-
nical specifications.
page 140 Ed 03
Menu structure
NOTE:
In case of a small deviation between the displayed power and the output
power measured in the power meter, a power calibration can be done in the
System > Service > Forward Power menu (see section 5.5.1.12). It must be
taken into account maximum output power levels that the device is able to
reach maintaining specifications.
Forward power
Indicates the current forward power (in watts) that is transmitting the power amplifier. For
the amplifier output with a resolution of 100mW and also the offset configured previously.
The range is the same as previously configured power parameter.
This measure is taken into account (together with the corresponding power thresholds)
for the trigger of exceeded output power alarm and decreased output power alarm.
This measurement (together with the exceeded power threshold) is also taken into
Reverse power
plifier output with a resolution of 100mW.
This measurement (together with the forward power measurement) is taken into account
for excessive reflected power self-protection (as detailed in section 2.2.5.1) and for the
trigger of Reflected power alarm.
gers the Exceeded power alarm.
This measurement (together with the forward power measurement) is also taken into
gers the Decreased power alarm.
page 141 Ed 03
Menu structure
the Reflected power alarm.
Temperature (in o C) measured at the amplifier output stage.
Indicates the consumption currents of the LDMOS transistors (up to 4) at output stage of
power amplifier stage in amperes with a resolution of 10mA.
These measurements (together with the ranges of table 2.1) are taken into account for
LDMOS currents self-protection (as detailed in section 2.2.5.4) and for the trigger of LD-
MOS transistors alarm.
page 142 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.3 Status
Amplifier 3
[Non critical]
RF input 88 Section 5.5.3.9.
IF processor 89
Input level 90 Section 5.5.3.10.
10MHz reference 51 Section 5.5.3.11.
Output level 92 Section 5.5.3.13.
Shoulders 42 Section 5.5.3.14.
Gain margin 108 Section 5.5.3.15.
page 143 Ed 03
Menu structure
Alarm ID Diagnosis
Satellites antenna 46 (a)
Section 5.5.3.17.
UnLock 47 (a)
Section 5.5.3.18.
Holdover not available 48 (a)
Section 5.5.3.19.
1PPS input 44 (a)
Section 5.5.3.23.
HW error 57
LDMOS transistors 58 Section 5.5.3.24.
Amplifier output sample Section 5.5.3.28.
Fan 62
Fan 1 63 Section 5.5.3.29.
Fan 2 64 Section 5.5.3.30.
Fan 3 65 Section 5.5.3.31.
(b)
AC power supply 53
PSU A 54 (b)
Section 5.5.3.32.
PSU B 55 (b)
Section 5.5.3.33.
External alarm 66
(a)
(b)
Only available for 3HU devices.
page 144 Ed 03
Menu structure


tion).

amplifier) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Exceeded power threshold at Setup
> Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.10.

amplifier) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Decreased power threshold
at Setup > Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.10.

threshold [Non critical] at Setup > Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.10.

It is triggered when the measure of reverse power (detected at the output stage of the
amplifier) exceeds a user-configurable threshold (Reverse power threshold at Setup >
Amplifier menu). See section 5.5.2.10.
5.5.3.7 Amplifier :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of amplifier stage temperature (Setup > Amplifier
menu) exceeds 75o C (in 1HU/2HU devices) or 80o C (in 3HU devices). These thresholds
are not user-configurable. See section 5.5.2.10.

page 145 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.3.8 RF input
It is triggered when the measure of the level of the RF signal detected at the input of
the gap filler or transposer is under a user-configurable threshold (Input level threshold
at Setup > Exciter > RF input > RF configuration menu). See section 5.5.2.1.
When this alarm is triggered, the RF output of the device is muted. The device returns
automatically to normal operation when input level is above input level threshold.
5.5.3.9 IF processor :: Input level

It is triggered when the level of the signal detected at the input of the IF processor is
not enough to excite this stage.
5.5.3.10 IF processor :: 10MHz reference

input of the IF processor stage.
10MHz mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.7 section.
5.5.3.11 IF processor :: Temperature

It is triggered when the measure of IF board temperature (Setup > Exciter > IF proces-
sor > General menu) exceeds 70o C. This threshold is not user-configurable.
5.5.3.12 IF processor :: Output level

It is triggered when the IF processor does not provide signal at intermediate frequency.
5.5.3.13 IF processor :: Shoulders

ple (Lower shoulder or Upper shoulder at Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Precorrec-
tor menu) decreases under a user-configurable threshold (Shoulder alarm at Setup >
Exciter > IF processor > Precorrector menu).
5.5.3.14 IF processor :: Gain margin

It is triggered when the measure of the gain margin of the gap filler (the relation between
the feedback echo and the input signal) (Gain margin measurement at Setup > Exciter >
IF processor > Echo canceller menu) decreases under a user-configurable threshold
(Gain margin threshold at Setup > Exciter > IF processor > Echo canceller menu).
10MHz mute performance is based on this alarm. See 5.5.2.7 section.
5.5.3.15 RF output
is not enough to excite the amplifier stage.
page 146 Ed 03
Menu structure





module.

configurable.

external one. Active source and switching options can be configured at menu Setup >
Reference > Reference source, see section 5.5.2.8).
page 147 Ed 03
Menu structure

external one. Active source and switching options can be configured at menu Setup >
Reference > Reference source, see section 5.5.2.8).
5.5.3.23 HW error :: LDMOS transistors

It is triggered when the measure of the current consumption of any of the LDMOS tran-
sistors at the output stage of the amplifier is out of the limits of the table 2.1.
Together with this alarm, a self-protection due to LDMOS currents out-of-range is trig-



It is triggered when any of the voltages of the internal DC lines measured in the device
(menu System > Service > power supply, see section 5.5.1.15) and that are generated
from the DC output voltage from AC power supply is out of its usual range detailed in
the table 5.2.
5.5.3.27 HW error :: Amplifier output sample

It is triggered when the level of the RF signal detected from the feedback signal is not
enough to a correct performance of the linear precorrector of the gap filler or transposer.
5.5.3.28 Fan :: Fan 1

5.5.3.29 Fan :: Fan 2

fan placed in second position from the left looking from rear to front.
page 148 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.3.30 Fan :: Fan 3

It is triggered when a failure is detected in the fan 3 at the rear side of the device. This
fan is only available in 1U devices and is placed in third position from the left looking
from rear to front.
5.5.3.31 AC power supply :: PSU A

It is triggered when the AC power supply A (1 - basic, see figure 2.7) returns an error
message of the table 5.3.
5.5.3.32 AC power supply :: PSU B

It is triggered when the AC power supply B (2 - redundant, see figure 2.7) returns an
error message of the table 5.3.

NOTE:
External alarm is not available when the 1+1 redundancy is enabled, because
I/O port is reserved for 1+1 functionality

NOTE:
External alarm is not available when the 1+1 redundancy is enabled, because
I/O port is reserved for 1+1 functionality
page 149 Ed 03
Menu structure
5.5.4 EventLog


page 150 Ed 03
6 Maintenance

6.1.1 and 6.1.2 details the step by step procedures for a single drive configuration.
CAUTION:
page 151 Ed 03
Software upgrade

NOTE:
page 152 Ed 03
Software upgrade
page 153 Ed 03
Software upgrade
Error control
for the file size.
retry.
page 154 Ed 03
Software upgrade
error:
page 155 Ed 03
Software upgrade

server.
the new version.

page 156 Ed 03
Software upgrade

download type.
available .
page 157 Ed 03
Software upgrade
page 158 Ed 03
Software upgrade
Error control
page 159 Ed 03
Software upgrade
Check the URL.
manifest.list.
sion. Try again.
error:
page 160 Ed 03
Software upgrade
page 161 Ed 03
Software upgrade

Chrome for Desktop

Firefox for Desktop

erything".
Opera for Desktop


the entire cache.
Microsoft Edge
page 162 Ed 03
Software upgrade
Safari for macOS

Safari for Windows

Safari for iOS

Chrome for Android
page 163 Ed 03

Dust can be removed manually with a brush or with the help of a vacuum cleaner or
blower. If manual cleaning is chosen, the technician should be grounded to prevent ESD,
either through conductive shoes or through a static grounding strap. If a blower is used,
protect equipment from ESD grounding the nozzle, which should be metallic.
ical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers. To clean
page 164 Ed 03
7 Troubleshooting

flowchart.
INPUT
inputs.
section 5.2).
ALARMS
7.2).
7.2).
page 165 Ed 03
Fault Diagnosis via alarms status

Alarm ID Diagnosis
[Non critical]
7.3).
Temperature 7 Overtemperature at amplifier stage.
RF input 88 Check RF input signal frequency and level.
IF processor 89 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
Input level 90 Go to "No output power" flowchart for gap fillers
and transposers (section 7.3).
10MHz reference 51 Check 10MHz external cabling.
Temperature 91 Overtemperature at gap fillers / transposers signal
board.
Output level 92 Go to "No output power" flowchart for gap fillers
and transposers (section 7.3).
Shoulders 42 Reduce output power. Digital precorrector, signal
board or amplfier damaged.
Gain margin 108 Improve the isolation between the RF reception
and transmission system. Reduce output power.
page 166 Ed 03
Fault Diagnosis via alarms status
Alarm ID Diagnosis
7.3).
7.3).
See section 8.5.
ule.
LDMOS transistors 58 The device is damaged.
Amplifier output sample The device is damaged.
AC power supply 53 See diagnosis of sub-alarms below.
PSU A 54 Replace the power supply unit A. See sec-
tion 8.8.3.
PSU B 55 Replace the power supply unit B. See sec-
tion 8.8.3.
page 167 Ed 03
Fault Diagnosis via flowchart

RF service failure

Green? flowchart.
NO

The POWER LED is

Green?
NO

spare one.

Green? damaged.
NO
page 168 Ed 03
No output power [GAP FILLER

/ TRANSPOSER]. Output power
alarm. RF OUTPUT LED: Red.
No Mute causes (section 5.5.2.7).
YES
NO
IF processor: Output NO
level alarm?
YES
YES Check input signal level and

RF Input alarm?
frequency.
NO
IF processor: Input YES

level alarm?
NO
page 169 Ed 03

Reflected power YES

alarm?
NO

Reflected power NO
alarm?
YES

justed.
page 170 Ed 03
page 171 Ed 03
SFN Reference

NO

NO

flowchart.
ceiver ?
NO

Sync. module
Check
YES YES 10MHz
and 1PPS
mode = OCXO? alarm?
external
cabling.
NO NO

YES

page 172 Ed 03
SNMP communication
problems

interface correctly
connected?
.
YES

SNMP SW option li-
censed?
SNMP SW option.
YES
Correct Community
(case-sensitive)?
YES

ing SNMP packets?
YES

YES
page 173 Ed 03

upgrading?
the upgrade.
AFTER

the upgrade.
YES
page 174 Ed 03
Reset
7.4 Reset
7.4.1 System Reset
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 5.3.2).

7.4.2 RF Reset
This procedure performs a RF output restart in order to restore the device from an auto-
matic self-protection. For example for overtemperature or for reflection protection.
1. Log on to the Management via web browser (see the chapter 5.3.2).
page 175 Ed 03
8 Service

coupling device.

page 176 Ed 03
Change of the input frequency
8.2 Change of the input frequency

This service task is only applicable for changing the iinput RF central frequency of the
Gap Fillers or Transposers.
2. Go to Setup > Exciter > RF input > RF configuration menu and set the desired
iinput central frequency.

The level displayed in the input level measurement would be correct due to the fact
that the iinput reference value is adjusted at factory for all frequencies. But, in any
case, you can adjust the device input level to the desired value at System > Service
> RF iinput level menu as detailed in section 5.5.1.11. After the calibration, check
the new input level displayed at input level.
page 177 Ed 03
Install/Uninstall a HW option

8.3.1 Install the Synchronization board (GPS/GNSS)

tion 8.7.1.

section 8.5.2.
8.3.2 Uninstall the Synchronization board (GPS/GNSS)

1. Remove the Synchronization board (GPS/GNSS) following the instructions de-
tailed at section 8.5.1.
8.7.2.

tion 8.7.1.

section 8.5.2.
page 178 Ed 03
Install/Uninstall a HW option

section 8.5.1.
8.7.2.
8.3.5 Install the redundant 3HU AC power supply

1. Insert the new AC power supply in the second (upper) slot following the instruc-
4. At Redundant PSU select the Redundant PSU enabled option.
dundant PSU option is installed.
8.3.6 Uninstall the redundant 3HU AC power supply

1. Remove the new AC power supply in the second (upper) slot following the instruc-
4. At Redundant PSU select the Redundant PSU disabled option.
dundant PSU option is not available.
page 179 Ed 03
Install a SW option

page 180 Ed 03
GPS/GNSS receiver replacement
8.5 GPS/GNSS receiver replacement

the optional GPS/GNSS receiver module.
The design of the device allows a plug and play installation of the GPS/GNSS module.
So, it is possible to perform this procedure while the device is running.
CAUTION:
8.5.1 Removing GPS/GNSS receiver

2. Remove the screws (4x) on the four corners of the GPS/GNSS Receiver cover
using a PH2 screwdriver.
3. Remove the GPS/GNSS Receiver Module from the slot pulling by the two handles
at the same time.
that the GPS/GNSS receiver is not detected.
NOTE: GPS/GNSS slot must not be empty. In case that the GNSS is not replaced for
a spare one, External Reference module (or OCXO module) must be inserted
instead. Go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at Synchroniza-
tion board select the External reference (or OCXO ) option and click in Apply
button. Follow the steps of procedure 8.7.2 (or 8.6.2) for completing the removal.
8.5.2 Installing GPS/GNSS receiver

PH2 screwdriver.
3. Connect the cables of the GPS/GNSS Receiver Module that are needed (ANTENNA,
page 181 Ed 03
OCXO module replacement

CAUTION:

PH2 screwdriver.
time.
removal.

PH2 screwdriver.
page 182 Ed 03
External reference module replacement

driver.
tion.

PH2 screwdriver.
page 183 Ed 03
AC power supply replacement
8.8 AC power supply replacement

8.8.1 1HU devices
vices.
CAUTION:
page 184 Ed 03
side of the device.
2. Remove the 6 screws (1) at bottom and lateral side close to the PSU using a PH2
screwdriver.
3. Remove the 7 screws (2)(2a) at top side close to the PSU using a PH2 screw-
driver.
4. Remove the 4 screws (3) of the adjacent module to the PSU at rear side using a
PH2 screwdriver.
5. Pull the adjacent module out.
6. Pull the PSU unit out.
7. Push the new PSU unit inside the slot.

8. Push back the adjacent module.
9. Fasten the 4 screws (3) of the adjacent module to the PSU at rear side using a PH2
screwdriver.
10. Fasten the 7 screws (2)(2a) at top side close to the PSU using a PH2 screwdriver.
11. Fasten the 6 screws (1) at bottom and lateral side close to the PSU using a PH2
screwdriver.
green.
page 185 Ed 03
8.8.2 2HU devices

vices.
CAUTION:
side of the device.
2. Remove the two screws (1) at the side close to the PSU using a PH2 screwdriver.
page 186 Ed 03
3. Pull the unit out with the handle (2).
4. Push the new unit inside the slot through the rail.
5. Fasten the two screws (1) at the side close to the PSU using a PH2 screwdriver.
green.
page 187 Ed 03
8.8.3 3HU devices

the AC power supply unit for 3HU devices.
The design of the device allows, due to a built-in Oring MOSFET in each power supply
unit, a hot-swap installation of up to 2 AC power supply units. So, it is possible to perform
this procedure without turning off the AC source providing to the device.
CAUTION:
supply unit (disconnect the power plug).

page 188 Ed 03
8.8.3.1 Removing AC power supply (3HU)

the device.
3. Press the clip (1) and pull the unit out with the handle (2).
driver.
NOTE: In case of removing the redundant power supply placed at the upper slot, if this
slot will be empty, please go to System > Service > Install HW / SW menu and at
Redundant PSU select the Redundant PSU disabled option and click in Apply
button in order to avoid monitoring the alarms from the redundant power supply
slot.
8.8.3.2 Installing AC power supply (3HU)

2. Grasp the handle (2) and push inside the slot through the rail.
the device.
4. Check that LED at the front of the power supply keeps green.
driver.
page 189 Ed 03
Fans replacement

the devices.

ment
page 190 Ed 03
Fans replacement
6. Through the desired GUI, go to System > Service > Cooling and at the reset of
operating time counter of each fan press the corresponding button.
page 191 Ed 03
Change of fuse
8.10 Change of fuse

8.10.1 1HU/2HU devices
CAUTION:
1HU Devices 2HU Devices

Fuse: 6.3A / 250V 10A / 250V
page 192 Ed 03
Change of fuse
8.10.2 3HU devices
CAUTION:
3HU Devices
Fuse: 20A / 250V
2. Retire the power supply unit (see section 8.8.3.1).
4. Insert the power supply unit (see section 8.8.3.2).
page 193 Ed 03
Saving and restoring configuration

menu.
page 194 Ed 03
user.




Date and time
Events
I/O interface
page 195 Ed 03
Input (Transmitter) IP sockets

ASIs
Input switching
RF input (Gap Filler) RF configuration
IF processor (Gap Filler) General
System
Echo canceller
Precorrector
Modulator (Transmitter) General
System
Network
Modulation
T2 Frame(DVB-T2)
PLP(DVB-T2)
Precorrector
Amplifier Amplifier
page 196 Ed 03
UNE-EN ISO 9001
ER-1491/2007
c TRedess 2010 S.L.

Tel: +34.981.534.203
Fax: +34.981.522.052
TRedess 2010, S.L.
.
S PA I N
GPS N: 42° 51’ 52.93”, W: 8° 34’ 5.19”

T +34 981 534 203
F +34 981 522 052

www.tredess.com

System Manual FS Tredess 04 FULL

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

System Manual FS Tredess 04 FULL

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical Manual

Documentation included in this package:

UNE-EN ISO 9001

c TRedess 2010 S.L.

UNE-EN ISO 9001

c TRedess 2010 S.L.

DECLARACIÓN UE DE CONFORMIDAD SIMPLIFICADA

DECLARAÇÃO UE DE CONFORMIDADE SIMPLIFICADA

DECLARATION UE DE CONFORMITE SIMPLIFIEE

DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITÀ UE SEMPLIFICATA

ZJEDNODUŠENÉ EU PROHLÁŠENÍ O SHODE

LIHTSUSTATUD ELI VASTAVUSDEKLARATSIOON

POJEDNOSTAVLJENA EU IZJAVA O SUKLADNOSTI

SUPAPRASTINTA ES ATITIKTIES DEKLARACIJA

EGYSZERUSÍTETT EU-MEGFELELOSÉGI NYILATKOZAT

DIKJARAZZJONI SSIMPLIFIKATA TA’ KONFORMITÀ TAL-UE

UPROSZCZONA DEKLARACJA ZGODNOSCI UE

DECLARATIA UE DE CONFORMITATE SIMPLIFICATA

ZJEDNODUŠENÉ EÚ VYHLÁSENIE O ZHODE

Zjednodušené EÚ vyhlásenie o zhode uvedené v clánku 10 ods. 9 znie takto:

POENOSTAVLJENA IZJAVA EU O SKLADNOSTI

FÖRENKLAD EU-FÖRSÄKRAN OM ÖVERENSSTÄMMELSE

2 Design and Characteristics 9

5.3.4 Log out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

5.5.3.35 Synchronization module :: Satellites antenna . . . . . . . 272

8.5 Install a SW option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

• Do not obstruct the ventilation slots of the equipment.

• Air circulation at front and rear must be free to avoid overheating.

Operation Safe equipment:

• Operation allowed only under responsibility of electrically qualified persons and

2 Design and Characteristics

• Architecture based on an exciter and separate amplifiers:

– 1 amplifier : up to 600W (DVB-T).

• Amplifiers, up to 600W (DVB-T) in 3HU, use Ultra-Wide-Band Doherty technology:

• DVB-T, DVB-T2, ISDB-T/Tb and ATSC 1.0 modulation standards supported.

• MFN and SFN operation.

• DVB-T/T2 receiver option for re-transmitter operation.

• Digital Adaptive linear and non-linear pre-correction.

• Air-cooled system based on fans.

• Built-in GNSS option available for GPS and/or GLONASS satellites.

Figure 2.1: Fourth Series Medium Power Transmitter (7HU).

Figure 2.2: Fourth Series medium power exciter (1HU).

Figure 2.3: Fourth Series medium power amplifier (3HU).

Type Height DVB-T/T2/ISDB-T ATSC 1.0

2.2 Exciter description

Figure 2.4: Fourth Series medium power exciter (1HU).

2.2.1 AC Power supply

The AC Power supply is provided with following automatic protections:

2.2.2 Control board

2.2.2.1 Control addressing

EXCITER A EXCITER A EXCITER A

Figure 2.5: Control bus addressing schema (SD, DD, 1+1).

EXCITER B EXCITER A1 EXCITER A2 EXCITER An

AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER

B-1 A1-1 A2-1 An-1

AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER

B-2 A1-2 A2-2 ... An-2

AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER

B-3 A1-3 A2-3 An-3

AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER

B-4 A1-4 A2-4 An-4

Figure 2.6: Control bus addressing schema (N+1).

• Type of redundancy. Choose the appropriate option: SD (Single Drive), 1+1

2.2.2.2 Date and time